Home

Xerox 5222 All in One Printer User Manual

1. Code Description and Remedy 016 454 Unable to retrieve the IP address from DNS Check the DNS configuration and IP address retrieve setting 016 455 Connection to the SNTP server was timed out Check the network cable connection and the IP address of the SNTP server 016 456 Received a message from the SNTP server saying that it was not synchronized with the standard time source Check the SNTP server settings 016 500 An error occurred during data write processing Contact the Xerox Welcome 016 501 Center 016 502 016 503 Unable to resolve the name of the SMTP server when e mail was transmitted Check if the SMTP server is set correctly using CentreWare Internet Services Also check that the DNS server is set correctly 016 504 Unable to resolve the name of the POP3 server when e mail was transmitted Check if the POP3 server is set correctly using CentreWare Internet Services Also check that the DNS server is set correctly 016 505 Unable to log in to the POP3 server when transmitting e mail Check if the user name and password used for the POP3 server are set correctly using CentreWare Internet Services 016 513 An SMTP server connection timeout error occurred The SMTP server or network is overloaded Wait for a while and try again 016 514 An XPS error occurred Use a print driver on XPS Viewer to submit a print job 016 515 The memory space for XPS data is not sufficient Change the print mode to a higher p
2. Item By An existing operational TCP IP network is required These procedures Customer are not designed to install a network Obtain and record the following information Customer e IP address e Gateway address e Subnet mask for IPv4 Prefix for IPv6 e Host name Test the machine to make sure that it is fully installed and functioning Customer correctly Install the print driver Customer If problems are encountered during the installation of the machine refer to Problem Solving on page 347 IPP Environment System configuration The machine supports Internet Printing Protocol IPP As Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Server 2003 Windows Me Windows Vista are installed with the client software needed to output to an IPP printer you can specify this printer using the Add Printer Wizard Using IPP you can print to a remote printer through the Internet or intranet The transport protocol for IPP can be TCP IP 262 IPP Internet Printing Protocol Target computers The following computers support IPP Connection OS Protocol IPP port Windows 2000 TCP IP Windows XP Windows Server 2003 Windows Me Windows Vista NOTE For Internet printing from a Windows Me computer the IPP port should be installed For the IPP port installation see the Windows Me documentation IPP Installation Use the following procedure to install and use the machine in an IPP environmen
3. 08 120 Print Service 0 2 2 ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 100 Scan Mod eei ai e ani 105 Scan Service ee 105 SOUP ici ieee ee 122 Stored Document ccceeeceeeeeeeeeees 121 System Administrator eceeeceeeeeeees 138 SOUP da 60 122 Add Address Book Entry oasen 127 Add Fax Comment cccccceeeeeeeeeeesteees 132 Create Fax Group Recipients 131 Create Job Flow Sheet eeeeeeees 125 Create Job Flow Sheet Keyword 127 Create Mailbox ooooooccccnnccccccccccononcnncconnnnns 122 Stored Programming ococcccccnnonccccnnnnancccnnnn 124 SETUPS ati ot evince sd tee 63 Sharpness iniru ceeeeeccccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeneneeeees 85 105 Short Edge Feed SEF ceeceseeeteeeees 14 18 Signature Outgoing Internet Fax conocio 98 MB esse et ited ele ad eaae ard 91 251 Computer Setup coooocccccccccccccconinconcnnccnnnnnnn 255 Information Checklist oooooonnnninninnno 251 Network Communication Setup 253 problem solving eeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeetteeeeeeeaes 362 SMB Environments n 252 SMB Installation cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 252 Test Pride ee 255 SMB Server Settings oooonioccccnnonaccccccnncancccnnnnnns 97 SMTP AUTH Login Name l 96 442 SMTP AUTH Password cccceceeeeeeteeesenee 96 SMTP Server Name IP Address eeeees 96 SMTP Server Port Numb
4. seeeeeeeeeeeees 285 Job Flow Sheet List Default eee 122 job flow sheet types authentication 311 Job Flow Sheets cccccccccceeceeeeeeeeeseeeereeeeeeees 169 Job Flow Sheets CentreWare Internet Services cccccceeceeeeeeeeeeecneeeeeeeeees 169 Job History List CentreWare Internet Services e eit 156 Job History Report ceeeeeeeees 53 57 73 JOD Stat sraa reetan e aa a aa A raa 39 Job Status button 22 0 eee eeeeeetceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 39 Job Status Default 2 00 00 eee eeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 144 Active Jobs VieW oooooococcoccccccoccncononcnnccnncnnnn 145 Completed Jobs View cceceeeeeeeeees 145 Job Status Activity Report a e 53 Error History Report 0 eee 53 Job History Report ceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeenees 53 Stored Document List 00 ceeceeeeeee 53 job template ce eects narran 160 Job Type on Job Status screen oo 69 jobs active and pending coococcccccnnocicicinncnncncnnnnannn 40 completed iei diia tidad 41 Jobs CentreWare Internet Services 156 K Kerberos Server Settings ooooocccconnoccccnnncaccccconnns 97 Keyboard Input Restriction oooooooncccnnnnnnicicnnnns 83 L language displayed on the touch screen 14 LDAP SSL TLS Communication 06 98 LDAP Server Directory Service 97 Lighten Darken 0 cceeeeeeeeeeees 85 105 110 Line 1
5. 2 Remove the jammed paper 3 Close Cover C until it latches Paper Jams in Cover E Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in Cover E 7 Open the bypass tray and then open Cover A while lifting up the release lever 2 Lift up the handle to open Cover 3 SS gt E l 5 A SI Ninn Re MES A IE o 3 Remove the jammed paper A Close Cover E 5 Close Cover A until it latches and then close the bypass tray 347 15 Problem Solving Paper Jams in Trays 1 and 2 Trays 3 and 4 Optional and the Envelope Tray Optional Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in Trays 1 to 4 and the Envelope Tray of the machine 7 Open Tray 1 2 3 or 4 or the Envelope Tray 2 Remove the jammed paper 3 Close the paper tray Paper Jams in the High Capacity Tandem Tray Optional Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the High Capacity Tandem Tray In Tray 3 7 Pull out Tray 3 of the High Capacity Tandem Tray 2 Remove the jammed paper 3 Close Tray 3 In Tray 4 7 Pull out Tray 4 of the High Capacity Tandem Tray 2 Remove the jammed paper 3 If paper is jammed underneath the inner cover open the cover and remove the paper 4 Close Tray 4 348 Paper Jams Paper Jams in Tray 5 Bypass Follow the steps below to
6. Specifies the reduce enlarge ratios assigned to each of the seven buttons Select from 25 options in the range of 50 400 e Variable Specifies the reduce enlarge ratios using the scroll buttons in the range of 50 to 400 in 1 increments Original Size Defaults This feature allows you to configure or change the scan size buttons on the Original Size feature on the Layout Adjustment screen 7 Select Original Size Defaults in the Features menu 2 Change the required settings Use the scroll buttons to switch between screens 3 Select Close Original Size 1 to 11 AIB Series Size Original Size Defaults Items Current Settings 1 Original Size 1 2 Original Size 2 AJO 3 Original Size 3 ASO 4 Original Size 4 AS riginal Size a Change 5 _ Original Size 5 B4g Setting Specifies standard document sizes in A B series Use the scroll buttons to switch between screens e Inch Size Specifies standard document sizes in Inch series Use the scroll buttons to switch between screens e Others Specifies other miscellaneous sizes Use the scroll buttons to switch between screens Local Terminal Information This feature allows you to register or change the local terminal information 7 Select Local Terminal Information in the Features menu 2 Change the required settings Use the scroll buttons to switch between screens 3 S
7. 1 Select User Account Billing User Account Billing Information Close Information on the Billing O Information screen E This Session 1 Meter Tot 100 O Scan Jobs i 1 0 0 Account Limit po C Meter Print Jobs Available Balance Meter Copy Jobs Displays the meter readings for copy jobs Meter Scan Jobs Displays the meter readings for scan jobs Meter Print Jobs Displays the meter reading for print jobs 59 5 Machine Status Tools On the Tools screen the System Administrator can change various default presets on the machine register mailboxes and job flow sheets and configure authentication and security features To access all features on this screen you must enter the machine in the System Administration mode Use the following steps to enter the Tools screen in the System Administration mode 7 Press the lt Log In Out gt button m X o on the control panel CSS S Ane er AC O lt gt HI JKL MNO v O lt Log In Out gt button Pars Tuv CD OOO O 2 Enter the correct user ID using Cancel the numeric keypad on the mE control panel or the screen RS keyboard AA FED swt J Je J sr More Characters Space Le gt com NOTE The default System Administrator ID is 11111 If the Authentication feature is enabled you may also be required to enter a passcode T
8. 3 Select Close Original Type Specifies the default for the Original Type feature on the General Settings screen File Format Specifies the default for the File Format feature on the E mail Options Filing Options screen Optimize PDF For Fast Web View Specifies the default status of the Optimize PDF Fast Web View check box that is displayed for the PDF Multiple Pages per File option of the File Format feature on the E mail Options Filing Options screen Select On to place a check mark in the check box by default Lighten Darken Specifies the default for the Lighten Darken feature on the Advanced Settings screen Sharpness Specifies the default for the Sharpness feature on the Advanced Settings screen 105 6 Setups Background Suppression Specifies the default for the Background Suppression feature on the Advanced Settings screen Original Orientation Specifies the default for the Original Orientation feature on the Layout Adjustment screen Resolution Specifies the default for the Resolution feature on the Layout Adjustment screen Mixed Sized Originals Specifies the default setting of the Original Size feature on the Layout Adjustment screen Select On to select the Mixed Sized Originals option by default Edge Erase Specifies the default for the Edge Erase feature on the Layout Adjustment screen Edge Erase Top amp Bottom Edges Spe
9. Select an S MIME certificate to attach Certificates must be set up in advance With E mail selected Item Description Default E mail Address Enter an e mail address up to 128 characters to 32 characters Name Enter a recipient name up to 18 characters Surname Enter the family name of the recipient up to 32 characters Given Name Enter the given name of the recipient up Business Phone Enter the telephone number of the recipient up to 20 characters NOTE This item can be renamed on the Address Search Directory Service screen 130 Setup Item Description Default Office Enter the company name or department name of the recipient up to 40 characters NOTE This item can be renamed on the Address Search Directory Service screen Business Address Enter the address of the recipient up to 60 characters NOTE This item can be renamed on the Address Search Directory Service screen S MIME Certificate Select an S MIME certificate to attach Certificates must be set up in advance With Server selected Item Description Default Name Enter a recipient name up to 18 characters Transfer Protocol Select FTP or SMB as the transfer protocol FTP Server Name IP Address Enter the name and IP address of the destination server
10. 308 LOGIN TYPO ceiro E as 140 Mailbox Job Flow Sheet ccceceees 311 OVOIVICW ou ee ceeceeeeecececceececeeeeceeeeesenetneeeeeees 307 Passcode Policy ccccecesseeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeees 143 Personal Job Flow Sheet eeee 311 Personal Mailbox ecceeeeeeeeteeees 315 remote ACCESS cocicoccccccncnnnncncocinnonananinananzdas 310 Remote Authentication ccee 308 Reset User Accounts eeeeeereees 141 System Administrator Maximum Login Attempts aseeseen 143 System Administrator Shared Mailbox 314 System Administrator Shared Job Flow Sheet cccceceeeeeseeeeesereneees 311 TYPOS ied a IS ltda 308 User Details Setup oooooocinociccccnnccnnnnnccncccccns 142 Xerox Secure ACCESS cnoococcccccccccccnnannnnnnoos 309 Authentication and Account Administration AT cat BPA ates oY Rod sce dana a 307 Authentication Method cccceeeetetteees 100 authentication setup BO201X drid tata niente nae 330 O 331 DIOIWOTK coi iii eee 335 A fetes a ea neni dee 332 Xerox Secure ACCESS cnoococcccccccccicanoncnncnnoos 337 Authentication System seeren 96 Authentication System Setup 00 0 96 Authentication Security Settings 61 138 Passcode Policy oocooooonocccccnnnoccccccnncancccnnnn 143 Auto Clear scort aldea 66 Auto Clear Alert Tone cccceeceeteeeteeseenteees 68 435 Index Auto Configure
11. 7 Open the bypass tray and then open Cover A while lifting up the release lever 2 Ifthe jammed paper is inside the fuser unit rotate the green lever A1 in the direction of the arrow to feed the paper from the top of the fuser unit 3 Pull out the paper from the machine in the direction of the arrow 4 Close Cover A until it latches and then close the bypass tray Green Lever A2 7 Open the bypass tray and then open Cover A while lifting up the release lever 345 15 Problem Solving 2 lf the jammed paper is inside the fuser unit lower the green lever A2 in the direction of the arrow to open the fuser unit cover 3 If the jammed paper is found in the fuser unit hold the green lever and carefully remove the paper from the machine NOTE Be careful not to touch the fuser unit It may be hot 4 Close Cover A until it latches and then close the bypass tray Paper Jams in Cover B Follow the steps below to rectify paper jams in Cover B 7 Open Cover B while lifting up the release lever 2 Remove the jammed paper 3 Close Cover B until it latches NOTE Firmly press the center of the cover to close it T p E BN A 346 Paper Jams Paper Jams in Cover C Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in Cover C 7 Open Cover C while lifting up the release lever
12. 32 Replacing the Toner Cartridge Replacing the Toner Cartridge The toner cartridge is a customer replaceable unit The touch screen will display a message when the cartridge needs to be replaced N WARNING Use a broom or a wet cloth to wipe off spilled toner Never use a vacuum cleaner for the spills A CAUTION Keep the drum and toner cartridges out of the reach of children If a child accidentally swallows toner spit it out rinse mouth with water drink water and consult a physician immediately When replacing the drum and toner cartridges be careful not to spill the toner In case of any toner spills avoid contact with clothes skin eyes and mouth as well as inhalation e If toner spills onto your skin or clothing wash it off with soap and water Removing the Old Toner Cartridge 7 Make sure that the machine is not operating and open the front cover 2 Pull the toner cartridge out until you can grasp the handle on top of the cartridge 3 Hold the handle and remove the cartridge from the machine ANIZ a NOTE Be careful when handling the empty cartridge to avoid spilling any residue toner 33 3 Maintenance Inserting the New Toner Cartridge 7 Remove the new toner cartridge from the box Before removing the cartridge from the bag shake it from side to side to evenly distribute the t
13. Auditron Mode Displays the Auditron Mode screen Specify whether to perform Auditron Administration for each service 136 Accounting e Verify User Details Specifies whether to verify user details Select Off Keep Logon Records to allow access without verifying the User ID and Account ID The entered information is logged on the machine Select On to verify user information e Customize User Prompts Specifies the type of user information used for the Accounting feature Selecting None does not prompt users to enter their user ID or account ID for accounting purpose Accounting Login Screen Settings This screen allows you to set the accounting login screen 1 Select Accounting and then Accounting Login Screen Settings select Accounting Login Screen merce Sl bin Settings in the Group menu 2 Mask User D Hide 2 Select the required setting RES Fide 5 Store User Details NVM Alternative Name for User ID Displays a keyboard screen Enter an alternative name for User ID which is displayed in alogin screen on the touch screen and in CentreWare Internet Services and is to be printed on reports The name can be up to 15 characters long Mask User ID Specifies whether to display a user ID or hide it with asterisks on the login screen Alternative Name for Account ID Displays a keyboard screen Enter an alternative name for Account ID
14. TIFF File for Each Page PDF Images Multiple Pages per File e Optimize PDF For Fast Web View e XPS NOTE For a description of each option refer to File Format under the Scan E mail chapter in the User Guide 172 Properties SMB Transfer The following table shows the information fields on the SMB Transfer page Job Flow Sheet Name Displays the name of the job flow sheet Name Enter the recipient name with up to 36 characters Server Name Enter the server name or IP address of the transfer destination Shared Name Enter the volume name of the destination in which documents will be saved Save in Specify the directory in which to save documents Login Name If the server of the transfer destination requires user login set the login name to the server with up to 32 characters Password If the server of the transfer destination requires password entry set the password to the server with up to 32 characters File Format Select the file format to be used when saving scanned documents mTIFF Multiple Pages per File TIFF File for Each Page PDF Images Multiple Pages per File Optimize PDF For Fast Web View e XPS NOTE For a description of each option refer to File Format under the Scan E mail chapter in the User Guide Properties This tab allows you to view and set the machine properties These include the machine details and configuration t
15. 005 500 An error occurred with the document feeder Contact the Xerox Welcome Center 012 210 012 211 012 212 012 213 012 221 012 223 012 224 012 225 012 226 012 227 012 228 012 229 012 230 012 231 012 232 012 233 012 234 012 243 012 246 012 247 012 249 012 259 012 260 012 263 012 264 012 265 012 266 012 268 012 269 012 280 012 282 012 283 012 284 012 285 012 291 012 293 012 295 012 295 012 296 The Finisher malfunctioned Switch off the machine and then switch it on again Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 012 500 An error occurred during data writing to the Finisher ROM Or the data in the ROM has been erased and the machine cannot perform properly Contact the Xerox Welcome Center 383 15 Problem Solving Code Description and Remedy 013 210 The Finisher malfunctioned Switch off the machine and then switch it on again 013 211 Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 013 212 013 213 013 220 016 210 An error occurred on the software Switch off the machine and then switch it on 016 211 again Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 016 212 016 213 016 214 016 215 016 216 016 217 016 218 016 219 016 220 016 221 016 222 016 223 016 224 016 225 016 226 016 227 016 228 016 229 016 230 016 231 016 232 016 240 016 324 The d
16. All print data spooled in machine memory including the data currently being printed is deleted There is no print data on the machine when the machine is switched on However if the machine is switched off immediately after a print request the print data may be stored on the client In this case the print request can be reissued when the machine is switched on and the print data is printed on the machine When Receiving Buffer LPD is set to Spool to Hard Disk All print data spooled on the machine hard disk including the data currently being printed is retained A print request can be reissued when the machine is switched on and the print data is printed on the machine When Receiving Buffer LPD is set to No Spooling All print data in the receiving buffer including the data currently being printed is deleted There is no print data on the machine when the machine is switched on 372 Network related Problems However if the machine is switched off immediately after a print request the print data may be stored on the client In this case the print request can be reissued when the machine is switched on and the print data is printed on the machine When printing When Receiving Buffer LPD is set to Spool to Hard Disk or Spool to Memory Print data cannot be received if the print data size exceeds the available capacity of the hard disk or memory allocation NOTE If the print data e
17. NOTE The trays displayed depend on the machine configuration Status Displays the status of each tray as Ready Empty Not Available or Unknown NOTE When the machine is in the Energy Saver mode the status may be displayed as Unknown Full Displays the percentage of paper remaining in each tray in 25 increments Paper Size Displays the size of paper loaded in each tray Paper Color Displays the color of paper loaded in each tray 154 Status Paper Type Displays the type of paper loaded in each tray Priority Displays the priority set for each tray when Auto Tray Switching is selected The highest priority is number 1 The greater the number the lower the priority Output Destination Trays Lists the available output trays NOTE Trays displayed will depend on the configuration Status Displays the status of each output tray NOTE If the output tray becomes full remove the stack from the output tray Consumables The consumables menu displays the status of the toner cartridge drum cartridge and other consumables The status indicates when to replace each consumable Consumables SMart Kits Toner Cartridges Displays the status of the toner cartridge as OK Reorder Replace or Fault It also displays the remaining toner in percentages NOTE If Replace is displayed replace the toner cartridge NOTE Once a new toner cartridge is installed a status will be di
18. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to enter the same System Administrator passcode Select Save Authentication This section describes the settings related to user authentication 1 Select Authentication in the Group menu Y Biting W Tools Information Machine Y Supplies Information Faults Features Type Access Control Create View User Accounts System Administrator o B DO Allow User to Disable Authentication DO Setti Security Settings 139 6 Setups Login Type This screen allows you to select an authentication type NOTE The available options vary depending on the machine configuration NOTE When Login to Local Accounts is selected authentication is carried out based on the user information set for the Accounting feature 7 Select Login Type in the ne Features menu O Login Required Cancel Users will be required to login to their accounts before Copy Scan Fax Print services can be accessed The availability of these services is determined by Login to machine configuration and System Administrator s settings Local Accounts 2 Select the required option 0 Login to 3 Select Save gt a Sa The machine usage data of login users will be collected and managed according to the Accounting Type selected Access Control This screen allows you to set whether to verify users when they access a target s
19. Y Toots Features System Administrator s Login ID ESA Adminstaters ESA le O Allow User to Disable Active Settings Authentication Security Settings This feature allows you to change the default System Administrator s Login ID Program a new ID between 1 and 32 alphanumeric characters 1 A 5 6 Select System Administrator Login 1D in the Features menu Select On Touch Keyboard and then use System Administrator s Login ID System Administrator s Login ID Ou gt Re enter System Administrator sLogin ID Keyboard the screen keyboard or the numeric keypad on the control panel to enter a new System Administrator ID Select Close to close the keyboard screen Repeat steps 3 and 4 to enter the same System Administrator ID Select Save System Administrator s Passcode This feature allows you to change the default System Administrator passcode Program a new passcode between 4 and 12 alphanumeric characters including spaces 1 4 5 Select System Administrator s Passcode in the Features menu Touch Keyboard and then use the screen keyboard or the numeric keypad on the control System Administrator s Passcode Cancel New Password Passcode Keyboard Retype Password Passcode panel to enter a new System Administrator passcode Select Close to close the keyboard screen
20. 193 7 CentreWare Internet Services Feature Setting items Connectivity Protocols continued HTTP continued Keep Alive Timeout Displays 60 seconds This is a display only item Maximum Connections Enter the maximum number of sessions between 1 and 15 Port Number Enter the port to be used for HTTP communication Secure HTTP SSL Select whether or not to enable SSL TLS communication Secure HTTP Port Number Enter the port number to be used for SSL TLS communication Connection Time Out Allows you to specify the connection time out period when transmission fails Proxy Server General e Use Proxy Server Specify whether to enable a proxy server e Proxy Setup Specify whether to use the same proxy for all protocols or to use a different proxy for each protocol Addresses to Bypass Proxy Server Specify an addresses that bypass the proxy server HTTP Server Server Name Specify the HTTP server name Port Number Specify the HTTP proxy server port number e Authentication Specify whether to enable HTTP proxy server authentication e Login Name Specify the HTTP proxy server login name e Password Specify the HTTP proxy server password e Retype Password Re enter the password for verification HTTPS Server Server Name Specify the HTTPS proxy server name Port Number Specify the HTTPS proxy server
21. Linux distributions with CUPS that supports IPv6 The WINS protocol does not support IPv6 communication Onan IPv6 network without a DNS server the machine cannot be connected to Windows Vista via SMB e Netware does not support IPv6 communication Use IPv4 for Netware Bonjour does not support IPv6 communication Use IPv4 for Bonjour Scanning e When IPv6 is enabled and IPv4 is disabled on the machine the Browse function of the Scan to PC SMB service is not available In an IPv6 network with no DNS server installed the file transfer using the Scan to PC service fails if a destination server is specified using the computer name Directly specify the IPv6 address Discovery e IPv6 devices cannot be searched in UPnP Use the WSD discovery function for IPv6 device search Authentication InanIPv6 network without a DNS server SMB authentication fails if an SMB server is specified using the computer name Directly specify the IPv6 address Connection to External Applications Custom Services External applications such as DocuShare cannot be specified in IPv6 address format The machine supports only the domain name format or the IPv4 format to access external applications In IPv6 environment use a DNS server and specify applications in domain name format 387 15 Problem Solving Fault Codes When a fault occurs the touch screen displays a message on how to clear the fault Some faults indi
22. Reports e Configuration Report Lists common settings such as hardware configuration network information and print and copy feature settings e Mailbox Selector List Lists the settings for sorting into mailboxes e Scan Fax Configuration Report Lists settings specific to fax and scan features e Domain Filter List Lists domains registered for domain filtering Address Book Prints a list of recipient addresses and relay stations for the selected range of address numbers Multiple ranges can be selected Check boxes are available to print only group send settings or the settings for all address numbers Fax Comments List Lists the comments saved for use on cover notes Billing Data List Lists the billing data for fax jobs NOTE This option is displayed when Accounting gt Accounting Type gt Auditron Mode gt Fax Service is enabled 55 5 Machine Status Mailbox List 7 Select Mailbox List on the Mailbox List Coss Print Reports PS vx List C 001 050 O cul 2 Select the required option O tt o 3 Select the lt Start gt button on the mE Ls control panel Mailbox List Lists the mailbox settings and procedure when storing data in the mailbox Job Counter Report 7 Select Job Counter Report on Frame Tose the Print Reports screen en Report 2 Select the required option 3 Select the lt Start gt button on the control panel Job Counter
23. 018 559 The job was cancelled because the same file name existed Select an option other than Do Not Save in File Name Conflict 018 560 Login to the HTTP server failed Check if your computer is connected to the HTTP server Also check if the login name login password HTTP server name and HTTP server path are correct 018 561 Connection to the HTTP server failed Check if your computer is connected to the HTTP server Also check if the HTTP server name and path are correctly set 018 562 018 563 An HTTP server error occurred Check if your computer is connected to the HTTP server Also check the HTTP server settings 018 564 A host name solution error occurred Check if the HTTP server is registered on the DNS server if the HTTP server is connected to the DNS server and if the DNS server is registered on the machine 018 565 A proxy name solution error occurred Check if the proxy server is registered on the DNS server if the HTTP server is connected to the DNS server and if the DNS server is registered on the machine 018 566 Connection to the HTTP server failed Check the network cable connection on the machine and also check if your computer is connected to the HTTP server 018 567 An error occurred during communication with the HTTP server Check if your computer is connected to the HTTP server 396 Fault Codes Code Description and Remedy
24. 018 707 An LDAP server protocol error occurred in the address book operation The server returned the RFC2251 specification protocol error 7 authentication method not supported during the address book query Change the authentication method and review the authentication settings 018 708 An LDAP server protocol error occurred in the address book operation The server returned the RFC2251 specification protocol error 8 strong authentication required during the address book query Check that there are no errors in the authentication settings and strengthen subsequent authentication 018 710 An LDAP server protocol error occurred in the address book operation The server returned the RFC2251 specification protocol error 10 referral during the address book query There is nothing registered in the specified search range Check the authentication settings status 018 711 An LDAP server protocol error occurred in the address book operation The server returned the RFC2251 specification protocol error 11 admin limit exceeded during the address book query Check the server operating status 018 712 An LDAP server protocol error occurred in the address book operation The server returned the RFC2251 specification protocol error 12 unavailable critical extension during the address book query Check the server operating status 018 713 An LDAP server protocol error occurred in the address book operation The ser
25. 1 Document 1 2 Document 2 3 Document 3 4 Document 4 5 Document 5 3 2 2007 10 20 AM_ 655 A 6 4 2007 810 AM j Soera 9 6 2007 1215 PM 10 a 7 7 2007 430PM_ 100 vwo007 830 AM 09 1 Print Deletes a document selected in the list Print Prints a document selected in the list After printing the document will be deleted Secure Print This feature allows you to print or delete passcode protected stored documents A secure print job requires a user ID and a passcode registered in the machine 7 Select Secure Print on the Secure Print Jobs amp More screen 2 Select a user ID NOTE Use the scroll buttons to switch between screens Secure Print Refresh 001 User 002 Userl2 an a Go to 003 UserO3 001 lt 200 004 Userd4 005 UserllS J 006 Usern gt 007 Userd7 008 Userl8 Document List AAA 010 UseriO on Userl1 012 Userl2 J 44 Secure Print Jobs amp More 3 Select Document List 4 Enter the passcode for the user ID and select Confirm 5 Select a document to print or delete 6 Select the required option Refresh Refreshes the displayed information Go to Specifies the Secure Print number to be displayed on the screen Enter anumber within the range of 001 to 200 using the scroll buttons or the numeric keypad Document List
26. Initially boot the EtherTalk port 71 Connect the machine to the network 2 Press the lt Log In Out gt button on the control panel and then type the System Administrator login ID to enter the System Administration mode NOTE The passcode may also be required depending on the machine configuration 3 Press the lt Machine Status gt button on the control panel and then select the Tools tab on the screen Select System Settings in the menu at the left side of the screen Select Connectivity amp Network Setup in the Group menu Select Port Settings in the Features menu Select EtherTalk and then Change Settings Select Port Status and then Change Settings 9 Select Enabled and then Save SND HA Computer Setup Install the print driver Adobe PS for Macintosh Install the screen font if necessary Refer to the CentreWare Printer Drivers Guide 250 Microsoft Networking Test Print To make sure that the machine has been installed on the network correctly a test print should be submitted from each client computer Perform the following steps 7 Open a sample document on a client computer 2 Select the machine using the Chooser Mac OS 9 2 or the Print Center Mac OS X 10 x 3 Print the document on the machine and verify that it prints correctly 4 Make sure that the driver is installed on every computer that will be sending jobs to the machine 5 Repeat the test for all
27. Line Selection oooooocccccnnnncccnncccccononccnnno 114 Line Monitor Volume ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeees 68 linking job flow sheets to mailboxes 318 loading PAPER iiine a lads dete etal 17 local access authentication 0 eeee 309 Local ACCOUNTING eae e EE 136 local machine authentication 308 331 LocallNam e siccasttecatieet calada aia ace ioa 116 Local Terminal Information Fax Service Settings ooooooonnnccccnnnnocccccnnnanccncnnno 115 Login ID System Administrator 139 Login Password iocccconooccccccnnoncccncnnnnncccnnnanancninnno 100 Login Type Authentication oooon nniccnnnnnnccccnn 140 Login User Name sucesi 100 Long Edge Feed LEF c eeeeueeeeeeetees 14 18 Low Toner Alert Tone cccccceeceeeeeeeeeteetteeees 68 A Gesaasneetevsa ssc 91 LPD Print QUeUE o enira eai 104 M machine before USING arr r i 13 CIEANING resa a ie a aie 29 CONTIgUTAtION iia 50 CONVENTIONS esses aa aaas aiaa didas 14 INFOPMALION gaiitan si na a atian ei ian 50 information and status CentreWare Internet DEIVICES ct 154 ANQUAJES paaa lila 14 serial NUMDE c ococoncnccnccccncnncnnncnnnnnos 13 50 420 software Version coococoococcccncccccccnccnnannoncnncnnnno 50 A 49 Machine Clock Timers Common Service Settings ooonnnncicnnnnnniicnnnom 66 Machine Name coooccoccccococccnccnnccnnnnnnnnononcnnncnnnnnnnnns 94 Machine Password ccceeeeeee
28. NOTE When loading trays with postcards contact the Xerox Welcome Center to have the tray settings changed specially for the use of postcards e Documents The machine automatically recognizes the sizes listed on the following page when a document is placed on the document glass or loaded in the document feeder 78 System Settings Document Glass Document Feeder i rr _ S gt s _ gt gt _ gt 9 gt gt Size Width Length 53 3 5 23 Siler E e E mm mm xo o ol Zol alo ol Sal al o o 22 2 22 S 22 rg g so o Aa Sola3 co o z 3a 3 o 0 n RO Oo o n o RO o A5 SEF 148 0 210 0 o lolo O oT fort o To A5 LEF 210 0 148 0 o o o O o lo 5 5 x 8 5 LEF 215 9 139 7 o lolo o lo 5 5 x 8 5 SEF 139 7 215 9 O o B5 SEF 182 0 257 0 o o O o o B5 LEF 257 0 182 0 o o O otiol oO o o 1 A4 SEF 210 0 297 0 o o o O ot 10 o o t o 1 A4 LEF 297 0 210 0 o o o o lolo lolo o lo 8 5 x 11 SEF 215 9 279 4 o lol o o o lo Letter 8 5 x 11 LEF 279 4 215 9 O O o o o o t o o lo Letter 8 5 x 13 SEF 215 9 330 2 O o o o O Legal 8 5x 14 SEF 215 9 355 6 O O Legal B4 SEF 257 0 364 0 o o O otiol oO o or 16K SEF 194 0 267 0 o 16K LEF 267 0 194 0 o o o 8K SEF 267 0 388 0 O o t o 1 A3 SEF 297 0 420 0 o o o o lolo
29. Scan to E mail Setup Procedure for Scan to E mail Setup 7 From a workstation open up a web browser such as Internet Explorer and then enter the Internet address of the machine If connected properly you should see the CentreWare Internet Services web page for your machine NOTE If you use the IP address to specify the machine use one of the following formats depending on your machine configuration The IPv6 format is supported on Windows Vista only An IPv6 address needs to be enclosed in square brackets For IPv4 http xxx xxx XXxX XXX For IPv6 http XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX NOTE If you have changed the port number from the default port number 80 append the number to the Internet address as follows In the following examples the port number is 8080 For IPv4 http xxx xxx xxx xxx 8080 For IPv6 http XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 8080 2 Set up the SMTP server configuration via CentreWare Internet Services 1 Click the Properties tab 2 Click the Connectivity folder and then the Protocol Settings folder 3 Click SMTP Server 4 Enter the SMTP mail server Host Name or IP address and Port number the default is port 25 5 Click on Apply 3 Set up the Machine E mail address 1 Click the Properties tab 2 Click on Description 3 Set Machine s E mail Address 4 Click on Apply 4 On the machine load a sample document that you want to e mail int
30. Specifies the message encryption method Select from 3DES RC2 40 RC2 64 and RC2 128 Digital Signature Outgoing E mail Specifies whether to add a digital signature to an outgoing E mail or to prompt the user to add the signature Signature Outgoing Internet Fax Specifies whether to add a signature to an outgoing Internet Fax or to prompt the user to add the signature Certificate Auto Store Specifies the client certificate to attach to the E mail address PDF XPS Signature Settings Specifies the PDF XPS signature settings NOTE XPS stands for XML Paper Specification 98 System Settings e Device Certificate Specifies the certificate for the PDF XPS signature For information on certificates refer to Security Encryption Digital Signature on page 297 PDF Signature Specifies whether to add a PDF signature whether to add a visible or invisible signature or whether to prompt the user to add a signature XPS Signature Specifies whether to add a XPS signature or whether to prompt the user to add a signature IPSec Settings Allows you to configure the IPSec settings e IKE Authentication Method Specifies the authentication method Preshared Key Specifies the preshared key A preshared key is a password used for establishing trust between devices This setting is valid when IKE Authentication Method is set to Authenticate by Preshared Keys Device Certificate Specifies the d
31. System Settings Paper Tray Attributes During Loading Specifies whether to display the paper tray attributes on the control panel when the tray is opened to load paper This setting does not apply to Tray 5 Bypass Paper Tray Priority Specifies the paper tray priority for Auto Tray Switching Tray 5 Bypass is not available For more information on Auto Tray Switching refer to Auto Tray Switching on page 22 Paper Type Priority Specifies the paper type priority for Auto Tray Switching This setting overrides the Paper Tray Priority If the priority of paper types is set to the same value then Auto Tray Switching will select a tray based on the Paper Tray Priority Selecting Auto Paper Off prevents the paper type from being used by Auto Tray Switching For more information on Auto Tray Switching refer to Auto Tray Switching on page 22 Tray 5 Bypass Paper Size Defaults Specifies the default paper sizes to be displayed on the Tray 5 Bypass screen of the Paper Supply feature If you frequently use non standard size paper for copying assigning the paper size to a button will be helpful for you AIB Series Size Displays standard paper sizes of the A B series e Inch Size Displays standard paper sizes of the Inch series e Others Displays other paper sizes e Custom Size Allows you to enter a paper size Specify the paper width X and the paper length Y Auto Tray Switching Control Specifies whether to ena
32. oooooooocccccccccnccnncnonccnnncnnnonnnonnnnnnnnnncnnnoss 262 IPP Environment coooooooccccnnncnncnnncnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenoness 262 IPP nstallation cias is 263 Computer Setup e A E oran crac TT 265 TestPIN casi chara ctues iaa dao 265 E mail Environment Settings oocconcccnnnononncncnnnnnnnnnnancncnnnnnnnnnannnnnns 267 E Mail OyervieW ea 267 Information Checklist ccccccceccceececcceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 268 E mail Environment erar a a aa aeaaea 269 E mail Installation oonnnonnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnonnnonnnnninnnnnnnnn ninas 269 Installation Procedure oooooooccccccccccnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnninnnoss 269 Network Communication Setup ooooccoccccccccnccncccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnneninnnns 270 Test Ma ici A A AS 272 Scanner Environment SettigQS ooococononnonncccnnnnnnnnnancnnnccnnnnnnaannnnnnn 275 SAM ee 275 Scanning with the machine ooooccconcccccccooocooncooncoonno nono ncnnnnoncnoncnnnnnnns 275 SCANNING Process arcs riea hela dcir iaa des 276 Scan to E mail Setup icono id cios 276 Prerequisites for Scan to E mail Setup oocccccccccccnccononononnnnnnnnno 276 Procedure for Scan to E mail Setup cocccccccccccnccnccconcnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 277 Scan to E mail Troubleshooting oooooninonnccccncnccnccnncnacancnnnncnnnnannno 278 Scan to Mailbox Setup ooooocococcccccccocononoooononononnnnonononnoncnnnnnnnnnnncnnncnnnnnns 278
33. which is displayed in a login screen on the touch screen and in CentreWare Internet Services and is printed on reports The name can be up to 15 characters long Mask Account ID Specifies whether to display an account ID or hide it with asterisks on the login screen Store User Details Specifies where to store user information Fax Billing Data This screen allows you to make a fax billing setting 7 Select Accounting and then iano select Fax Billing Data in the items Current Settings Group menu 2 Set Charge Rate per Unit 3 Select Close 1 Charge Rate per Unit 1 Unit 10 0 Charge Rate per Unit Specify a charge rate per unit using numeric buttons on the screen 137 6 Setups Auto Reset of User Billing Information This screen allows you to specify when to reset user billing information 7 Select Accounting and then Auto Reset of User Billing Information Cancel select Auto Reset of User Qo 1 Billing Information in the eh Baap Vee Group menu gt Fest say 4 O Reset Every Month 2 Select the required option and set the time values accordingly 3 Select Save Copy Activity Report This screen allows you to set the machine to automatically print reports showing the number of copy jobs processed for each user 7 Select Accounting and then PO Sere Cancel select Copy Activity Report in the Gro
34. 018 568 SSL access to the HTTP server failed Check if your computer is connected to the HTTP server Also check if the SSL is enabled and if the HTTP server name and path are correctly set 018 569 The HTTP server certificate may have a problem Check if your computer is connected to the HTTP server Also check if the SSL server certificate for the HTTP server is registered on the machine and if the certificate is valid If the SSL certificate is not registered on the HTTP server disable the Verify Remote Server Certificate setting 018 570 A client certificate authentication error occurred on the HTTP server Check if your computer is connected to the HTTP server Also check if the SSL client certificate is registered on the machine and if the device certificate is registered on the HTTP server 018 571 An internal error occurred Try again Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 018 572 The specified Netware context name may contain invalid characters Check the context name 018 573 The specified Netware server or tree name may contain invalid characters Check the server name and the tree name 018 574 The specified Netware volume name may contain invalid characters Check the volume name 018 575 The specified Netware user name or password may contain invalid characters Check the user name and password 018 576 The specified Netware path may contain invali
35. Arepository folder needs to be created on the server to hold scanned documents Data to Set Up Network Scanning install Comments Requirement Templates are created via CentreWare Required Refer to Job Templates on page 160 Internet Services or any other Xerox Network Scanning Solutions Repositories are created via CentreWare Required Refer to Network Scanning on page 204 Internet Services or any other Xerox Network Scanning Solutions Remote Authentication Server s IP Address Optional If Remote Authentication is required then the Authentication feature needs to be enabled Procedure for Network Scanning Setup 1 A 5 6 Create templates and repositories via CentreWare Internet Services On the control panel select Network Scanning Select a template from the list You can change any other value from the control panel without impacting the template configuration only the current job will be affected Load a sample document into the document feeder Press the lt Start gt button on the machine The job is sent to the server using the protocol as defined within the template Log on to the server Navigate to the repository folder that was specified earlier Your scanned document is located in that repository NOTE If the authentication feature is enabled for the Network Scanning service a separate login screen appears when Network Scanning is selected on the All Services screen Users can
36. Authentication Security Settings gt Overwrite Hard Disk is enabled 7 Select Overwrite Hard Disk on gverwite Hard oie Close the Machine Information Status Standby screen This feature prevents the document image and registered data recorded on the hard disk from being illegally retrieved The number of overwrites is set by the System Administrator When Overwrite Hard Disk is In Progress the jobs on the hard disk are being made unreadable When the machine returns to standby the job overwrite process is completed Print Reports This feature allows you to print various reports lists for each service NOTE Print Reports is displayed when System Settings gt Common Service Settings gt Reports gt Print Reports Button is enabled For more information refer to Reports in the Setups chapter on page 72 NOTE Some of the reports lists on this screen are not displayed unless you are logged in as the System Administrator NOTE The reports lists displayed on this screen vary depending on the enabled fax service 52 Machine Information 7 Select Print Reports on the Machine Information screen Job Status Activity Report Print Reports Close Job Status Activity Report D Copy Reports m Printer Reports B Scan Reports B Fax Reports J Mailbox List m Job Counter Report D Auditron Reports NOTE When Server Fax is enabled the Job Stat
37. Auto Load Local When a switch off on message is displayed Cause Confirmation Method Action A fault occurred in the Netware interface Switch the machine off and on When the required printing result is not obtained Cause Confirmation Method Action The specified print language of the print job is different from one specified in the machine Check the print language of the machine Specify the same print language of the print job as that of the machine When there is no notification of error When there is no message displayed on the client which has sent print request the possible causes confirmation methods and actions are as follows When there is no notification of printer error Cause Confirmation Method Action The user is not registered in the Notify list of the print server Use PCONSOLE to check whether the user name or group name of the job is registered Register the user name or group name of the job 368 Network related Problems When there is no notification of the completion of the job Cause Confirmation Method Action When sending the print job from the client the NOTIFY option is not specified When sending the print job check whether the NOTIFY option has been specified When sending the print job specify the NOTIFY option NetwareCASTOFF
38. Disabled NOTE Use CentreWare Internet Services to register the IP addresses which are not allowed to access the machine Refer to CentreWare Internet Services on page 147 16 When you have finished establishing TCP IP select Close on the Protocol Settings screen 227 8 Printer Environment Settings NetWare This section explains how to install the machine onto a NetWare network The following information is provided Information Checklist page 228 NetWare Environments page 228 NetWare Installation page 229 Installation Procedure page 229 Network Communication Setup page 230 NetWare Setup page 231 Computer Setup page 231 Test Print page 231 Information Checklist Before installing the machine onto a network make sure that the following items are available or have been performed Item By An existing operational NetWare network is required These procedures Customer are not designed to install a NetWare network NetWare versions 3 x 4 x 5 x or 6 x Customer Obtain and record the following information if required Customer Pv4 address e Gateway address Subnet mask Host name NOTE Only the IPv4 format is available for addresses Test the machine to make sure that it is fully installed and functioning Customer correctly Install the print driver Customer If problems arise during the machine installation ref
39. Displays the passcode entry screen for the selected user ID Enter the passcode to display the list of stored documents The following options are available e Select All Selects all documents in the list e Delete Deletes a document selected in the list Print Prints a document selected in the list Select whether or not to delete the document after printing NOTE Only the System Administrator can access the stored documents without entering the passcode Sample Set This feature allows you to print a sample set of a document prior to printing the whole quantity You can choose whether or not to print more sets after checking the print result 7 Select Sample Set on the TS Refresh Secure Print Jobs amp More 001 Document 1 Joo2 Document 2 A 003 Docurnent3 Joos Document 4 screen 005 Document5 J oos Document 6 2 Select a user ID 007 Document J oos Document 8 NL i 009 Document9 Joo Document 10 NOTE Use the scroll buttons to Cn Docmmeetis JOR boeonenta 1 switch between screens 3 Select Document List 4 Select a document to print or delete 5 Select the required option Refresh Refreshes the displayed information Go to Specifies the Sample Set number to be displayed on the screen Enter a number within the range of 001 to 200 using the scroll buttons or the numeric keypad Document List Displays the list of stored documents for the selec
40. Edit Click this button to edit the above information and other Internet fax settings as follows 201 7 CentreWare Internet Services Feature Setting items Services Internet Fax continued Default continued e Incoming Internet Fax Print Options Allows you to select the printing options for the headers and contents of incoming Internet faxes e Subject Specify the default Internet fax subject e Message Specify the default Internet fax message User Select whether to include the sender s user name and e mail address in the Internet fax message Attachment Select whether to include information about attachments such as the number of pages and file format in the Internet fax message Device Information Select whether to include machine information such as the name location serial number IP address and Mac address in the Internet fax message e Signature Enter the default signature using up to 128 characters Confirmation Sheet Select whether to have a confirmation sheet printed with each Internet fax transmission Confirmation sheets can be always printed not printed or printed only upon an error Public Address Book Allows you to import or retrieve address information in CSV format When a new Address Book in CSV format is imported all previous addresses are replaced with the new data Address Book File CSV Allows you to
41. Enabled allows you to configure the IPv6 settings NOTE Select Enabled when the machine is connected to a network on which IPv6 stateless address autoconfiguration is disabled or when you want to set the static IPv6 address Manually Configured IPv6 Address Specifies the IP address in IPv6 format Manually Configured IPv6 Prefix Specifies the length of the IP address prefix between 0 to 128 Manually Configured IPv6 Gateway Specifies the gateway address in IPv6 format Auto Configured IPv6 Address Displays the link local address auto stateless address 1 to 3 and auto gateway address IPv6 IP Filter Specifies whether to filter access from remote machines The addresses to be filtered can be specified in CentreWare Internet Services For more details refer to Properties Features on page 174 Machine s E mail Address Host Name This feature allows you to set the e mail address host name and domain name for the machine 93 6 Setups 1 Select Machine s E mail Machine s E mail Address Host Name Address Host Name in the items Current Settings 1 E mail Address smtp_Mail Address Features menu 3 Host Name serverHostName 2 Change the required settings Duran nz EA 3 Select Close E mail Address Specifies the e mail address of the machine Enter an address of up to 128 characters Machine Name Specifies the name of the machine Host Name
42. Ensure the machine is fully functional on the network 2 Ensure that the TCP IP and HTTP protocols are configured on the machine and fully functional Refer to those topics in this guide for configuring information as required This is required to access CentreWare Internet Services to configure authentication The Internet Services function is accessed through the embedded HTTP server on the machine and allows System Administrators to configure Authentication settings by using an Internet browser At Your Workstation 7 Open your web browser and enter the TCP IP address of the machine in the Address or Location field Click Enter to access CentreWare Internet Services 2 Click the Properties tab 3 Expand the Accounting folder and then click Accounting Configuration On the page displayed select Local Accounting from the Accounting Type drop down list 4 Click Apply to reboot the machine 5 Expand the Security folder and then click Authentication Configuration On the page displayed select Login to Local Accounts from the Login Type drop down list 6 Click Apply to reboot the machine 7 Expand the Security folder and then click Authentication Configuration On the page displayed place a check mark in the Enabled box for each service that you wish to restrict access to 8 Click Next 9 To configure authentication for each account user enter an account number in the Account Number box
43. Enter up to 32 characters for a user ID User Name Enter up to 32 characters for a user name e Passcode Enter 4 to 12 alphanumeric characters for a passcode Usage Limits Set the maximum number of impressions per page within the range of 0 to 9999999 e Black Printed Impressions Set the maximum number of impressions allowed for B W printing e Black Copied Impressions Set the maximum number of impressions allowed for B W copying e Black Scanned Images Set the maximum number of impressions allowed for B W scanning e Fax Images Sent Set the maximum number of impressions allowed for fax transmission Internet Fax Images Sent Set the maximum number of impressions allowed for Internet Fax transmission 208 Properties Feature Setting items Accounting Xerox Standard Accounting continued User Role User Role Select a user role for the user Add This User to Authorization Group Select an authorization group for the user By default users belong to Authorization Group 00 Default Group The groups in the list are defined under Create Authorization Groups in the Security folder Select All Click this button to select all the users listed Limits amp Access To change user information select the check box for the user and then click the Limits amp Access button User User ID Displays the user ID User N
44. Select the check box to enable this port Receive E mail Select the check box to enable this port E mail Notification Service Select the check box to enable this port Internet Services Select the check box to enable this port FTP Client Select the check box to enable this port IPP Select the check box to enable this port UPnP Discovery Select the check box to enable this port WebDAV Select the check box to enable this port Bonjour Select the check box to enable this port WSD Select the check box to enable this port SOAP Select the check box to enable this port 182 Properties Feature Setting items Connectivity Physical Connections Ethernet Allows you to select the Ethernet transmission rate Rated Speed You can select one of the following options Auto Detects the Ethernet transmission rate automatically e 10 Mbps Half Duplex 10 Mbps Full Duplex 100 Mbps Half Duplex 100 Mbps Full Duplex MAC Address Displays the MAC address of the machine This is a display only item USB Allows you to configure the USB port settings Auto Eject Time Allows you to specify the time when the paper will be automatically ejected from the machine if no data are sent to the machine Adobe Communication Protocol Only displayed when PostScript is enabled Select one of the following options Normal Select this when the communication
45. Set the machine and Windows clock settings so that they match Other Problem Action On Windows Server 2003 Windows XP or Windows Vista cannot perform SMB transfers for users without a password Change the network access settings as follows 1 Boot Windows and select Control Panels gt Administrative Tools gt Local Security Policy 2 Select Security Settings gt Local Policies gt Security Options 3 Set Accounts Limit local account use of blank passwords to console logon only to Disabled Cannot perform SMB transfers using a DFS access path domainname sharename DFS access path specification is not supported Specify a UNC format path Whostnamelsharename In IPv6 environment without a DNS server scan data cannot be transferred using the Scan to PC SMB service Scan data cannot be transferred if a destination server is specified using the computer name Use the IPv6 format to specify the server 376 Network related Problems Restrictions This section explains the restrictions that apply while using scan functions NOTE For information on the network scan driver and Mailbox Viewer 3 refer to the Readme file on the driver CD ROM When retrieving a document from a mailbox If Delete Document After Retrieval is switched off the same document can be accessed by many clients If Delete Document After Retrieval is switch
46. Shared Name SMB Only Enter a name assigned for sharing a folder destination server Save In Specify the location or path of the directory for saving documents User Name Enter a user name if required by the destination server Password Enter a password if required by the Port Number Select an appropriate port number to be used Create Fax Group Recipients This feature allows you to group multiple address numbers When a group number is specified documents are then sent to all address numbers registered to that group Up to 50 group numbers can be created each containing up to 20 address numbers NOTE This feature is not displayed when the Server Fax service is enabled 7 Select Create Fax Group Recipients in the Group menu 2 Select a group number 3 Select Create Delete Create Fax Group Recipients Group Total Entries Speed Dial 01 1 001 A 02 9 002 03 20 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 04 1 Ea 05 2 001 002 y 131 6 Setups 4 Enter a 3 digit Address Number using the numeric keypad on the control panel 5 Select Add to this g rou p Group 01 Create Delete Cancel Recipients Speed Dial Total Entries 1 001 999 001 gt Add to Delete from this group this group NOTE You can use an asterisk to specify multiple Address Numbers at a
47. Specifies the mailbox for storing received documents sorted by the incoming line Up to 200 mailboxes can be registered NOTE Before using this feature select Enabled in the Mailbox Selector Setup feature on the Fax Control screen Fax Received Line 1 Specifies whether incoming documents on this line are stored in a mailbox Select On to display Mailbox Number Output Destination Setup Specifies the output tray for printing received documents sorted by the incoming line The output tray for Public Mailbox Printed Documents can also be set e Fax Received Line 1 Specifies the output tray e Public Mailbox Printed Documents Specifies the output tray for documents printed from public mailboxes both manually and automatically using job flow sheets Reduce Enlarge Presets This feature allows you to configure or change the reduction enlargement ratio buttons that appear when Preset is selected on the Reduce Enlarge feature on the Layout Adjustment screen 114 System Settings 7 Select Reduce Enlarge Presets in the Features menu 2 Change the required settings Use the scroll buttons to switch between screens 3 Select Close R E Preset 1 to 7 e Preset Reduce Enlarge Presets Current Settings Items a 2 R E Preset 2 70 A3 gt A4 3 R E Preset 3 81 B4 gt A4 4 R E Preset 4 86 A3 gt B4 Change Y 5 R E Preset 5 115 B4 gt A3
48. Supported Paper Types Paper Trays The following table lists the paper types supported by each paper tray duplex module and the finisher Z WARNING Do not use conductive paper e g carbonic paper or coated paper Tray 2 Tray 3 4 Tray 6 en Tray 5 y Paper Tyve Weight a m Tray 1 Two Tray Bypass High Envelope per yp eight gim y Module H Capacity Tray High Capacity y Feeder Tandem Tray Plain O O O O Plain Reload O O O O Recycled O O O O Custom Paper O O O O 1 5 60 105 Punched O O O O Letterhead O O O O Pre Printed O O O O Other O O O O Lightweight 56 63 O O O O Heavyweight 106 169 O O O Extra O O O Heavyweight 1702213 26 Supported Paper Sizes and Types Tray 2 Tray 3 4 Tray 6 Paper Tuna 2 Tray 1 Two Tray pas High Envelope per YP Weight g m y Module da Capacity Tray High Capacity y Feeder Tandem Tray Bond Paper 170 215 O O O Envelope 170 215 O O Labels O O 0 0 Transparency O O O O O Available blank Not available 4 Plain Reload refers to paper already printed on one side NOTE When printing onto postcards or envelopes Extra Heavyweight should be selected and the size should be specified NOTE Depending on the heavyweight paper used the paper cannot be loaded Short Edge Feed In that case load the paper Long Edge Fee
49. Therefore the Accounting feature must be enabled when you use Local Machine Authentication The print or fax data sent directly from a computer can be received on the machine after being authenticated The authentication information pre configured on a client s fax print driver is cross checked with the information registered on the machine Remote Authentication Remote Authentication uses a remote authentication server to manage authentication No user information is registered on the machine 308 Overview of Authentication Functions NOTE A registered user ID on the remote authentication server can be a maximum of 32 characters and the passcode a maximum of 128 characters For SMB authentication the passcode can be a maximum of 32 characters Xerox Secure Access A system such as the magnetic card IC card or biometrics system is used for authentication If prompted users need to enter their user information on the machine s control panel For accounting purposes Xerox Secure Access can work with Network Accounting Controlled by Authentication The following explains the functions that are restricted by the Authentication feature Restriction depends on which of the following two ways the machine is used e Local Access e Remote Access For more information on the restrictions to mailboxes and job flow sheets using the Authentication feature refer to Authentication for Job Flow Sheets and Mailboxes on p
50. To Restore Settings or Clone Settings to another Machine NOTE This procedure will cause the machine to reboot and be inaccessible over the network for several minutes 7 Open your web browser and enter the TCP IP address of the machine you wish to restore or clone the settings to Press lt Enter gt Click the Properties tab Expand the General Setup folder Select Cloning In the Install Clone File portion of the displayed dialog click Browse B29 A AHN Locate the dat clone file 7 Click Install NOTE It may be necessary for you to use your web browser to view the Xerox Standard Accounting set up of Users and Groups on the new machine 802 1x Authentication The machine supports 802 1x authentication based on the Extensible Application Protocol EAP 802 1x can be enabled for devices connected through both wired and wireless Ethernet networks As described here the 802 1x configuration is used to authenticate the machine rather than individual users After the machine has been authenticated it will be accessible to users on the network The System Administrator can configure the machine to use one EAP type EAP types currently supported on the machine are EAP MD5 EAP MS CHAPv2 and PEAP MS CHAPv2 Before you configure 802 1x authentication the following configuration is required e Create a user name and password on your authentication server which will be used to authenticate the machine E
51. Using the same method as in step 11 enter a subnet mask 14 Select IPv4 Gateway Address and then Change Settings 15 Using the same method as in step 11 enter a gateway address NOTE If you do not wish to set the gateway address leave this field blank 76 Select IPv4 IP Filter and then Change Settings 17 Select Enabled to filter access to the machine NOTE If you do not wish to use the IP filter feature select Disabled NOTE Use CentreWare Internet Services to register the IP addresses which are not allowed to access the machine Refer to CentreWare Internet Services on page 147 18 When you have finished establishing TCP IP select Close on the Protocol Settings screen When IPv6 Mode or Dual Stack is selected in step 7 8 Set IPv6 Address Manual Configuration to Enabled 9 Select Manually Configured IPv6 Address and then Change Settings 70 Use the keypad on the screen to enter an IP address for the machine in the format XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX Select Save 11 Select Manually Configured IPv6 Prefix and then Change Settings 72 Enter an IP address prefix and then select Save 73 Select Manually Configured IPv6 Gateway and then Change Settings 14 Using the same method as in step 10 enter a gateway address 15 Select IPv6 IP Filter and then select Enabled or Disabled NOTE If you do not wish to use the IP filter feature select
52. Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Server 2003 Windows Vista Port9100 Windows 2000 TCP IP Windows XP Windows Server 2003 Windows Vista NOTE The optional PostScript Kit is required when you print from a Macintosh TCP IP LPD or Port9100 Installation This section describes how to set up the machine to use the LPD and Port9100 protocols Installation Procedure There are three stages to enable printing on the machine through LPD or Port9100 Network Communication Setup Enable the following ports using the touch screen or CentreWare Internet Services e Printing through LPD LPD port Printing through Port9100 Port9100 port Set the IP address using the touch screen 256 TCP IP LPD or Port9100 Computer Setup This requires the computers in the networking environment to be configured to communicate with the machine Test Print A print job should be submitted to make sure that the machine has been installed and configured correctly Network Communication Setup This section describes how to set up the network communication parameters of the machine At the machine perform these steps NOTE Keep the SNMP port enabled while you use the machine on the TCP IP network NOTE Some of the configuration options for this protocol are only available from CentreWare Internet Services Refer to CentreWare Internet Services on page 147 Initially boot the LPD port or Port9100 71 C
53. click Connectivity click Protocols and finally click LDAP For more information refer to CentreWare Internet Services chapter on page 147 Procedures for Scan to Home Setup The Scan to Home feature only works with Remote Authentication At Your Workstation Enabling Remote Authentication 1 2 A AWN Open your web browser and enter the IP address of the machine in the Address or Location field Click Enter Click the Properties tab Click Security Click Authentication Configuration In the Login Type box select Login to Remote Accounts Click Apply The machine will reboot Selecting an Authentication System 1 2 3 4 5 Refresh the web browser On the Properties page click Security Click Remote Authentication Servers Click Authentication System and then under Authentication System Settings click an authentication system For more information on the settings for each authentication system refer to Remote Authentication Setup on page 332 Click Apply The machine will reboot Configuring the Scan to Home Settings 1 Refresh the web browser 282 Scan to PC Setup FTP A SS N On the Properties page click Services Click Scan to Home Click General On the Scan to Home page a On the Status line place a check mark in the Enabled box b In the Friendly Name box type in a user recognizable name of up to 127 c
54. e e Scan to E mail Scan to Mailbox Network Scanning Scan to PC FTP Scan to PC SMB The setup procedures are as follows Scan to E mail Setup Hard copies can be scanned at the machine and sent to remote clients as e mail attachments in Single TIFF Multi TIFF PDF or XPS format SMTP and POP3 mail servers are used to send and receive e mail respectively NOTE XPS stands for XML Paper Specification Prerequisites for Scan to E mail Setup 7 Confirm that an existing operational network using TCP IP is available 2 Confirm that DNS and the Domain Name have been correctly setup for the multifunction machine 3 Confirm that the following ports are enabled Scan to E mail Send E mail E mail Print Receive E mail e E mail Notification Service Notify Job End by E mail E mail Notification Service Data to Set Up E mail Install Comments Requirement SMTP mail server Host Name or IP Required If using an external mail server your address Internet Service Provider will provide you with the mail server name or IP address SMTP login password Required WorkCentre E mail address Required Local e mail addresses Optional A Local Address Book can be created to store e mail addresses LDAP server address can be LDAP Host Name Displays only e mail addresses on the enabled corporate LDAP internal address book Only if the SMTP server requires login and password for authentication 276
55. e Message Encryption Method Select a contents encryption method from 3DES RC2 40 RC2 64 and RC2 128 e Certificate Auto Store Place a check mark into the box to automatically save an S MIME certificate attached to an e mail received from an address registered in your address book e Receive Untrusted E mail Decide whether or not you wish to receive untrusted e mail e Digital Signature Outgoing E mail Decide whether or not to add a digital signature to outgoing e mail and the method to use if a signature is required e Receive Untrusted Internet Fax Decide whether or not you wish to receive untrusted Internet Faxes e Digital Signature Outgoing Internet Fax Decide whether or not to add a digital signature to outgoing Internet Faxes and the method to use if a signature is required d Click the Apply button Configuration on a Computer The following describes the configuration for a remote networked computer Sending Scanned Data by S MIME Encrypted E mail from the Machine to a Computer An S MIME certificate MUST be imported configured and stored on the machine as stated in this chapter For details refer to Configuring S MIME Certificates with CentreWare Internet Services on page 300 When importing the S MIME certificate make sure that a root certificate is included for use with Supported E mail Applications on page 303 Receiving E mail with S MIME Digital Signature from the Machine No settings a
56. e mail 027 715 The S MIME certificate for the received e mail has not been registered on the machine or is not effective on the machine Import the sender s S MIME certificate into the machine or if it has been imported register the certificate on the machine so that it becomes effective 027 716 The reception of the e mail was rejected because the S MIME certificate was not trusted Ask the sender to send e mail with a trusted certificate 027 730 The number of the document pages attached to the SMTP e mail was more than the maximum number of pages allowed for the Split Send feature Reduce the number of the document pages and try again 027 731 A Job Template server access limit error occurred Wait until the Netware job in process is completed and try again 027 732 A Job Template server access error occurred Check if the hard disk on the server is working correctly and has sufficient free space and try again 027 733 A Job Template server SSL error occurred Check if the SSL is enabled on the server 027 734 The job template certificate may have a problem Check if your computer is connected to the HTTP server via the HTTP protocol Also check if a valid SSL server certificate for the HTTP server is registered on the machine If the device certificate is not registered on the Job Template server disable the SSL certificate verification setting 027 735 Data was to be transfer
57. glass cover feeder closed Document Sizes Standard size A5 LEF to A3 SEF 5 5 x 8 5 to 11 x 17 SEF Custom size width Up to 297 mm 0 6 to 11 7 length Up to 432 mm 0 6 to 17 0 Auto Size Sensing Yes NOTE The standard sizes of documents that can be detected vary depending on the paper size table specified by the System Administrator For information on setting the paper size table refer to Paper Size Settings in the Setups chapter on page 78 Document Feeder Capacity 75 sheets of 50 to 80 g m Document Sizes Maximum document size 297 mm W x 432 mm 11 7 x 17 0 Minimum document size 139 7 mm W x 210 mm 5 5 x 8 3 Long Document Scan feature for Fax mode 297 mm W x 600 mm 11 7 x 23 6 NOTE The Long Document Scan feature is not available in the double sided mode When using this feature to scan long documents which exceed 432 mm 17 0 inches the operator must feed the document one sheet at a time The paper weight should be between 60 and 90 g m Document Weight 38 to 128 g m 50 to 128 g m in double sided mode Mixed Sizes Yes If so specified on the machine and the lead edges of documents have the same dimension Auto Size Sensing Yes 422 Specitications NOTE The standard sizes of documents that can be detected vary depending on the paper size table specified by the System Administrator For information on setting the paper size table refer to Paper Size S
58. http into the address column in the web browser Example https 192 168 1 1 When encrypting IPP communications Internet printing enter an address beginning with https instead of http as the URL of a printer that is selected from Add Printer NOTE You will typically be presented with a Digital Certificate which you need to accept in order to send encrypted files to the device Digital Certificates represent the Public Key of the machine to which you are sending and must be accepted in order to allow the encryption process to take place No settings are needed to use the SOAP or WebDAV port Configuration of E mail Encryption Digital Signature Installation Overview Configuration on the Machine Import an S MIME certificate from a Certificate Authority in PKCS7 format and then configure the certificate on the machine using CentreWare Internet Services Configuration on a Computer No special configuration is needed for remote computer receipt of encrypted e mail For sending encrypted e mail to the machine however you will need a copy of the machine s S MIME certificate on your computer to allow you to encrypt email to be sent to the machine The S MIME certificate represents the Public Key of the machine allowing encryption to take place Configuring S MIME Certificates with CentreWare Internet Services To configure S MIME certificates with CentreWare Internet Services first enable HTTP communicatio
59. maintaining Cleaning s es 29 Control Panel Alert Tone aa 67 Control Panel Select Tone eceeeeeeeees 67 CONVENTIONS aiiin ee ae 14 Convert Custom to Standard Size 120 Copy Control Copy Service Settings 88 Copy Defaults Copy Service Settings 85 Copy Mode Settings ooooioccccnnnniccccccnnnoncccccannns 84 Copy Outputs tce4 sh ieiteh eet einstein 86 Copy Output Separator Tray cceceeees 86 Copy Reports c cccccceceeeeeeseeeeeeseneeeeeeeeeees 53 Configuration Report eseese 53 Copy Service Settings cc eeeeeeeesteeeeeeenaes 84 Copy Control inisenisi iea 88 Copy Defaults ardi a a ae 85 Copy Tab inicio nei 84 Original Size Defaults 0 0 0 eee 89 Reduce Enlarge Presets 90 Copy Tab Copy Service Settings 84 COUNTIY tdci add caida 84 Cover A Paper jams coooooccccnccnnccccocccconcnncnnnnnnnn 345 Cover B paper jams 0 ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 346 436 Index Cover C paper jamS ooooccccccncnncononcnnncnncnnnnncnnnnns Cover E paper jams ccceceeeeeeeeeeeteees Covers Cover Tray Create Authorization Groups Authentication oooocnnnnnnccncncnnnnnnononononocncnononons Create Fax Group Recipients Setup Create Job Flow Sheet Setup 05 Create Job Flow Sheet Keywords SOU urinaria did nadie ined Create Mailbox Setup Create View U
60. or Dual Stack When IPv4 Mode or Dual Stack is selected in step 2 3 Select IP Address Resolution and then Change Settings 4 Select a method for establishing an IP address from DHCP BOOTP RARP DHCP Autonet and STATIC and then select Save NOTE Use the DHCP server together with the Windows Internet Name Server WINS server If you selected STATIC in step 4 then proceed to step 5 to configure the protocol settings Otherwise proceed to step 11 5 Select IPv4 IP Address and then Change Settings 6 Use the keypad on the screen to enter an IP address for the machine in the format XXX XXX XXX XXX When you have finished entering all values select Save 7 Select IPv4 Subnet Mask and then Change Settings Using the same method as in step 6 enter a subnet mask 9 Select IPv4 Gateway Address and then Change Settings 57 270 E mail Installation 70 Using the same method as in step 6 enter a gateway address NOTE If you do not wish to set the gateway address leave this field blank 11 Select IPv4 IP Filter and then Change Settings 12 Select Enabled to filter access to the machine NOTE If you do not wish to use the IP filter feature select Disabled NOTE Use CentreWare Internet Services to register the IP addresses which are not allowed to access the machine Refer to CentreWare Internet Services on page 147 73 When you have finish
61. proceed to step 11 257 8 Printer Environment Settings 5 Select IPv4 IP Address and then Change Settings 6 Use the keypad on the screen to enter an IP address for the machine in the format XXX XXX XXX XXX When you have finished entering all values select Save 7 Select IPv4 Subnet Mask and then Change Settings 8 Using the same method as in step 6 enter a subnet mask 9 Select IPv4 Gateway Address and then Change Settings 70 Using the same method as in step 6 enter a gateway address NOTE If you do not wish to set the gateway address leave this field blank 11 Select IPv4 IP Filter and then Change Settings 12 Select Enabled to filter access to the machine NOTE If you do not wish to use the IP filter feature select Disabled NOTE Use CentreWare Internet Services to register the IP addresses which are not allowed to access the machine Refer to the CentreWare Internet Services on page 147 73 When you have finished establishing TCP IP select Close on the Protocol Settings screen When IPv6 Mode or Dual Stack is selected in step 2 3 Set IPv6 Address Manual Configuration NOTE Select Enabled when the machine is connected to a network on which IPv6 stateless address autoconfiguration is disabled or when you want to set a static IPv6 address If you selected Enabled in step 3 proceed to step 4 Otherwise proceed to step 10 4 Select
62. protocol is in ASCII format e Binary Select this when the communication protocol is in binary format TBCP Select this to switch between the specific control codes when the communication protocols involve both ASCII and binary formats RAW Select this when the communication protocol is in RAW format Protocols EtherTalk Allows you to configure the EtherTalk port settings This is only displayed when PostScript is enabled Protocol Displays whether the protocol is enabled or disabled Physical Connection Displays Ethernet This is a display only item Printer Name Enter the EtherTalk printer name Printer Type Displays the printer type Zone Name Enter the EtherTalk zone name NetWare Allows you to configure the NetWare settings General Protocol Displays whether the protocol is enabled or disabled e Physical Connection Displays Ethernet This is a display only item Network Address Displays the network address in XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXX format Filing Transport Displays whether two transport protocols IPX SPX and TCP IP are enabled or disabled 183 7 CentreWare Internet Services Feature Setting items Connectivity Protocols continued NetWare continued Frame Type Select the frame type Auto Automatically configures the active frame type Ethernet Il Selects Ethernet frame typ
63. s usage status on the machine E mail Address Displays the e mail address associated with the certificate Export this certificate Exports the certificate to a client computer s certificate folder in PKCS 7 format 221 7 CentreWare Internet Services Feature Setting items Security 802 1x Allows you to set up the 802 1 authentication feature Enable IEEE 802 1x Select whether or not to enable IEEE 802 1x authentication Authentication Method Specify the IEEE 802 1 x authentication method Login Name Device Name Enter a user name for IEEE 802 1 authentication Password Enter the password for the user name Retype Password Re enter the password for verification Certificate Validation Select whether or not to validate the server certificate when Authentication Method is PEAP MS CHAPv2 SSL TLS Settings Allows you to configure SSL TLS communication HTTP SSL TLS Communication Select to enable HTTPS SSL TLS communication HTTPS SSL TLS Communication Port Number Enter the number of the port to be used for HTTPS SSL TLS communication LDAP SSL TLS Communication Select to enable LDAP SSL TLS communication S MIME Communication Select to use a certificate for e mail transmission reception via S MIME communication This check box becomes active only when a certificate for S MIME communication is registered on the machine Verify Remote Server Certificate Select
64. screen 2 00020 Store for Polling 6 4 2002 810 AM S 2 Select a docu ment to p ri nt or 3 00030 Store for Polling 9 6 2003 12 15 PM 10 4 00040 Store for Polling 7 7 2000 430PM 100 delete 5 00050 Store for Pollin 1 11 2000 830 AM__999 Delete Ae Print NOTE Use the scroll buttons to switch between screens 3 Select the required option Refresh Refreshes the displayed information Document Type Identifies each document by number and type Stored Date Displays the date the document was stored 46 Secure Print Jobs amp More Pages Displays the number of printed scanned sent or received pages Select All Selects all the documents in the Public Mailbox Print Prints a document selected in the list Delete Deletes a document selected in the list Undelivered Faxes This feature allows you to delete or resend undelivered faxes You can resend faxes to their original recipient or change the recipient 1 Select Undelivered Faxes on Undelivered Faxes Refresh the Secure Print Jobs amp More 2 Twe A Fax Send lane Smi screen Fax Broadcast Jane Smith S Fax iFax Broadcast 0123456789 2 Select a document to delete or n rese nd Fax Broadcast Jane Smith y NOTE Use the scroll buttons to switch between screens 3 Press the lt Start gt button on the Tari ecamentaa control panel to resend the fax t
65. to require reconfirmation only when multiple recipients are specified Reconfirm Internet Fax Recipient Specifies whether to reconfirm Internet Fax recipients before transmission Select Confirmation Not Required to disable this setting Always Reconfirm Recipient to always require reconfirmation of recipients or Reconfirm If Multiple Recipients to require reconfirmation only when multiple recipients are specified 69 6 Setups Paper Tray Settings This feature allows you to configure various settings for trays and for paper to be loaded in the trays 7 Select Paper Tray Settings in Paper Tray Satings the Featu res menu m Custom Paper Name m Paper Tray Attributes J Paper Tray Attributes Color on Setup Screen 2 Change the required settings ere tees E og try iy E During Loading 3 Select Close Tray 5 Bypass Auto Tray Switching Paper Size Defaults Control Custom Paper Name Color Specifies user defined paper names and paper colors for Custom Paper Type 1 to 5 and Custom Paper Color 1 to 5 respectively The settings are available for plain paper bond paper and recycled paper Enter a name of up to 24 alphanumeric characters and symbols Assigned names are displayed on the screens relating to paper supply Paper Tray Attributes Specifies the size and type of paper loaded in the paper trays The paper trays available vary depending on your machine configura
66. 0 0 0 0 eee 106 Scan to E mail Setup ooococcccnccncononccnncnncnnncnnnnnnns 276 Prerequisites cecccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 276 Procedure aut 277 Troubleshooting ineei ie EER E 278 Scan to Home Setup eceecceeeeeeeeeeetees 281 Prerequisites cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 282 Procedures m aae 282 Scan to Mailbox Computer Setup ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeteees 280 Scan to Mailbox Setup Prerequisites cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 278 Procedure on Control Panel 0005 280 Procedure on CentreWare Internet Services 0 279 Scan to PC Defaults Scan Service SENGE use sires tess ee a ee 106 Scan to PC Setup FTP ecceceeeeeeeeeees 283 Prerequisites cccccceceeeeeeseeeeeeeenees 283 Procedure cada o 284 Scan to PC Setup SMB ceeeeeeeteeeeees 284 Prerequisites e T enean ais 284 A 285 scanner environment settings eese 275 SCANNING Services cnnnnccccnnnocccccnnnannccnnnnannncnnnns 275 problem SOIVING oooooncccnnnnnncccnnnnnocccininnnnncnns 376 Scheduled Image Overwrite ieee 146 Screen Default at Power ON ceeeeeeeee 68 Screen Defaults Fax Service Settings 109 SCFEEN MESSAGES coocccccccccccncnnonancnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnns 419 Screen Button Settings Common Service Settings oooooonnnnnccnnnnnaccccccnnns 68 Search Time Out cooooccccccccnnnnonnononnncnnnn
67. 027 514 The machine failed to transfer data via SMB using the Scan to PC service because the machine could not resolve the host name or the server name of the SMB server when accessing DNS Check the connection to DNS Check if the SMB server name has been registered on DNS 027 515 During data transfer via SMB using the Scan to PC service access to DNS failed because the DNS server was not set correctly Set the DNS server address Or specify the destination SMB server address using its IP address 404 Fault Codes Code Description and Remedy 027 516 The machine failed to transfer data via SMB using the Scan to PC service because the SMB server was not found Take one of the following actions and try again e Check the following to see if the destination SMB server and the machine are set up properly for network communication Check if the network cables are plugged in securely Check the TCP IP settings Check the communication status of port 137 UDP port 138 UDP and port 139 TCP e Check the following to see if the computer correctly works as an SMB server Check if the file sharing service for Microsoft Network is activated Check if NetBIOS over TCP IP for TCP IP is activated Check if the file sharing service using communication through port 137 UDP port 138 UDP and port 139 TCP are authorized for the Firewall settings For communication that
68. 100 0 4 x 6 LEF 152 4 101 6 4 x 6 SEF 101 6 152 4 Prepaid Postcard 200 0 148 0 LEF 3 5 x 5 5 SEF 88 9 139 7 B6 LEF 182 0 128 0 B6 SEF 128 0 182 0 O Available Blank Not available 81 6 Setups Tray 6 HCF A D 5 Size Width Length ae z 35 xz 3 mm mm xa a Sa Sal y 22 2 22 22 09 0 5p bT D 0 0 0 RO N A5 SEF 148 0 210 0 A5 LEF 210 0 148 0 5 5 x 8 5 LEF 215 9 139 7 5 5 x 8 5 SEF 139 7 215 9 B5 SEF 182 0 257 0 B5 LEF 257 0 182 0 O O A4 SEF 210 0 297 0 A4 LEF 297 0 210 0 O O O O O 8 5 x 11 SEF 215 9 279 4 Letter 8 5 x 11 LEF 279 4 215 9 O O O O O Letter 8 5 x 13 SEF 215 9 330 2 Legal 8 5 x 14 SEF 215 9 355 6 Legal B4 SEF 257 0 364 0 16K SEF 194 0 267 0 16K LEF 267 0 194 0 8K SEF 267 0 388 0 A3 SEF 297 0 420 0 11 x 17 SEF 279 4 431 8 7 25 x 10 5 SEF 184 2 266 7 Executive 7 25 x 10 5 LEF 266 7 184 2 O O O Executive C4 Envelope 229 0 324 0 SEF C5 Envelope 229 0 162 0 LEF C5 Envelope 162 0 229 0 SEF Commercial 10 241 3 104 8 Envelope LEF DL Envelope 220 0 110 0 LEF Monarch 190 5 98 4 Envelope LEF Youkei 0 235 0 120 0 Envelope LEF A6 SEF 105 0 148 0 A6 LEF 148 0 105 0 Postcard SEF 100 0 148 0 Postcard LEF 148 0 100 0 4 x 6 LEF 152 4 101 6 4 x 6 SEF 101 6 152 4 Prepaid Postca
69. 134 Reset User ACCOUNS drsni e ar e a a a 135 System Administrator s Meter Copy JODS oooccccccoccccccccccccccnnnnnos 136 Accounting Type uscatataci tii diia diia 136 Accounting Login Screen Settings oooocccnnninonicinnnnnnnccorcccccnnnnnnns 137 Fax Billing Data aus iras 137 Charge Rate per Until iii 137 Auto Reset of User Billing Information ooo nmnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnniconcccnnnnnns 138 Copy Activity Report ideeen ee a eaS 138 Authentication Security Settings coocoocinnnionnonncncnnnnnnnnarernnnnnnnnnnnnos 138 System Administrator Settings oooocccnnnnononccocnnnccconcnacanncnnncnnnnnnnns 138 System Administrator s Login ID ooooooccccccccnoncocanoconcninonanannn cnn 139 System Administrator s PaSSCOdE c ooooccccccccccnncoconcncnoccncnnnnanonnnnn 139 Authentication ococcccccccnnncnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnennnennneninnnns 139 ODIN TIP ds aitor ei lados 140 ACCESS COMO iii ds 140 Create View User ACCOUNTS ecccceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeneeee 141 Reset User Accounts cooocccocccocicccccconoccnnonnno nono nino nnnnrnnnr nn nn nnnr nn nn 141 Create Authorization Groups cccccccceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 141 User Details Setup c ooococcccicccinicicccnoccconconnconnno rro nono nono n non nnnnnnnnnnnns 142 System Administrator Maximum Login Attempts oo co 143 Passcode Polley ita acicate 143 Charge Private Print Settings oocooonoc
70. 287 Information CheckliSt oooccccnccccccccononencncnnnnnononononincnnnnnnnnnnnnonos 287 Internet Fax Environments occccccccccccccconencnnnnnononononcnnnnononnnnnonononanenenons 288 Internet Fax Installation cccccccccncoocononcnononnnonononononccnononononononononenons 288 Installation Procedure coooococcncnnnnccnonononencncnnnnnnnonononincncnnnnnnnnnnonos 288 Network Communication Setup ccocccccccccccccicocicinicinicinicinicinncinnannns 289 Test Internet Fai ia ia aa 291 Server Fai Ai Ai 293 Server Fax OVervVieW oococccccccccocccononcncnnonnnnonononncnnnnonnnnnononninnnnnnnnanonononos 293 Server Fax Environments ccoccccococcncnnnnnnnononononcnnnnononnnonnnncnnncnnnnnnnnononos 293 Server Fax Installation ooonoccccnnnnncccconononcnnnnnnnnnnonococonononnnnnonononos 294 Installation Procedure cooooccncncnnnnccnononononcncnnnnnnnonononincnnnnnnnnnnononos 294 Fax Server Installation and Configuration ooooonnonnccccnnnnnccccccccnnnnn 294 Machine Configuration 0 ita 295 Test Server Fax Transmission ooooooonconccccconncnnoncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonineninoss 296 Security Encryption Digital Signature oomommnmoniniiinnnmmmmmns 297 Types of Encryption Digital Signature Services Available 297 Configuration of HTTPS SSL TLS Communication Encryption 298 Installation Overview oooococcoccncnnnnccnonononencncnnnnnnnonononincncnnannnonononos 298 Configuring C
71. 50 General Settings 2nd Column 109 General Users 00 0 0 ccceeceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 308 H High Capacity Tandem Tray paper JAMS cooooccccccnccononcononcnnnnnncnnnnnanannnnn nono 348 Hole Punch Tool ssis aa 75 Hole Punch Waste Container 0 0 e 37 HostName atescete aaa aliob eiaa 94 a eE e E EPA E E EEE 238 HTTP SSL TLS Communication 0 06 98 HTTP SSL TLS Port Number 0 00 98 HTTP Proxy Server Authentication 94 HTTP Proxy Server Login Name nae 95 HTTP Proxy Server Name ceecee 94 HTTP Proxy Server Password enen 95 HTTP Proxy Server Port Number nessen 94 HTTPS Proxy Server Authentication 95 HTTPS Proxy Server Login Name n e 95 HTTPS Proxy Server Name eee 95 HTTPS Proxy Server Password ee 95 HTTPS Proxy Server Port Number ee 95 HTTPS SettingS ai a 298 l EEE 802 TE ee reer rd aa E 100 IEEE 8021x Settings cranna 99 IKE Authentication Method eeeeeeeees 99 IKE SA Life TIME se piesthat see eked iaaa 99 Image Enhancement cceeesecceeeettteeeeeenaees 72 Image Quality Common Service Settings E IEE ued shan atte cena AE Staten sete nate 72 Image Rotation eeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeneeeeees 86 Image Rotation Direction 86 Image Shift Side 1 oo eeeeeeeeeteeeeeeenaees 86 Image Shift Side 2 oo ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeees 86 Image Transfer Screen ceecee 108 Incoming E mail Print Op
72. 64 characters Password Enter the password for the user name with up to 32 characters 178 Properties Feature General Setup Setting items Cloning This feature provided by Xerox Standard Accounting saves the settings of selected features in a configuration file which can then be used to clone the settings onto other machines To install configuration files to other machines the machines must have the same version of software as this machine Create Clone File Allows you to select which settings will be cloned from the following features To select all the features simply click Clone To customize a configuration file select only the desired features and click Clone e Connectivity Settings E mail e Internet Fax e Job Management Authentication e Administration e Fax e Network Scanning Setup e Network Scanning Templates Audit Log View Feature Details Displays the details of the features in Create Clone File Select the check boxes of the settings to be cloned Hide Feature Details Hides the details of the features in Create Clone File Install Clone File Click the Browse button to locate the configuration file to install and click the Install button to start the installation The Browse and Install buttons appear only when Hide Feature Details is selected Alert Setup E mail Notification Notification Allows you to set up the automatic notification of t
73. AEPA T E E A E E 423 Paper QUtput uses Aatistaceattusaianes eiii tilapia 424 Electrical Specifications errira aeea de ia e 425 Specifications for the Fax Service ococcccccccccnnccnnccnnnnnnnicnnininininininns 426 Emulation Parameters oooccnnccnnncnccncncnononnncnnnnnnnnnononnnnnnonononnnonononenenass 427 PCL EMuU AtiON cerien e ida 427 PDF Direct Printing kia imgesini dois 430 Machine Software Upgrade ccccccceecceecececeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeesereeeeeeeeeess 430 Xerox Extensible Interface Platform XEIP eeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeenteeees 431 Co fig ring XE P esti triada 432 MT MOK AEA EEEE AEEA EEA A A T AA A 435 12 1 Before Using the Machine Welcome to the Xerox family of WorkCentre products This System Administration Guide provides detailed information technical specifications and procedures for using the integral features of the machine Xerox Welcome Center If you need assistance during or after product installation visit the Xerox website for on line solutions and support http www xerox com support If you require further assistance contact our experts at the Xerox Welcome Center A telephone number for the local representative may have been provided when the product was installed For convenience and future reference please record the telephone number in the space below Welcome Center or local representative telephone number Bo Xerox US Welcome Center 1 800 821 2797 Xer
74. Accounting and enter the group account ID with up to 48 characters NOTE This item is displayed only when Local Accounting Xerox Standard Accounting or Network Accounting is enabled When Network Accounting is enabled the item is displayed when Customize User Prompts is Display User ID amp Account ID Prompts or Display Account ID Prompt Only File Name Allows you to specify the file to print Clicking Browse opens the Choose File dialog box where you can select the file to print You can print only files with the following exceptions pdf tif pcl ps and txt Submit Job Click this button to print the file 159 7 CentreWare Internet Services Scan This page allows you to create modify or delete job templates for Network Scanning jobs and configure mailbox and job flow sheet settings 7 Click Scan on the Header Panel of the home page 2 On the collapsible menu of the Menu Panel click Job Template Mailbox or Job Flow Sheets Job Templates Templates This page allows you to view the list of job templates registered in the machine create new templates or modify the existing templates for the Network Scanning feature Job templates can be created with different settings by selecting features such as resolution and file format Up to 250 templates can be stored on the hard disk of the machine If you apply any template to a scan job retrieve the job template first
75. Administrator Job Flow Shared by Shared by Operations ee Mailbox E Personal peral Mailbox oe Personal trators trators Create O Xx Xx Xx Xx Xx O Xx Display O x O x Edit O Xx Xx Xx 312 Authentication for Job Flow Sheets and Mailboxes General Users System Administrator Job Flow Shared by Shared by Operations clear Mailbox iano Personal oe Mailbox Pisani Personal trators trators Copy O x O Delete X Select Run O O x O O O O Operation available X Operation not available When the Authentication Feature is Enabled The owner of a copied job flow sheet becomes a duplicate user The following table shows the relationship with the mailboxes for each user type when the Authentication feature is enabled NOTE You can perform the same operations regardless of whether job flow sheets are created using Create Mailbox or Create Job Flow Sheet on the Setup screen When Login to Local Accounts is selected or when authenticated as a user other than a guest user in Login to Remote Accounts NOTE If authenticated as a guest user in Remote Authentication you are treated as an unauthenticated user general user and cannot operate job flow sheets Unauthenticated Users General Users Job Flow Operations Shared by the Senora Mailbox System Personal Shared Be Admin
76. Administrator user ID and passcode are 11111 and x admin respectively 8 Refresh the web browser 9 Click on the left of Security to display the items in the folder 70 Configure the certificate a Click Certificates Management b Select Local Device for Category select S MIME for Certificate Purpose and then click the Display the List button If necessary enter the System Administrator user ID and passcode and click OK c Place a check mark in the box in front of the certificate you wish to view details for d Click the Certificate Details button e Click the Use this certificate button f Click Reboot Machine The machine will reboot and the setting values will be reflected 11 Refresh the web browser 72 Click on the left of Security to display the items in the folder 73 Click SSL TLS Settings 14 Select the Enabled check box for S MIME Communication 301 13 Security Encryption Digital Signature 75 Apply the settings a Click Apply The Main Panel will display the Reboot Machine button b Click Reboot Machine The machine will be unavailable for a short period of time 76 Configure the settings for S MIME a Refresh the web browser b Click on the left of Security to display the items in the folder c Click S MIME Settings and set the following items e Message Digest Algorithm Select a message digest algorithm from SHA1 and MD5
77. Check the transport protocol selected from the control panel Select the transport protocol matching the client When the required printing result is not obtained Cause Confirmation Method Action The specified print language is different from the print language of the print data Check the specified print language and the print language of the print data Specify a print language matching that of the print data 370 Network related Problems This section explains the troubleshooting procedures and restrictions while using TCP IP Troubleshooting The possible causes confirmation methods and actions are as follows When using Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Server 2003 Windows Vista When printing fails Cause Confirmation Method Action The correct IP address is not specified Check whether the IP address of the machine is correct Specify the correct IP address for the machine When Receiving Buffer LPD is set to Spool to Memory the size of print data sent in one print request exceeds the maximum size specified Check the maximum receiving data size on the touch screen of the machine and then compare it with the size of print data to be sent as one request When the print data size exceeds the maximum size in one file divide the file into smaller files than the maximum receiving data size and then send the pr
78. Check the user name settings 027 549 An SMB protocol error occurred Perform the same operation again Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 027 564 An SMB protocol error occurred The SMB server could not be found Check that the authentication server and the machine can communicate across the network For example check the following e Check the network cable connections e Check the TCP IP settings Check the port settings port 137 UDP port 138 UDP port 139 TCP 027 565 An SMB protocol error occurred Perform the same operation again Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 027 566 An SMB protocol error occurred SMB TCP IP is not activated Using CentreWare Internet Services open the Port Status page on the Properties tab and check that TCP IP for SMB is enabled 027 569 The SMB TCP IP port is not enabled Enable the port with CentreWare Internet Services 407 15 Problem Solving Code Description and Remedy 027 572 An SMB protocol error occurred Perform the same operation again Contact the 027 573 Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 027 574 027 576 027 578 027 584 An SMB protocol error occurred The SMB server is operating in share security mode The SMB server is probably set on the Windows 95 Windows 98 or Windows ME OS Set the SM
79. China 270 0 390 0 SEF 0 Postcard 100 0 148 0 LEF 0 Prepaid 200 0 148 0 SEF O Postcard 4x6 101 6 152 4 LEF 0 European 3 120 0 235 0 LEF O Chouyoukei 3 Envelope Commercial 104 8 241 3 LEF 0 0 10 Envelope Monarch 98 4 190 5 LEF O 0 Envelope DL Envelope 110 0 220 0 LEF 0 oO C4 Envelope 229 0 324 0 SEF 0 C5 Envelope 162 0 229 0 LEF 0 0 O Available blank Not available 24 Supported Paper Sizes and Types Output Trays Duplex Module Standard Sizes Paper Size Dimensions LEEY Gontor tensive Mera Os pups y ray Finisher LX Module A6 105 0 148 0 LEF 0 Oo O A5 148 0 210 0 SEF O 0 O 0 LEF O O O 0 A4 210 0 297 0 SEF 0 0 O oO 0 LEF O O O O 0 A3 297 0 420 0 SEF 0 oO O Oo O B6 128 5 182 0 SEF O O O B5 182 0 257 0 SEF Oo O Oo Oo LEF O oO O O O B4 257 0 364 0 SEF 0 O O O O 5 5 x 8 5 139 7 215 9 SEF 0 O O O LEF O O O O 7 25x 10 5 184 2 266 7 SEF O 0 Oo O LEF O 0 O O O 8 5 x 11 215 9 279 4 SEF Oo Oo O Oo Oo LEF O O O O 0 8 5 x 13 215 9 330 2 SEF 0 0 O oO O 8 5 x 14 215 9 355 6 SEF Oo 0 Oo 0 oO 11 x 17 297 4 431 8 SEF O oO O O oO 16K Taiwan 194 0 267 0 SEF O 0 O O LEF O O O O O 8K Taiwan 267 0 388 0 SEF O 0 O O oO 16K China 195
80. F and TIFF J may not be received When you set to TIFF F or TIFF J check the capability of the remote machine in advance Internet Fax Subject Specifies the default e mail subject to be used for Internet Fax transmission 110 System Settings Fax Control This feature allows you to conduct operational control of the various fax features 1 Select Fax Control in the Fax Control Featu re s menu Items Current Settings 1 Re enter Recipients 2 C h an g e th ere q u i re d S etti n g S 2 Re enter Broadcast Recipients Broadcast Disabled Re enter Speed Dial Recipients nter Twice Use the scroll buttons to switch J betwee n scree ns 5 Transmission Header Text Polling Display Header ly 3 Select Close Re enter Recipients Specifies whether to re enter a recipient address after once entering it to reduce the risk of sending a fax to the wrong address When Enter Twice is selected you will be prompted to re enter a specified address for confirmation Re enter Broadcast Recipients Specifies whether to re enter Broadcasting recipient addresses after once entering them or whether to enable or disable the Broadcasting feature itself This setting is effective when you select Enter Twice under Re enter Recipients Re enter Speed Dial Recipients Specifies whether to re enter a recipient address after once specifying it using Speed Dial This s
81. FTP SMB and SMTP If the fax server uses TCP IP to communicate it is recommended that the server is assigned a static IP address Follow the fax server software manufacturer s instructions to create a fax repository a directory to store transferred images Create a user account login name and password for the machine on the server Make sure that the machine has full access rights to the fax repository Configure the fax server referring to the fax management software manufacturer s documentation so that it is able to monitor the fax repository for incoming documents NOTE Follow the fax server software manufacturer s instructions for any other settings required to use the Fax Server service 294 Server Fax Installation Machine Configuration 7 Set TCP IP and HTTP for the machine This is required to access CentreWare Internet Services which can be used to configure Server Fax settings from a networked computer For details on how to set TCP IP and HTTP refer to CentreWare Internet Services Installation on page 148 2 Enable the port to be used for the Server Fax service The transfer protocols available for the Server Fax service are FTP SMB and SMTP For details on how to enable a port refer to Port Settings on page 90 NOTE To verify that TCP IP and HTTP are correctly configured and the port is enabled you can print a Configuration Report For information on the Configuration Report refer to Mac
82. Fax Delivery Confirmation Method Specifies the method of confirming delivery of an Internet Fax transmission Select Delivery Receipts to receive a notification mail that informs you whether an Internet Fax is delivered to the destination Select Read Receipts to receive a notification mail that informs you that an Internet Fax has been correctly handled at the destination Incoming Internet Fax Print Options Specifies whether to print the header and body the subject and body or attached files of a received e mail This is effective in saving paper and printing the attached files Internet Fax Output Destination Specifies the output tray for printing received e mails Fax Transfer from Address Book Specifies whether to restrict the forwarding of received e mails as fax documents to an address not registered in the Address Book If On is selected and you attempt to forward a received e mail to an address not registered in the Address Book forwarding will not be executed and e mail data will be discarded Transmission Header Fax Transfer Specifies whether to use the Transmission Header Text feature when you forward a received e mail to remote machines as a fax document Select On to send header information at the top of each page of the document Fax Transfer Maximum Data Size Specifies the maximum data size when you forward a received e mail to remote machines as a fax document Enter a size within the range of 1 t
83. For details on each item refer to Authentication Configuration on page 212 Device Default State Configuration For details on each item refer to Device Default State Configuration on page 212 User Details Setup Allows you to configure the settings for user ID authentication The items displayed on this page vary depending on the authentication method being selected Alternative Name for User ID Enter a name you want to display on the machine s touch screen and CentreWare Internet Services or to print on reports instead of the user name This name can be up to 15 characters long Mask User ID Specify whether or not to hide user IDs behind asterisks when entered Alternative Name for Account ID Enter a name you want to display on the machine s touch screen and CentreWare Internet Services or to print on reports instead of the account ID This name can be up to 15 characters long Mask Account ID Specify whether or not to hide account IDs behind asterisks when entered Failed Access Log Allows you to specify the number of authentication failures within a certain period before the attempt is logged as an error Store User Details Specify whether to store user details in the machine s hard disk or nonvolatile memory Remote Login User ID Specify whether to distinguish lower case and upper case letters in user IDs for remote authentication User ID for Login Specify whether or not to make the
84. Format Displays the file format to use when saving scanned data Edit Displays a page where you can edit the Filing Options settings NOTE Some of the following options may not be available depending on other settings Document Name Enter the document name Document Format Allows you to specify the file format to use when saving scanned data The following options are available PDF Images One or More Images per File e TIFF File for Each Page mTIFF One or More Images per File XPS One or More Images per File NOTE For a description of each option refer to the Scan E mail chapter in the User Guide Report options Confirmation Sheet Displays whether generation of confirmation sheets is enabled or disabled Job Log Displays whether generation of job logs is enabled or disabled Edit Displays a page where you can edit the Report options settings Select whether or not to generate confirmation sheets and or job logs Compression Edit Capability Click this button to newly configure or edit the file compression capability settings Select whether to enable or disable the following compression formats You can enable multiple compression formats at once The default is CCITT Group 4 G4 MMR JBIG2 is available for PDF data only Compression Capability CCITT Group 4 G4 MMR e JBIG2 Arithmetic Encoded Huffman Encoded This page allows you to cr
85. If your machine is equipped with the Network Scanning Kit and the Server Fax Kit you can use the Server Fax service that sends and receives image data through a separate networked fax server with its own links to the telephone system A document scanned on the machine is converted into a TIFF file and a job log is sent along with the image data to the fax server The transferred image resides in a directory on the fax server commonly known as a fax repository The server monitors the repository for documents to be faxed and faxes any documents it finds per the routing instructions contained in the job log As stated in this chapter you will be setting up a network connection to a Xerox certified third party fax server server running fax management software which will receive store and redirect incoming documents to the server s fax boards or other destinations determined by fax server software setup NOTE Some models do not support the Server Fax service NOTE The Fax and Internet Fax services and the Server Fax service are mutually exclusive While the Fax Server service is enabled even if the Fax Kit and Internet Fax Kit are installed on the machine they are detected as not installed During that time therefore Fax Internet Fax transmission and reception are disabled and configuration reports show that the machine does not support the Fax or Internet Fax service Also note that Mailbox to Fax fax transmission using a job fl
86. Keyboard screen Enter the keyword assigned to a job flow sheet to search Select Keyword Displays the Select Keyword screen Select a preset keyword assigned to a job flow sheet to search For preset keywords refer to Create Job Flow Sheet Keyword on page 127 Create Job Flow Sheet Screen Allows you to create a new job flow sheet 7 Select Create on the Job Flow Sheets screen 2 Change the required settings Use the scroll buttons to switch between screens 3 Select Save Create Job Flow Sheet Cancel Items Current Settings 2 Description Automated Output Delete Settings 3 Keyword Keyword 1 4 Send as Fax 9 Entries Change 5 Send as Internet Fax 49 Entries Settings NOTE Select Delete Settings if you want to clear the current setting for the selected item NOTE If a recipient s name and number in the Address Book is modified after assignment to a new job flow those changes are not reflected in the job flow which can result in documents being sent to the previous destination The job flow must also be updated in order to send documents to the correct destination Name Enter a name up to 64 characters to be assigned to the job flow sheet Description Enter a comment up to 128 characters to be saved with the job flow sheet 126 Setup Keyword For use in searching for a job flow sheet on the Mailbox Link Job Flow Sheet to
87. Mailbox screen touch the box under Keyword to enter a keyword or touch Select Keyword to select a keyword from the keywords registered in Job Flow Sheet Keywords For details on Job Flow Sheet Keywords refer to Create Job Flow Sheet Keyword on page 127 Send as Fax Displays the screen for registering fax destinations or changing the settings of registered destinations You can register up to 100 destinations Send as Internet Fax Displays the screen for registering Internet Fax destinations or changing the settings of registered destinations You can register up to 100 destinations Send as E mail Displays the screen for registering e mail destinations or changing the settings of registered destinations You can register up to 100 destinations Transfer via FTP 1 Displays the screen for specifying a server to which documents are to be sent using the FTP protocols Transfer via FTP 2 Displays the screen for specifying another server to which documents are to be sent using the FTP protocols Transfer via SMB 1 Displays the screen for specifying a server to which documents are to be sent using the SMB protocols Transfer via SMB 2 Displays the screen for specifying another server to which documents are to be sent using the SMB protocols Print Specifies the number of copies to be printed out and the paper type to be used for printing Create Job Flow Sheet Keyword Registering a keyword for Job Flow Sea
88. Name oocccccccnnccnnonconnnnnnnnnnncnnnnannnnencnnnno Drum Cartridge oococononccccnnnnoccccccnonncccnnnannncninnno drum cartridge OSORNO cio dt ia rem Cerati replacing nesnenin a Duplex Module Cover D paper jams E Edge Erase eonenni ce cctastas esencia tad nectedatate 106 Edge Erase Left amp Right Edges 86 106 113 Edge Erase Top amp Bottom Edges 85 106 113 Edit E mail Recipients sceeeseeeeeeeees 119 O 431 electrical specifications cseeseeeeeeeeees 425 E mail E mail Environments ccceeeeeeeee 269 Information Checklist ooooooocnnnnicnn 268 Installation Procedure seeeeeeeees 269 Network Communication Setup 270 problem solving eeeeeeceeeeeeteeeeeeetteeeeeeeeaes 378 Lest Mall iii tdi db 272 E mail Address coooocococcccccnncccccoccnnnnonnoncnnccnnnnnnnnnnns 94 E mail Control E mail Internet Fax Service Settings e eee 118 e mail environment settings c cece 267 E mail Notification Service 0 cccceeeee 92 E mail Receive Protocol 2 cceeeeeeees 100 E mail Send Authentication cceeeeeees 96 E mail Sending When Search Failed 119 E mail Subject oo ee eeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeenteeeeeeeaaes 106 E mail Internet Fax Service Settings 118 E mail Control ooooococonnnccconccnccnncnnconcnnnncnnnonoos 1
89. Poor transfer of toner onto side 2 when manually making a double sided copy Load the side 2 paper in Tray 5 Bypass Tray 360 Common Problems Symptom Recommendation Misregistration on a double sided copy of business cards When printing a name card from Tray 5 Bypass Tray the lead edge registration may be different between side 1 and side 2 maximum 4 4 mm e Adjust the position of the image on the output copy paper Refer to Image Shift in the Copy chapter of the User Guide Output does not reflect the selections made on the touch screen Select Save after each selection on the touch screen if available The finisher does not stack output correctly e Check that the paper tray guides are locked into position against the paper Pages in the set are not stapled e Check that the paper tray guides are locked into position against the paper Paper delivered to an output tray is not properly stacked up e Flip over the paper stack in the paper tray or rotate it head to toe Paper curls e Check that the paper is loaded correctly Load paper in Trays 1 2 3 and 4 seam side up Load paper in the High Capacity Tandem Tray and bypass tray seam side down e Load custom media in the bypass tray Refer to Paper and Other Media on page 17 for procedures Cannot store a document for secure polling due to full memory e Cancel the oper
90. Prerequisites for Scan to Mailbox Setup occccccccccconcnoncnononinnno 278 Procedure for Scan to Mailbox Setup through CentreWare Internet Services ooocciocciccciccccocccccnonnnonnnon nono nononnnnnnos 279 Procedure for Scan to Mailbox Setup through the Control Panel 280 Computer Setup mec A 280 Network Scanning Slade cosido ld betas 280 Prerequisites for Network Scanning Setup 280 Procedure for Network Scanning Setup oooccccccccnnnoconcccccninccananannnos 281 Gomputer Setup aii tai 281 Scan to Home Setup ici di las 281 Prerequisites for Scan to Home Setup occccccccccccccccnccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 282 Procedures for Scan to Home Setup ooocccccccccccccnncccncconnnoncnnnnninnnos 282 11 12 13 14 Scan to PC Setup FTP ess useecestevelianaeess canteccar tases suanreniabiecteeacouactvencde 283 Prerequisites for Scan to PC Setup FTP ccceeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeees 283 Procedure for Scan to PC Setup FTP cceceeeeessseeeereneeeeeees 284 Scan to PC Setup SMB c ren aae a ae a Eas a a i 284 Prerequisites for Scan to PC Setup SMB oooccicccccccccnnccocinacinancnnns 284 Procedure for Scan to PC Setup SMB sssssssssssssseessrerrrerrrrrrrerrrens 285 Job Flow Service Setup coocoooccccccocococococonconnnonnn nono n nono nono nono nn nn nnnnnnnnnnnnnos 285 Internet RMC ida aid ia dada 287 Internet Fax OVervVieW ooooocccccccnncnncnononononnnnnnnnnnnonnncncnnonononononononenenenass
91. Reboot Machine to reflect the setting The following describes how to configure the repository settings The repository settings can only be configured using CentreWare Internet Services 8 In CentreWare Internet Services click the Properties tab 9 Expand the Services folder and then expand the Fax folder 10 Click Defaults 11 On the General screen set Job Log and Confirmation Sheet 12 Click Apply to reflect the settings 13 On the tree in the left frame click Fax Repository setup 14 On the right frame set the items under Fax Destination 295 12 Server Fax 15 Select a protocol NOTE When FTP or SMB is selected faxes will be sent to the destination specified under Fax Destination When SMTP is selected faxes will be sent to the destination specified in the E mail settings e When FTP or SMB is selected Set the server that is to be used for the Server Fax service IP Address Host Name amp Port If the port number is blank or set to 0 the default port number FTP 21 or SMB 139 will be used NOTE The IP address must be in IPv4 format Share SMB only Document path Login name Password Retype password When SMTP is selected The SMTP server settings conform to the E mail settings For details on the SMTP server settings refer to Scan to E mail Setup on page 276 On the Fax Repository Setup screen the following SMTP settings a
92. Report on page 73 Activity Report Lists activity results of incoming and outgoing fax communications For more information refer to Activity Report on page 73 Transmission Report Job Undelivered Lists undelivered documents and their transmission status For more information refer to Transmission Report Job Undelivered on page 73 Transmission Report Job Deleted Lists transmissions cancelled by the user For more information refer to 7ransmission Report Job Deleted on page 73 Mailbox Report Lists documents received into a mailbox For more information refer to Mailbox Report on page 73 Broadcast Multi Poll Report Lists the results of multi poll transmissions For more information refer to Broadcas Multi Poll Report on page 73 Relay Broadcast Report Lists the results of a relay broadcast when the broadcast ends For more information refer to Relay Broadcast Report on page 73 Scan File Transfer Report Shows the results of scan file transfers For more information refer to Scan File Transfer Report on page 73 File Transfer Report Fax Server Shows the results of Server Fax transmissions For more information refer to Fi e Transfer Report Fax Server on page 74 Job Flow Error Report Notifies a job flow error For more information refer to Job Flow Error Report on page 74 Copy Activity Report Shows the usage report of a user s completed copy service session For more information refer t
93. TCP IP Installation ccocccccccccocononcncnnconononononcocnnnnnnnnnncnonos 233 A AG ana cy oe tal aun acess awe de et vinden EE ease anaes 240 Printer Status iii ario 243 CODPTION nia do a ciales 245 EtherTalk rora a a ta 249 Information Checklist oooocccccccccccccocononcncnnnnnnnonononcncnnonaninonononos 249 EtherTalk Environments oooococcncnnnncnncnonenoncnnnnnnnnnnnononincnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 249 EtherTalk Installation ooccccccccccccnonononcncnnnnnononononincnnnnancnnnononos 250 Microsoft Networking icooiiatinis cash nck a 251 Information Checklist oooococcncncccccconononencncnnnonononononencncnnnnnnnnnnos 251 SMB EnvirOnMen nt e a a a l aa a ea a O Eaa aea ai dain 252 10 SMB Installation bus a iii 252 TCP IP LPD or Port9100 a a ae a a a paa TE E EEn 255 Information Checklist oooooooooocccccccncncncconcconncnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnononons 255 TCP IP LPD or Port9100 Environments n se 256 TCP IP LPD or Port9100 Installation oonnooncnnnnnnnnoninnccccocccccncnn 256 USB nessa ria aa 259 Information Checklist oooooooocccccccccncconcconnconncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonononoss 259 USB Port Environment oocccccccnnccnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnninoness 260 USB Port Installation oooooococcccccnnccnnccnnncnnnnnnonononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnons 260 IPP Internet Printing Protocol scoocoriosi ic dticcin tds 262 Information Checklist
94. The machine can be connected directly to the USB port of a host computer A document file can be sent from the host computer via the USB port to the machine for printing Other computers can be connected via a network to the host computer Each computer has a queue that can hold a number of files The document file is sent from the queue in the computer to the queue in the host computer and then onto the queue in the machine to be printed Target computers The following computers support printing through the USB port e Windows 2000 Windows ME Windows XP Windows Server 2003 Windows Vista e Mac OS 8 6 through 9 2 2 e MacOSX 10 X 10 1 5 or later NOTE The optional PostScript Kit is required when you print from a Macintosh USB Port Installation Follow these installation procedures for using the machine on a USB port Installation Procedure There are three stages required to install the machine on a USB port USB Port Communication Setup This requires the machine to be set up for USB port printing Computer Setup This requires the computer to be configured to print to the machine Test Print A print job should be submitted to make sure that the machine has been installed and configured correctly USB Port Communication Setup This section describes how to set up USB communication on the machine The following parameters can be set depending on your requirements These setups must be done without the USB cable connected Th
95. User ID gt Save in Charge Print Save in Private Charge Print gt Job without User ID gt Save in Charge Print 7 Select Charge Print on the TOLER Refresh Secure Print Jobs amp More oor mwr AFP NO 003 Fuji0l J oos Smith01 J sereen 005 a Joos _ Whiten gt 2 Selecta billing user ID and then Document List the Document List button NOTE Use the scroll buttons to switch between screens 3 Enter the passcode for the billing user ID and select Confirm NOTE The passcode entry screen will not appear if a passcode is not set up for the billing ID 4 Select a document to print or delete 5 Select the required option Refresh Refreshes the displayed information Go to Specifies the Charge Print number to be displayed on the screen Enter a number within the range of 001 to 200 using the scroll buttons or the numeric keypad Document List Displays the list of stored documents for the selected billing ID in the list The following options are available e Delete Deletes a document selected in the list Print Prints a document selected in the list After printing the document will be deleted 43 4 Job Status Private Charge Print The Private Charge Print feature temporarily stores documents per user ID until a user logs in and manually prints them from the machine s control panel This feature only displays documents of a log
96. Verification Specifies whether to verify the server certificate This setting is valid when PEAP MS CHAPv2 is selected in Authentication Method Other Settings This feature allows you to set the e mail receiving protocol and the output tray for e mail printing 7 Select Other Settings in the AZ Featu res menu Items Current Settings 1 E mail Receive Protocol 2 Change the required setting 2 Output Destination for E mail Center Tray 3 Select Close Settings E mail Receive Protocol Specifies the protocol for receiving e mail Select from SMTP or POP3 Output Destination for E mail Specifies the output tray for e mail printing The available options vary depending on the machine configuration Selecting Auto sets to the default output tray Print Service Settings This section describes the features that allow you to change the default settings for the printer configuration For more information refer to the following Allocate Memory page 107 Other Settings page 103 7 Select System Settings and active Faults Y Spies tng Y Toots i then select Print Service Settings in the Group menu E Allocate Memory Other Settings AEA O Fax Service Settings Security Settings 100 System Settings Allocate Memory This feature allows you to specify memory capacities required for printing and for the receive buffer for each inte
97. Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 016 748 Unable to print due to insufficient hard disk space Reduce the number of pages in print data for instance by dividing the print data or by printing one copy ata time when making multiple copies 016 749 The printer language received from a print driver is not supported on the machine Use the machine s print driver If the problem persists contact the Xerox Welcome Center Or the printer language received for the Internet Fax job is not supported on the machine Request the sender to send the document with a printer language supported by the machine 016 750 Printing banner sheets was cancelled Enter the System Administration mode on the touch screen Press the lt Machine Status gt button and select the Tools tab on the Machine Status screen From System Settings gt Print Service Settings gt Other Settings select Banner Sheet and set Start Sheet and also select Banner Sheet Tray and set Tray 1 016 751 An error occurred due to insufficient memory when the PDF Direct Print mode is set to PostScript Use the machine print driver or increase the PostScript memory 016 752 An error occurred due to insufficient memory Change the print mode to a higher speed mode If the problem persists add memory 016 753 The entered password is invalid for the PDF file Set the correct password on ContentsBridge 016 755 A print error occurred The PDF file is print protect
98. all oia A A do 154 DAYS in A da ia das 154 Consumables 20 td dida de lisis 155 A docietcedecueteanal lee tuedok sada E yesdev aes Ala ec chess 156 ACUVE JODS ui dhesdiiesieuecath needs Miashaesdingdedels 156 JOB ASO ISU oia nitusee ie tue mates 156 A sic2 scsseczenss30si0 A AEE 158 Prada 158 JOD SUDMISSION cooooccoccccnnnnnnnocononencncnnnnnnnnnnonononenenennnnnononenincnneneninons 158 ii hdd hoes Mad A ice ahi alive s 160 Job Templates eere a aaa aaa aia a i 160 MallboXe ln a 165 Job Fow Shee ui ds 169 O A ai os 173 Properties Features a aaraa aida eaea ieat aana a t aaa aetati aa ha aiaia iaa 174 SUPPOMM ie E E a EE a i a ai 224 Printer Environment SettiNgS ccccccccccccccncccncnenenennennnninennennnnens 225 Windows TGPIIP ers cessscec vee lia diia 225 Quick Network Setup DHCP ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 225 Quick Network Setup Static IP 0 eee eeseeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeees 226 NetWare irc said 228 Information Checklist oooocccccccccccoconononcncnnnnnnnonononincnnnnnnnnonononos 228 NetWare Environment ooonccncnccccccccnoncnncnnnnnononononinnnnnnnnnonononenencnnos 228 NetWare Installation cccccccccnoconcnnncnnnnconononononenonnnnnonononenincnnns 229 UNDSTOP Poca iia 232 Information Checklist oooccccccncccccconononcnnnnnnncnonononcncnnononnnnnnnonos 232 UNIX TCP IP Environment ooccccccccccccnocononcncnnnnnononononincncnnnnnnnnononos 233 UNIX
99. and click Edit 10 Fill in the settings for the user NOTE Set Feature Access as required DO NOT set a service to No Access unless you wish to deny user access to that specific service 331 14 Authentication and Account Administration 77 Click Apply NOTE You can also use the control panel on the machine to configure local machine authentication The menu path to follow there is press the lt Log In Out gt button enter the System Administration mode press the lt Machine Status gt button touch the Tools tab on the screen and finally touch Authentication Security Settings at the left side of the menu on the screen For more details refer to Authentication Security Settings on page 138 Remote Authentication Setup When Login to Remote Accounts is enabled machine users will be prompted to provide their user ID and passcode to be validated by the designated authentication server If this validation is successful the machine and any restricted services will be available for individual use Preparations 7 Ensure the machine is fully functional on the network 2 Ensure that the TCP IP with DNS WINS enabled and HTTP protocols are configured on the machine and fully functional Refer to those topics in this guide for configuring information as required This is required to access CentreWare Internet Services to configure authentication CentreWare Internet Services is accessed through the em
100. and right margins of the Edge Erase feature on the Layout Adjustment screen Set the margins within the range of 0 50 mm 0 2 0 inches using the scroll buttons Image Shift Side 1 Specifies the default position of Side 1 in the Image Shift feature on the Layout Adjustment screen Image Shift Side 2 Specifies the default position of Side 2 in the Image Shift feature on the Layout Adjustment screen Image Rotation Specifies the default for the Image Rotation feature on the Layout Adjustment screen Image Rotation Direction Specifies the default image rotation direction in the Image Rotation feature on the Layout Adjustment screen Original Orientation Specifies the default for the Original Orientation feature on the Layout Adjustment screen Copy Output Specifies the default for Collation in the Copy Output feature on the Copy screen The options available vary depending on your machine configuration Copy Output Separator Tray Specifies the default for With Separators gt Paper Supply in the Copy Output feature on the Copy screen Output Destination Specifies the default output tray NOTE When the staple punch fold function is used the output tray changes to Finisher Tray automatically Annotations Font Size Specifies the default font size of annotations Annotations Position on Side 2 Specifies the default annotation position for side 2 of copy sheet
101. ay1 Tray 3 amp 4 Envelope Tray Tray 3 amp 4 HCTT Two Tray Module pe iray Size Width Length mm mm 52 22 7 52 52 S21 Z ae azel 22 3 mm mm 5 3 85 33 2 33 3 Se 33 2 35 5 35 50 8 xnl o Sa a a al ol Zol 2a a al o Sa Sal v 2212 22 0132 2 92 fe ea 32 2 92 0 co o S5o 2 al aoaicolo 20o gt 2 gt 0 a co o 5oa gt 2ol o o o o AO a o o o AO a o o o AO a A5 SEF 148 0 210 0 O O O O A5 LEF 210 0 148 0 5 5 x 8 5 LEF 215 9 139 7 5 5 x 8 5 SEF 139 7 215 9 O B5 SEF 182 0 257 0 O O O O O B5 LEF 257 0 182 0 O O O O A4 SEF 210 0 297 0 O O O O O A4 LEF 297 0 210 0 O O O O O O O O O 8 5 x 11 SEF 215 9 279 4 O O O O O Letter 8 5x 11 LEF 279 4 215 9 O O O O O O O O O Letter 8 5 x 13 SEF 215 9 330 2 O O O O O Legal 8 5 x 14 SEF 215 9 355 6 O O O O O Legal B4 SEF 257 0 364 0 O O O O O 16K SEF 194 0 267 0 16K LEF 267 0 194 0 O O 8K SEF 267 0 388 0 O O A3 SEF 297 0 420 0 O O O O O 11 x 17 SEF 279 4 431 8 O O O O O 7 25 x 10 5 SEF 184 2 266 7 Executive 7 25 x 10 5 LEF 266 7 184 2 O O O O O Executive C4 Envelope 229 0 324 0 SEF C5 Envelope 229 0 162 0 O O O O O LEF C5 Envelope 162 0 229 0 SEF Commercial 10 241 3 104 8 O O O O O Envelope LEF DL Envelope 220 0 110 0 O O O O O LEF Monarch 190 5 98 4 O O O O O Envelope LEF Youkei 0 235 0 120 0 Envelope LEF A6 SEF 105 0 148 0 A6 LEF 148 0 105 0 Postcard SEF 100 0 148 0 Postcard LEF 148 0
102. change the right frame connection Check if you are using the specified OS and browser Use the specified OS and browser The screen display is distorted Change the window size of the browser The latest information is not displayed Click the Refresh Status button 375 15 Problem Solving Problem Confirmation Method Action Clicking the Apply button does not reflect the new settings Check if the entered value is correct Enter the correct value If the entry is not valid it will be changed within the limit automatically Clicking the Apply button will display messages like the server has returned ineffective or unrecognizable response or no data Check if the user ID and passcode are correct Enter the correct user ID and passcode Reboot the machine Cannot delete the job Wait for a while and then click the Refresh Status button Scanning Services This section explains the troubleshooting procedures and restrictions while using scan functions Troubleshooting The possible causes confirmation methods and actions are as follows When SMB transmission to Windows Server 2003 fails Cause Confirmation Method Action The machine and Windows clock settings do not match as specified by the SMB signature SMB transmission fails even with a correct user name and password
103. changes to the field Delete Select an existing field and click this button to delete the field Network 2 Sided Displays whether to scan 1 sided or 2 sided Scanning Scanning Original Type Displays the original type setting Edit Displays a page where you can edit the Network Scanning settings NOTE Some of the following options may not be available depending on other settings 2 Sided Scanning Allows you to specify whether to scan only one side or both sides of your document Select 2 Sided Rotate 2 when the images on both sides of your document are in opposite directions 1 Sided e 2 Sided e 2 Sided Rotate Side 2 Original Type Allows you to scan at optimum image quality by selecting the type of the original document Photo amp Text e Photo Text 162 Scan Feature Description Advanced Settings Lighten Darken Displays the scan density setting Background Suppression Displays whether to suppress background colors when scanning Resolution Displays the scan resolution setting Edit Displays a page where you can edit the Advance Settings settings Some of the following options may not be available depending on other settings Image Options e Lighten Darken Allows you to adjust the density in seven levels from Lighten 3 to Darken 3 Image Enhancement e Background Suppression Allows you to suppress background colo
104. clear paper jams in the bypass tray 7 Remove the jammed paper in the bypass tray Paper Jams in the Duplex Module Cover D Optional Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the Duplex Module 7 Open the bypass tray 2 Open the Duplex Module Cover D while lifting up the release lever 3 Remove the jammed paper inside the Duplex Module 4 Close the Duplex Module Cover D until it latches 5 Close the bypass tray Paper Jams in the High Capacity Feeder Optional Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in around the High Capacity Feeder Tray 6 At the Exit of Tray 6 7 Make sure that the screw is E removed from the left side of o Tray 6 NOTE The screw should have been a A removed during the installation of Tray 6 Y R Y 349 15 Problem Solving 2 Hold the handle on the top left of Tray 6 and move Tray 6 to the left of the machine 3 Remove the jammed paper 4 Gently put Tray 6 back into position Under the Top Cover of Tray 6 7 Open the top cover of Tray 6 2 Remove the jammed paper 3 Close the top cover In Tray 6 7 Pull out Tray 6 2 Remove the jammed paper 3 Close Tray 6 350 Paper Jams Paper Jams in the Integrated Office Finisher Optional Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the Integrated Off
105. communications at the machine Download the Controller Interface for Xerox from the Equitrac web site Install the Controller Interface for Xerox at the server 336 Xerox Secure Access Setup Verify that you have purchased a license for the Controller Interface for Xerox as well as a license for each device communicating with the server Register each multifunction device at the server using the device s IP address for identification Enabling the Accounting Option in Workstation Print Drivers Use the Windows Add Printer dialogs to add the machine s print driver to individual networked workstations In the print driver default setting dialogs locate and then enable the Accounting option This step assures that print jobs from individual workstations will be recognized by the authentication system rather than being unrecognized and deleted by the machine For Windows operating systems the default setting dialogs are accessed by right mouse clicking on the printer s icon in the Printers window for Windows 2000 or in the Printers and Faxes window for Windows XP Select Properties from the displayed menu and then locate and enable the Accounting option Xerox Secure Access Setup Xerox Secure Access enables customers to leverage Xerox Partner Solutions to provide user authentication with an optional card reader Users can access the features available at the machine once they have been authenticated S
106. configure the machine so that an e mail is sent notifying the completion of a print job which has been requested from your computer 267 9 E mail Environment Settings Notify Job End by E mail This is one of the E mail Notification Service features described in the previous paragraph You can configure the machine to notify the end of a print job via e mail On your print driver enable this feature and specify the addresses to notify of print job completion For information about how to make these settings refer to the print driver s Help Information Checklist Before enabling the e mail feature make sure that the following items are available or have been performed Item By An existing operational network utilizing TCP IP is required These Customer procedures are not designed to install a network Obtain and record the following information Customer IP address e Gateway address Subnet mask for IPv4 Prefix for IPv6 e Machine Host name e Machine E Mail Account SMTP Server Address or Server Name DNS Server Name if Mail Server Names are used instead of Mail Server Addresses LDAP Server Address if global search is required Set up the mail server and e mail accounts Customer Test the machine to make sure that it is fully installed and functioning Customer correctly NOTE You must have an Internet service provider if you wish to acquire an E mail account through IS
107. connect to the server Use the following methods e Check the network cables are connected e Check the target server s operating status Check that the server name in the LDAP Server Directory Service settings in Remote Server Directory Service is correct 018 782 An LDAP server protocol error occurred in the address book operation The server returned the RFC2251 specification protocol error 82 program error or SSL authentication error during the address book query Check the LDAP server status 018 783 An LDAP server protocol error occurred in the address book operation The server returned the RFC2251 specification protocol error 83 send message encoding error during the address book query Check the LDAP server status 018 784 An LDAP server protocol error occurred in the address book operation The server returned the RFC2251 specification protocol error 84 receive message decoding error during the address book query Check the LDAP server status 018 785 An LDAP server protocol error occurred in the address book operation The server returned the RFC2251 specification protocol error 85 search result timeout during the address book query Review the search conditions and search root entry then repeat the same operation Contact the network administrator if the problem persists 018 786 An LDAP server protocol error occurred in the address book operation The server returned the RFC2251 speci
108. described in the Machine Status chapter Enabling Xerox Standard Accounting from Internet Services At Your Computer 7 Open your web browser and enter the TCP IP address of the machine in the Address bar Press lt Enter gt 2 Click the Properties tab 326 Xerox Standard Accounting A In the left pane of the screen expand the Accounting folder and then select Accounting Configuration Select Xerox Standard Accounting from the Accounting Type drop down list Click Apply and enter the Administrator User name and passcode when prompted default of 11111 and x admin Click OK Click the Reboot Machine button when it displays on screen Creating a Group Account 7 2 On the Properties tab of Internet Services expand the Accounting folder and then the Xerox Standard Accounting folder Click the Group Accounts link to create a new group account In the Group Accounts Account ID box enter an ID for the new group account for example 001 The Group Account can be up to 32 numeric characters Group Account ID s must be unique Enter a name for the group account in the Account Name box for example Xerox A group name can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters Group Account names must be unique Click Apply The account will now be available in the Group Accounts list You may have to refresh your browser or click another link and then click on Group Accounts again to
109. dpi Fine 200 dpi Superfine 400dpi and Superfine 600dpi With Panel selected the resolution level selected on the control panel is used Panel Cover Page Specify whether to attach a Cover Note If you select On then select a comment for a recipient and or a sender NOTE Unless registered beforehand comments cannot be selected For information on how to register comments refer to Add Fax Comment on page 132 Off Maximum Image Size Select the maximum image size depending on recipients paper size from among A3 B4 and A4 or among 8 5 x 11 B4 and 11 x 17 depending on the country 11x 17 Delay Start Select whether to specify the transmission start time If you select On then specify the start time Off Remote Mailbox Specify whether to send as confidential fax documents If you select On then enter the recipient s mailbox number 3 digits and passcode 4 digits Off F Code Specify whether to perform F Code transmission If you select On then enter the appropriate F Code and password Off Relay Broadcast Specify whether to use the machine as an initiating relay broadcast station in order to use the registered Address Number as a relay station If you select On enter a Relay Station ID Broadcast recipients and Print at Relay Station Off NOTE For Server Fax the available information fields are
110. driver or PPD optional Customer If problems are encountered during the machine installation refer to Problem Solving on page 341 EtherTalk Environments System configuration As the machine supports EtherTalk protocol you can print from a Macintosh NOTE You will need the optional PostScript Kit to use EtherTalk for printing Target computers The machine supports a Macintosh or Power Macintosh with the following OS Mac OS 7 5 or later 8 x 9 x or Mac OS X 10 x 249 8 Printer Environment Settings EtherTalk Installation This section describes the installation procedure for using the machine in an EtherTalk environment Installation Procedure There are three stages required to install the machine on an EtherTalk network Network Communication Setup This requires the machine to be set up for EtherTalk Workstation Setup Install the print driver Adobe PS for Macintosh Test Print A test print should be submitted to make sure that the machine has been installed and configured correctly Network Communication Setup This procedure is used to set up the network communication parameters of the machine At the machine perform these steps NOTE Keep the SNMP port enabled while you use the machine on the TCP IP network NOTE Some of the configuration options for this protocol are only available from CentreWare Internet Services Refer to CentreWare Internet Services on page 147
111. e RO Co O gt k lt Job Status gt a gt D gt Ses button 1O OCO o AAA HN 2 Select the required option Active Jobs Y comino Jobe Y Secure Print Jobs amp More Waiting Jobs Job Type Owner Name Status 001 White Copy Job 00002 Printing 002 Fuji FileName1234 00003 Job in Progress 003 Smith FTP Transfer 00004 Transferring 004 Brown Fax Send 00005 Sending 005 Smith FileName234 00040 __ Held Sample _ ji 39 4 Job Status Active Jobs This screen allows you to view incomplete jobs that are waiting in progress or suspended It also allows you to view Secure Print Sample Set or Delayed Print documents that are currently stored in the machine You can see job attributes or promote delete jobs 7 Press the lt Job Status gt button Active Jobs T Jobs Y Secure Print Jobs amp More Print View by Waiting Jobs Job Type on the control panel Owner J Name Status i 001 White Copy Job 00002 Printing 2 S e e ct th e Active J O bs ta b z 002 Fuji FileName1234 00003 Job in Progress 003 Smith FTP Transfer 00004 Transferring NOTE Use the scroll bar to switch 004 Brown Fax Send 00005 Sending 3 between screens 005 Smith FileName234 00040 Held Sample v 3 Select a job to cancel or promote as required Print Waiting Jobs Prints the jobs waiting in the incomplete jobs queue View by Job Type Allows you to d
112. error dialog box on the client e Deleting jobs On Windows NT 4 0 jobs can be deleted if Service Pack 4 or later is installed Deleting a job while receiving print data generates a write error In this case the button to retry printing on the error dialog box is disabled Printing using an SMB environment On Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 Windows XP or Windows Vista printing in an SMB environment is not available when Unicode support is active On Windows XP or Windows Vista the user name may not be correctly displayed when printing on an SMB port On Windows Vista in IPv6 environment the machine is not displayed in a list of networked computers Authentication using SMB When SMB authentication is performed using the assigned IP address or host name authentication is successful if the user name and passcode matches the authentication server even if the domain name does not match 365 15 Problem Solving Netware This section explains what to do when problems occur while using Netware Troubleshooting The causes confirmation methods and actions are as follows When printing fails For setting and confirmation methods refer to the Netware online documentation Cause Confirmation Method Action A network component does not conform to the automatic setting of the frame type Check that the data link port light is on in the network component connected to the machine Then c
113. exceeds the subnet check the WINS server settings and check if the server address can be resolved correctly For Windows NT 4 0 Server Workstation use the following steps to see if the NetBIOS interface device is activated on the destination SMB server Select Start gt Settings gt Control Panel Display Services then select Messenger Select Startup gt Auto gt OK then select Close Select Devices in Control Panel then select NetBIOS Interface Select Startup gt Auto or Manual gt OK then select Close Reboot the computer OaRWDNDN 027 518 The machine failed to transfer data via SMB using the Scan to PC service because the specified password was incorrect When the server is Macintosh the specified user may not have been registered as a user who is permitted to use Windows Sharing Check the password for the shared folder When the server is Macintosh specify a user who is permitted to use Windows Sharing 027 519 During data transfer via SMB using the Scan to PC service an error occurred because the save location or file name specified for the scanned image had one of the following problems The specified save location does not exist on the server e Illegal characters are used in the save location or the file name e Because the specified save location has the Distributed File System DFS settings it is linked to other shared folders Take one
114. for specifying paper size only Paper is selected but the document size is not resized to fit the actual paper size NOTE If the print data specifies a paper tray the setting takes priority over any C option NOTE If an invalid combination is specified the machine may not operate correctly NOTE For some print languages the specification may be invalid Selecting a paper output tray The following parameter can be specified Parameter Description STACKER n stacker n Delivers prints to a finisher tray Yon bin number 1 Selecting a paper type The following parameters can be specified Parameter Description PTS pts Selects plain paper PT 1 pt1 Selects thick paper 1 POH poh Selects transparency PTP ptp Selects tracing paper PRC prc Selects recycled paper Specifying double sided printing The following parameters can be specified Parameter Description DUP dup Double sided printing as follows rxs TUMBLE tumble Double sided printing as follows 375 SIMP simp Single sided printing NOTE If multiple parameters are specified in an lpr command data may not print correctly NOTE The system default is used if no parameter is specified UNIX TCP IP NOTE If the print data specifies double sided or single sided printing those specifications take priority over any C option Specifying paper size and double sided printing S
115. from the CD ROM to view print scanned documents 278 Scan to Mailbox Setup Data to Set Up Scan to Install Mailbox Requirement comments CentreWare Internet Optional CentreWare Internet Services can be used to Services create edit mailboxes and view print scanned documents stored in mailboxes Procedure for Scan to Mailbox Setup through CentreWare Internet Services 7 From a workstation open up a web browser such as Internet Explorer and then enter the Internet address of the machine If connected properly you should see the CentreWare Internet Services web page for your machine NOTE If you use the IP address to specify the machine use one of the following formats depending on your machine configuration The IPv6 format is supported on Windows Vista only An IPv6 address needs to be enclosed in square brackets For IPv4 http xxx xxx XXxXx XXX For IPv6 http XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX NOTE If you have changed the port number from the default port number 80 append the number to the Internet address as follows In the following examples the port number is 8080 For IPv4 http xxx xxx xxx xxx 8080 For IPv6 http XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 8080 2 Create mailboxes 1 Click the Scan tab 2 Click the Mailboxes folder 3 Click the Create button for a mailbox 4 Enter the appropriate information 5 Click on Apply NOTE If a passcode is set for a
116. has been executed on the client Execute NetwareCASTON on the client This section explains the troubleshooting procedures while using a UNIX environment Troubleshooting The possible causes confirmation methods and actions are as follows When printing fails Cause Confirmation Method Action The IP address is not correct Check whether the IP address of the machine is correct Specify the correct IP address for the machine A network error occurs on the network between the client and the machine Use the PING command to check the communication status Check the error The printer entry setting is not correctly defined on the client Check the printer entry setting on the client Check the etc printcap file of the client or use the Ipstat command to troubleshoot Define the correct printer entry setting The system is in offline Check if the online lamp is off Exit the pause or the machine setting mode and then check if the online lamp comes on The print data size sent in one print command exceeds the buffer memory size in spool mode Check the upper limit of the receiving data size and then compare it with the size of print data to be sent as one job When the print data size exceeds the maximum receiving data size in one file divide the file into files smaller than the maximum and then re send the print request When the
117. identify the type of fault Once a fault or problem is identified establish the probable cause and then apply the appropriate solution e Ifa fault occurs first refer to the screen messages and animated graphics and clear the fault in the order specified Ifthe problem is not solved by following the screen messages and graphics refer to Common Problems on page 358 and apply the appropriate solution as described Also refer to the fault codes displayed on the touch screen in Machine Status mode Refer to Fault Codes on page 382 for an explanation of some of the fault codes and corresponding corrective actions In some cases it may be necessary to switch the machine off and then on Refer to Power On Off in the Product Overview chapter of the User Guide NOTE Failure to leave at least 20 seconds between a power off and a power on can result in damage to the hard disk in the machine e Ifthe problem persists or a message indicates that you should call for service refer to Network related Problems on page 362 NOTE In the event of a power failure all the queued jobs will be saved on the machine s hard disk The machine will resume processing queued jobs when the power to the machine is restored 341 15 Problem Solving Paper Jams When a sheet of paper jams inside the machine the machine stops the operation and beeps and a message is displayed on the touch screen Follow the instructions displayed to remove
118. import address information into the machine Specify the file name or click Browse to locate the CSV file and click Import Now NOTE Do not open the CSV file using software such as Microsoft Excel Once opened in the software it is automatically edited and the edited file cannot be used in the machine Map Existing Address Book Allows you to download the address information in a CSV file Click this button to download the CSV file Fax Allows you to configure fax settings Fax Settings Fax Service Select whether to use the Scan to Fax or Scan to Fax Server feature Defaults General e Job Log Displays the Job Log setting configured on the General page e Confirmation Sheet Displays whether to have a confirmation sheet printed with each fax transmission Confirmation sheets can be always printed not printed or printed only upon an error 202 Properties Feature Setting items Services Fax continued Edit Displays the General page which allows you to configure the following settings Job Log Specify whether to include user names and or the domain names on job logs Confirmation Sheet Specify whether to have a confirmation sheet printed with each fax transmission Confirmation sheets can be always printed not printed or printed only upon an error Fax Repository Setup This is displayed when Fax Service under Fax
119. inches Space Requirements W x D 1 340 x 1 185 mm 52 8 x 46 7 inches With the Office Finisher LX W x D 2 140 x 1 187 mm 84 3 x 46 7 inches NOTE For installations in a walkway add an additional 610 mm 24 0 inches Machine Weight WorkCentre with the Document Glass Cover 64 0 kg 140 8 Ib Including the interface cable the Duplex unit and the Exit 2 unit model A Copier Speed From Tray 1 1 sided WorkCentre 5222 A4 8 5 x 11 LEF 23 cpm cycles per minute 1 sided A4 8 5 x 11 LEF 23 cpm cycles per minute 2 sided A3 11 x 17 SEF 13 cpm cycles per minute 1 sided A3 11 x 17 SEF 8 cpm cycles per minute 2 sided 421 16 Appendix WorkCentre 5225 A4 8 5 x 11 LEF 25 cpm cycles per minute 1 sided A4 8 5 x 11 LEF 25 cpm cycles per minute 2 sided A3 11 x 17 SEF 14 cpm cycles per minute 1 sided A3 11 x 17 SEF 9 cpm cycles per minute 2 sided WorkCentre 5230 A4 8 5 x 11 LEF 30 cpm A4 8 5 x 11 LEF 30 cpm A3 11 x 17 SEF 16 cpm A3 11 x 17 SEF 11 cpm cycles per minute 1 sided 2 sided 1 sided 2 sided _ cycles per minute cycles per minute ii emi cycles per minute First Copy Out Time From Tray 1 A4 or 8 5 x 11 LEF 4 3 seconds or less Warm up Time Cold Start Within 26 seconds varies with machine configuration Document Glass Capacity A document within 30 mm of thickness can be copied with the document
120. is set to Rename New File make sure the file format is not Multiple Page 016 592 The machine failed to transfer data via FTP using the Scan to PC service because access to the NEXTNAME DAT file was not successful after connection to the FTP server When File Name Conflict is set to Rename New File check if the NEXTNAME DAT file is correct 016 593 The machine failed to transfer data via FTP using the Scan to PC service because an internal error occurred after connection to the FTP server Try again If the problem persists contact the Xerox Welcome Center 016 594 016 595 016 596 The machine failed to transfer data via FTP using the Scan to PC service because a network error occurred Try again If the problem persists contact the Xerox Welcome Center 016 597 The file transfer via FTP using the Scan to PC service was cancelled after connection to the FTP server because the same file or folder name existed on the FTP server Make sure that the multiple machines are not accessing the same folder on the server and then try again If the problem persists contact the Xerox Welcome Center 016 700 The job was suspended because the number of the digits for the Security Print or Charge Print passcode set on the print driver was less than the value specified in Min Passcode Length for Stored Job on the machine On the print driver set the passcode string equal to or longer than the value specified
121. its IP address 027 746 The protocol setting of the job template server is not correct Set up the correct port 027 750 Fax forwarding or printing or Internet Fax forwarding was attempted for a scanned document Fax forwarding and printing and Internet Fax forwarding cannot be performed for scanned documents 027 751 An error occurred while a job flow sheet is being processed Check the job flow sheet 027 752 The job flow sheet has a parameter that requires user input Take one of the following actions e Link the mailbox with a job flow sheet that does not require user input Set the default value for the parameter on the job flow sheet 027 753 The required port is not activated Activate the port 027 754 XPS or PDF Signature settings written in the job flow sheet are invalid Check the XPS or PDF Signature settings both on the machine settings and on the job flow sheet If the settings are not the same change either of them 027 772 An error occurred during communication with the server Use only ASCII characters for the host name in Machine s E mail Address Host Name For details refer to Machine s E mail Address Host Name on page 93 If the problem persists check if the server supports the HELO command 027 773 A timeout error occurred Wait for a while and try again 027 774 The e mail address contains unsupported characters Use only ASCII characters for the
122. limit is exceeded the job will be cancelled If the user s limit is reached before a print job is completed the machine will notify the user that the limit has been reached The job will be deleted from the print queue The job may run over due to sheets committed to the paper path NOTE The system administrator has unlimited access to the machine To Reset User Limits 7 On the Properties tab of Internet Services expand the Accounting folder and then the Xerox Standard Accounting folder Click Manage Accounting Place a checkmark in the box for the required User ID Click Limits 8 Access Check Reset boxes and click Apply A S Using XSA at the machine When you enable XSA users must enter a valid user name at the machine to access any services to which access restriction has been applied Refer to Enabling Xerox Standard Accounting from Internet ServicesJon page 326 in this section for the specific service restricting procedure At the Machine 7 Press the lt All Services gt button if necessary to display all the available service buttons 2 Press any button representing a service to which restricted access has been applied 3 When the Press the Log In Out button message displays on screen press the lt Log In Out gt button 4 Enter a User ID and touch Confirm NOTE If the user is a member of more than one Group Account he or she will be asked to select the account that
123. lists the items that can be managed for each service Print The items you can manage for print jobs using the Account Administration feature are as follows 322 Overview of Account Administration Account Manageable Jobs Information User Type g Items Required Regular Print Print driver for Yes Verified Pages sheets the machine Other print se Not verified Pages sheets drivers Secure Print Store documents Yes Print documents No Verified Pages sheets Sample Print Sample Print Yes Verified Pages sheets store print documents Sample Print No Verified Pages sheets Print stored documents Delayed Print Store documents Yes Print documents No Verified Pages sheets Charge Print Store documents No Print documents Yes Verified Pages sheets Private Charge Store documents No a Print Print documents Yes Verified Pages sheets E mail Print a2 Not verified Pages sheets 4 Account information is not required for printing as print jobs are verified when received by the machine 2 Printing available only if Non account Print is enabled in CentreWare Internet Services 3 Authentication is required depending on the Receive Control settings in the Authentication feature For more information refer to Receive Control on page 144 Fax The items you can manage for fax jobs using the Account Administration feature are as follows A
124. mailbox users are prompted for the passcode when they access the mailbox 3 From the touch screen select Scan to Mailbox 1 Select the number of the mailbox to which you want to send a scanned document 2 Load a sample document into the document feeder 3 Press the lt Start gt button on the machine 4 Verify that the scanned document is in the mailbox 1 Select the number of the mailbox to which the scanned document was sent 2 Select Document List 279 10 Scanner Environment Settings Procedure for Scan to Mailbox Setup through the Control Panel 1 3 4 5 Press the lt Machine Status gt button on the control panel Select the Tools tab On the Tools screen select Setup in the menu at the left side of the screen and then select Create Mailbox in the Group menu Select a mailbox number and then select Create Delete Enter the information required NOTE If a passcode is set for a mailbox users are prompted for the passcode when they access the mailbox 6 7 On the All Services screen select Scan to Mailbox 1 Select the number of the mailbox to which you want to send a scanned document 2 Load the sample document into the document feeder 3 Press the lt Start gt button on the machine Verify that the scanned document is in the mailbox 1 Select the number of the mailbox to which the document was sent 2 Select Document List Computer Setup T
125. obtain its network configurations so DHCP must be turned off by manually entering a static IP address Before installing record the following information for use during setup TCP IP Address Gateway Address Subnet Mask for IPv4 Prefix for IPv6 DNS Server Address Procedure for Manual Setup of the Network Using a Static IP Address 71 Power on the machine 2 Press the lt Log In Out gt button on the control panel and then type the System Administrator login ID to enter the System Administration mode NOTE The passcode may also be required depending on the machine configuration 3 Press the lt Machine Status gt button on the control panel and then select the Tools tab on the screen Select System Settings in the menu at the left side of the screen 4 5 Select Connectivity amp Network Setup in the Group menu 6 Select Protocol Settings in the Features menu 7 Under TCP IP IP Mode select IPv4 Mode IPv6 Mode or Dual Stack When IPv4 Mode or Dual Stack is selected in step 7 8 Select IP Address Resolution and then Change Settings 9 Select STATIC and then select Save 226 Windows TCP IP 70 Select IPv4 IP Address and then Change Settings 11 Use the keypad on the screen to enter an IP address for the machine in the format XXX XXX XXX XXX Select Save 72 Select IPv4 Subnet Mask and then Change Settings 73
126. of authentication failures to be allowed using the numeric keypad on the control panel Display Login Status Specifies whether to display login status of the user on the upper right corner of the login screen Select Enabled to display or Disabled to hide login status Logout Confirmation Screen Specifies whether to display a logout confirmation screen every time a user session is to be ended using the lt Log In Out gt button User ID for Login Specifies whether to make the user ID entry field case sensitive on the login screen that is displayed when a user ID is authenticated by a remote server 142 Authentication Security Settings NOTE Once this setting is changed all the registered information about users as well as the mailboxes and job flow sheets linked to the users are deleted Before the deletion a confirmation message is displayed Allow Guest User Specifies whether to allow guest users to use the machine When On is selected set Guest Passcode NOTE Allow Guest User is displayed when Login to Remote Accounts is selected in Login Type System Administrator Maximum Login Attempts This feature allows you to deny access if the System Administrator ID or a user ID that has the System Administrator privileges is mistyped a specified number of times 7 Select System Administrator A Cancel Maximum Login Attempts in the Logh vere Enter the number of attempts a person is allowed
127. of copies C parameter File name Command options The following command options are available e P printer name This option specifies the printer name registered at etc printcap If this option is omitted print data will be output to the default printer Ip e number of copies This option specifies the number of copies If one lpr command is issued to print multiple files the number of copies specified by this option will apply to all the files This option is only valid in the spool mode 241 8 Printer Environment Settings e C parameter To print from the machine using the PostScript language use the C option to specify the form of output This option is valid in the spool mode In the non spool mode the client must be a Windows NT machine to use this option NOTE Ifthe PostScript logical printer and the C option are configured simultaneously using CentreWare Internet Services some functions may not work as expected Also when specifying the PostScript logical printer as a default printer on UNIX it is recommended not to use the C option by Ipr Refer to the C option of the lpr command NOTE Some options which are not listed here e g m option and which are not processed by the workstation sending the print instructions will not be valid NOTE In the spool mode up to 32 files can be specified in one lpr command Any files specified after the 32nd file will be ignored Example To print a
128. of the following actions e Check if the save location is correct e Check if the specified file name is available on the SMB server e Check the Distributed File System DFS settings The DFS settings can be checked using the following steps 1 Select Start gt Programs gt Administrative Tools gt Distributed File System 2 Select the specified save location from the left side frame of the Distributed File System window and then check the target information displayed on the right side frame of the window 3 Specify the SMB server shared name and save location based on the information you checked in step 2 027 520 During data transfer via SMB using the Scan to PC service the file name or folder name could not be retrieved Check the access privilege to the SMB server 405 15 Problem Solving Code Description and Remedy 027 521 During data transfer via SMB using the Scan to PC service the suffix of the file name or folder name exceeded the limit on the SMB server Change the file name or destination folder on the SMB server Or move or delete the files from the destination folder 027 522 During data transfer via SMB using the Scan to PC service the scanned image file could not be created on the SMB server due to one of the following reasons e The specified file name already exists on the server The specified file name is already used The specified fi
129. on a BSD system by selecting the check box 5 Make sure that the Remote Cancel Model is set correctly 6 Make sure that the Remote Status Model is set correctly 7 Make sure that the Default Request Priority is set correctly 8 Make sure that the Allow Anyone to Cancel a Request check box is set correctly 9 Make sure that the Make This Printer the Default Destination check box is set correctly 6 Select OK Read and respond to any system messages displayed N 8 Continue with 7est Print on page 239 To make sure that the machine has been installed on the UNIX TCP IP network correctly a test print should be submitted from each client workstation Perform the following steps 7 Start the Open Windows application 2 Send atest print to the machine 3 Repeat the procedure for all workstations that will be sending jobs to the machine The UNIX TCP IP installation is now complete If the test print fails refer to Problem Solving chapter on page 341 239 8 Printer Environment Settings Printing Solaris HP UX This section describes printing from workstations running Solaris or HP UX Refer to the manuals supplied with the workstation for full details Print Ip The lp command is used for printing Command format lp d printer name n number of copies File name Command options The following command options are available e d printer name Specify the printer name register
130. operation The server returned the RFC2251 specification protocol error 34 invalid DN syntax during the address book query An invalid DN syntax was specified Check the user name and password Check the LDAP server authentication settings and other status 018 735 An LDAP server protocol error occurred in the address book operation The server returned the RFC2251 specification protocol error 35 is leaf during the address book query The object specified is a leaf node Check the LDAP server status 018 736 An LDAP server protocol error occurred in the address book operation The server returned the RFC2251 specification protocol error 36 alias dereferencing problem during the address book query The error occurred while dereferencing an alias Check the LDAP server status 018 748 An LDAP server protocol error occurred in the address book operation The server returned the RFC2251 specification protocol error 48 inappropriate authentication during the address book query Inappropriate authentication was specified Check the LDAP server authentication settings 018 749 An LDAP server protocol error occurred in the address book operation The server returned the RFC2251 specification protocol error 49 invalid credentials during the address book query Invalid credentials user name or password were specified Check the user name and password Check the LDAP server authentication settings 018 750 An LDA
131. print data size exceeds the maximum receiving data size in multiple files reduce the number of files to be printed at one time A fault occurred during print processing Check the LPD error message displayed on the control panel Switch the machine off and on 369 15 Problem Solving Cause Confirmation Method Action The specified transmission speed is different from the transmission speed of the network Check whether the transmission speed is specified correctly Specify the correct transmission speed The client and machine are in different rings connected via a bridge and the source routing is inactivated Check whether the source routing is specified correctly Activate the source routing The data format of the print job does not match the print environment of the client print data sent from the client contains TBCP Specify PSASC as the printer name The data format of the print job does not match the print environment of the client print data sent from the client is in the binary notation Set the logical printer name to PSBIN to print a binary file in the PostScript language Print paper is out Check the paper refilling message on the control panel Load the paper into the paper tray When changing the paper size specify the new size if required The selected transport protocol does not match the client
132. respective objects For information on how to use PCONSOLE or NWADMIN refer to the manual which comes with NetWare There are two ways to type the name typeful OU O etc and typeless The user must use the typeful name in order for it to work Example OU xxxx 0 yyyy C ZZZzz When using in the PSERVER mode set as follows e Printer server name Use the same device name as the target printer e Printer location Set as Auto Load Printer Type Set as Parallel e Parallel Setting Set as Auto Load For NetWare 5 only NWADMIN is available for use Computer Setup Test Print Install the PCL print driver on the NetWare client computer Refer to the HTML document on the PCL Print Driver CD ROM To make sure that the machine has been installed on the network correctly submit a test print from each client computer Perform the following steps 7 Open a document on a client computer 2 Select the machine as the printer 3 Print the document on the machine and verify that it prints correctly 4 Make sure that the print driver is installed on every computer that will be sending jobs to the machine 231 8 Printer Environment Settings 5 Repeat the test for all computers that will be sending jobs to the machine The installation process is now complete If the test print fails refer to Problem Solving chapter on page 341 UNIX TCP IP This section explains how to set up the machine to operate
133. selecting a paper tray specify either a paper size or a tray If the paper size is specified the machine automatically searches and selects the tray The following parameters can be specified Parameter Description INTRAY 1 intray1 Selects Tray 1 INTRAY 2 intray2 Selects Tray 2 INTRAY3 intray3 Selects Tray 3 INTRAY4 intray4 Selects Tray 4 INTRAY5 intray5 Selects Tray 5 manual feed INMF inmf Selects Tray 5 manual feed A3 a3 Selects the tray which has A3 297 x 420 mm 11 7 x 16 5 inches paper loaded B4 b4 Selects the tray which has B4 257 x 364 mm 10 1 x 14 3 inches paper loaded A4 a4 Selects the tray which has A4 210 x 297 mm 8 3 x 11 7 inches paper loaded B5 b5 Selects the tray which has B5 182 x 257 mm 7 2 x 10 1 inches paper loaded A5 a5 Selects the tray which has A5 148 x 210 mm 5 8 x 8 3 inches paper loaded LETTER letter Selects the tray which has letter size 216 x 279 mm 8 5 x 11 0 inches paper loaded LEGAL legal Selects the tray which has legal size 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 0 inches paper loaded INHC inhc Selects the High Capacity Tray 245 8 Printer Environment Settings NOTE If multiple parameters are specified in the first lpr command data may not be printed correctly NOTE The system default is used if no tray number is specified or a specified tray or specified size of paper is not loaded NOTE This option is
134. specify the macro file to import Font Management Allows you to configure or import a PDL font To configure a font click the Font List button and fill out the required items To import a font click the Import a Font button and specify the font file to import e Paper Supply Command Displays the numbers of the logical paper trays and physical paper trays specified via Paper Media Source Command TIFF JPEG Allows you to configure the following settings when TIFF JPEG is enabled e Logical Printer Number Enter the number of the logical printer to use e Memory Settings Select the logical printer to be used as the default when the machine is switched on e Edit Displays a page which allows you to set the print parameters for the selected logical printer Logical Printer Number Displays the logical printer number specified in the Language Emulations TIFF JPEG page Document Size Allows you to select image size or standard size Paper Supply Allows you to select the paper tray Output Size Allows you to select the paper size Bypass Tray Feed Direction Allows you to specify the paper feed direction when using the bypass tray Output Destination Allows you to select the destination for your output Print Quantity Setup Allows you to select the Print Quantity Setup that has priority over other settings 198 Properties Feature Setting items S
135. the Remote Authentication Servers folder Click Kerberos Server Under Kerberos Server 1 Default enter the IP address and port of the primary server the server running the key distribution center service Enter the IP address and port of the secondary server if necessary Enter the domain in the Domain Name box For example example com Enter details for up to four alternate servers and backups if required Click Apply Configuring Remote Authentication for SMB At Your Workstation 1 Click the Properties tab 333 14 Authentication and Account Administration Expand the Security folder and then the Remote Authentication Servers folder Click SMB Server From the SMB Server Setup drop down menu select your desired method A S Enter the domain name up to 64 characters in the Domain Name box This setting is mandatory D Enter the IP Address of the domain controller in the Server Name IP Address box if By Domain Name and Server Address IP Address was selected for SMB Server Setup 7 Repeat steps 7 and 8 for the configuration of up to four additional backup domain controllers if applicable 8 Click Apply Configuring Remote Authentication for LDAP Refer to your LDAP server documentation for the full range of information that can be entered into this LDAP dialog to fully support both e mail applications and authentication using your LDAP server The p
136. the LPD print sequence If Job Submission Order is selected Receiving Buffer LPD under Allocate Memory is automatically set to Spool to Hard Disk 104 System Settings Scan Service Settings This section describes the features that allow you to configure or change machine settings specific to the scan features For more information refer to the following NOTE When the Server Fax service is enabled Scan Service Settings is displayed as Scan Fax Service Settings Scan Defaults page 105 Scan to PC Defaults page 106 Original Size Defaults page 107 Output Size Defaults page 107 Reduce Enlarge Presets page 108 Other Settings page 108 1 Select System Settings and Machine Y Faults Y Supplies Y Billing Y Tools i Information Information then select Scan Service t Grap Features Setti ng s in the Grou p menu gy Pint Service Settings Scan Defaults Scan to PC Defaults e Settings A Original Size Defaults Authentication Security Settings Scan Defaults This feature allows you to configure or change various default settings for the scan features 1 Select Scan Defaults in the ae Featu res menu Items Current Settings 1 Original Type Black amp White Text A 2 Change the required settings 2 File Format TIFF File for Each Use the scroll buttons to switch between screens Tie Neral y
137. the correct user ID and password and try again 018 509 A parameter in the template is invalid Check the parameters specified in the template 018 524 A network error occurred The probable cause are as follows 1 The DNS server is not registered on the machine but the server is specified in the job template with the domain name 2 The protocol SMB FTP etc specified in the job template is not enabled on the machine 018 525 The partition for job templates is full in the HDD or the HDD is defective Wait for a while and try again Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 018 526 A scanning error occurred The machine is now polling job templates Wait for a while and try again 018 527 An internal error occurred Wait for a while and try again Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 018 528 A scanning error occurred Check if the Custom Services settings are correct 018 529 During the Custom Services scanning process another Custom Services scan job was requested Wait for a while and try again 395 15 Problem Solving Code Description and Remedy 018 530 A Custom Services authentication error occurred Check the authentication settings 018 531 The scan job could not be executed Try again Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 018 532 There are too many scan jobs in p
138. the file from the web browser Take one of the following actions and then try retrieving again Refresh the browser page e Restart the browser e Switch the machine off and then back on 016 789 The mail processing was interrupted due to insufficient hard disk space Lower the image resolution or reduction enlargement ratio or divide the document into smaller segments to send 016 791 Access to the destination for the Scan to PC service or to the Network Scanning server application failed Check if you are authorized to access the specified destination or server 016 792 A job history report was to be printed but the specified job history could not be retrieved The specified job history is not available 016 793 The hard disk has run out of space Delete unnecessary data or initialize the hard disk if the saved data is not needed 016 794 The media was incorrectly inserted Insert the media correctly 016 795 A read error occurred on the media Check the contents stored on the media 016 796 using a computer 016 797 016 798 The print job could not be processed The hard disk drive or memory may not be installed properly on the machine or may be damaged Contact the Xerox Welcome Center 016 799 The print data contains invalid parameters Check the print data and print options and try printing again 016 981 A HDD access error occurred The HDD is full Divide pages to reduce the size of a job or lower the resolution Or delete
139. the same privileges as the System Administrator for machine operations except Operating mailboxes and job flow sheets Changing the passcode of the System Administrator Authenticated Users with Account Administrator Privileges These are users who are registered on the machine and assigned Account Administrator privileges When a restricted service is used this type of user must enter a user ID on the authentication screen This type of user has the same privileges as the System Administrator for account management They are permitted to register delete edit view account information Authenticated Users with No System Administrator or Account Administrator Privileges These are users who are registered on the machine and assigned no System Administrator or Account Administrator privileges When a restricted service is used this type of user must enter a user ID on the authentication screen Unauthenticated Users These are users who are not registered on the machine An Unauthenticated User cannot use services that are restricted General Users These are users other than the System Administrator in non authentication mode Types of Authentication The following three types of authentication are used by the machine depending on where user information is stored Local Machine Authentication Local Machine Authentication uses the user information registered for the Accounting feature to manage authentication
140. the specified resolution due to insufficient memory Specify less than 400 dpi for the resolution setting 003 760 Incompatible scan options are selected Check the selected options 003 761 The paper size in the tray selected by auto tray switching differs from the paper size in the tray selected at the tray selection Either change the paper size for the tray or change the paper type priority setting 003 764 The machine cannot perform Form Overlay since the scanned document contains one page only Make sure that the document contains at least two pages a page with a form image which must be the first page of the document and a page that the form image will overlay 003 780 Compression of scanned data was unsuccessful Lower the resolution or reduction enlargement ratio to reduce the data size or divide the document in smaller segments 003 795 The reduction enlargement ratio exceeds the setting range when the scanned document is enlarged reduced to the specified paper size Directly enter the reduction enlargement ratio or change the paper size 003 98 1 Stapling mixed size documents is available only for documents with the same width Cancel the staple feature or set the documents with the same width 382 Fault Codes Code Description and Remedy 005 210 005 274 005 275 005 280 005 283 005 284 005 285 005 286 An error occurred with the document feeder Contact the Xerox Welcome Center
141. the type of filtering Select from Allow Domains and Block Domains to enable filtering Domain 1 to 50 Specifies the domain names to be restricted or permitted according to the selection on the Domain Filtering screen Remote Authentication Server Settings This feature allows you to set up the external authentication server and directory service settings The options available may vary depending on your machine configuration 1 S e e ct Re m ote A u t h en ti cat i on Remote Authentication Server Settings Close S erver S etti ng s In th e B Sa D ae 2 3 Features menu m SMB Server Settings Change the required settings Select Close Authentication System Setup e Authentication System Specifies the remote authentication service Select from Kerberos Windows 2000 Kerberos Solaris LDAP SMB and Authentication Agent 96 System Settings e Server Response Time Out Specifies the time out value for a response from the server e Search Time Out Specifies the time out value for user search on the server Kerberos Server Settings Specifies the Kerberos servers The following parameters are available for each Kerberos server Use the scroll buttons to switch between screens e Kerberos Server 1 to 5 Primary Server Name IP Address Specifies the domain name or IP address of the primary server Primary Server Port Number Specifies the pri
142. time but the destination machine did not answer Check the telephone line connection to the destination machine 035 750 Transmission was cancelled because the machine was switched off or the lt RESET gt button was pressed while the machine was dialing or sending data Switch the machine on again and resend the document Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 035 751 Transmission was cancelled because the lt Stop gt button was pressed while the 035 752 machine was dialing or sending data No user action is required 035 762 Refer to 034 508 415 15 Problem Solving Code Description and Remedy 036 500 A fax error occurred Check the fax settings and the fax number and then try to again Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 036 542 036 700 to 036 777 036 778 Communication was interrupted on the destination machine Ask the sender to 036 779 try again 036 780 A fax error occurred Check the fax settings and the fax number and then try 036 781 again Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 036 782 036 783 036 784 036 785 036 786 Refer to 034 507 036 787 036 788 The polling feature was to be used but the target machine did not store the 036 789 documents to be polled Check the target machine and try again 036 790 Communication failed due to an invalid request Check the proced
143. to enter the sarne System Administrator s Login ID after Featu re s menu Feit 5 which access to the system will be disabled 2 Select the required option If you si E select Limit Attempts enter a i y value into the Login Attempts box using the arrow buttons 3 Select Save Passcode Policy This feature allows you to configure passcode policy settings 7 Select Passcode Policy in the rasscode Poly Features menu es va a Settings 2 Select the required option and configure the settings 3 Select Close Settings Passcode Entry from Control Panel Specifies whether to prompt users to enter their passcode when they log in to the control panel Regardless of this setting passcode entry is always required for Remote Authentication Minimum Passcode Length Specifies whether to set the minimum number of digits allowed for a passcode If you select Set enter a value in the range of 4 to 12 Charge Private Print Settings This feature allows you to specify how to treat the print jobs that are received when the machine is in the Authentication mode 7 Select Charge Private Print IE TU TT Settings in the Features menu tems Current Settings According to Print Auditron 2 Change the required setting 3 Select Close Setting 143 6 Setups Receive Control Specifies the receive control for externally submitted
144. to verify the validity of server certificates sent from the SSL TLS server during SSL TLS communication S MIME Settings Message Digest Algorithm Select a message digest algorithm from SHA1 and MD5 Message Encryption Method Select the encryption method to use when encrypting e mail messages sent from the machine Certificate Auto Store Select the check box to automatically save S MIME certificates when they are attached to e mails sent from the addresses registered in the Address Book Receive Untrusted E mail Select the check box if do not want to receive untrusted e mails such as those without a certificate Digital Signature Outgoing E mail Select whether to always add a digital signature to outgoing e mails Receive Untrusted Internet Fax Select the check box if you do not want to receive untrusted Internet faxes such as those without a certificate Digital Signature Outgoing Internet Fax Select whether to always add a digital signature to outgoing Internet faxes 222 Properties Feature Setting items Security PDF XPS PDF Signature Security Select whether to add a digital signature to PDF files Settings The machine must have a digital certificate to use this feature XPS Signature Select whether to add a digital signature to XPS files The machine must have a device certificate to use this feature Watermark Watermark Date Format Select the date form
145. unnecessary Secure Print Delayed Print pending fax or mailbox documents to increase the HDD free space 016 982 The hard disk has run out of space Delete unnecessary data from the hard disk or documents in mailboxes 016 985 The e mail size exceeded the maximum size Try one of the following procedures and resend the e mail e Reduce the number of document pages e Lower the scan resolution using Resolution e Reduce the document size using Reduce Enlarge Increase the maximum value using Maximum E mail Size on the Tools screen 018 400 An IPSec setting error occurred The preshared key or device certificate which is required for the selected authentication method is not specified Specify the preshared key or device certificate according to the authentication method 018 500 The job cannot be printed with the specified print parameter combination i e file size paper size paper tray 2 sided print request output tray etc Set the appropriate combination of print parameters and try again 394 Fault Codes Code Description and Remedy 018 501 The machine did not have a server certificate secret key when it was powered on and thus could not enable the SSL server required for Xerox Secure Access authentication Generate a server certificate or disable the Xerox Secure Access feature 018 502 018 503 Your computer is not permitted to log in to the SMB server Check the prope
146. use the service after authenticated Computer Setup For more information about programming templates using CentreWare Internet Services refer to CentreWare Internet Services on page 147 Scan to Home Setup The Scan to Home feature is supported through the Network Scanning service Essentially it is a template file xst stored locally on the machine but in a different directory than the Network Scanning templates or mailbox folders 281 10 Scanner Environment Settings Users access the Scan to Home template by selecting the Network Scanning button on the All Services screen on the control panel The machine queries LDAP to acquire the authenticated user s home directory or uses the network home path predefined on the machine Prerequisites for Scan to Home Setup 1 A Ensure the machine is fully functioning on the network prior to installation Install the Network Scanning kit Ensure that the TCP IP and HTTP protocols are configured on the machine and fully functional This is required to access CentreWare Internet Services to configure Network Scanning Ensure that the SMB port is enabled and the protocol is configured correctly If required configure the LDAP protocol for the system or an authenticated user to log in to the LDAP server LDAP is configured through CentreWare Internet Services using the following path open your web browser enter the IP address of the machine click Properties
147. used to control access to certain areas of the machine For example the LDAP server may contain a group of users called Admin You can configure the Admin group on the machine so that the members of that group will have administrator access to the machine When a user logs in to the machine with their network authentication account the machine performs an LDAP lookup to determine if the user is a member of any groups If the LDAP server confirms that the user is a member of the Admin group the user will have administrator access In the System Administrator Access Group box enter the name of the group defined at the LDAP server that you want to provide with System Administrator access to the machine Repeat the process for other LDAP group access boxes Custom Filters For E mail Address Filter in the box provided type in the LDAP search string filter that you wish to apply The filter defines a series of conditions that the LDAP search must fulfill in order to return the information you seek The form of the typed search string filter is LDAP objects placed inside parenthesis For example to find all users that have an E Mail attribute mail enabled type objectClass user mail If you are not familiar with LDAP search strings use a web browser search to find examples Network Authentication Setup Network authentication uses the user information managed on a remote Accounting server to manage authentication acces
148. version you are currently running as follows 7 Open your web browser and enter http and the TCP IP address of the machine in the Address or Location field Click Enter Click the Properties tab Click the General Setup folder Click Configuration A S Scroll down to Software to see your system software version Write down the version number Note whether the Controller ROM is listed as Controller ROM or Controller PS ROM This will determine which file to download from Xerox com 430 Xerox Extensible Interface Platform XEIP 6 Download the software file a Obtain the new software upgrade file Controller ROM or Controller PS ROM for your machine from the www xerox com web site or from your Xerox Customer Support Representative b Download the upgrade file to a local or network drive You will be able to delete the file after the upgrade procedure c Extract the bin file from the zip archive At Your Workstation 7 Verify that the machine is switched on and running and is not in Energy Saver mode N Open your web browser and enter the TCP IP address of the machine in the Address or Location field and then press Enter Click the Properties tab Click the Services folder Click the Machine Software folder In the Machine Software folder SAA a Click Upgrades Place a check mark in the Enabled check box and then click Apply b Click Manual Upg
149. whether to restrict the size of scanned data to be sent as e mail attachments Select On to enter the maximum size of data in the range from 50 to 65535 KB using the scroll buttons or the numeric keypad Maximum Address Entries Specifies the maximum total number of To Cc and Bcc recipients of a single e mail Enter the number in the range from 1 to 100 using the scroll buttons or the numeric keypad Incoming E mail Print Options Specifies whether to print the header and body the subject and body or attached files of a received e mail This is effective in saving paper and printing the attached files Print Error Notification E mail Specifies whether to print error notification mails automatically when e mails are not delivered due to an error Response to Read Receipts Specifies whether to send the processing result to the host machine when an e mail requesting acknowledgement is received 118 System Settings Read Receipts Specifies whether to request destinations to send back acknowledgement when opening e mail Print Delivery Confirmation E mail Specifies whether to automatically print out transmission confirmation e mails Max number of pages per Split Send Specifies whether to split scanned data into multiple files by the selected number of pages Select On to enter the number of pages in the range of 1 to 999 using the scroll buttons or the numeric keypad NOTE Scanned data can be split into multi
150. will not be checked A logon record will be kept by the machine however 9 If the Guest User box is available and configurable consider whether it is advisable in your network environment to allow simple password guest access to this restricted service machine The default setting is Off 70 If you wish to allow guest access enter your guest passcode twice in the boxes provided 77 Click Apply 72 Refresh your web browser and then click User Details Setup to configure the Store User Details setting Note that you can set either NVM or the hard disk as the destination for saved authentication information User Details Setup also allows you to configure the characteristics of the login prompt for user authentication Configuring Communications Between the Accounting Server and the Machine Refer to the remote Accounting server manufacturer s documentation for the specific procedures to follow to configure communications between the server and the machine The server will contact the machine based upon Accounting service parameters set up at the server such as the machine s IP address and polling frequency Required network communications and server settings will be stated by the server s manufacturer The following is a sample list of setup requirements for Equitrac s Accounting service Enable TCP IP and HTTP on the machine Setup a static or reserved DHCP IP address for the machine Enable TCP IP port 80
151. 0 270 SEF O O O Oo LEF O O O O O 8K China 270 0 390 0 SEF 0 oO O O O Postcard 100 0 148 0 LEF O O O Prepaid 200 0 148 0 SEF Oo O O Postcard 4x6 101 6 152 4 LEF 0 Oo O European 3 120 0 235 0 LEF O O O Chouyoukei 3 Envelope Commercial 104 8 241 3 LEF 0 0 0 10 Envelope Monarch 98 4 190 5 LEF Oo O O Envelope DL Envelope 110 0 220 0 LEF O O Oo C4 Envelope 229 0 324 0 SEF O 0 O C5 Envelope 162 0 229 0 LEF Oo 0 O O Available blank Not available 25 2 Paper and Other Media Paper Trays Non standard Sizes Tray 1 2 I Tray 3 4 Tray 6 Lar Tray 3 4 High Capacity y m e High Capacity Envelope Tray ae Two Tray Tandem Tray YP y Feeder Modules Width 139 7 297 0 mm 88 9 297 0 mm 148 7 241 0 mm 5 5 11 8 3 6 11 8 5 9 9 6 Not Available Not Available Length 182 0 431 8 mm 98 4 431 8 mm 98 4 162 0 mm 7 2 17 2 3 9 17 2 3 9 6 4 Output Trays Duplex Module Non standard Sizes Paper Integrated Office Finisher Size Center Tray Left Side Tray Office Finisher LX Duplex Module Width 88 9 297 0 mm 88 9 297 0 mm 88 9 297 0 mm 210 0 297 0 mm 139 7 297 0 mm 3 6 11 9 3 6 11 9 3 6 11 9 8 4 11 9 3 5 11 9 Length 98 4 431 8 mm 98 4 432 0 mm 98 4 431 8mm 182 0 431 8 mm 182 0 431 8 mm 3 9 17 2 3 9 17 3 3 9 17 2 7 3 17 2 5 1 17 2
152. 035 726 A communication error occurred Fax transmission Check the fax number Check if the specified features are supported on the destination machine Fax reception Ask the sender to try again 035 727 A communication error occurred Ask the sender to try again 035 728 035 729 035 730 A communication error occurred 035 731 Fax transmission Check the fax number Check if the specified features are 035 732 supported on the destination machine 035 733 Fax reception Ask the sender to try again 035 734 035 735 035 736 035 737 035 738 035 739 035 740 035 741 035 742 035 743 Communication failed The fax number is not correct or the specified features 035 744 are not supported on the destination machine Enter the correct fax number and 035 745 check the features supported on the destination machine 035 746 The fax network did not respond Check the following and send the document again e Is the telephone line correctly connected to the machine The other party may not be connected to the fax network or there may be some problem with the network When you are connected to a fax network that requires an access code enter two pauses after the access code and then dial the fax number 035 747 Transmission was stopped because the lt Stop gt button was pressed while the 035 748 machine was dialing or sending data No user action is required 035 749 The machine dialed the fax number the specified number of
153. 18 emulation PCL parameters 0 cceeeeeeeeeeecteeeeeeeees 427 PDF parameters cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 430 printing parameters cceeeeeeee 427 CNICHYPLION aei EE TAE AAR 297 Encryption Key for Confidential Data 83 Error History Report seese 53 58 Ethernet Rated Speed eseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeees 92 Ethereal mernin aae aa 91 249 Computer Setup cocoocccccccccccccconinnoncnncnnnnnnn 250 EtherTalk Environments 0 cceee 249 Information Checklist oooooocccinninnnn 249 Installation Procedure ceseeeeeees 250 Network Communication Setup 250 problem solving eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteentteeeeeeeaes 373 TestPridta ii iia 251 Extended Tray Module aseene 77 F fault clearance procedure coococcccoccccccccccnccncnnnnns 341 fault codeS rner n neds 382 Fault Tone side sad 68 Faults Machine Status cceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 58 Fax Control Fax Service Settings 111 Fax Defaults Fax Service Settings 109 Fax Received Options Fax Service Settings 114 Fax Receiving Mode 58 112 Fax REPOS 200 tdi da 55 Address Book oooococcocococcccccoccccccncccncnnannnnnnnnns 55 Billing Data List ooooonnnnicccnnnnnicinnnnacccncnnnnnnon 55 Configuration Report eseese 55 Domain Filter List c ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 55 Fax Comments List c ceceeeeet
154. 2 C OPON iicet RO 245 HP WX iia we ee eaten 238 Information Checklist c ceeeeeeeee 232 Installation Procedure seeeeeeees 233 Network Communication Setup 233 Printer Status 0 ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 243 A E 240 problem solving coconoocccccnnociccccnncancccnannns 369 Solaris 20 at dida 236 SUNOS A ai nee aed 237 TestiPrMtic taa ai is 239 UNIX TCP IP Environments 05 233 Workstation Setup ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 235 TCP IP Windows ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeentaees 225 Quick Network Setup DHCP 225 Quick Network Setup Static IP 226 TEF O Mad sortida ida 108 VAMO AA A ieee eee 66 TIMO ZOMG it id 66 Toner Cartridge eeccceceeeeecceceeeeecceneeeseecaneneesenes 33 toner cartridge inserting aoracscriianii eenieee 34 raplacing soia aa e aa 33 TOONS tab iit aia 65 Touch Screen maintaining cleaning eee 29 Transfer Protocol cecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 106 Transmission Header Fax Transfer 117 Transmission Header Text ccceeeeeeeeeeees 110 Transmission Header Text Polling 111 Transmission Interval cccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 112 Transmission Report Job Deleted 57 73 Transmission Report Job Undelivered 57 73 Transmission Screen ececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee
155. 21 8 5 x 14 22 8 5 x 13 23 8 5 x 11 Default 24 11 x 17 30 8K Sets the default paper size when the machine is set to select the paper size automatically Only available when Paper Tray is set to Auto The default value will be either 4 or 23 depending on the region Bypass Size 203 3 A3 4 A4 Default 5 A5 14 B4 15 B5 21 8 5 x 14 22 8 5 x 13 23 8 5 x 11 Default 24 11 x 17 25 Custom Sets the paper size for the bypass tray Only available when Paper Tray is set to Tray 5 Bypass The default value will be either 4 or 23 depending on the region Orientation 205 0 Portrait Default 1 Landscape Sets the document orientation 427 16 Appendix Parameter tem Value No 2 Sided Print 206 0 Off Default 1 On Sets whether to enable double sided printing Default Font 207 0 CG Times 41 Times New Bold 1 CG Times Italic 42 Times New Bold Italic 2 CG Times Bold 43 Symbol 3 CG Times Bold Italic 44 Wingdings 4 Univers Medium 45 Line Printer 5 Univers Medium Italic 46 Times Roman 6 Univers Bold 47 Times Italic 7 Univers Bold Italic 48 Times Bold 8 Univers Medium Condensed 49 Times Bold Italic 9 Univers Medium Condensed 50 Helvetica Italic 51 Helvetica Oblique 10 Univers Bold Condensed 52 Helvetica Bold 11 Univers Bold Condensed Italic 53 Helvetica Bold Oblique 12 Antique Olive 54 Courie
156. 23 The destination machine is too busy to accept your fax Wait a while and then try again 034 527 A dial control error occurred Switch off the machine and then switch it on again Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 034 528 Manual fax transmission is not available while the machine is in dialing mode Wait a while and then try again 034 529 The received document cannot be printed using the paper loaded on the machine Try one of the following Check that the proper size paper is loaded on the machine e Check that the trays are correctly installed and detected on the machine 034 530 Operation timed out Perform the operation within the specified time frame 034 550 An error occurred during writing to the FaxCard ROM Contact the Xerox Welcome Center 034 700 The G3 DP Dial Pulse connection timed out Switch off the machine and then switch it on again Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 034 701 The software needs to be reset Switch off the machine and then switch it on again Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 034 702 Communication failed due to an incorrect fax number Check the number and try again If a speed dial button was used check the correct number is registered with the button 034 728 An invalid number was specified Check the destination number and try again Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 034 730 Refer to 034 508 034
157. 41 0 mm 5 9 to 9 6 For length 98 4 to 162 0 mm 3 9 to 6 4 Paper Weight 60 105 g m 423 16 Appendix Envelope Tray Supported Envelope Types Commercial 10 Envelope LEF Monarch Envelope LEF DL Envelope LEF C5 Envelope LEF Stackability Height 43 mm or less Auto Size Sensing No Paper Output Center Tray Capacity Without Finisher 500 sheets of 80 g m 20 Ib bond paper With the Office Finisher LX 250 sheets of 80 g m 20 Ib bond paper Paper Sizes A6 LEF A5 SEF A5 LEF A4 SEF A4 LEF A3 SEF B6 SEF B5 SEF B5 LEF B4 SEF 5 5 x 8 5 SEF 5 5 x 8 5 LEF 7 25 x 10 5 SEF 7 25 x 10 5 LEF 8 5 x 11 SEF 8 5 x 11 LEF 8 5 x 13 SEF 8 5 x 14 SEF 11 x 17 SEF 16K Taiwan SEF 16K Taiwan LEF 8K Taiwan SEF 16K China SEF 16K China LEF 8K China SEF Postcard LEF European 3 Chouyoukei 3 Envelope LEF Commercial 10 Envelope LEF Monarch Envelope LEF DL Envelope LEF C4 Envelope SEF C5 Envelope LEF Left Side Tray Capacity 100 sheets of 80 g m 20 Ib bond paper Paper Sizes A6 LEF A5 SEF A5 LEF A4 SEF A4 LEF A3 SEF B6 SEF B5 SEF B5 LEF B4 SEF 5 5 x 8 5 SEF 5 5 x 8 5 LEF 7 25 x 10 5 SEF 7 25 x 10 5 LEF 8 5 x 11 SEF 8 5 x 11 LEF 8 5 x 13 SEF 8 5 x 14 SEF 11 x 17 SEF 16K Taiwan SEF 16K Taiwan LEF 8K Taiwan SEF 16K China SEF 16K China LEF 8K China SEF Postcard LEF European 3 Chouyoukei 3 Envelo
158. 5 sets or 750 sheets 2 staples Finisher Tray with Booklet Maker For paper of more than 216 0 mm in length When not stapled 1000 sheets When stapled 75 sets 1 staple 2 staples 50 sets center staple or 750 sheets For paper of 216 0 or less in length When not stapled 2000 sheets When stapled 100 sets or 1000 sheets 1 staple 75 sets or 750 sheets 2 staples Paper Sizes A4 SEF A4 LEF A3 SEF B5 LEF B4 SEF 7 25 x 10 5 LEF 8 5 x 11 SEF 8 5 x 11 LEF 8 5 x 13 SEF 8 5 x 14 SEF 11 x 17 SEF 16K Taiwan LEF 8K Taiwan SEF 16K China LEF 8K China SEF Staples 5 000 or more per cartridge Booklet Staples 2 000 or more per cartridge Staples up to 50 sheets of 90 g m or lighter paper Punched holes 2 amp 3 holes 2 amp 4 holes or 4 holes Electrical Specifications Frequency 50 60 Hz 3 Hz Electrical Voltage 110 127 VAC amp 220 240 VAC Power Consumption Maximum average 1 3 KVA 0110 V AC 1 524 KVA 127 VAC 1 76 KVA 220 VAC 1 92 KVA 240 VAC 425 16 Appendix Specifications for the Fax Service Fax Transmission Speed Automatic fallback 33 6 Kbps Page Transmission Time ITU No 1 document 33 6 Kbps standard less than 4 seconds reference data Telephone Line Type Standard public analogue switched telephone line or equivalent Compatibility Super G3 ECM G3 Resolution Capability Standard 200 x 100 dpi 8 x 3 85 lines mm F
159. 51 10 Paper Jams in the Office Finisher LX Optional ceeeeee 351 DOCUMENESAMS teca a cd neto da cando 353 Stapler Faults toi ii laa 354 Staple Jams in the Integrated Office Finisher Optional 355 Staple Jams in the Office Finisher LX Optional oooocccicicinc 356 COMMON Problems iconos ca decete toads a a aaa 358 Network related Problems cccccccoccnnoconcnnnnncnoconononcncnnnnnonononenincnnonenon 362 Problem Solving Procedure ccccceceeceeeeseeeeceeeeeessseeeaeeeeeteeees 362 SOB ears eens ao cane ne ok cece 362 NC ON 366 UNID orei an ae dd racer lid 369 IC Pirro dedos dera loreto Larrain destete 371 Eth rtalk sarani AAA ee ieee ed 373 BOU uta dd ta 374 CentreWare Internet Services ooonccccnncccnccononnncnnononnncnnoneninconenonon 375 Scanning DEMOS ral salda 376 E Malll SEMVICESs ces sisccta sida 378 Internet Intranet CONNECTION occccncccccccconononcncnnnnnnnonononcncnnnnnnnnnnnnonos 379 IPV6 AddressEsS ia Aina 381 Raul Codes a SA ee E E Gio ae ME ee ake 382 Screen Messages occcoccconccnccnnncnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnneniness 419 Xerox Welcome Center iniedi iiaii aieiaiei aribadah nadak 420 16 Appa ana taea aa aea aeaa daada a aadi aana raadin iai saa aaia 421 Specifications sppe iien eP eae E Ee aE a e Epe ap EEan aeania 421 Machine Specifications ccccccccccccecececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 421 PAPO Suppl A
160. 583 A hard disk error occurred on the Netware server Check the status of the HDD on the Netware server Also check if your computer is connected to the Netware server If the problem persists run DSREPAIR at the server console on the Netware server 397 15 Problem Solving Code Description and Remedy 018 584 Communication with the Netware server was interrupted Check if your computer is connected to the Netware server If the problem persists run DSREPAIR at the server console on the Netware server 018 585 Connection to the Netware server failed Check if your computer is connected to the Netware server and if the specified folder or file is in use by another user If the problem persists run DSREPAIR at the server console on the Netware server 018 586 Login to the Netware server was denied Check if your PC is connected to the Netware server Also check the login name login password volume name server name tree name and context name are correct If the problem persists run DSREPAIR at the server console on the Netware server 018 587 The same file name exists Change the setting of the File Name Conflict feature to any option other than Do Not Save 018 588 An error occurred during communication with the server When the File Name Conflict feature is set to an option other than Do Not Save the multi page TIFF format is not available 018 589 An error occu
161. 6 address of the machine is duplicated on the network Change the link local address of the machine or the address of the other device 027 452 The specified IP address already exists Change the IP address 027 500 Unable to resolve the name of the SMTP server when reply e mail was transmitted Check using CentreWare Internet Services to see if the SMTP server is set correctly 027 501 Unable to resolve the name of the POP3 server when using the POP3 protocol Check using CentreWare Internet Services to see if the POP3 server is set correctly 027 502 Unable to log in to the POP3 server when using the POP3 protocol Check using CentreWare Internet Services to see if the user name and password used for the POP3 server are set correctly 027 503 An error occurred in the POP server Try again Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 027 504 An error occurred in the SMTP server Try again Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 027 513 The machine failed to transfer data via SMB using the Scan to PC service because access to the SMB server was not permitted When the server is Macintosh a folder with the same name as the specified file may exist on the server Change the settings so that a file or a folder can be read and written at the save location When the server is Macintosh change the folder name on the server or the file name to be transferred
162. 64 characters can be used for a printer name NOTE Output parameters in the print data take priority over the printer name Follow the steps below to set up a Solaris workstation to communicate with the machine 7 Log in as root at a client workstation 2 Use the Solaris ADMINTOOL to add the machine to the system host files NOTE Refer to the Solaris documentation for instructions on using the ADMINTOOL 1 Select Browse 2 Select Printers 3 Select Edit 4 Select Add 5 Select Local Printer 6 Enter the Host Name in the Printer Name field and then select OK 7 Select File 8 Select Exit 3 Verify connectivity to the machine by using a UNIX command such as ping as shown in the following example ping PrinterName PrinterName is alive NOTE The remote queue name must be set to Ip to spool jobs to the machine 236 UNIX TCP IP SunOS Follow the steps below to set up a SunOS workstation to communicate with the machine 7 Log in at a client workstation as root and add the machine to the etc hosts file For example IP address tab PrinterName NOTE If an NIS server is running on the same segment of the network as the machine log in at the NIS server as root and add the machine to the master hosts file For example IP address tab PrinterName 2 Verify connectivity to the machine by using a UNIX command such as ping as shown in the following example ping PrinterName P
163. 72 210 An error occurred when Tray 2 was used Switch off the machine and then 072 211 switch it on again Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 073 210 An error occurred when Tray 3 was used Switch off the machine and then 073 211 switch it on again Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 074 210 An error occurred when Tray 4 was used Switch off the machine and then 074 211 switch it on again Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 077 211 An error occurred with the Tray Module Switch off the machine and then switch it on again Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 077 215 An error occurred when the Two Tray Module was used Switch off the machine and then switch it on again Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 078 210 An error occurred when Tray 1 of the High Capacity Tandem Tray was used Switch off the machine and then switch it on again Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 078 211 An error occurred when Tray 2 of the High Capacity Tandem Tray was used Switch off the machine and then switch it on again Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 078 212 An error occurred in the High Capacity Feeder Switch off the machine and then switch it on again Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 078 213 Tray 5 Bypass malfunctioned Switch off the machine and then switch it on 07
164. 731 413 15 Problem Solving Code Description and Remedy 034 734 An internal error occurred Switch off the machine and then switch it on again Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 034 796 The fax number is invalid Check the number and try again 034 797 A communication parameter error occurred Switch off the machine and then switch it on again Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 034 798 A parameter error occurred Switch off the machine and then switch it on again Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 034 799 A fax error occurred Switch off the machine and then switch it on again Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 035 550 An error occurred during data write processing Contact the Xerox Welcome Center 035 700 A fax error occurred Perform the same operation again Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 035 701 Unable to communicate due to an incorrect phone number Check the phone number and perform the same operation again If DP Dial Pulse is used for G3 check that and are not included in the phone number 035 702 The other party cancelled the transmission Ask the other party to check their 035 703 machine status and resend the document if necessary 035 704 The specified feature such as polling is not supported by the remote m
165. 8 214 again If the problem persists contact the Xerox Welcome Center 078 250 An error occurred in the High Capacity Feeder Switch off the machine and then switch it on again Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 081 799 The e mail to fax job was cancelled The fax destination may be incorrect Check the number and try again 112 700 The hole punch waste container is full Empty the container For information on how to empty the hole punch waste container refer to Emptying the Hole Punch Waste Container Optional on page 37 417 15 Problem Solving Code Description and Remedy 116 220 The machine failed to move onto the Download mode Contact the Xerox Welcome Center 116 392 The Printer or PostScript kit is attached to an improper slot on the controller board Attach the Printer or PostScript kit to the correct slot 116 701 Unable to print double sided due to insufficient memory Check if memory is installed correctly If the problem persists contact the Xerox Welcome Center 116 702 Data was printed using a substitute font Check the print data 116 703 An error occurred during PostScript processing Check the print data or disable bi directional communication on the print driver 116 713 The data was divided because the hard disk ran out of space Delete unnecessary data from the hard disk 116 720 A print error occurred due to
166. 859 2 Latin 2 20 PS Math 3 ISO 8859 9 Latin 5 21 Pi Font 4 ISO 8859 10 Latin 6 22 Legal 5 PC 8 23 ISO 4 United Kingdom 6 PC 8 DN 24 ISO 6 ASCII 7 PC 775 25 ISO 11 Swedish names 8 PC 850 26 ISO 15 Italian 9 PC 852 27 ISO 17 Spanish 10 PC 1004 OS 2 28 ISO 21 German 11 PC Turkish 29 ISO 60 Norwegian v1 12 Windows 3 1 Latin 1 30 ISO 69 French 13 Windows 3 1 Latin 2 31 Windows 3 0 Latin 1 14 Windows 3 1 Latin 5 32 Windows Baltic 15 DeskTop 33 Symbol 16 PS Text 34 Wingdings 17 MC Text Font Size 209 400 5000 Default 1200 Specifies the point size of a font in increments of 25 The value of 100 represents 1 point Font Pitch 210 600 2400 Default 1000 Specifies the pitch size of a font The value of 100 represents the pitch size of 1 Form Line 211 5 128 Default 64 or 60 Specify the number of lines on a page The default value will be 64 if the default value of the item 202 203 is 4 or 60 if the value for 202 203 is 23 No of Sets 212 1 999 Default 1 Specify the number of print sets Image 213 0 Off Enhance 1 On Default Sets whether to enable the enhanced image mode Hex Dump 214 0 Off Default 1 On Sets whether to enable a hex dump Draft Mode 215 0 Off Default 1 On Sets whether to enable the draft mode Binding 217 0 LEF Default 1 SEF Specifies which edge of paper is to be bound Line 218 0 Off Default Termination 1 Add LF Appends an LF to CR 2 Add CR Appends a C
167. B server on an OS other than Windows 95 Windows 98 or Windows ME 027 585 An SMB protocol error occurred Access to the server is not allowed at this time Check the login allowed time 027 586 An SMB protocol error occurred The password has expired Obtain a valid password 027 587 An SMB protocol error occurred The password must be changed Log in to the server on Windows and change the password 027 588 An SMB protocol error occurred The user account is invalid Enable the user 027 589 An SMB protocol error occurred The user account is locked out Cancel the lockout 027 590 An SMB protocol error occurred The user account has expired Obtain a valid user account 027 591 An SMB protocol error occurred The user account is restricted The blank password is invalid Set a password for the user account 027 599 An SMB protocol error occurred Perform the same operation again Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 027 702 The certificate for addresses does not exist Register the certificate with the machine 027 703 The certificate for addresses has expired Register a valid certificate with the machine 027 704 The certificate for addresses is not trusted Register a valid certificate with the machine 027 705 The certificate for addresses has been revoked Register a valid certificate with the machine 027 706 The machine has no S MIME certificate for the machine s e mail address Import an S MIME certifi
168. E The standard sizes of paper that can be detected vary depending on the paper size table specified by the System Administrator For information on setting the paper size table refer to Paper Size Settings in the Setups chapter on page 78 Paper Trays Standard Sizes Tray 1 2 Tray 3 4 Tray 6 High Tray 5 a E Dimensions LEF 3 High Envelope Paper Size Tray 3 4 Capacity Bypass mm SEF Capacity Tray Two Tray Tandem Tray Feeder Module Tray AG 105 0 148 0 LEF 0 A5 148 0 210 0 SEF 0 LEF O A4 210 0 297 0 SEF O 0 LEF O 0 O 0 A3 297 0 420 0 SEF 0 0 B6 128 5 182 0 SEF 0 B5 182 0 257 0 SEF 0 0 LEF O B4 257 0 364 0 SEF 0 0 5 5 x 8 5 139 7 215 9 SEF O 0 LEF O 23 2 Paper and Other Media Tray 1 2 Tray 3 4 Hi h Tray 5 Tray 6 Dimensions LEF g y High Envelope Paper Size Tray 3 4 Capacity Bypass mm SEF Capacity Tray Two Tray Tandem Tray Feeder Module Tray 7 25 x 10 5 184 2 266 7 SEF O LEF O O 0 0 8 5 x 11 215 9 279 4 SEF O 0 LEF O O O 0 8 5 x 13 215 9 330 2 SEF 0 0 8 5 x 14 215 9 355 6 SEF O O 11 x 17 297 4 431 8 SEF O 0 16K Taiwan 194 0 267 0 SEF O LEF O 8K Taiwan 267 0 388 0 SEF O 16K China 195 0 270 SEF O LEF O 8K
169. EEA 61 132 Accounting Type essssssssesesrreessrrresseernreerna 136 Create View User Accounts sesse 133 Reset User Accounts coooooccccccccccccccccccnccononoos 135 System Administrator s Meter Copy Jobs 136 View Accounts cooccococccccccocccccnonnnononccnnnnncnnnnns 34 active and pending Jobs oo eeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 40 Active Jobs View Job Status Default 145 Activity Report srann dra sanat SERRAR 57 73 Add Address Book Entry Setup aseeseen 127 Add Fax Comment Setup ceceeeeeeeees 132 Add Me to CC Field cccceceeseeeseteeteeeeeeees 119 Add Me to To Field ooooococncnnnnicicocccccccccncnos 119 Address Book Speed Dial Default 109 Addresses to Bypass Proxy Server 94 Adjust Punch Position i e 75 Alert Tone T Seinien aa llores tals leche lad a 68 NET 69 Allocate Memory Print Service Settings 101 Allow Casual Users to Edit From Field 119 Allow Guest Users to Edit From Field 119 Allow to edit From if Search failed 119 Allow to edit From if Search found 119 Allow User to Disable Active Settings 144 Annotations Apply Bates Stamp To 87 Annotations Apply Comment To ooiinnnccncnncccco 86 Annotations Apply Date Stamp To 87 Annotations Bates Stamp c eeeeeeeeeees 87 Annotations Comment coooooccccccccccccnncnno
170. FC2251 specification protocol error 92 unsupported function during the address book query Check the LDAP server status 018 793 An LDAP server protocol error occurred in the address book operation The server returned the RFC2251 specification protocol error 93 result not returned during the address book query Check the LDAP server status 402 Fault Codes Code Description and Remedy 018 794 An LDAP server protocol error occurred in the address book operation The server returned the RFC2251 specification protocol error 94 result no longer available during the address book query Check the LDAP server status 018 795 An LDAP server protocol error occurred in the address book operation The server returned the RFC2251 specification protocol error 95 result still available during the address book query Check the LDAP server status 018 796 An LDAP server protocol error occurred in the address book operation The server returned the RFC2251 specification protocol error 96 client loop detected during the address book query Check the LDAP server status 018 797 An LDAP server protocol error occurred in the address book operation The server returned the RFC2251 specification protocol error 97 maximum number of reference hops exceeded during the address book query Check the LDAP server status 024 742 The number of print pages for the Booklet Creation job exceeded t
171. Fax Number Name and Index only With Internet Fax selected Item Description Default E mail Address Enter an e mail address up to 128 characters search the Address Book Name Enter a recipient name up to 18 characters Index Enter a single alphanumeric character to 129 6 Setups Item Description Default Starting Rate Select a communication mode from G3 Auto and Forced 4800 bps This feature is not available for Internet Fax recipients However the selected mode is applied to another Internet Fax machine which is used as a relay station for fax transmission G3 Auto Resolution Select a resolution level to be used for transmission from among Panel Standard 200x100 dpi Fine 200 dpi Superfine 400dpi and Superfine 600dpi With Panel selected the resolution level selected on the control panel is used Panel Maximum Image Size Select the maximum image size depending on recipient s paper size from among A3 B4 and A4 or among 8 5 x 11 B4 and 11 x 17 depending on the country 11x17 Internet Fax Profile Select an Internet Fax profile from among TIFF S TIFF F and TIFF J An Internet Fax profile is an agreement between transmitting and receiving Internet Fax machines that limit image resolution paper size and other attributes TIFF S S MIME Certificate
172. Guide for information on fault code The machine operation has stopped due to a fault Restart the job Xerox Welcome Center If you need any additional help on using your machine you can 1 Refer to the User Guide or this System Administration Guide 2 Visit our Customer Web Site at www xerox com or contact the Xerox Welcome Center For details refer to Xerox Welcome Center in the Before Using the Machine chapter on page 13 Please have your serial number at hand when contacting Xerox The Welcome Center will want to know the following information the nature of the problem the serial number of the machine the fault code if any as well as the name and location of your company Follow the steps below to look up the serial number of the machine 7 Press the lt Machine Status gt button on the control panel Press the lt Features gt or lt All Services gt button at any time to exit 2 On the Machine Information screen select General Information 3 The serial number will be displayed lt Machine Status gt button y Supplies Billing Tools Information Print Mode Machine Faults Information J General Information D Paper Tray Status J Orrline Overwrite Hard Disk Fax Receiving Mode Standby Print Auto Receive Reports General Information Close For enquiry on maintenance and operation http www xerox com Machine C
173. Jams If a document jams in the document feeder the machine stops and an error message is displayed on the touch screen Clear the document jam according to the instructions displayed and then reload the document in the document feeder Follow the steps below to clear document jams in the document feeder 7 Open the document feeder cover and then remove the jammed document If prompted on the touch screen turn the green wheel to feed the jammed document out of the document feeder Green Wheel 2 Ifa double sided document is jammed underneath the inner cover open it and turn the green wheel to remove the document E EsTa 3 Close the inner cover and then the document feeder cover 353 15 Problem Solving Stapler Faults The following describes stapler troubles when the Finisher optional is installed Follow the procedures on the following pages when copies are not stapled or when staples are bent Contact your Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists after you have tried the following solutions Z CAUTION Be careful in removing jammed staples Unstapled Bent staple If staples are stapled on the copies in the manner shown in the figures below contact your Xerox Welcome Center One side of staple rising up Staple bent in reverse direction Entire staple rising up S
174. List page which lists the certificates in the selected category and purpose The items displayed in the list are as follows e Previous Displays the previous page when the Certificate List is in multiple pages e Next Displays the next page when the Certificate List is in multiple pages e Category Displays the selected certificate category Certificate Purpose Displays the selected certificate purpose e Issued To Displays the owner of the certificate e Validity Displays the validity status of the certificate e Certificate Details Displays the Certificate Details page which shows the details of the selected certificate The items displayed on the page are as follows Use this certificate Click this button to use this certificate Delete Click this to delete the certificate Certificate Details Category Displays the category of the certificate Issued To Displays the owner of the certificate Issuer Displays the issuer of the certificate Serial Number Displays the serial number of the certificate Public Key Size Displays the size of the public key assigned to the certificate Valid From Displays the validity start date and time Valid Until Displays the validity end date and time Validity Displays the validity status of the certificate Certificate Purpose Displays the usage purpose of the certificate Certificate Selection Status Displays the certificate
175. MTP authentication to their e mail server Check with your ISP to determine if this is a requirement If so enable SMTP authentication for the multifunction machine via CentreWare Internet Services ISP does not allow e mail on the standard port number 25 Check with your ISP to determine if this is a problem Ask if they can accept e mail on another port number If so change the SMTP port number for the multifunction machine via CentreWare Internet Services ISP requires login to the e mail account via Microsoft Outlook Express before allowing e mail to be sent Check with your ISP to determine if this is a requirement If so log in to the Microsoft Outlook Express account and then try sending the e mail If this is successful you can set Outlook Express to check e mail every 5 or 10 minutes for the multifunction machine s e mail account Scan to Mailbox Setup This feature allows documents to be stored in a mailbox public or private for future processing Prerequisites for Scan to Mailbox Setup Confirm that an existing operational network utilizing TCP IP is available Target Computers e Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Server 2003 Windows Vista Data to Set Up Scan to Mailbox Install Requirement Comments Mailboxes are created on Required For additional information refer to Sefup on page the machine 122 Scan Driver is installed Optional This utility can be installed
176. Manually Configured IPv6 Address and then Change Settings 5 Use the keypad on the screen to enter an IP address for the machine in the format XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX Select Save 6 Select Manually Configured IPv6 Prefix and then Change Settings 7 Enter an IP address prefix and then select Save 8 Select Manually Configured IPv6 Gateway and then Change Settings 9 Using the same method as in step 5 enter a gateway address 70 Select IPv6 IP Filter and then select Enabled or Disabled NOTE If you do not wish to use the IP filter feature select Disabled NOTE Use CentreWare Internet Services to register the IP addresses which are not allowed to access the machine Refer to CentreWare nternet Services on page 147 11 When you have finished establishing TCP IP select Close on the Protocol Settings screen Computer Setup Install print drivers on each client computer that will be sending print jobs to the machine and map to the machine as a printer Refer to the HTML document on the PCL Print Driver CD ROM or to the document provided with the optional PostScript Kit 258 USB Port Test Print To make sure that the machine has been installed on the network correctly a test print should be submitted from each client computer Perform the following steps 7 Open a document on a client computer 2 Select the machine as the printer to which the selected document
177. On and then select the time period in the range from 1 to 240 seconds Printer Lockout Duration Specifies whether to prohibit printing of incoming documents for example faxes for a specified duration Select On and then specify the start and end times of the interval during which printing will be prohibited Power Saver Energy Saver Timers Specifies the time interval of inactivity before automatically switching the machine to Low Power Mode a second time interval of inactivity before switching to Sleep Mode Select the time period for each mode in the range from 1 to 240 minutes You must select a longer time period for the Sleep Mode than for the Low Power Mode Audio Tones This feature allows you to select the volume level of tones to be generated at various occasions You can choose different volume levels for each item shown on the screen 7 Select Audio Tones in the Na Features menu items Current Settings l 1 Control Panel Select Tone A 2 Change the required settings 2 Control Panel Alert Tone Normal J E i n rt Use the side tabs to switch __ _ _ _ _ Change between screens 5 Job Complete Tone 2 Loud ly 3 Select Close Control Panel Select Tone Specifies the volume level of the tone generated when an appropriate button on the control panel is pressed and its action is accepted Control Panel Alert Tone Specifies the volume level of the to
178. P If problems are encountered during machine setup refer to Problem Solving on page 341 268 E mail Environments E mail Environments System Requirements The following are required for the machine Scan To E mail Kit is required to send scanned documents as e mail attachments e The machine is connected to the network using TCP IP The environment allows the sending and receiving of e mail Item Correspondent Specifications ITU T Recommendations ITU T T 37 T 30 F 185 and E 164 E mail forwarding RFC2304 RFC2305 DSN function RFC1891 1894 MDN function RFC2298 SMTP receiving RFC821 822 1869 POP3 receiving RFC1939 MIME version Version1 0 RFC2049 NOTE A file may not be printed if the format differs from those in the above table NOTE It is recommended to use Microsoft Outlook Express 5 5 6 0 or Netscape 7 as the e mail software E mail Installation This section describes how to enable the e mail feature Installation Procedure To use the e mail feature configure the following settings on the machine Network Communication Setup Use the touch screen to set the following ports to Enabled e Receive E mail e Send E mail e E mail Notification Service Then set the IP address Finally set the other items required for the e mail feature Test Mail An e mail job should be submitted to make sure that the machine has been installed and configured cor
179. P network NOTE Some of the configuration options for this protocol are only available from CentreWare Internet Services Refer to CentreWare Internet Services on page 147 First enable the NetWare port 71 Connect the machine to the network 2 Press the lt Log In Out gt button on the control panel and then type the System Administrator login ID to enter the System Administration mode NOTE The passcode may also be required depending on the machine configuration 3 Press the lt Machine Status gt button on the control panel and then select the Tools tab on the screen Select System Settings in the menu at the left side of the screen Select Connectivity amp Network Setup in the Group menu Select Port Settings in the Features menu Select NetWare and then Change Settings Select Port Status and then Change Settings Select Enabled and then Save Next establish TCP IP if you use an IP Address for the NetWare network CUNDA 1 Select Connectivity amp Network Setup in the Group menu and then select Protocol Settings in the Features menu 2 Under TCP IP IP Mode select IPv4 Mode or Dual Stack NOTE IPv6 Mode is not available for Netware settings 3 Select IP Address Resolution and then Change Settings 4 Select a method for establishing an IP address from DHCP BOOTP RARP DHCP Autonet and STATIC and then select Save NOTE Use the DHCP serv
180. P server protocol error occurred in the address book operation The server returned the RFC2251 specification protocol error 50 insufficient access rights during the address book query User has insufficient access to perform the operation Check the LDAP server access rights 018 751 An LDAP server protocol error occurred in the address book operation The server returned the RFC2251 specification protocol error 51 busy during the address book query The server is too busy Wait a while then repeat the same operation Contact the network administrator if the problem persists 400 Fault Codes Code Description and Remedy 018 752 An LDAP server protocol error occurred in the address book operation The server returned the RFC2251 specification protocol error 52 unavailable during the address book query The server is unavailable Wait a while then repeat the same operation Contact the network administrator if the problem persists 018 753 An LDAP server protocol error occurred in the address book operation The server returned the RFC2251 specification protocol error 53 unwilling to perform during the address book query The server is unwilling to perform the operation Wait a while then repeat the same operation Contact the network administrator if the problem persists 018 754 An LDAP server protocol error occurred in the address book operation The server returned the RFC2251 s
181. R to LF and FF 3 CR XX Appends a CR to LF and FF and LF to CR Default 219 Item No 219 984 to 4318 Default 2100 Custom Paper Length Item No 220 890 to 2970 Default 2970 Size 220 Unit 1 10 mm Width 429 16 Appendix PDF Direct Printing Parameter Item No Value Print Sets 401 1 999 Default 1 Specify the number of print sets 2 Sided Print 402 0 Off Default 1 LEF Binding 2 SEF Binding Specifies which edge of paper is to be bound for double sided printing Print Mode 403 0 Standard Default 1 Fast 2 High Quality Selects the print mode Sort 404 0 Off Default 1 On Sets whether to enable sorting Layout 405 0 Auto Reduce Enlarge Default 1 Booklet 2 Two up 3 Four up 4 100 actual size Specifies layout options 0 Auto Reduce Enlarge prints with magnification to fit the paper size selection 1 Booklet performs duplex printing 2 Two up and 3 Four up print two and four pages on a single sheet of paper respectively Paper Size 406 0 Auto 1 A4 or Letter Default Sets the paper size Password Enter a password up to 32 characters Machine Software Upgrade To upgrade the software you must first obtain the upgrade software and then install it Prepare for the Upgrade It is important to obtain the correct upgrade file for your machine Determine the software
182. ROUP3 04 GROUP4 02 GROUP2 g DEFAULT group using the following procedure 1 Select Create Authorization Groups in the Features menu 2 3 4 Select a group from the list and then select Create Delete Configure the required settings Select Save Group Name Allows you to enter a group name The group name can be up to 32 characters long Restrict Recipient Selection Method Specifies whether to permit the group members to specify recipients using the keyboard screen and buttons on the control panel when Recipient Selection Method in Common Service Settings is set to Only From Address Book NOTE For information on Recipient Selection Method refer to Recipient Selection Method on page 84 Restrict User to Edit Address Book Specifies whether to permit the group members to edit Address Book when Restrict User to Edit Address Book in Common Service Settings is set to Yes NOTE For information on Restrict User to Edit Address Book refer to Restrict User to Edit Address Book on page 84 141 6 Setups Allow user to disable active settings Specifies whether to permit the group members to disable the Watermark feature during their user session when Allow User to Disable Active Settings in Authentication Security Settings is set to Enable Active Settings NOTE For information on Allow User to Disable Active Settings refer to Aow User to Disable Active Setti
183. Report Lists the job counter reports for each service Auditron Reports 7 Select Auditron Reports on the Auditron Reports Close Print Reports screen Onn 2 Select the required option Oo Q Mar Tri 3 Select the lt Start gt button on the Ona control panel Scan Jobs When Accounting Type is Accounting Disabled e Auditron Report Print Jobs Displays the number of pages printed per user and by all users When Accounting Type is Local Accounting and Auditron Mode is enabled e Auditron Report Print Jobs Displays an Auditron report for all print jobs completed by the selected users Auditron Report Copy Jobs Displays an Auditron report for all copy jobs completed by the selected users Auditron Report Fax Jobs This is displayed when Fax or Internet Fax is enabled under Auditron Mode and displays an Auditron report for all fax jobs completed by the selected users Auditron Report Scan Jobs This is displayed when Scan to E mail Scan to PC Scan to Mailbox or Network Scanning is enabled under Auditron Mode and displays an Auditron report for all scan jobs completed by the selected users 56 Machine Information Automatically Printed Reports Lists This section describes the various reports lists that can be printed automatically Job History Report Lists the last 50 jobs processed on the machine For more information refer to Job History
184. S Security Settings Job Status Default System Administrator Settings Support Software Upgrades System Administrator Xerox Support 153 7 CentreWare Internet Services Default User ID and Passcode If the System Administration mode is enabled in CentreWare Internet Services settings you will be prompted to enter the System Administrator user ID and passcode when some changes are made The default user ID and passcode for the System Administrator are 11111 and x admin respectively This ID and passcode are the default and can be changed by the System Administrator Status The Status tab allows you to check the status of the paper trays output trays and consumables of the machine NOTE The details displayed may differ from those shown on the machine s touch screen Follow the steps below to select features available on the Status tab 7 Click Status on the Header Panel on the home page 2 Click the required feature on the collapsible menu of the menu panel General This page displays the machine information IP address and status It also displays the Refresh and Reboot Machine buttons Click the Refresh button to display the latest information Trays This page displays the status of the paper tray and output tray Paper Supply Trays Lists the available paper trays Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 optional Tray 4 optional Tray 5 Bypass and Tray 6 optional
185. SB Porbi cidad da 259 Computer Setup cooccoincccnocconcccccccccncnnananononoos 261 Information Checklist oooooooonnnninonnnnnnnncccno 259 TestPridtiaticiiiad tati 261 USB Port Communication Setup 260 USB Port Environment cncccccccccncnnonionnnccnncn 260 Use Proxy Server cccceesc eee eeeesee tees eeeeeees 94 User Account Billing Information 59 User Details Setup Authentication 142 V Verify Remote Server Certificate 98 View Accounts Accounting s es 134 volume Audio Tones cceeeseeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeees 67 WwW o bd oii EAA EAN 15 Watermark Background Contrast eee 76 WebDAV cit dated alive 92 website Xerox meirin iiini anaE iida 224 Windows SMB ccececseeeeeeesttteeeeettteeeeeees 251 Computer Setup ceeeeeeeeeeeeecteeeeeeeeees 255 Information Checklist o oooooooncnninno 251 Network Communication Setup 253 problem solving eeeeeeeeeeseteeeeeeetteeeeeeeeaes 362 SMB Environments e eeeeeeeeeees 252 SMB Installation cceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 252 Test Print iniciada Rede teat 255 Windows TCPIIP ooo eeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeneaees 225 Quick Network Setup DHCP eeen 225 Quick Network Setup Static IP 226 WSD tonada ir eee tes 92 X Xerox Extensible Interface Platform 431 Xerox Secu
186. Settings is set to Scan to Fax Server Fax Destination Protocol Select a transfer protocol from FTP SMB and SMTP Host Name IP Address amp Port Enter the host name IP address and post number of the transfer protocol Share Enter the shared name This appears only when SMB is selected in Protocol Document Path Specify the path to the file repository using up to 128 characters e Login Name Specify the login name to use e Password Specify the password for the login name e Retype Password Re enter the password for verification Fax Received Options Mailbox Selector e Mailbox Selector Setup Select whether or not to sort received documents into the mailboxes by the incoming line Mailbox Selector Setup e Change Settings Selecting the check box of the incoming line to be edited and clicking this button displays a page which allows you to edit the following information for the selected line Save Incoming Fax in Designated Mailbox Specify whether to save incoming faxes in the specified mailbox Mailbox Number Enter the number of the mailbox in which to save incoming faxes 203 7 CentreWare Internet Services Feature Setting items Services Network General Scanning Allows you to set up general information for the Network Scanning service Network Scanning e Confirmation Sheet Allows you to select whether or not to pr
187. Setup page 281 Scan to PC Setup FTP page 283 Scan to PC Setup SMB page 284 Job Flow Service Setup page 285 Scanning Overview Scanning Services brings the versatility of network scanning to the workstation By combining the power of the machine CentreWare Internet Services and third party applications scanning services provides a network solution for all scanning requirements Scanning features can be programmed and documents can then be scanned and transferred to a file server You can access those documents from your workstation or share them with other users connected to the network The stored scanned document can be opened by any software application that can view or edit TIFF PDF XPS files NOTE XPS stands for XML Paper Specification Scanning with the machine Scanning services enables multiple users to use the machine to scan and store documents With the power of the local area network multiple users can access the machine and use it to scan documents To perform network scanning the machine must be installed on a local area network using TCP IP protocol To retrieve a scanned document file it must be transferred to a file server NOTE ASCII characters are used for the user name password and all job template fields when assigned using Scanning Services 275 10 Scanner Environment Settings Scanning Process The machine has five types of scanning functions e e e
188. Size feature on the Layout Adjustment screen If you predefine frequently used document sizes you can set the size of the original quickly and easily 1 Select Original Size Defaults in aw the Features menu Items Current Settings 1 Original Size 1 A3 2 Change the required settings 2 Orgnal Sze 2 MO Use the scroll buttons to switch H2um vg J 4 Original Size 4 A450 between screens 5 Orignal Sze 5 ABE 3 Select Close Original Size 1 to 11 Specifies the document sizes assigned to each of the 11 buttons AIB Series Size Specifies standard document sizes from A B series Use the scroll buttons to switch between screens e Inch Size Specifies standard document sizes from Inch series Use the scroll buttons to switch between screens e Others Specifies other miscellaneous sizes Use the scroll buttons to switch between screens 6 Setups e Custom Size Specifies a user defined size set using the scroll buttons Reduce Enlarge Presets This feature allows you to assign preset magnification buttons These are displayed when you select Proportional in the Reduce Enlarge feature on the Copy screen If you predefine frequently used magnifications the original can be expanded or reduced quickly and easily 7 Select Reduce Enlarge AAA Presets in the Features menu tens Current Settings E a 2 Change the requ
189. Specifies the host name of the machine Enter a host name of up to 32 characters Domain Name Specifies the domain name of the machine Enter a domain name of up to 64 characters Proxy Server Settings This feature allows you to set up the proxy server settings and HTTP HTTPS server settings 7 Select Proxy Sever Settings in Prr sava sany the Features menu Items Current Settings 2 Cha nge th e req u i red setti ng S 2 Proxy Server Setup Same Proxy for All Protocols Ls 3 Addresses to Bypass Proxy Server U se th e scrol b utto ns to switch 4 HTTP Proxy Server Name HTTP_PROXY Change b etwee n screens 5_HTTP Proxy Server Port Number Standard 8080 ly 3 Select Close Use Proxy Server Specifies whether to enable the proxy server Proxy Server Setup Specifies the proxy server assignment method Select from Different Proxy for Each Protocol and Same Proxy for All Protocols Addresses to Bypass Proxy Server Specifies the addresses to bypass the proxy server One address can be up to 64 characters long When you specify multiple addresses use semicolons to separate them HTTP Proxy Server Name Specifies the HTTP proxy server name HTTP Proxy Server Port Number Specifies the HTTP proxy server port number HTTP Proxy Server Authentication Specifies whether to enable HTTP proxy server authentication 94 System Settings HTTP Proxy Server Login Name Specif
190. Status and then Change Settings 9 Select Enabled and then Save Next establish TCP IP 7 Select Connectivity amp Network Setup in the Group menu and then select Protocol Settings in the Features menu 2 Under TCP IP IP Mode select IPv4 Mode IPv6 Mode or Dual Stack When IPv4 Mode or Dual Stack is selected in step 2 3 Select IP Address Resolution and then Change Settings 4 Select a method for establishing an IP address from DHCP BOOTP RARP DHCP Autonet and STATIC and then select Save NOTE Use the DHCP server together with the Windows Internet Name Server WINS server If you selected STATIC in step 4 then proceed to step 5 to configure the protocol settings Otherwise proceed to step 11 5 Select IPv4 IP Address and then Change Settings 6 Use the keypad on the screen to enter an IP address for the machine in the format XXX XXX XXX XXX When you have finished entering all values select Save 7 Select IPv4 Subnet Mask and then Change Settings 8 Using the same method as in step 6 enter a subnet mask 9 Select IPv4 Gateway Address and then Change Settings 70 Using the same method as in step 6 enter a gateway address NOTE If you do not wish to set the gateway address leave this field blank 11 Select IPv4 IP Filter and then Change Settings 12 Select Enabled to filter access to the machine NOTE If you
191. Supplies Data Sent Displays the last supplies data sent to the Xerox Communication Server e Supplies Assistant Displays whether the Supplies Assistant feature is enabled e Date Displays the date on which the last supplies data was sent e Time Displays the time at which the last supplies data was sent Supplies Assistant continued e Component Displays the consumable on which the last supplies data was sent e Current Level Displays the remaining life of the consumable 181 7 CentreWare Internet Services Feature Setting items Connectivity Port Settings Allows you to select whether to enable or disable different ports used on the machine USB Select the check box to enable this port EtherTalk Select the check box to enable this port NetWare Select the check box to enable this port You can also configure the transport protocol to be used To enable the transport protocol select IPX SPX and or TCP IP SNMP Select the check box to enable this port You can also configure the transport protocol to be used To enable the transport protocol select UDP and or IPX SMB Select the check box to enable this port You can also configure the transport protocol to be used To enable the transport protocol select TCP IP and or NetBEUI LPD Select the check box to enable this port Port 9100 Select the check box to enable this port Send E mail
192. TP Netware SMB HTTP and HTTPS Host Name IP Address amp Port Enter the host name IP address and post number of the transfer protocol This appears only when FTP SMB HTTP or HTTPS is selected in Protocol e Validate Repository SSL Certificate Place a check mark into this check box to validate the repository SSL certificate This appears only when HTTPS is selected in Protocol Share Enter the shared name This appears only when SMB is selected in Protocol Scriptpath and filename from HTTP root Specify the script path and file name This appears only when HTTP or HTTPS is selected in Protocol Document Path Specify the path to the file repository using up to 128 characters Server Name Specify the server name This appears only when Netware is selected e Server Volume Specify the server volume This appears only when Netware is selected NDS Context Specify the NDS context This appears only when Netware is selected NDS Tree Specify the NDS tree This appears only when Netware is selected Login Credentials to Access the Destination Select System to specify the login name and password on this page Select Prompt at User Interface to specify the user ID and password on the machine s control panel when requesting a job Select None to disable authentication None appears only when HTTP or HTTPS is selected Login Name Spe
193. User ID text box case sensitive when a user ID is authenticated by the remote server Minimum Passcode Length Specify the minimum number of digits allowed for a passcode 216 Properties Feature Setting items Security Create Authorization Groups Create Authorization Groups Allows you to create authorization groups to assign to users Up to 20 groups can be created including the Default Group Edit Displays the Authorization Setup page for a group number Authorization Setup Allows you to configure settings for a group Group Name Enter a group name of up to 32 characters e Restrict Recipient Selection Method Specifies whether or not to permit group members to specify recipients using the keyboard screen and buttons on the control panel when the Recipient Selection Method setting is set to Only From Address Book e Restrict User to Edit Address Book Specifies whether or not to permit group members to edit Address Book when the Restrict User to Edit Address Book setting is set to Yes Allow User to Disable Active Settings Specifies whether or not to permit group members to disable the Watermark feature during a user session when Allow User to Disable Active Settings is set to Enable Active Settings e When Protection Code Is Detected Specifies what to do if a protection code is detected in a job from a user in this group Remote Authent
194. W format Using this option allows you to correctly print EPS files from a Macintosh computer via USB LPD Specifies whether to enable the LPD port and specifies the port number and the maximum number of sessions NetWare Specifies whether to enable the NetWare port SMB Specifies whether to enable the SMB port IPP Specifies whether to enable the IPP port and specifies the port number EtherTalk Specifies whether to enable the EtherTalk port Bonjour Specifies whether to enable the Bonjour port Port 9100 Specifies whether to enable the Port 9100 port and specifies the port number 91 6 Setups SNMP Specifies whether to enable the SNMP agent FTP Client Specifies whether to enable the FTP Client port Receive E mail Specifies whether to enable the mail receiving port Send E mail Specifies whether to enable the mail transmission port E mail Notification Service Specifies whether to enable the mail notification service UPnP Discovery Specifies whether to enable the UPnP port and specifies the port number WSD Specifies whether to enable the WSD port and specifies the port number Internet Services Specifies whether to enable the Internet Services port and specifies the port number SOAP Specifies whether to enable the SOAP port and specifies the port number to communicate with external applications WebDAV Specifies whether to enable the WebDAV port and specifies the port numb
195. When digital signatures are added to PDF or XPS documents scan file certificates imported to the machine from a Certificate Authority are typically used To import PKCS12 scan file certificates use Machine Digital Certificate Management in the Security folder on the Properties page of CentreWare Internet Services IPsec typically used to encrypt FTP can be enabled from the Security folder on the Properties page of CentreWare Internet Services Configuration of HTTPS SSL TLS Communication Encryption Installation Overview Configuration on the Machine Two methods are available depending on the type of certificate Create a self signed certificate on the machine with CentreWare Internet Services and enable HTTPS This method is used primarily for server certificates Enable HTTPS and import a signed certificate from a Certificate Authority using Machine Digital Certificate Management in the Security folder on the Properties page of CentreWare Internet Services NOTE To see Machine Digital Certificate Management at least one certificate must have been created and stored on the machine This is one of the reasons for creating a self signed certificate 298 Contiguration of HTTPS SSL TLS Communication Encryption NOTE The Trusted Certificate Management folder does not appear under the Security folder until you enable HTTPS SSL TLS Communication Configuration on a Computer Use In
196. When replacing the drum and toner cartridges be careful not to spill the toner In case of any toner spills avoid contact with clothes skin eyes and mouth as well as inhalation 30 Replacing the Drum Cartridge Removing the Old Drum Cartridge 7 Make sure that the machine is not operating and open the front cover 2 Open the bypass tray and then Cover A while lifting up the release lever 3 Lift up the colored lever and slide the drum cartridge out until Reames you can grasp the handle on top tts gt of the cartridge 4 Hold the handle and remove the RZ cartridge from the machine NOTE When replacing the drum cartridge make sure that the new cartridge is the correct one specified for the machine Inserting the New Drum Cartridge 1 Remove the new drum cartridge from the box Carefully remove the protective sheet from the cartridge by pulling up the sealing tape 31 3 Maintenance 3 Insert the cartridge as shown in the illustration and slide it into the machine until it clicks 4 Pull the cartridge tape straight out without breaking it 5 Push the cartridge again to ensure it is positioned correctly 6 Close Cover A until it latches and then close the bypass tray 7 Close the front cover NOTE If the front cover is not completely closed a message will appear and the machine will not operate
197. WorkCentre 5222 5225 5230 XEROX wae print copy scan fax email System Administration Guide dz IO q uy 3 ESS 7 o XE3022EN0 1 Copyright 2008 Xerox Corporation All rights reserved www xerox com support 2007 by Fuji Xerox Co Ltd All rights reserved Copyright protection claimed includes all forms and matters of copyrighted material and information now allowed by statutory or judicial law or hereinafter granted including without limitations material generated from the software programs which are displayed on the screen such as icons screen displays looks etc Xerox and all Xerox products mentioned in this publication are trademarks of Xerox Corporation Product names and trademarks of other companies are hereby acknowledged The information in this document is correct at the time of publication Xerox reserves the right at any time to change the information without notice Changes and technical updates will be added in subsequent editions of the documentation For the latest information go to WWW Xerox com Products Subject To Ordinary Export Regulations An export of this product is strictly limited in accordance with Laws concerning Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade of Japan and or the export control regulations of the United States You must obtain if you wish to export this product any appropriate export license from the Japanese Government or its agency and or re expor
198. X X X O X Display O X O O Delete O X X O O O Change Settings O X X O O O Display Document O O X O O O Delete Document O O X O O O Store Document O O X O O O Print Document O O X O O O Job Display O O X O O O Flow Sheet Link O X X O O O Auto Run O O X O O O Manual Run O O X O O O O Operation available X Operation not available 1 When documents are stored or retrieved using a mailbox authentication is not applicable to the following operations 315 14 Authentication and Account Administration e Confidential fax reception e Confidential Internet Fax reception e Retrieving documents that use scan driver or Mailbox Viewer 3 NOTE When job flow sheets not available for operation depending on changes made to the authentication status are linked to a mailbox you can still use them but are not allowed to change copy them If you release the link the job flow sheet will no longer be displayed and will be disabled When the Authentication Feature is Enabled The following table shows the relationship with the mailboxes for each user type when the Authentication feature is enabled For more information on the Authentication feature refer to Login Type on page 140 When Login to Local Accounts is selected or when a user is authenticated as a user other than a guest user in Login to Remote Accounts NOTE If authenticated as a guest user in Remote Authentication you are tre
199. a ane eet 122 Pool Server Login Method ceesseeeeeeeees 122 POP Password Encryption s es 96 POP3 Login NAME ooo eeceeeeeeeeteeeeeeettteeeeeeenaees 95 POP3 Password ccccccecceeeeeeeesseeseceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 95 POP3 Polling Interval a e 95 POP3 Port Number 0 cceeeeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeees 95 POP3 Server Name IP Address e 95 POP3 Server Settings ooooooococinnncocicnnnccconccncnanonos 95 Port Settings Connectivity amp Network Setup 90 PORO sie olaaa 91 PostScript Font Absence oocccccicnncononcnnccnnnnncn 104 440 Index PostScript Font Substitution ooooociininnn 104 PostScript Memory coononccccccnnoccccccnnnncccnonannncnnnnno 101 PostScript Paper Supply eeeeeeeeeees 104 Power Saver Energy Saver Timers omic 67 preparing paper for loading eseeees 17 Preshared Key ccceccccceeeeeeccceeeeeecceeceneeeeneneneeeens 99 Print emulation parameters ccccceeeeeeeeeees 427 PCL emulation cccccceceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeaees 427 PDF direct printing oooonnncccnnnnnacccnnonccccccnns 430 Print CentreWare Internet Services 158 Print amp Delete Confirmation Screen 120 PrintiArea iii 103 Print Delivery Confirmation E mail 119 Print Error Notification E mail 0006 118 Print Mode Machine Status 0 eeee 51 Print Report
200. a test page Click Next 15 Click Finish Using Secure Access 7 Read the machine s User Interface prompt to determine what needs to be done to be authenticated at the machine Authentication methods include swiping a card placing a proximity card near the reader or entering a user ID or PIN personal identification number 2 Ifthe machine requests further information such as accounting details enter this information at the User Interface 3 The machine will confirm successful authentication allowing access to previously locked system features 4 When finished using system features press the lt Login Out gt button twice on the machine s control panel to close your account 339 14 Authentication and Account Administration 340 15 Problem Solving This chapter describes solutions to problems that you may come across while using the machine The machine has certain built in diagnostic capabilities to help identify problems and faults and displays error messages whenever problems or conflicts occur There is also a section on troubleshooting common faults Fault Clearance Procedure page 341 Paper Jams page 342 Document Jams page 353 Stapler Faults page 354 Common Problems page 358 Network related Problems page 362 Fault Codes page 382 Xerox Welcome Center page 420 Fault Clearance Procedure If a fault or problem occurs there are several ways in which you can
201. a user ID or account ID upon authentication This item becomes active only when Accounting Type is set to Network Accounting Authentication Required This item may not appear depending on your authentication and accounting settings Authentication System Displays the Authentication System page For details on the page refer to Authentication System on page 217 Kerberos Server Displays the Kerberos Server Settings page For details on the page refer to Kerberos Server on page 217 SMB Server Displays the SMB Server Settings page For details on the page refer to SMB Server on page 218 LDAP Server Displays the LDAP Server page For details on the page refer to LDAP Server on page 197 LDAP User Mappings Displays the LDAP User Mappings page For details on the page refer to LDAP User Mappings on page 192 LDAP Authentication Displays the LDAP Authentication page For details on the page refer to LDAP Authentication on page 192 LDAP Group Access Displays the LDAP Group Access page refer to LDAP Group Access on page 193 211 7 CentreWare Internet Services Feature Setting items Accounting Accounting Configuration continued Custom Filters Displays the Custom Filters page For details on the page refer to Custom Filters on page 193 Authentication Configuration This item may not appear depending on your authentication and acc
202. above table Internet Fax Installation This section describes how to enable the Internet Fax service Installation Procedure To use the Internet Fax service configure the following settings on the machine Network Communication Setup Use the touch screen to set the following ports to Enabled e Receive E mail Send E mail Then set the IP address Finally set the other items required for the Internet Fax service 288 Internet Fax Installation Test Internet Fax An Internet Fax job should be submitted to make sure that the machine has been installed and configured correctly Network Communication Setup NOTE Some of the configuration options for this protocol are only available from CentreWare Internet Services Refer to CentreWare Internet Services on page 147 NOTE Keep the SNMP port enabled while you use the machine on the TCP IP network Initially activate the port 71 Connect the machine to the network 2 Press the lt Log In Out gt button on the control panel and then type the System Administrator login ID to enter the System Administration mode NOTE The passcode may also be required depending on the machine configuration 3 Press the lt Machine Status gt button on the control panel and then select the Tools tab on the screen Select System Settings in the menu at the left side of the screen Select Connectivity amp Network Setup in the Group menu Selec
203. according to Mailbox Settings i menu 2 Print 8 Delete Confirmation Screen Enabled heal 2 Change the required settings 3 Convert att to Standard Size No 4 Standard Size Threshold Value Ox Ot Crane 3 S el e ct Cl os e 5 Internet Fax to Internet Fax Disabled ly Documents Retrieved By Client Specifies when and how to delete documents in mailboxes after they are retrieved e Delete according to Mailbox Settings Deletes documents according to the settings made for the individual mailbox e Force Delete Deletes documents immediately after they are retrieved Print amp Delete Confirmation Screen Specifies whether to display a confirmation message screen when deleting a document Convert Custom to Standard Size Specifies whether to convert custom non standard sized fax and Internet Fax documents to standard sized documents before transmission Standard Size Threshold Value Specifies the size threshold for which custom sized documents are converted to standard sized documents Internet Fax to Internet Fax Specifies whether to allow documents received through the Internet Fax service to be automatically retransmitted through the Internet Fax service Internet Fax to E mail Specifies whether to allow documents received through the Internet Fax service to be automatically retransmitted as e mail 120 System Settings Stored Document Settings This feature allows you to select whether documents store
204. ace the paper stock tightly against the left rear corner of the tray NOTE Do not load paper above the maximum fill line 18 Loading Paper NOTE Always load paper into the tray in the orientation shown in the diagram 3 Close the tray The elevator rises and positions the paper for use Bypass Tray Tray 5 The bypass tray allows you to use a variety of paper types The bypass tray is located on the left hand side of the machine A tray extension is provided to accommodate larger sized paper After loading paper stock in the bypass tray make sure that the bypass tray settings on the touch screen match the paper size and type of stock loaded If they do not match reprogramming is required For more information on programming of the bypass tray refer to the Copy chapter in the User Guide NOTE To avoid paper jams make sure that the paper size and paper type settings are identical to the paper stock loaded 7 Load the paper neatly into the bypass tray making sure that the paper stock is in the center of the tray NOTE Do not load paper above the maximum fill line NOTE When making single double sided copies on perforated paper J load the paper to feed the opposite side of the perforated edge first Feeding the perforated edge first might cause paper jams NOTE If when making copies or prints on thick stock paper the paper will not feed into the machine apply a cur
205. achine Orientation is used to mean the direction of images on the page When the image is upright the paper or other media can be either long edge feed or short edge feed Long Edge Feed LEF When loading documents long edge feed into the document feeder load with one of the long edges facing into the document feeder with the short edges facing the front and back of the document feeder When loading paper long edge feed into a paper tray place the paper with one of the long edges toward the left hand side and one of the short edges toward the front of the tray Short Edge Feed SEF When loading documents short edge feed into the document feeder load with one of the short edges facing into the document feeder with the long edges facing the front and back of the document feeder When loading paper short edge feed into a paper tray place the paper with one of the short edges toward the left hand side and one of the long edges toward the front of the tray LEF Orientation SEF Orientation lt lt _____ gt gt Paper feed direction Paper feed direction 14 Conventions Text in Square Brackets Indicates the names of the screens tabs buttons features and option categories Square brackets are also used when referring to file and folder names on a PC For example e Select Original Type on the Image Quality screen Select Save Text in lt Angle Brackets gt Indicates the names of the hard button
206. achine Contact the other party to check the supported functions 035 705 The destination machine may have a problem Check the destination machine 035 706 and try again 035 707 No password or an invalid password was specified for the fax data This code is only to notify that the machine received such a document 035 708 The destination machine may have a problem Check the destination machine 035 709 and try again 035 710 035 712 035 713 035 714 Refer to 035 702 035 715 Refer to 035 507 035 716 A communication error occurred Ask the sender to try again 035 717 035 718 035 719 035 720 The destination machine could not receive the document you sent Check if e the destination machine has paper in paper trays the destination machine has no paper jam the destination machine has enough memory e the destination machine supports G3 reception When using remote broadcasting check if the machine supports the feature When sending data directly to a remote mailbox check if the passcode is correct 035 721 A communication error occurred Ask the sender to try again 035 722 414 Fault Codes Code Description and Remedy 035 723 A communication error occurred 035 724 Fax transmission Check the fax number Check if the specified features are supported on the destination machine Fax reception Ask the sender to try again 035 725 Refer to 034 511
207. address 027 775 Too many addresses were specified Reduce the number of addresses 027 776 An error occurred during communication with the server Use only ASCII characters for the host name in Machine s E mail Address Host Name For details refer to Machine s E mail Address Host Name on page 93 If the problem persists check if the server supports the EHLO command 027 777 The server does not support SMTP AUTH In SMTP Server Settings set E mail Send Authentication to Off For details refer to SMTP Server Settings on page 96 027 778 The server does not support SMTP AUTH Check the authentication types supported on the server The machine supports the following authentication types PLAIN plain text LOGIN BASE64 and CRAM MD5 challenge response 027 779 The SMTP authentication failed Check the login name and password required for authentication 027 796 The e mail without an attachment was discarded The machine is configured to print only e mail attachments To also have the machine print the body text and header of e mail change the settings on Properties in CentreWare Internet Services 410 Fault Codes Code Description and Remedy 027 797 The output destination is not correct Specify the correct destination and resend the e mail 033 310 If the machine is equipped with two or mor
208. address beginning with https into the Address box of your web browser and press the lt Enter gt key Example https 192 168 1 1 Click the Properties tab Click on the Security folder to display the items in the folder Click on Machine Digital Certificate Management SAA Generate a certificate a Click the Create Self Signed Certificate button b Set Public Key Size as necessary c Set Issuer as necessary d Click the Apply button When a screen to enter the user ID and passcode appears enter the System Administrator user ID and passcode and then click OK NOTE The default System Administrator user ID and passcode are 11111 and x admin respectively 7 Refresh the web browser 299 13 Security Encryption Digital Signature 8 Click on the left of the Security folder to display the items in the folder 9 Click SSL TLS Settings 70 Select the Enable check box for HTTP SSL TLS Communication 11 Check HTTP SSL TSL Communication Port Number 12 Apply the settings a Click Apply b The right frame on the web browser will change to the machine reboot display c Click Reboot Machine The machine will be unavailable for a short period of time Configuration on a Computer The following describes the configuration for a computer When encrypting communication between a web browser and the machine enter an address beginning with https instead of
209. age 158 Scan page 160 Properties page 173 Support page 224 The services supported by CentreWare Internet Services are subdivided into the following categories The category is selected on the tab bar in the header panel Category Name Services Status General Trays Consumables Jobs Active Jobs Job History List Error History Print Job Submission Scan Job Templates Mailbox Job Flow Sheets 152 Services Category Name Services Properties Configuration Overview Description General Setup Configuration Job Management Paper Tray Attributes Paper Settings Power Saver Energy Server Settings Stored Document Settings Memory Settings Internet Services Settings Pool Server Settings Cloning Alert Notification Billing amp Counters SMart eSolutions Connectivity Port Status Physical Connections Protocols Services Printing E mail Internet Fax Fax Network Scanning Scan to Home Machine Software Xerox Services Custom Services Properties Accounting Xerox Standard Accounting Accounting Configuration Accounting Login Screen Settings Security Authentication Configuration User Details Setup Remote Authentication Servers IP Filtering Audit Log Machine Digital Certificate Management IPSec Certificate Management 802 1x SSL TLS Settings PDF XP
210. age 310 Local Access Direct operation of the machine from the control panel is called Local Access The functions restricted by Local Access are as follows Device Access e All Services Pathway verifies users when they access a service screen e Job Status Pathway verifies users when they access the Job Status screen e Machine Status Pathway verifies users when they access the Machine Status screen Service Access Copy e Fax Internet Fax Scan to Mailbox E mail e Network Scanning e Scan to PC Send from Mailbox e Stored Programming e Job Flow Sheets e Custom Services 309 14 Authentication and Account Administration Feature Access e Print Documents from Mailbox e Retrieve Documents from Mailbox Remote Access Operation of the machine through a network using CentreWare Internet Services is called Remote Access The functions restricted by Remote Access are as follows Print Printing is limited to print jobs sent from a computer To use the Accounting feature use the print driver to set account information such as user ID and passcode If verification using account information fails for a print job the print data will be either saved in the machine or deleted depending on the Charge Print settings NOTE Printing is not limited when Login Type is set to Login to Remote Accounts in the System Administration mode For more information about Login to Remote Accounts ref
211. ail settings Defaults From Address Displays the sender s address Message Displays the default e mail message Signature Displays the default e mail signature Confirmation Sheet Displays whether to have a confirmation sheet printed after every e mail transmission or only upon an error Add Me to To Field Displays whether to automatically add the sender s address in the To field Edit Click this button to edit the above information and other e mail settings as follows e Receiving Protocol Select the receiving protocol from SMTP and POP3 From Address Enter the address to be displayed in the From field From Name Optional Enter the name to be displayed in the From field This setting is optional Incoming E mail Print Options Allows you to select the printing options for the header and contents of incoming e mail Output Destination for Incoming E mail Select an output tray to use to print incoming e mail e Print Delivery Confirmation E mail Select whether and when to automatically print a delivery confirmation e mail e Print Error Notification E mail Select whether to automatically print error notices sent from the e mail server e Response to Read Receipts Select whether to automatically send a confirmation e mail when an e mail that requests a delivery confirmation is received e Domain Filtering Specify whether t
212. ainer when the power is on If you empty the container when the power is off the machine will not recognize that the container has been emptied 7 Make sure that the machine is not operating and open the front transport cover of the finisher 2 Pull out the hole punch waste container 3 Empty the container 4 nsert the empty hole punch waste container all the way into the finisher 5 Close the front transport cover of the finisher NOTE If the center front transport cover of the finisher is not completely closed a message will appear and the machine will not operate 38 4 Job Status This chapter contains information on the job status screens and the features available Job Status This feature allows you to check the progress of incomplete jobs or display the detailed information of completed jobs The newest job will be displayed at the top of the list You can also check delete or print documents stored in the public mailbox polling box of the machine Use the scroll bar to switch between screens For more information on each button refer to the following Active Jobs page 40 Completed Jobs page 41 Secure Print Jobs amp More page 42 7 Press the lt Job Status gt button y on the control panel OO O NOTE Press the lt Features gt or lt All O Services gt button at any time to exit 365 OOO
213. alled When the transmission data includes binary or EPS data disable this feature Connection Time Out Allows you to specify the connection time out period when transmission fails Maximum Number of Sessions Enter the maximum number of sessions Port 9100 General Protocol Displays whether the protocol is enabled or disabled Physical Connection Displays Ethernet This is a display only item Port Information TCP Port Number Enter the port number for Port 9100 e Bidirectional Displays whether the bidirectional communication is enabled or disabled Maximum Connections per Port Displays 8 This is a display only item End of Job Timeout Allows you to specify the connection time out period when transmission fails e PDL Switching Displays whether the PDL Switching feature is enabled or disabled This is a display only item e TBCP Filter Select the check box to enable TBCP Filter when processing PostScript data This is available only when the optional PostScript kit is installed When the transmission data includes binary or EPS data disable this feature 190 Properties Feature Setting items Connectivity Protocols continued SMTP Server Required Information SMTP Server IP Address Host Name amp Port Enter the SMTP server address in the first text box Up to 128 characters can be entered including peri
214. ame Enter up to 32 characters for a new user name e Passcode Enter 4 to 12 alphanumeric characters for a new passcode Usage Limits Allows you to change how many impressions the user is allowed to use for each item To reset a User Limits value select the Reset check box for the item To reset all the Usage Limits values click Reset All User Role User Role Select a user role for the user Add This User to Authorization Group Select an authorization group for the user By default users belong to Authorization Group 00 Default Group The groups in the list are defined under Create Authorization Groups in the Security folder Access Rights Displays the group accounts linked to the user To change group account information click Edit to display the Group Account Access page e Group Account Access Displays the list of the group account information linked to the selected user If information is listed over two to more pages use the Previous or Next button to move between pages The list can be sorted by clicking Access ID or Name You can change information for the group accounts that are linked to the user Access Select the check box for the group account to be linked to the user To link all the group accounts to the user click Select All ID Displays the group account ID Name Displays the group account name Default Select a default group account fo
215. and the machine s serial number Use the space below to record the telephone number Supplies Telephone Number NOTE If you do not use the consumables recommended by Xerox the performance of the machine may not be at its optimum level Use only the consumables recommended by Xerox Cleaning the Machine This section describes how to clean the machine to help maintain high performance Z WARNING Do not use aerosol cleaners Aerosol cleaners can be explosive or flammable when used on electromechanical equipment Before cleaning this product unplug the product from the electrical outlet Always use materials specifically designated for this product The use of other materials may result in poor performance and create a hazardous situation Always unplug this equipment from the electrical outlet before cleaning Control Panel and Touch Screen Clean the exterior of the machine touch screen and control panel on a regular basis to keep them free from dust dirt and fingerprint smudges Wipe the exterior surfaces with a soft firmly wrung cloth moistened with water Do not use cleaning agents other than water or neutral detergent Wipe off any excess water with a dry cloth 29 3 Maintenance Document Glass and Document Feeder Glass Clean the document cover and document glass monthly to prevent streaks smears and other marks from appearing on copies or prints If the optional document feeder is in
216. ansfer data via FTP using the Scan to PC service because lock folder deletion was not successful on the FTP server after connection Take one of the following actions e Check the access privilege to the FTP server e If any lock directory LCK exists in the forwarding destination delete it manually and then retry executing the job 016 587 The machine failed to transfer data via FTP using the Scan to PC service because folder deletion was not successful on the FTP server after connection Check the access privilege to the FTP server 016 588 The machine failed to transfer data via FTP using the Scan to PC service because the data could not be written in the FTP server after connection Check if enough space is available in the save location 016 589 The machine failed to transfer data via FTP using the Scan to PC service because the data could not be read from the FTP server after connection Check the access privilege to the FTP server 388 Fault Codes Code Description and Remedy 016 590 The machine failed to transfer data via FTP using the Scan to PC service because the file could not be saved in the FTP server File Name Conflict may be set to Do Not Save Set File Name Conflict to any item other than Do Not Save 016 591 The machine failed to transfer data via FTP using the Scan to PC service because the filing policy was invalid When File Name Conflict
217. ap on the SNMP Configuration gt Advanced page and clicking this button deletes the trap You can select and delete multiple traps at once SSDP Allows you to configure the SSDP protocol settings as follows Protocol Displays whether the protocol is enabled or disabled Valid Advertising Period Specify the time during which the advertising period remains valid Maximum TTL Specify the maximum TTL time to live Microsoft Networking Filing Destination Protocol Displays whether the protocol is enabled or disabled Physical Connection Displays Ethernet This is a display only item Transport Select a transport protocol from TCP IP NetBEUI and TCP IP amp NetBEUI Maximum Connections Enter the maximum number of simultaneous connections allowed Connection Timeout Displays 600 seconds This is a display only item Workgroup Enter the name of the workgroup for the machine SMB Host Name Enter the SMB host name with up to 15 characters If a name of more than 16 characters is entered the first 15 characters are registered as a name TBCP Filter Select the check box to enable TBCP Filter when processing PostScript data This is available only when the optional PostScript kit is installed When the transmission data includes binary or EPS data disable this feature Unicode Support Specify whether or not to support Unicode support in the host name and work
218. ases 111 6 Setups If non standard size documents are scanned If B4 size documents are scanned with Paper Size Settings set to Inch Series Sender ID Specifies whether to notify the remote machine of the machine s G3 ID fax number when you send documents with G3 in the Communication Mode Save Undelivered Faxes Specifies whether to save fax documents that could not be sent Select Yes to display the Undelivered Faxes feature in the Stored Print Jobs amp More tab in Job Status from where you can resend the fax document Save Deleted Faxes Specifies whether to store fax documents where the fax transmission was forcibly deleted Saved Faxes Auto Delete Specifies whether to automatically delete stored documents Transmission Interval Specifies the period between transmissions within the range of 3 to 255 seconds using the scroll buttons or the numeric keypad on the control panel The longer the transmission interval the longer the total time spent for operation but the machine can receive faxes during the standby time Batch Send Specifies whether to send pending documents to an identical destination as a batch with a single transmission thereby reducing telephone charges Manual Send Receive Default Specifies the default for whether the Manual Receive or Manual Send button is to be selected when you use the On Hook feature Fax Receiving Mode Specifies the default for fax r
219. assword minimum 8 characters Enter the privacy password using 8 to 32 characters Confirm Privacy Password Re enter the privacy password for verification Print Drivers Remote Clients Account Account Enabled Select to enable the print drivers remote clients account This account allows client computers and drivers a limited access to the features on the machine If the machine does not have SNMP v1 v2c enabled and does not have this account enabled SNMP clients will not be able to communicate with the machine The default passwords should be used unless the passwords have been changed on client computers e Reset to default Password Click this button to reset your password to the default 187 7 CentreWare Internet Services Feature Setting items Connectivity Protocols continued SNMP Configuration continued Advanced Displays a page that contains the Add UDP IPv4 Add UDP IPv6 Address Add IPX Address and Delete buttons Add UDP IPv4 Address This button displays the SNMP Configuration IPv4 page which allows you to set the following settings IP Trap Destination Address IP Address Enter the IPv4 address of the SNMP agent that you are setting up to receive traps UDP Port Number Enter the UDP port number of the SNMP agent SNMP Version Select the SNMP version of the SNMP agent Traps TRAP Community Name Enter the trap communi
220. at as necessary Ghosting e Check the quality of the documents e If transparencies are used select Transparency in Paper Type The machine automatically adjusts the quality for transparencies Feed the document SEF e Replace the drum cartridge Washout e Check the quality of the documents Ifthe image is lighter near the borders select a darker image quality setting on the touch screen e Replace the drum cartridge Solid density variations Check the quality of the documents Select Lighten Darken on the touch screen e Replace the drum cartridge Image loss e When copying a document from a larger paper size to a smaller size reduce the image to fit onto the smaller paper size e If you are using A4 210 x 297 mm 8 5 x 11 0 inches paper set a slightly smaller document size for example copy 90 instead of 100 or select Copy All on the Reduce Enlarge screen Select Auto Center in Image Shift White stripes appear 210 mm from the top of the output When choosing Bond Paper Plain Paper Recycled Paper or Custom Paper as paper type change the paper type in the Image Quality to Extra Heavyweight D e When choosing Heavyweight 1S as paper type change the paper type in the Image Quality to Extra Heavyweight A B C or S For more information about the paper type in the Image Quality refer to Paper Tray Settings in the Setups chapter on page 70
221. at the left side of the screen 2 Select Connectivity amp Network Setup in the Group menu 271 9 E mail Environment Settings Test Mail 3 Select the following items and then Change Settings e Machine s E mail Address Host Name E mail Address Machine Name Host Name This is the TCP IP and SMB Host Name of the device Domain Name This is the DNS information Outgoing Incoming E mail Settings gt POP3 Server Settings when receiving E mail via POP3 POP3 Server Name IP Address If server name is used then DNS needs to be configured properly via CentreWare Internet Services POP3 Port Number POP3 Polling Interval POP3 Login name POP3 login name used for SMTP Authentication POP3 Password POP3 password used for SMTP Authentication POP Password Encryption e Outgoing Incoming E mail Settings gt SMTP Server Settings when sending or receiving E mail via SMTP SMTP Server Name IP Address If server name is used then DNS needs to be configured properly via CentreWare Internet Services SMTP Server Port Number E mail Send Authentication SMTP AUTH Login Name SMTP login name used for SMTP Authentication SMTP AUTH Password SMTP password used for SMTP Authentication e Outgoing Incoming E mail Settings gt Domain Filtering if required Domain Filtering This field will be populated ONLY if restriction is required on sending e mail to certain domains Do
222. at to be used for the Watermark feature Default Watermark Effect Select a type of Watermark text Font size Select a font size of Watermark text Background Pattern Select a Watermark background pattern Density Select a density of Watermark text Watermark Background Contrast Select the contrast level to be applied between Watermark text and the background Force Watermark Copy Job Specify whether or not to always enable the Watermark feature for copy jobs Client Print Specify whether or not to always enable the Watermark feature for print jobs Mailbox Print Specify whether or not to always enable the Watermark feature for Mailbox Print jobs Job Status Completed Jobs View Default Completed Jobs View Specify whether or not to allow all users or only authenticated users to view completed jobs Access To Specify whether to display all completed jobs or only the jobs of a job owner This is selectable only when Completed Jobs View is set to Require Login to View Jobs Hide Job Details Select whether to display or hide details of completed jobs Active Jobs View Hide Job Details Select whether to display or hide details of active jobs System Allows you to set the System Administrator s ID and Administrator password Settings Administrator s Login ID Specify the System Administrator s ID with up to 32 characters Administrator s Passcode Specify the System Administrator s passcod
223. ata in the hard disk is being overwritten Wait until the processing is completed To cancel the processing switch off the machine and then switch it on again 016 400 An 802 1x authentication error occurred The user name or password set in the machine is not correct or switch settings on the authentication server have a problem 016 401 The 802 1x authentication method selected on the machine is not supported by the authentication server Change the 802 1x authentication method on the control panel 016 402 A connection timeout error occurred between the machine and the 802 1x authentication server Check the connection between the machine and the authentication server 016 403 An 802 1x authentication certificate error occurred The root certificate for the server certificate of the authentication server is not stored in the machine or is invalid Import a valid root certificate into the machine Or set Server Certificate Verification to Disabled 016 404 An 802 1x authentication error occurred Try again Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 016 450 The SMB host name already exists Change the host name 016 453 A dynamic DNS error occurred The IPv6 address and host name were not updated Check if the address of the DNS server has been correctly set on the machine Also check if the DNS server supports dynamic update for IPv6 addresses 384 Fault Codes
224. ated as an unauthenticated user general user and cannot operate job flow sheets Unauthenticated Users General Users Mailbox Operations Generally Shared by the l Shared System Persona Administrator Create X X X Display X 07 x Delete X X X Change Settings X X X Display Document X o X Delete Document X 07 X Store Document X o X Print Document X 07 X Job Flow Display x x x Sheet Link X X X Auto Run x x s x Manual Run X x s X Authenticated Users Mailbox Operations Generally Shared by the Pet onai P rs nal Shared System owner other Administrator Create X X O Display X O O Delete X X O 316 Authentication for Job Flow Sheets and Mailboxes Authenticated Users Mailbox Operations Generally Shared by the Perse al lParsonal Shared System owner other Administrator Change Settings X X O X Display Document X O O X Delete Document X O O X Store Document X O O X Print Document X O O X Job Flow Display X O O X Sheet Link X X O X Auto Run X O O X Manual Run X O O X System Administrator Mailbox Operations Generally Shared by the Shared System Personal Administrator Create X O X Display O O Delete O O O Change Settings O O O Display Document O O O Delete Document O O O Store Document O O O Print Doc
225. ath to the LDAP dialog is as follows At Your Workstation 7 Click the Properties tab 2 Expand the Connectivity folder the Protocols folder and then the LDAP folder 3 Click LDAP Server 4 Under Server Information enter the IP address or host name in the box supplied NOTE If entering a fully qualified host name for example Idapserver xerox com make sure that the specified domain name matches the machine s TCP IP configuration domain name shown under DNS on the machine s Configuration Report 5 Enter the port number default of 389 6 If available decide whether or not to use encryption Authentication with SSL when accessing the LDAP server 7 Specify the LDAP server environment from the LDAP Server drop down list 8 If required enter the path to the LDAP objects to limit the LDAP search in the Search Directory Root field The entry should be in base DN format for instance ou people dc xerox dc com 9 In Login Name Password and Retype Password enter the machine s login name and password if required Note that quite often to simply supply address information for e mail no login is required 70 Enter your required number for Maximum Number of Search Results 11 Enter the required time to wait for Search Time Out Alternatively you may select Wait LDAP Server Limit 72 Place a checkmark in the LDAP Referrals box if you would like the server to refer
226. ation then repeat the same operation later when additional memory is available 361 15 Problem Solving Network related Problems Problem Solving Procedure SMB This section enables you to identify network related machine problems Use the following steps to identify and solve a problem 7 Resolve any local copier or fax problems first Do not attempt to resolve a network problem if the local copier and fax functions are not operating correctly 2 A AWN correctly N Check that the machine has power and is switched on Check that the network cable is connected to the machine Check that the network cable is connected to the computer Check that the correct print driver for the machine is selected at the computer Check that the software application being used to send print jobs is set up If printing and faxing options are not available from a computer re install the print driver on the computer 8 Call the local Xerox Welcome Center where a representative will assist in the diagnosis and solution of the problem This section explains the troubleshooting procedures and restrictions while using an SMB environment Troubleshooting The possible causes confirmation methods and actions are as follows When the machine is not found from client computers Cause Confirmation Method Action The transport protocol is different between the client and the machine When selecti
227. ation Setup 70 Select your system from the Authentication System Settings drop down list Configure the Server Response Time Out and Search Time Out settings Click Apply 11 For further configuration refer to one of the following sections depending on the system selected in Authentication System Settings in step 10 Configuring Remote Authentication for Kerberos Windows 2000 page 333 Contiguring Remote Authentication for Kerberos Solaris page 333 Configuring Remote Authentication for SMB page 333 Configuring Remote Authentication for LDAP page 334 Configuring Remote Authentication for Kerberos Windows 2000 At your Workstation 7 Click the Properties tab 2 Expand the Security folder and then the Remote Authentication Servers folder 3 Click Kerberos Server 4 Under Kerberos Server 1 Default enter the IP address and port of the primary server domain controller running the key distribution center service 5 Enter the IP address and port of the secondary server domain controller if necessary 6 Enter the Windows 2000 domain in the Domain Name box For example in uppercase EXAMPLE COM 7 Enter details for up to four alternate domain controllers and backups if required 8 Click Apply Configuring Remote Authentication for Kerberos Solaris At Your Workstation 1 A amp DN Click the Properties tab Expand the Security folder and then
228. ator Administrator s E mail Address Enter the e mail address of the System Administrator Machine s E mail Address Enter the e mail address of the machine Comment Enter a comment on the machine General Setup Configuration Displays information such as the memory capacity available printer languages and installed hardware software Memory Displays the size of the installed memory amount of memory used for each port protocol and installed printer languages Available PDL Lists the printer languages used by the machine and their versions Software Displays the version of software firmware installed on the machine Hard Disk Lists the names and total and free sizes of the volumes on the hard disk Hardware Lists the installed hardware components and their status Job Job Deletion Management Allows you to set whether to allow all users or only the System Administrator to delete jobs Paper Tray Trays Attributes Lists the paper trays installed Paper Type Lists the paper type set for each tray Priority Allows you to set the priority for specified paper trays 176 Properties Feature Setting items General Setup Paper Settings Paper Type Lists different paper types Paper Name Enter the names for Custom Paper 1 to Custom Paper 5 Priority Allows you to configure the priority settings for various paper types when the auto tray is select
229. ature does not support the paper size specified Select a paper size supported by the Booklet Creation feature 016 739 The specified paper size is not appropriate Make sure that the combination of the document and paper sizes is feasible for the Booklet Creation feature 016 740 The Booklet Creation feature does not support the paper tray specified Select a paper tray supported by the Booklet Creation feature 016 741 Unable to move onto the downloading mode 016 742 The product ID in the downloaded data is invalid Try downloading again 016 743 The downloaded files are not supported Download files available for the model of your machine 016 744 An error occurred to the data being downloaded Check if the connection between the external device and the machine is secured and try executing the operation again 016 745 An XPJL error occurred while downloading Try executing the job again Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 391 15 Problem Solving Code Description and Remedy 016 746 Received a PDF file containing unsupported functions Use a print driver to print the file 016 747 An error occurred while annotation image data was being processed due to insufficient memory Take one of the following actions Increase the annotation image size Reduce the number of the images in Page Layout gt Repeat Image Contact the
230. ature using IPv6 addresses 218 Properties Feature Setting items Security IP Filtering continued IP Filter Rule List e Rule Number Displays entry numbers 1 10 IP addresses to be filtered Source IP Mask Displays the ranges of the IP addresses in IPv6 address prefix length format Add Displays the Add IP Filter Rule IPv6 page which allows you configure the following settings Source IP Address Enter an IP address from which to control access to the machine Source IP Mask Enter the mask address of the IP address in prefix length format Edit Displays the Edit IP Filter Rule IPv6 page which allows you to edit the IP address selected in IP Filter Rule List e Delete Displays the Delete IP Filter Rule IPv6 which allows you to delete the address selected in IP Filter Rule List Audit Log Audit logs record who used what services on the machine and when The Audit Log feature can monitor unauthorized use or attempts at unauthorized use of the machine HTTPS must be configured before enabling this feature Audit Log Select whether or not to enable the Audit Log feature Machine Digital Certificate Management Allows you to create and upload certificates for SSL communication Create New Self Signed Certificate Allows you to create a self signed certificate for SSL communication Clicking this button displays a pag
231. ax document is being printed the document is not deleted after printing even if the delete after printing setting is enabled in the mailbox settings 2 Depends on the System Administrator settings Mailbox Link Job Flow Sheet to Mailbox Screen 1 Select Create Job Flow Sheet on the Setup Menu screen 2 Change the required settings 3 Select Close Sheet Filtering Displays the Sheet Filtering screen allowing you to filter job flow sheets Link Job Flow Sheet to Mailbox OROOB Name de Updated Forward to customer To Accounting Legal Print List Private J Sheet Filtering z m Mailbox t y Edit Delete Search by Name Search by Keyword J setect Keyword Owner Filters job flow sheets by owner e Target Filters job flow sheets by target 125 6 Setups Create Displays the Create Job Flow Sheet screen Edit Delete Displays the Show Details screen e Delete Deletes the selected job flow sheet e Copy Allows you to create a new job flow sheet by copying and modifying the selected job flow sheet Edit Allows you to modify the selected job flow sheet NOTE The contents of this option are the same as Show Details on the Select Job Flow Sheet screen of a mailbox Search by Name Displays the Keyboard screen Enter the name of a job flow sheet to search Search by Keyword Displays the
232. ay 5 aia 19 High Capacity Feeder Tray 6 ooococcocononononocconcnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnaonons 20 Envelope Tray enema eese a Mae ipe Neee sieri 22 Auto Tray SwitchiNg persrcotsredeserecreanathtatedeuty sa utsaspeenauenreitbbecidetauelbanganstad 22 Storing and Handling Paper cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeneeeeeneeneeies 23 Supported Paper Sizes and Types occccccccccccconcconccnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnoninenonons 23 Supported Paper Sizes ooccccccccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnininnns 23 Supported Paper Types occoccccccccncnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennneninnnns 26 Maintenance Prae E ETT TET TT 29 Ordering Supplies cooccoccccnccncncnncnnnnnnnnononononononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnos 29 Cleaning the Machine ivionorataontn ica 29 Control Panel and Touch Screen occooocccccccccccconononncnnnnoncnanananancnnnnnnns 29 Document Glass and Document Feeder Glass oooccicococccccccccccnannnns 30 Document Feeder Rollers ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeceenseeeeseeeees 30 Replacing the Drum Cartridge occcoconccccccccccconccconcncncnnnonnnnnnnoncnnnnnnnnnnnnns 30 Removing the Old Drum Cartridge ooooooconocccccccccccconanannnononcninnnannnns 31 Inserting the New Drum Cartridge ccooooncoccccnnnncccconancccnnnncnonannnnnnnno 31 Replacing the Toner Cartridge ccccccceseeseececeeteeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeees 33 Removing the Old Toner Cartridge eee eeeenee
233. b gt Chapter Start gt Separators Tray of the Build Job feature on the Job Assembly screen Copy Control This feature allows you to implement operational control of the various copy features 7 Select Copy Control in the POR Featu res menu Items Current Settings 1 Memory Full Procedure a 2 Change the required settings 2 Mariam Stored Pages 299 Auto Paper ra Use the scroll buttons to switch 2 j Mixed Sized Originals 2 Sided Copy Copy to Side 2 Thange between screens 5 Fine tune 100 X 100 0 Y 1000 y 3 Select Close Memory Full Procedure Specifies the default process to execute if the hard disk becomes full while reading documents A message asking how to process the data read up to that point is displayed You can predefine a processing method to be performed after the message has been displayed for a specified period If you select Cancel Job the data will be discarded If you select Run Job the data read up to that point will be processed Maximum Stored Pages Specifies the maximum number of pages that can be stored in memory when you copy documents Select a number in the range from 1 to 999 Auto Paper Off Specifies the paper tray used when you cancel Auto Paper Select in the Paper Supply feature by selecting Auto or Independent X Y in the Reduce Enlarge feature Mixed Sized Originals 2 Sided Copy Specifie
234. bedded HTTP server on the machine and allows the System Administrator to configure Authentication settings by using a web browser 3 Ensure the authentication server to be used is functional on your network Refer to your manufacturer s documentation for instructions to complete this task At Your Workstation 7 Open your web browser and enter the TCP IP address of the machine in the Address or Location field Click Enter to access CentreWare Internet Services 2 Click the Properties tab 3 Expand the Accounting folder and then click Accounting Configuration On the page displayed select Local Accounting from the Accounting Type drop down list A Click Apply to reboot the machine 5 Expand the Security folder and then click Authentication Configuration On the page displayed select Login to Remote Accounts from the Login Type drop down list 6 Click Apply to reboot the machine 7 Expand the Security folder and then click Authentication Configuration On the page displayed place a checkmark in the Enabled box for each service that you wish to restrict access to NOTE If the Guest User box is available and configurable consider whether it is advisable in your network environment to allow simple passcode guest access to this restricted service machine The default setting is Off 8 Click Next 9 Click Configure for Authentication System 332 Remote Authentic
235. ble Auto Tray Switching For more information on Auto Tray Switching refer to Auto Tray Switching on page 22 e Auto Tray Switching Specifies the conditions to enable the Auto Tray Switching feature e Targeted Paper Type Copy Jobs Targets some paper types according to the settings in Paper Tray Priority or only one paper type e Targeted Paper Color Copy Jobs Targets all paper colors or only one paper color NOTE In any of the following cases Auto Tray Switching is not available If Tray 5 Bypass is selected Ifthe specified tray holds paper other than Plain paper Recycled paper Side 2 paper and Custom paper Ifthe specified tray holds paper set under Auto Paper Off in the Paper Type Priority setting 71 6 Setups Image Quality Reports This feature allows you to configure various settings to adjust the quality of scanned data 7 Select Image Quality in the OA Features menu Items Current Settings 1 Photo amp Text Recognition 2 C h an g e th ere q u i red setti ng S 2 Background Suppression B W Copy High Speed 3 Background Suppression Scan Jobs High Speed 3 Select Close i 4 Image Enhancement On Settings Photo amp Text Recognition Specifies the level at which the machine distinguishes between text and photos when Original Type is set to Photo amp Text on the Image Quality screen Select More Text to make very fi
236. box is selected the received document is automatically printed instead of stored in a mailbox Memory Full Procedure Specifies the default process to execute if the hard disk becomes full while reading documents A message asking how to process the data read up to that point is displayed You can predefine a processing method to be performed after the message has been displayed for a specified period If you select Cancel Job the data will be discarded If you select Run Job the data read up to that point will be processed 113 6 Setups Maximum Stored Pages Specifies the maximum number of pages that can be stored in memory when you copy documents Select a number in the range from 1 to 999 Mailbox Receive Display Priority 1 to 3 Specifies the display priority to the fax documents in mailboxes Select from F Code Remote Terminal ID and Remote Terminal Name Direct Fax Specifies whether to enable or disable the Direct Fax feature Line 1 Line Selection Specifies whether to use Line 1 for both fax transmission and fax reception or for fax reception only Fax Received Options This feature allows you to sort received documents by incoming line to specified mailboxes or to the output trays 7 Select Fax Received Options ARTE Close in the Features menu ao Selector Gon Destination Setup Setup 2 Change the required settings 3 Select Close Mailbox Selector Setup
237. buffer spooling set to Memory or Hard Disk each page within a job is printed in the sequence assigned by the operating system However sometimes pages between different jobs may not be printed in the intended sequence if for example printing multiple copies of a single 1 page job In this case set spooling to Off the default to maintain the intended printing sequence e No Spooling Specifies no spooling Allows you to change the input buffer memory capacity within the range of 64 1 024 KB in 32 KB increments using the scroll buttons or the numeric keypad e Spool to Memory Specifies spooling to memory Allows you to change the input buffer memory capacity within the range of 0 50 32 00 MB in 0 25 MB increments using the scroll buttons or the numeric keypad e Spool to Hard Disk Specifies spooling to the hard disk Receiving Buffer IPP Specifies the input buffer memory capacity for the IPP interface The currently available memory will be displayed at the top of the screen with the following message Memory Available XXX MB NOTE When printing with the receiving buffer spooling set to Memory or Hard Disk each page within a job is printed in the sequence assigned by the operating system However sometimes pages between different jobs may not be printed in the intended sequence if for example printing multiple copies of a single 1 page job In this case set spooling to Off the default to maintain the inte
238. can slightly offset the paper output position for each copy or print set This allows you to identify the start of each set Booklet Offset Specifies whether to offset the copies or prints processed using the Folding function of the Office Finisher LX Booklet Maker This setting is effective only when the Offset Stacking setting for the Right Middle Tray is set to Offset per Set Extended Tray Module Select the type of Extended Tray Module used If the Left Side Tray is installed select Offset Stacking Module to use the Center Tray Auto Job Promotion Specifies whether jobs can automatically be promoted bypassing other jobs when the machine is unable to complete the current job For example if there is no paper in the required paper tray for the current job NOTE Stored documents such as secure prints and sample prints cannot be promoted Default Print Paper Size Specifies the paper size to be used as the initial setting 77 6 Setups Odd Page 2 Sided Specifies whether to add a blank page to a document that contains an odd number of pages so that the document prints as an even number of pages Paper Size Settings Specifies the paper size table used when the machine is set to detect standard sizes of documents and recording media automatically You can select from the following tables A B Series 8 x 13 A B Series A B Series 8K 16K A B Series 8 x 13 8 x 14 and Inch Series
239. cate customer maintenance while others require the attention of the System Administrator The following table represents some of the fault codes and their corresponding corrective actions These may appear in the Print Queue or Faults List available in the Machine Status mode Code Description and Remedy 002 500 An error occurred during the scan processing Try scanning again or check the restrictions on Xerox Standard Accounting Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 002 770 The job template could not be processed due to insufficient hard disk space Delete unnecessary data from the hard disk 003 750 No document was saved for the double sided Booklet Creation feature Check the setting of the double sided Booklet Creation feature 003 751 The specified document area is too small Select a higher resolution or a larger scan area 003 752 The selected resolution was too high for scanning mixed size documents using the document feeder Specify less than 600 dpi for the resolution setting and scan again 003 753 The selected resolution was too high for scanning mixed size documents using the document feeder Specify 200 dpi for the resolution setting and scan again 003 754 An error occurred in the document scanner Reset the document and scan 003 755 again 003 756 The document pages are blank Correctly load the document 003 757 The scan job could not be processed with
240. cate into the machine 027 707 The S MIME certificate for the machine s e mail address has expired Import a valid S MIME certificate into the machine 027 708 The S MIME certificate for the machine s e mail address is not trusted Import a trusted S MIME certificate into the machine 027 709 The S MIME certificate for the machine s e mail address has been revoked Import a valid S MIME certificate into the machine 027 710 The machine has no S MIME certificate for the received e mail Ask the sender to attach an S MIME certificate to e mail 027 711 The S MIME certificate for the sender was not retrieved from the received e mail Import a sender s S MIME certificate into the machine or ask the sender to attach an S MIME certificate to e mail 408 Fault Codes Code Description and Remedy 027 712 The S MIME certificate for the received e mail has expired or is not trusted Ask the sender to send e mail with a valid certificate 027 713 The reception of the e mail was rejected because the e mail contents had been altered during transmission Notify the sender of the possibility of falsification and request the sender to resend the e mail 027 714 The reception of the e mail was rejected because the sender written in the From field differs from the e mail address registered with the signature Notify the sender of the possibility of impersonation and ask the sender to resend the
241. cation Agent Before upgrading make sure that the interface on the machine supports the upgraded version of Authentication Agent 386 Fault Codes Code Description and Remedy 016 554 An Authentication Agent error occurred The login name or password for obtaining domain user information was not correct Enter the correct login name and password 016 555 A timeout occurred while Authentication Agent was to be connected to the database or to Active Directory Check if Authentication Agent is able to be connected to the database or to Active Directory For more details refer to the manual provided with Authentication Agent 016 556 A timeout occurred because the database connected to Authentication Agent was overloaded Wait for a while and then try again If the problem persists check the status of Authentication Agent For more details refer to the manual provided with Authentication Agent 016 557 An error occurred on Authentication Agent Check the status of Authentication Agent For details refer to the manual provided with Authentication Agent 016 558 The machine received an unknown error from Authentication Agent Contact the Xerox Welcome Center 016 559 A Remote Download parameter error occurred Check if the parameters used to access the Remote Download server are set correctly 016 560 A communication error occurred between Authentication Agent and the ma
242. ccccccccccnns 349 Envelope Tray eeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeaas 348 High Capacity Tandem Tray aaaeeeaa 348 Integrated Office Finisher c eee 351 Office Finisher LX cceceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeees 351 Tray 5 BYPASS e ce eeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeaees 349 Trays 1 2 ANd 3 4 ooo eeeeeeeeeteeeeees 348 paper output specifications c eee 424 Paper Size Settings 0 eeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeeeenees 78 Paper Supply coococcoconcccccncccnnononanononcnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnns 85 Paper Supply Button ooccoccccccccncccconconcnccnnnnnnnns 84 paper supply specifications ooo 423 Paper Tray Attributes 00 eeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 70 paper tray guides occ eeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeentteeeeeeeaees 17 Paper Tray Priority 0 ecceeeeseeeeeeeeeetereeeeeenaees 71 Paper Tray Settings Common Service Settings 70 Paper Tray Status Machine Status 50 Paper Type Mismatch cccccceeeeetteeeees 103 Paper Type Priority 00 cccceeeseseeeeeeetteeeeeeeeeaees 71 Passcode System Administrator 139 Passcode Policy Authentication 143 PCL Emulation econo ene dane 51 PDF sets ete tive eee ees eee 51 PDF Signature comicidad 99 PDF XPS Signature Settings 98 PFS Settings a cis cccselce cic seve ii iii 99 Photo amp Text Recognition ee eeeeeeeeeeeeees 72 Polled Documents Auto Delete 111 Pool Server iia ati aaa pean
243. cccccnnnnnnn 151 Certificate Auto Store 2 0 0 2 cceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 98 Certificate settings cccececceeeeeeeeeeteeeetteees 299 Charge Private Print Settings Authentication 143 Charge Print cecccccceeeeeccecceeeeceeceeseeeeeneneneeaee 43 cleaning the machine eseese 29 Common Service Settings ooonnncccnnnnnnnniicnnn 65 Audio TONES ccoo cin deeded 67 Image Quality oooconnncccnnnnncicccnnnnancccnnnnnanccnnn 72 Machine Clock TiMerS ooooinicccnnnnnccccinccnnnnnos 66 EA A 74 Other Settings ooooociniccnnnnnniccccconnnccccnnnnnccns 77 Paper Tray Settings 0 0 0 eeeeseeeeeeeees 70 REPOMS miii 72 Screen Button Settings eee 68 Communicate with Non IPSec Device 99 Company LOGO is tisiehever detect ciales cti 116 Completed jODS serinin riie Ti 41 Completed Jobs View Job Status Default 145 Confirmation Options c ceceeceeeeeeeeeeteees 110 Connectivity amp Network Setup neeese 90 Machine s E mail Address Host Name 93 Other Settings oooocoocinnoccccnnnnocccccconannncnnnnnno 100 Outgoing Incoming E mail Settings 95 Port Settings ea a a a aas 90 Protocol Settings ooommonccccnnnnnicinnnniccnccnannnnoo 92 Proxy Server Settings 0 94 Remote Authentication Server Settings 96 Security Settings oooooocnnnnnnicinnnnacoccnonnacccccnnns 97 consumable supplies status cceeeee 58 Control Panel
244. cconnnnmssscccccrcnnnnnns 143 Allow User to Disable Active Settings ooononnicnnncncnnnnnnnnccocccccccnns 144 Job Status Default e a a e a aaa Ei 144 Active Jobs VIEW cocooccoccocccococooconcconononnononononononnnnonnnoconnnnnnonnnnnnos 145 Completed Jobs View oooccccccccccnccocncocinenicenineninininininininininnnanns 145 Overwrite Hard Disk 0 eseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneenseeneeentenaas 145 Number of Overwrites cccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 145 Scheduled Image Overwrite ccceeeeeeseseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 146 7 CentreWare Internet Services ccoccccccccccenccennnnnnennnennnnnnannnnnnanans 147 Information Checklist cccccccccccnconcnnoconcnnnnnonononononnnnnnnonononenincnnenenons 147 CentreWare Internet Services Environment 0e seeseeeseereee 148 CentreWare Internet Services Installation s eeeeeesseereeeee 148 Installation Procedure ooooooccconccncccnncnnnnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 148 Network Communication Setup coooccocccccccccccncccnnnnnnnninnnnnnnnnininnnos 148 FESEACCESSS sia a a td senses rta 150 Selecting Transport Protocols cccccceesseseecceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeseneneeeses 151 Screen Layout nuca adenda 151 SOIVICOS A AA A dt oh 152 Default User ID and PaSSCOdE oocccccccocicncnnnncnnnnnnnineninininininininininns 154 Status A A aes ies 154 Gene
245. ccount User Jobs Information Document Manageable Items Required Type Send Automatically Yes Verified Sent faxes pages transmissions Manually Yes Verified Sent faxes pages transmissions 323 14 Authentication and Account Administration Account User Jobs Information Document Manageable Items Required Type Receive Automatically No Incoming faxes Receptions pages Print transmissions printed pages sheets Manually Yes Incoming faxes Receptions pages transmissions printed pages sheets Confidential Receiving No Incoming faxes Receptions pages Receive confidential transmissions documents Printing confidential Yes Verified Printed pages sheets documents Polling Storing documents Yes for polling Automatic sending No Not verified Sent faxes pages confidential Printing polled Yes Verified Polls pages documents transmissions printed pages sheets Printing documents Yes Verified Printed pages sheets for polling Relay Receiving relayed No Incoming faxes Receptions pages Broadcast documents transmissions Relay broadcasting No Relay Sent faxes pages printing broadcasting transmissions printed pages sheets Direct Fax Yes Verified Sent faxes pages transmissions Internet Fax Send Yes Verified Sent Internet Faxes pages Internet Printing received No Incoming Receptions pages Fax documents Internet Fax printed pages
246. chine Check the network cable connection and Authentication Agent settings Also print a Configuration Report and if a DNS address is set under Server Name IP Address check if the DNS server is working 016 562 The database for temporary users on Active Directory or Authentication Agent stores multiple entries with the same IC card information Modify the entries so that the temporary user information is not duplicated in the database 016 564 A Remote Download server authentication error occurred Check the login name and password to access the Remote Download server If the problem persists contact the Xerox Welcome Center 016 569 An error occurred on Authentication Agent Contact the Xerox Welcome Center 016 574 The machine failed to transfer data via FTP using the Scan to PC service because the host or server name of the FTP server could not be resolved Check the connection to the DNS server Check if the FTP server name is registered correctly on the DNS server 016 575 The machine failed to transfer data via FTP using the Scan to PC service because the DNS server address was not registered Specify the correct DNS server address Or specify the destination FTP server using its IP address 016 576 The machine failed to transfer data via FTP using the Scan to PC service because it could not connect to the FTP server Ensure that both the destination FTP server and the machine are available f
247. chine Status screen select the Tools tab Select a menu item from the main menu displayed on the left side of the Tools screen Select a group in the Group menu lt Machine Status gt button Machine Faults Information ya y Supplies y Billing y Tools Information al Print Mode Information m General Information 5 Paper Tray Status B Oring Overwrite Hard Disk Fax Receiving Mode m Standby Print DB Auto Receive Reports Machine V Faults Y Supplies Y Billing Y Toots Information System Copy Service Settings O py y Features Machine Clock Timers Audio Tones i Connectivity amp Screen Button Settings Authentication A Network S v E v Security Settings Select a feature in the Features menu and then configure the feature NOTE Some features display the Change Settings button Select the button to change settings or to enter information using the screen keyboard For information on how to use the keyboard refer to New Recipients in the Fax chapter of the User Guide Select Close 3 Exit the System Administration Mode 1 2 Press the lt Log In Out gt button on the control panel If the Logout screen appears select Logout to exit the System Administration mode If the Reboot Machine screen appears select Reboot Now to exit the System Administration mode a
248. chine is connected to a network on which IPv6 stateless address autoconfiguration is disabled or when you want to set a static IPv6 address 149 7 CentreWare Internet Services If you selected Enabled in step 3 proceed to step 4 Otherwise proceed to step 10 4 Select Manually Configured IPv6 Address and then Change Settings 5 Use the keypad on the screen to enter an IP address for the machine in the format XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX Select Save 6 Select Manually Configured IPv6 Prefix and then Change Settings 7 Enter an IP address prefix and then select Save 8 Select Manually Configured IPv6 Gateway and then Change Settings 9 Using the same method as in step 5 enter a gateway address 70 Select IPv6 IP Filter and then select Enabled or Disabled NOTE If you do not wish to use the IP filter feature select Disabled NOTE Use CentreWare Internet Services to register the IP addresses which are not allowed to access the machine Refer to Properties Features on page 174 11 When you have finished establishing TCP IP select Close on the Protocol Settings screen Test Access Follow the steps below to access CentreWare Internet Services 7 Ata client computer on the network launch a web browser 2 Inthe URL field enter http followed by the Internet address of the machine Then press the lt Enter gt key on the keyboard If you use th
249. cifies the default for the top and bottom margins of the Edge Erase feature on the Layout Adjustment screen Set the margins within the range of 0 50 mm 0 2 0 inches using the scroll buttons or the numeric keypad on the control panel Edge Erase Left amp Right Edges Specifies the default for the left and right margins of the Edge Erase feature on the Layout Adjustment screen Set the margins within the range of 0 50 mm 0 2 0 inches using the scroll buttons or the numeric keypad on the control panel E mail Subject Specifies the default e mail subject to be displayed under Subject on the E mail screen Scan to PC Defaults This feature allows you to configure or change the default settings for scanning and sending documents to specified destinations through the FTP or SMB protocol 7 Select Scan to PC Defaults in arca the Features menu Items Current Settings 1 Transfer Protocol 2 Change the setting 3 Select Close Transfer Protocol Specifies the default transfer protocol 106 System Settings Original Size Defaults This feature allows you to configure or change the original size buttons on the Original Size feature on the Layout Adjustment screen 7 3 Select Original Size Defaults in oigna size berau the Features menu Items Current Settings 1 Original Size 1 A3 N Change the required settings 2 Orignal S
250. cify the login name to use e Password Specify the password for the login name e Retype Password Re enter the password for verification Scan to Home Allows you to configure the Scan to Home feature This feature is available only when remote authentication is enabled General Status Select whether to enable or disable the Scan to Home feature Friendly Name Give a name to the home directory where Scan to Home jobs will be sent The name can be up to 127 characters long Determine Home Directory Specify the method of determining the home directory LDAP Query searches the home directory via LDAP No LDAP Query determines the home directory using the machine s resource settings Network Home Path Set the home directory in UNC format with up to 128 characters This item is displayed when Determine Home Directory is set to No LDAP Query 206 Properties Feature Setting items Services Scan to Home continued LDAP Mapping for Home Directory Displays the LDAP attribute for the home directory To change this click this link and enter it on the displayed LDAP User Mappings page The attribute can be up to 64 characters long Automatically Create Subdirectory Specify whether or not to automatically create a sub directory Subdirectory Enter the name of the sub directory using up to 64 characters Append User Name to Path Specify wh
251. cnccoccncnns 229 NetWare Environments coococcccccninninnconnnoo 228 NetWare Setup cecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 231 Network Communication Setup 230 problem solving ceeceeeeeeeeeeeteeneeeeeeeeeeees 366 Test Print riei i tai ia 231 Network Accounting oooocccccccoccccccnnoonccccnnnanccninnno 136 network authentication oooooococonnnnccnncccccoconccnnno 335 Network Scanning ooooccccccnnoncccccnnnancccconannncnnnnno 160 Network Scanning Setup aeee 280 Prerequisites cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 280 Procedures eceeceeceeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeaees 281 A AN 15 NTP Time Synchronization a e 66 Number of OverwritesS ooooocococccccccccccccccccccccnnonoos 145 O Odd Page 2 Sided cooococcccccnnocccccconconcccncnnancnnnnnnns 78 Office Finisher LX cccccccccceceseeseeeeeeenenes 35 37 Paper Jams ee eceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeteeseeneees 351 Office Finisher LX Staple Jams 356 Offset Stacking cscri a a E E 77 Operation of Up Down Buttons 0 83 Optimize PDF For Fast Web View 105 ordering supplies 2 cece cee eeeeeeeteeeceeeeeeeeeeees 29 Original Orientation ooonnocicnnnnnniccnnnnanccccnnn 86 106 Original Size coooococccnnnnncnnnnncccccconcnnnon 89 107 115 Original Size Defaults Copy Service Settings 89 Original Size Defaults Fax Service Settings 115 Original Size Defau
252. computers that will be sending jobs to the machine The installation process is now complete If the test print fails refer to Problem Solving on page 341 Microsoft Networking This section explains how to set up the machine to operate on a Microsoft network The following information is provided Information Checklist page 251 SMB Environments page 252 SMB Installation page 252 Installation Procedure page 252 Network Communication Setup page 253 Computer Setup page 255 Test Print page 255 Information Checklist Before starting the Microsoft networking installation procedures make sure that the following items are available or have been performed Item By An existing operational Microsoft network is required These procedures Customer are not designed to install a Microsoft network Obtain and record the following information if required Customer IP address e Gateway address e Subnet mask for IPv4 Prefix for IPv6 e Host name Test the machine to make sure that it is fully installed and functioning Customer correctly Install the print driver Customer If problems are encountered during the installation refer to Problem Solving on page 347 251 8 Printer Environment Settings SMB Environments Server Message Block SMB is a protocol for sharing files or printers on Windows OS This section explains the installation procedure f
253. confirmation DSN Send e mail without the DSN setting 016 770 The Direct Fax function is not available Check with the System Administrator whether the function is enabled If it is enabled contact the Xerox Welcome Center 016 771 Unable to resolve the data repository domain name Check the DNS connection Also check if the domain name is correct 016 772 Unable to access the data repository Specify the correct DNS address Alternatively directly specify the IP address of the repository 016 773 The IP address of the machine is not set correctly Check the DHCP environment Alternatively manually assign an IP address to the machine 016 774 Unable to process compression conversion due to insufficient hard disk space Delete unnecessary data from the disk 016 775 Unable to process the image conversion due to insufficient hard disk space Delete unnecessary data from the disk 016 776 An error occurred during image conversion processing Check the data in CentreWare Internet Services 016 777 An error occurred on the hard disk during image processing probably due to a hard disk malfunction For details on replacing the hard disk contact the Xerox Welcome Center 016 778 Conversion of the scanned image was discontinued due to insufficient disk space Delete unnecessary data from the disk 016 779 An error occurred during conversion processing of the scan image Instruct scanning again 016 780 An error occurred on the disk during con
254. copy XSA account information to a file on your computer You can then use this file to restore the data on the same machine or to clone the data to other machines You can only clone XSA accounts to another Xerox device that supports the XSA feature Check that the device you want to clone settings to supports XSA 1 A At a networked computer open your web browser and enter the TCP IP address of the machine you want to clone settings to Press lt Enter gt Click the Properties tab See if Xerox Standard Accounting is shown in the Accounting folder If it is not you cannot clone to this machine Click the General Setup folder in the directory tree From the display of available hot links verify that Cloning is among them To make a Back up file 1 A gt At your computer open your web browser and enter the TCP IP address of the machine with the settings you want to copy in the Address bar Press lt Enter gt Click the Properties tab Expand the Accounting folder and then the Xerox Standard Accounting folder Select Cloning and then select Clone Click Save on the dialog box that appears 329 14 Authentication and Account Administration 6 A dialog box will prompt you to specify the name and location for the cloned file Ensure the extension reads dat 7 Click Save The dat file can now be used to restore the information to the same machine or to clone other machines
255. creen NOTE The Device Access settings override the Service Access and Feature Access settings The Service Access settings override the Feature Access settings 7 Select Access Control in the u Close Featu res menu m Device Access DB Service Access B Feature Access 2 Select the required button and then change the settings as necessary 3 Select Close Device Access Specifies whether to limit access to Mames al the following pathways All Services Pathway Job Status Pathway Machine Status Pathway All Services Pathway Verifies vies ise CS users when they access a service Q vx Q wie screen e Job Status Pathway Verifies users when they access Job Status e Machine Status Pathway Verifies users when they access Machine Status Service Access Specifies whether to limit access to memeres each se rvice Items Current Settings Selecting Unlocked for a service Fax HA does not verify users upon accessing wo 3 to Mailbox locke the service Selecting Locked Show uz EE E Icon verifies users but shows the service icon to unauthenticated users Locked Hide Icon verifies users and hides the service icon to unauthenticated users NOTE The Locked Unlocked status of a service is linked to the Disable Enable status of the service in the Auditron Mode of the Accounting feature When Unlocked is s
256. creen displayed select prer mann A PRE meat save On or Off u nd er C heck M i box Check M box Passcode Mailbox Passcode Target Operation Passcode O AAA O NOTE If you select O n go to step The System Administrator s Login ID needs to be set writ 5 to reg ister a passcode The On atid to enable the Check Mailbox Passcode Sd nas Delete machine will not allow the mailbox to be accessed unless the registered passcode is entered If you select Off skip to step 8 5 Enter a passcode up to 20 digits max using the numeric keypad on the control panel 6 Select the required Target Operation option 7 Select Save 8 Change the required settings PSOE BATSON 9 Select Close Name cb Jecl ox Passcode ave e Delete Mailbox NOTE By selecting Delete H y Mailbox you can delete all 4 Delete Expired Documents No dap documents in the mailbox and all job 6 emm smnwm we flow sheets created through the mailbox Mailbox Name Specifies the mailbox name Enter a name up to 20 characters to be assigned to the mailbox Check Mailbox Passcode Checks the passcode for the target operation Select an option for restricting access to the mailbox through the passcode If you select Save Write the passcode entry screen appears when an attempt is made to edit any document in the mailbox If you select Print Delete Read the passcode entry screen appears w
257. ctions upon paper feeding NOTE The bypass tray is not subject to Auto Tray Switching NOTE The paper tray and paper type priority settings can be programmed in the System Administration mode For more information refer to Paper Tray Priority in the Setups chapter on page 71 and Paper Size Settings in the Setups chapter on page 78 When not in use the paper trays can be opened and loaded with paper while the machine is running However do not open an active paper tray This will cause the machine to stop the job that is being processed 22 Storing and Handling Paper Storing and Handling Paper Always use high quality xerographic grade paper in the machine Damaged curled or damp paper can cause jams and image quality problems Follow these simple rules to store paper Store paper in dry conditions away from extreme heat or cold such as radiators or open windows Store paper flat on a shelf or pallet above floor level e Leave the paper wrapped and boxed until ready to be used e Re wrap partly used packages of paper NOTE Do not store paper in the paper trays Supported Paper Sizes and Types This section lists the sizes and types of paper that can be used with the machine Supported Paper Sizes The following table lists the paper sizes supported by each paper tray output tray and the duplex module NOTE For the capacity of each tray refer to Appendix on page 421 Standard Sizes NOT
258. cuments in the Private Mailbox For more information refer to Remote Mailbox in the Fax chapter in the User Guide Broadcast Multi Poll Report Specifies whether to automatically print a Broadcast Multi Poll Report for fax jobs A Broadcast Multi Poll Report shows the results of transmissions and polling requests to multiple remote machines Relay Broadcast Report Specifies whether to automatically print a Relay Broadcast Report for fax jobs A Relay Broadcast Report shows the result of fax transmissions for relay broadcasting e Off Disables the feature e Send to Relay Station Sends a Relay Broadcast Report to relay stations Print at Local Station Prints out a Relay Broadcast Report Send to Relay Print at Local Prints out a Relay Broadcast Report and sends it to the relay stations Scan File Transfer Report Allows you to set whether to print a transmission report after the machine sends scanned data using a scan service No Print Does not print a report regardless of whether data transmission is successfully completed or not Print Report Automatically prints a transmission report for a successful transmission and a Transmission Report Job Undelivered for a transmission failure 73 6 Setups e Print when delivery fails Prints a Transmission Report Job Undelivered for a transmission failure File Transfer Report Fax Server Allows you to set whether to print a transmission repor
259. curity Settings Account Limit Displays the Account No XXX Account Limit screen Select Copy Service Fax Service Scan Service or Print Service to specify feature access permissions and account limits for that service Feature Access Displays the Account No xxx Feature Access screen Select the access permissions for each service for that account Account Limit Displays the Account No xxx Service Limit screen Enter an account limit to specify the maximum number of pages allowed to be processed by that account The maximum number can be entered within the range of 1 9 999 999 pages User Role Allows you to select user authority to give to the user Select from User System Administrator and Account Administrator e User Gives the user general user privileges e System Administrator Gives the user System Administrator privileges However operating mailboxes and job flow sheets and changing the passcode of the System Administrator are not authorized Account Administrator Gives the user Account Administrator privileges The user has the same privileges as the System Administrator but only for account management Add This User to Authorization Group Allows you to select for the user an authorization group that has been registered under Authentication Security Settings By default users belong to the DEFAULT authorization group NOTE The User Role button appears when you have enab
260. d NOTE Depending on the type of paper used and the operating environment the paper may not be fed into the machine properly or print quality may be negatively affected 27 2 Paper and Other Media Output Trays Duplex Module Paper Type Weight g m Center Tray e shes lence t Office Buplex ray Finisher Finisher LX Module Plain O O 0 O O Plain Reload O O O O Recycled O O O O O Custom Paper O O O O O 1 5 60 105 Punched 0 O 0 0 0 Letterhead O O 0 0 O Pre Printed 0 O 0 oO O Other O O O 0 O Lightweight 56 63 O O 0 O O Heavyweight 106 169 O O O O Bee tink Tiel 5 lt Bond Paper 170 215 O O O O Envelope 170 215 O O O Labels 0 O O Transparency O O O O Available blank Not available 1 Plain Reload refers to paper already printed on one side 28 3 Maintenance This chapter describes the maintenance tasks that are required periodically to maintain the machine in proper working order Ordering Supplies A variety of supplies are available for the machine including machine specific consumables such as a toner cartridge a drum cartridge staple cartridges and refills General use supplies are also available such as glass cleaners cleaning solvents paper and media products To obtain supplies contact the local Xerox Sales Representative giving the company name the product number
261. d lt space gt characters e Dial Type Specifies tone or pulse dialing e Line Type Specifies subscriber line PSTN or private branch exchange PBX line type Internet Fax Control This feature allows you to define Internet Fax control functions 7 Select Internet Fax Control in internet Fax Control the Features menu Items Current Settings 1 Internet Fax Path Via E mail Server 2 Chan ge the re qu ired setti ngs 2 Broadcast Intemet Fax Profile TIFF S J E Bri ti al Use the scroll buttons to switch 2224 lelivery Confirmation Method Read Receipts can betwee n screens 5 Incoming Internet Fax Print Options Basic Headers and Message y 3 Select Close Internet Fax Path Specifies the Internet Fax path Select Via E mail Server to send through a mail server Select Direct P2P to bypass the SMTP server and send directly to an Internet Fax capable machine Broadcast Internet Fax Profile Specifies the default Internet Fax profile for broadcasting For more information on Internet Fax profile refer to Internet Fax Profile on page 110 116 System Settings NOTE Although TIFF S can be received by any remote machine supporting Internet Fax TIFF F and TIFF J may not be received When you set to TIFF F or TIFF J check the capability of the remote machine in advance Broadcast Starting Rate Specifies the default starting rate for broadcasting Internet
262. d Change Settings Select Enabled and then Save 6S MN AH A Next establish TCP IP if you use an IP address for your network environment 7 Select Connectivity amp Network Setup in the Group menu 2 Select Protocol Settings in the Features menu 3 Under TCP IP IP Mode select IPv4 Mode IPv6 Mode or Dual Stack When IPv4 Mode or Dual Stack is selected in step 3 4 Select IP Address Resolution and then Change Settings 5 Select a method for establishing an IP address from DHCP BOOTP RARP DHCP Autonet and STATIC and then select Save 253 8 Printer Environment Settings NOTE Use the DHCP server together with the Windows Internet Name Server WINS server If you selected STATIC in step 5 then proceed to step 6 to configure the protocol settings Otherwise proceed to step 12 6 Select IPv4 IP Address and then Change Settings 7 Use the keypad on the screen to enter an IP address for the machine in the format XXX XXX XXX XXX When you have finished entering all values select Save 8 Select IPv4 Subnet Mask and then Change Settings 9 Using the same method as in step 7 enter a subnet mask 10 Select IPv4 Gateway Address and then Change Settings 11 Using the same method as in step 7 enter a gateway address NOTE If you do not wish to set the gateway address leave this field blank 12 Select IPv4 IP Filter and t
263. d machine supplies reporting Registration Setup 1 Enable Proxy Server Displays the Proxy Server Settings page For details on the page refer to Proxy Server on page 194 e 2 Register with Xerox Communication Server Displays the Xerox Communication Server page For details on the page refer to Xerox Communication Server on page 207 3 Setup E mail Notification Billing Meter Read Alerts Displays the Billing Meter Read Alerts page For details on the page refer to Billing Meter Read Alerts on page 180 e 4 Setup E mail Notification Supplies Data Sent Alerts Displays the Supplies Data Sent Alerts page For details on the page refer to Supplies Data Sent Alerts on page 180 Status Meter Assistant Displays whether the Meter Assistant feature is enabled e Supplies Assistant Displays whether the Supplies Assistant feature is enabled Meter Assistant Last Meter Billing Read Displays the last billing meter read reported to the Xerox Communication Server Meter Assistant Displays whether the Meter Assistant feature is enabled e Date Displays the date on which the last billing meter read was reported e Time Displays the time at which the last billing meter read was reported e Billing Meter Displays the type of the last billing meter read e Count Displays the value of the information reported to the Xerox Communication Server Supplies Assistant Last
264. d IPv6 Address ou 93 Auto Display of Login Screen eens 69 Auto Job Promotion c cccccceceeeeeeeeeesectteeeees 77 Auto Job Release cccccccceeeceeeeeeeeeettttteeeees 67 Auto Paper Off 2 c cccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeees 88 Auto Print caria IAS 67 Auto Reduce On Receipt 2 2 0 eeseeeeeees 112 Auto Tray Switching oocoononccccnnaciccccnncannccncnnnnnos 22 Auto Tray Switching Control esseen 71 automatically printed reports lists 57 B Background Pattern ncocconnocccccnnoconcccconannccncnnnnns 76 Background Suppress Photo 8 Text 89 Background Suppression oococcccccnnccccccccncnns 85 106 Background Suppression B W Copy 72 Background Suppression Scan Jobs 72 Banner Sheet c ccseeeccccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaees 104 Banner Sheet Tray eesse 104 Base LONG cias Dadas 68 Batch Send cuicos 112 Bates Stamp Edit Prefix 1 to 8 89 Bates Stamp Number of Digits 87 Bates Stamp Position oooooooccccnnnnccinnnccconconcncnno 88 Bates Stamp Starting Number 87 Bates Stamp Stored Prefix eseeees 87 before using the machine 13 Billing Data List porerne aaraa n 55 Billing Information seenen 59 BONJOUF toilet A EA 91 problem solving neseser 374 Booklet Creation Cover Tray ssec 88 Booklet Maker eceeceecceeeeeeeeeeee
265. d characters Check the path name 018 577 The specified file name may contain invalid characters Check the file name 018 578 The specified server or tree name does not exist Check the network cable connection on the machine Also check if your computer is connected to the Netware server and if the server and tree names are correct If the error persists run DSREPAIR at the server console on the Netware server 018 579 The hard disk on the Netware server may be full Check if your computer is connected to the Netware server and check the free space of the server If the problem persists run DSREPAIR at the server console on the Netware server 018 580 The specified volume name does not exist on the Netware server Check if your computer is connected to the Netware server and if the volume name is correct If the problem persists run DSREPAIR at the server console on the Netware server 018 581 The specified folder path does not exist on the Netware server Check if your computer is connected to the Netware server and if the folder path is correct If the problem persists run DSREPAIR at the server console on the Netware server 018 582 Access to the Netware server was denied Check if your computer is connected to the Netware server and if you are authorized to access and work with the Netware server If the problem persists run DSREPAIR at the server console on the Netware server 018
266. d in a mailbox are automatically deleted You can set how long documents are kept and what time they are deleted You can also select whether individual documents are deleted or not 7 Select Stored Document Stored Document Settings Settings in the Features items Current Settings 1 Mailbox Document Expiration Date off menu 2 Stored Document Expiration Date off 2 Change the required settings 3 Print Job Confirmation Screen Disabled 4 Min Passcode Length for Stored Job O Digit s 3 Sel ES Select Close Mailbox Document Expiration Date Specifies whether to delete documents from mailboxes when the specified period of time elapses Enter the number of days to store documents in the range from 1 to 14 days and enter the time documents are to be deleted using the scroll buttons or the numeric keypad Stored Document Expiration Date Specifies the retention period for stored documents Selecting On allows you to specify a retention period in the range of 4 to 23 hours in 1 hour increments NOTE If the machine is turned off before the specified period of time elapses the stored document will be deleted when the machine is turned back on Print Job Confirmation Screen Specifies whether to display a print confirmation screen on the control panel before the machine prints a printjob Selecting Enabled displays a confirmation screen and allows you to change the number of pri
267. d provides information such as the supported paper and media troubleshooting tips how to configure network and security settings and how to replace consumables Quick Network Setup Guide This guide is intended for the System Administrator and provides TCP IP setup procedures Quick Use Guide This guide is intended for general users and describes how to use some useful features on the machine and how to replace toner and drum cartridges Quick Scan Features Setup Guide This guide is intended for the System Administrator and describes how to configure scanning services NOTE Please note that the screens shown in these guides apply to a fully configured machine and therefore may not exactly represent the configuration being used 16 2 Paper and Other Media The machine is designed to use various paper types and other media This chapter provides information on loading paper and other types of media into the machine Loading Paper The machine can be equipped with various paper trays Depending on the machine configuration up to six paper trays are available including the Envelope Tray This section provides information on how to load paper into each type of tray NOTE Make sure the side and rear paper guides on the trays are properly positioned to match the size of paper loaded If there is a gap between the paper stack and the guides paper may not be fed into the machine properly or paper jams may occur For infor
268. d to access the machine Refer to CentreWare Internet Services on page 147 11 When you have finished establishing TCP IP select Close on the Protocol Settings screen Computer Setup Test Print Install a print driver on each client computer that will be sending print jobs to the machine and map to the machine as a printer Refer to the HTML document on the PCL Print Driver CD ROM for additional information ipp needs to be entered at the end of the string in order for the printer to be detected If you specify the printer using the IP address use one of the following formats depending on your machine configuration The IPv6 format is supported on Windows Vista only An IPv6 address needs to be enclosed in square brackets For IPv4 http xxx xxx xxx xxx ipp For IPv6 http XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX pp To make sure that the machine has been installed on the network correctly a test print should be submitted from each client computer Perform the following steps 7 Open a document on a client computer 2 Select the machine as the printer to which the selected document will be sent 3 Print the document on the machine and verify that it prints correctly 4 Make sure that the driver is installed on every computer that will be sending jobs to the machine 5 Repeat the test for all computers that will be sending jobs to the machine The installation process is now complete 265 8 Pr
269. d to specify the inquiry interval period for the duration of printing until all the data received has been printed The interval is set up in seconds The screen of the client is refreshed each time the information is returned NOTE Long file names will be truncated NOTE Information for a maximum of 64 print instructions can be displayed NOTE If two or more types of print languages modes are set up on a single workstation identical job numbers may be displayed when an inquiry command Ipq is issued Examples To inquire about the print data received by a printer named fxPS enter the following command Slpq PfxPS 244 UNIX TCP IP C Option e To display a printer named fxPS in long format enter the following command Slpq P xPS 1 On SunOS the C option can be used to specify the print format if the machine prints with the PostScript language in spool mode This section explains the functions which can be specified and printing operations which will be affected using the C option NOTE When the PostScript logical printer that was configured using CentreWare Internet Services and the C option have been specified simultaneously some of the actions cannot be guaranteed to work Also when specifying the PostScript logical printer as a default printer on UNIX it is recommended not to use the C option Function The following items can be set up using the C option Selecting a paper tray When
270. d to the required print server Use PCL Print Driver CD ROM or CentreWare Internet Services to specify the correct file server name tree name context name and active mode The file server goes down Select Network Neighborhood of Windows to search for the file server Activate the file server 367 15 Problem Solving Cause Confirmation Method Action A printer having the same machine name exists on the network Switch off the machine and then use NWADMIN to check that the printer object is in the job standby status Use PCL Print Driver CD ROM to specify another machine name The Netware port is not activated Print the System Settings List and then check that the port is activated Activate the Netware port Print the System Settings List When using IPX SPX check that the network number remains set to 00000000 Netware server down When using TCP IP check that the IP address remains set to 0 0 0 0 fixed IP address not specified or an address supply server DHCP server down When using IPX SPX start the Netware server When using TCP IP set the fixed IP address or start the address supply server DHCP Invalid printer configuration Use NWADMIN or PCONSOLE to check that the printer configuration is correct Use NWADMIN or PCONSOLE to set the following items Printer type Parallel Port LPT 1 Printer Location
271. dditional resources may be required on the machine depending on the solution For further information contact your Xerox Sales Representative 431 16 Appendix Configuring XEIP At your workstation 1 2 3 4 Open your web browser Enter the IP address of the machine in the Address or Location field Click Enter to access CentreWare Internet Services Enable the machine for EIP applications a Click the Properties tab b Click the Services folder and then the Custom Services link c On the Custom Services page select the Enabled button d Click Apply Generate a digital certificate if needed a Click the Properties tab b Click the Security folder and then the Machine Digital Certificate Management link c Click the Create New Self Signed Certificate button The Machine Digital Certificate Management page refreshes and displays the Self Signed Certificate area d In the Self Signed Certificate area click Apply Enable SSL a Click the Properties tab b Click the Security folder and then the SSL TLS Settings link c If prompted enter your System Administrator ID and passcode The default System Administrator ID and passcode are 11111 and x admin respectively d In the SSL TLS Settings area on the HTTP SSL TLS Communication line place a check mark in the Enabled box e Click Apply f If changes were made to the SSL
272. do not wish to use the IP filter feature select Disabled NOTE Use CentreWare Internet Services to register the IP addresses which are not allowed to access the machine Refer to CentreWare Internet Services on page 147 73 When you have finished establishing TCP IP select Close on the Protocol Settings screen When IPv6 Mode or Dual Stack is selected in step 2 3 Set IPv6 Address Manual Configuration NOTE Select Enabled when the machine is connected to a network on which IPv6 stateless address autoconfiguration is disabled or when you want to set a static IPv6 address If you selected Enabled in step 3 proceed to step 4 Otherwise proceed to step 10 4 Select Manually Configured IPv6 Address and then Change Settings 264 IPP Internet Printing Protocol 5 Use the keypad on the screen to enter an IP address for the machine in the format XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX Select Save 6 Select Manually Configured IPv6 Prefix and then Change Settings 7 Enter an IP address prefix and then select Save 8 Select Manually Configured IPv6 Gateway and then Change Settings 9 Using the same method as in step 5 enter a gateway address 70 Select IPv6 IP Filter and then select Enabled or Disabled NOTE If you do not wish to use the IP filter feature select Disabled NOTE Use CentreWare Internet Services to register the IP addresses which are not allowe
273. dress Host Name amp Port Displays the primary LDAP server IP address and port number LDAP Server Displays the directory application to use This is a display only item Backup IP Address Host Name amp Port Displays the secondary LDAP server IP address and port number Search Directory Root Displays the distinguished name that represents the search start point e Search Properties Displays Imported Heading This is a display only item Common Name Specify the name attribute type E mail Address Specify the e mail address attribute type Business Phone Specify the business phone attribute type Office Specify the office attribute type Business Address Specify the business address attribute type Home Specify the home attribute type LDAP Authentication LDAP Authentication Authentication Method Specify the LDAP authentication method 192 Properties Feature Setting items Connectivity Protocols continued LDAP continued Attribute of Typed User Name Specify the typed user name attribute Attribute of Login User Name Specify the login user name attribute Use Added Text String Specify whether to use additional user name characters Text String Added to User Name Enter the text string to be added to the user name LDAP Group Access e System Administrator Authorization System Administrator Access Group Allows y
274. e Ethernet 802 3 Selects IEEE802 3 frame type Ethernet 802 2 Selects IEEE802 3 IEEE802 2 frame type Ethernet SNAP Selects IEEE802 3 IEEE802 2 SNAP frame type Queue Poll Interval Allows you to set the time interval from when print data enters the print queue until printing starts Printer Server Name Enter the printer server PServer name e New Print Server Password Enter the PServer password e Retype New Print Server Password Re enter the PServer password for verification Active Mode Select the Active Mode for the machine when using NetWare Directory PServer Mode Select this when using the machine server mode in directory service Bindery PServer Mode Select this when using the machine server mode in bindery service Number of searches Enter the maximum number of searches TBCP Filter Select the check box to enable TBCP Filter when processing PostScript data This is available only when the optional PostScript kit is installed When the transmission data includes binary or EPS data disable this feature Service Advertising Protocol SAP Protocol Displays Enabled This is a display only item SAP Frequency Displays 60 seconds This is a display only item Bindery Settings File Server Name Enter the NetWare file server name NetWare Directory Services NDS NDS Tree Enter the NDS tree name NDS Context Enter t
275. e Button 3 R E Preset 1 5 Reduce Enlarge Button 4 R E Preset 2 Paper Supply Button 2 to 4 Specifies the paper trays for paper tray buttons 2 to 4 shown in Paper Supply on the Copy screen This allocation allows you to easily selectthe paper trays you frequently use with the exception of Trays 3 and 4 of the optional High Capacity Tandem Tray Reduce Enlarge Button 3 and 4 Specifies the magnifications for Reduce Enlarge buttons 3 and 4 shown in Reduce Enlarge on the Copy screen This allocation allows you to easily select the copy magnifications you frequently use 84 System Settings Copy Defaults This feature allows you to set the default for each copy feature The copy settings are returned to the defaults set here when the power is switched on when the Energy Saver mode is cancelled or when the lt Clear All gt button is pressed If you set defaults for the features you frequently use you can quickly copy documents without changing the settings each time 7 Select Copy Defaults in the A Features menu Items Current Settings 1 Paper Supply Auto Paper Select A 2 Change the required settings 2 Reduce Entro 00 3 Original Type Text Use the side tabs to switch ada Change between screens 5 Sharpness Normal Y 3 Select Close Paper Supply Specifies the default for the Paper Supply feature on the Copy screen NOTE If
276. e which allows you to enter the following items Self Signed Certificate e Public Key Size Select the size of the public key to be assigned to the certificate e Issuer Enter the issuer of the certificate using up to 64 characters e Apply Click this button to generate the certificate Upload Signed Certificate Allows you to upload a certificate to the machine You can upload PKCS 7 and PKCS 12 format certificates This button becomes active when SSL communication is enabled Click this button to display a page which allows you to enter the following items e Password Enter the password to the certificate using up to 36 characters e Retype Password Re enter the password for verification File Name Click the Browse button to specify the file to import Import Imports the certificate to the machine 219 7 CentreWare Internet Services Feature Setting items Security IP Sec Allows you to set up the IP Sec Security Architecture for Internet Protocol feature Protocol Select whether or not to enable the IPSec feature IKE Authentication Method Select the IKE authentication method from Pre Shared Key and Digital Signature Shared Key Specify the shared secret to be used when IKE Authentication is set to Pre Shared Key Verify Shared Key Re enter the shared secret for verification This is displayed only when IKE Authentication is set to Pre Shared K
277. e between screens E PI 3 Select Close Lighten Darken Specifies the default for the Lighten Darken feature on the General Settings screen Original Type Specifies the default for the Original Type feature on the General Settings screen Resolution Specifies the default for the Resolution feature on the General Settings screen Mixed Sized Originals Specifies the default for the Mixed Sized Originals feature on the Layout Adjustment screen Confirmation Options Specifies the default for the Confirmation Options feature on the Fax Options screen Delivery Receipts Read Receipts Specifies the default for the Delivery Receipts Read Receipts feature on the Internet Fax Options screen NOTE You can use Read Receipts only if the remote Internet Fax machine supports the feature Starting Rate Specifies the default for the Starting Rate feature on the Fax Options and Internet Fax Options screens Delay Start Specific Time Specifies the default for the Priority Send Delay Start feature on the Fax Options screen Transmission Header Text Specifies the default for the Transmission Header Text feature on the Fax Options and Internet Fax Options screens Internet Fax Profile Specifies the default for the Internet Fax Profile feature on the Internet Fax Options screen NOTE Although TIFF S can be received by any remote machine supporting Internet Fax TIFF
278. e lt Start gt button to continue the job 033 724 Unable to receive the image data because the data size that can be received per a fax transmission exceeds its upper limit Request the sender to divide the document into smaller segments to send or lower the resolution If the problem persists check if memory is installed correctly If the problem persists contact the Xerox Welcome Center 033 725 The hard disk is full Delete unnecessary data on the hard disk to increase the available hard disk space 033 726 The received document was printed single sided The 2 sided printing feature is not available for a mixed size document 033 727 The orientation of the received pages could not be changed because the data size was too large They were printed without rotation 033 728 The Auto Print formatting of the received fax document was interrupted by a manual print operation No user action is required The machine will automatically resume the Auto Print job after the manual printing is done 033 731 The Auto Print processing for the received fax document was interrupted by a manual print operation No user action is required 033 733 A fax error occurred Switch off the machine and then switch it on again Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 033 734 Fax printing was suspended because a job report was generated while the fax print job was being prepared No user action is required 411 15 Problem Solv
279. e select Configure for Authentication System The Authentication System page appears Enabling Specific Xerox Secure Access Settings 1 A WwW N Open your web browser and enter the TCP IP address of the machine in the Address or Location field Click Enter Click the Properties tab Expand the Security folder and then the Remote Authentication Servers folder Click Xerox Secure Access Settings In Xerox Secure Access Settings a Enter text into the Default Prompt and Default Title boxes to create the prompt and prompt title that will be displayed on the machine s screen informing users how to authenticate themselves at the machine NOTE If the Default Prompt and Default Title have been configured on the Secure Access server then that information will override the information entered here b Select the Enable box for Local Login to allow users to log in locally to the machine c Select the Enable box for Get Accounting Code to get user accounting data from a networked Accounting Server if used d Configure the Connection Time Out setting e Click Apply 338 Xerox Secure Access Setup Adding the Secure Access to the Server 7 On the Windows 2000 desktop from the Start menu click Settings and then Printers On the Windows XP desktop from the Start menu click Printers and Faxes On the Windows Vista desktop from the Start menu click Control Pane
280. e to change the displayed value or select Confirm if no change is required A If you selected Change Value enter the required value in the New Value field 5 Select Save PDF Allows you to set parameter values and a password for PDF direct printing NOTE This feature is only available with the PostScript driver 7 Select PDF on the Print Mode im Close screen sew password 2 Select the required option Setup Allows you to set emulation parameter item values for PDF direct printing For a list of PDF parameters refer to PDF Direct Printing on page 430 57 5 Machine Status 7 Select Setup on the PDF PDF Setup screen Item Number Current Value 2 Entera 3 digit parameter item gt E CJ Ctm number in the Item Number field Change Value 3 Select Change Value to change the displayed value or select Confirm if no change is required 4 Ifyou selected Change Value enter the required value in the New Value field 5 Select Save Password Allows you to enter a password to restrict access to PDF direct printing 7 Select Password on the PDF mro Pawn Cancel Next screen Enter a password using the Passcode en 3 Select Next 4 Re enter the password 5 Select Save Overwrite Hard Disk This feature displays the overwrite status of the hard disk NOTE This option is displayed when
281. e 84 Reconfirm E mail Recipient ceeceeee 69 Reconfirm Fax Recipient scccseeeeeeeeees 69 Reconfirm Internet Fax Recipient 69 Reduce 8 5x11 SEF Original to A4 SEF 113 Reduce Enlarge ccccccccccceesssscccetessccceetneneecees 85 Reduce Enlarge Button i is 84 Reduce Enlarge Presets Copy Service Settings 2 0 eeeeeeeeeesteeeeeeenees 90 Reduce Enlarge Presets Fax Service Settings 114 Reduce Enlarge Presets Scan Service Settings ce eeeeeeeeteeeeeeenaes 108 Re enter Broadcast Recipients 0 111 Re enter Group Recipients csceceeeees 111 Re enter Recipients cceeeseeeeeneeceeeeeeeeeees 111 Re enter Speed Dial Recipients 111 Relay Broadcast Report eseese 57 73 remote access authentication 310 remote authentication eee 308 332 Remote Authentication Server Settings Connectivity amp Network Setup eee 96 removing drum cartridge cooocoonnccccnnnnnococininonanncnr nana nn 31 toner cartridge ciionncoci nnnniicinnncccccnnnnnic s 33 replacing CUM CartridQe rasinis 30 toner Cartridge cocoonnnccconconnonnncnnnnencnonarnnccnos 33 Reports Common Service Settings 72 reports lists printing automatically 57 Reset User Accounts Accounting 135 Reset User Accounts Authentication 141 Resol
282. e Billing Administrator E mail Addresses Enter the e mail addresses of the recipients of Billing Meter Read e mails You can specify up to five e mail addresses Send Alert Select whether the e mail is sent when billing meter reads are reported or if registration with the Xerox Communication Server is cancelled Supplies Data Sent Alerts Allows you to set up the automatic notification of the machine s supplies consumables status Recipient Group Addresses e Supplies Administrator E mail Addresses Enter the e mail addresses of the recipients of the Supplies Data e mails You can specify up to five e mail addresses Send Alert Select whether an e mail is sent if registration with the Xerox Communication Server is cancelled Billing amp Billing Information Counters Current Billing Information Provides the current readings of the machine counters Serial Number Identifies the machine s serial number e Billing Meter Identifies the total number of impressions Usage Counters Usage Counters e Usage Counters Provides the current readings for the entire set of machine counters It displays the usage amounts for impressions sheets images sent and images received 180 Properties Feature Setting items General Setup SMart eSolutions Allows you to set up the SMart eSolutions feature which enables automatic billing meter reading an
283. e allows you to create edit or view job flow sheets Sheet Type Select the type of job flow sheets to be displayed in the Job Flow Sheets List The Personal option is available only when the Accounting feature is enabled User Name When Personal is selected for Sheet Type select the user name of the job flow sheets to be displayed This is displayed only when the Accounting feature is enabled Sheet Order Specify the display order of job flow sheets Display Job Flow Sheets List Displays the Job Flow Sheets List page Job Flow Sheets List The following table shows the information fields on the Job Flow Sheets List page Delete Deletes the selected job flow sheet Sheet Type Displays the type of the job flow sheet Job Flow Sheet Name Displays the name of the job flow sheet Last updated updated Displays the date and time when the job flow sheet was last 169 7 CentreWare Internet Services Edit Job Flow Sheet Displays the Job Flow Sheets Common Attributes page where you can edit the selected job flow sheet NOTE This button becomes active only when logged in as the System Administrator Create Job Flow Sheet Displays the Job Flow Sheets Common Attributes page where you can create a new job flow sheet NOTE This button becomes active only when logged in as the System Administrator Job Flow Sheets Common Attributes The followin
284. e domain name to specify the machine use the following format http myhost example com If you use the IP address to specify the machine use one of the following formats depending on your machine configuration The IPv6 format is supported on Windows Vista only An IPv6 address needs to be enclosed in square brackets IPv4 http XxX XXX XXX XXX IPv6 http XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX NOTE If you have changed the port number from the default port number 80 append the number to the Internet address as follows In the following examples the port number is 8080 Domain name http myhost example com 8080 IPv4 http Xxx XXX XXX xXxXx 8080 IPv6 http XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 8080 3 Verify that the home page of CentreWare Internet Services is displayed The CentreWare Internet Services installation process is now completed If the test fails refer to Centre Ware Internet Services in the Problem Solving chapter on page 375 NOTE If the Accounting feature is enabled you may be required to enter a user ID and passcode if one is set up NOTE When your access to CentreWare Internet Services is encrypted enter https followed by the Internet address instead of http 150 Selecting Transport Protocols Selecting Transport Protocols When using the NetWare SMB or SNMP port change the transport protocol if required e NetWare IPX SPX TCP IP e SMB N
285. e generated just before the machine performs auto clear Base Tone Specifies the volume level of the base tone generated when you toggle settings The machine emits a base tone when it exits the interrupted mode Screen Button Settings This feature allows you to customize the initial screen and select the initial language to be displayed on the touch screen 7 Select Screen Button Settings Screen Button Settings in the Features menu Items Current Settings 1 Screen Default at Power On 2 Change the required settings ZSevico Siren Defeat Tr Snes JA o 3 Service Screen After Auto Clear Last Selection Screen Use the side tabs to switch 4 Auto Display of Login Screen Off Cane between screens 5 Al Services y 3 Select Close Screen Default at Power On Specifies the initial screen to be displayed when the machine is switched on Set the preset initial screen to the All Services Job Status or Machine Status screen For information on the Job Status and Machine Status screens referto Job Status on page 39 and Machine Status on page 49 68 System Settings Service Screen Default Specifies the default features to be displayed when canceling the Energy Saver mode Use the scroll buttons to switch between screens Service Screen After Auto Clear Specifies the screen to be displayed after the machine performs Auto Clear Auto Display of Login Screen Specifies w
286. e information refer to the following Charge Print page 43 Private Charge Print page 44 Secure Print page 44 Sample Set page 45 Delayed Print page 46 Public Mailbox page 46 Undelivered Faxes page 47 7 Press the lt Job Status gt button Sa Soc Pane Jobs amp More on the control panel 2 S e e ct th e S ecure P ri nt J o bs 8 m Charge Print D Private Charge Print J Sample Set M O re ta b E m Delayed Print DB Public Mailbox m Undelivered Faxes 3 Select the required option 42 Secure Print Jobs amp More Charge Print The Charge Print feature temporarily stores documents on the machine per billing ID The feature prevents unauthorized printing by requiring users to log in to the machine before printing Documents without a billing ID are stored under No User ID and do not require user login to be printed NOTE Billing IDs can be set up on the print driver For more information refer to the online help provided for the print driver NOTE This feature is displayed when one of the following is selected under Tools gt System Settings gt Authentication Security Settings gt Authentication gt Charge Private Print Settings gt Receive Control in the System Administration mode Save in Charge Print According to Print Auditron gt Job Login Failure gt Save in Charge Print According to Print Auditron gt Job without
287. e is displayed load a new staple cartridge into the Booklet Maker The Booklet Maker contains two staple cartridges 7 Make sure that the machine is not operating and open the side cover of the finisher 2 Hold the tabs on both sides of the booklet staple cartridge and pull the cartridge out of the finisher 3 Hold the tabs on both sides of the new booklet staple cartridge and insert it into the original position until it clicks NOTE If you have trouble inserting the cartridge make sure that the staples in the cartridge are properly in place 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to replace the other booklet staple cartridge 5 Close the side cover of the finisher NOTE If the side cover is not completely closed a message will appear and the machine will not operate Emptying the Hole Punch Waste Container Optional The Hole Punch Unit for the Office Finisher LX contains a hole punch waste container When the hole punch waste container becomes full a message appears on the touch screen When the message is displayed empty the hole punch waste container Make sure to discard all paper chads when emptying the hole punch waste container If you do not empty the container completely the container becomes full before a 37 3 Maintenance message stating to empty the container appears again and this can cause a breakdown of the machine NOTE Make sure you empty the hole punch waste cont
288. e lines the Fax Billing feature cannot be set to ON Contact the Xerox Welcome Center to disable the Fax Billing feature or to change the machine to the single line configuration 033 363 A fax error occurred Switch off the machine and then switch it on again Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 033 710 The document for polling has been deleted Store the document again 033 712 The memory is full Delete unnecessary data 033 713 A fax error occurred Switch off the machine and then switch it on again Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 033 716 The mailbox specified from the remote machine does not exist Register the mailbox on the machine 033 717 The mailbox passcode specified on the remote machine is incorrect Notify the correct passcode 033 718 There are no fax documents or no documents for polling in the mailbox specified on the remote machine If required store documents in the mailbox 033 719 The fax job was cancelled when the machine was switched off and on Send the document again 033 721 A fax error occurred Switch off the machine and then switch it on again Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 033 722 The scan job was cancelled The document is jammed inside the machine or the number of scanned pages has reached the limit value If the problem is a document jam clear the jam first Reload only the document pages that have not been scanned and press th
289. e of the tray NOTE Do not load paper above the maximum fill line NOTE When making single double sided copies on perforated paper load the paper to feed the opposite side of the perforated edge first Feeding the perforated edge first may cause paper jams 4 Ifthe paper guides have been moved slide the guides to just touch the edge of the paper NOTE When loading standard size paper set the guides onto the notches on the tray to match the paper size The machine recognizes 8K 16K paper as standard sizes even though the paper trays have no notches for these sizes 5 Close the paper tray NOTE Paper can be loaded either short edge feed or long edge feed 6 Set the machine to detect the paper size automatically or Long edge feed Short edge feed manually specify the required LEF SEF size For more information refer to Paper Size in the Setups chapter on page 70 NOTE Paper sizes detected by the machine vary depending on the system settings For more information refer to Paper Size Settings in the Setups chapter on page 78 High Capacity Tandem Tray Trays 3 amp 4 The High Capacity Tandem Tray Trays 3 and 4 allows you to load up to 2 000 sheets of paper NOTE You cannot load custom size paper into the High Capacity Tandem Tray 7 Pull out Tray 3 or 4 The elevator in the tray lowers 2 Pl
290. e with up to 32 characters Retype Administrator s Passcode Re enter the System Administrator s passcode for verification Maximum Login Attempts Specify the number of System Administrator login attempts before reporting a login failure 223 7 CentreWare Internet Services Support This page provides support information for the machine including a link for software updates and contacts for technical support Follow the steps below to select the features available on the Support tab 7 Click Support on the Header Panel of the home page The Support page is displayed 2 Set the required options NOTE The System Administrator can edit the information on this page except for the software upgrade website Software Upgrades Click this link to access our software upgrade website http www xerox com For information on how to upgrade the software version of the machine refer to Machine Software Upgrade in the Appendix chapter on page 430 System Administrator Name Identifies the System Administrator Phone Number Displays the telephone number of the System Administrator Location Identifies the location of the System Administrator Xerox Support Customer Support Phone Number Displays the telephone number of the customer support representative Services Phone Number Displays the telephone number of the service representative Supply Phone Number Displays the telephone number of the cons
291. each e mail transmission Confirmation sheets can be always printed not printed or printed only upon an error Add Me to To Field Select whether to automatically add the sender s address to the To field Add Me to CC Field Select whether to automatically add the sender s address to the CC field Edit E mail Recipients Specify whether to allow edit of the To CC and From fields Public Address Book Allows you to import or retrieve address information in CSV format When a new Address Book in CSV format is imported all previous addresses are replaced with the new data Address Book File CSV Allows you to import address information into the machine Specify the file name or click Browse to locate the CSV file and click Import Now NOTE Do not open the CSV file using software such as Microsoft Excel Once opened in the software it is automatically edited and the edited file cannot be used in the machine Map Existing Address Book Allows you to download the address information in a CSV file Click this button to download the CSV file Internet Fax Allows you to configure Internet fax settings Defaults Message Displays the default Internet fax message Signature Displays the default Internet fax signature Confirmation Sheet Displays whether to have a confirmation sheet printed with every Internet fax transmission or only upon an error
292. eate View User AT Accounts in the Group menu UseriD User Name Not in Use E Go to 2 Select an item number 0002 Not in Use LA oeo 0003 Not in Use gt 3 Select Create Delete 0004 Not in Use m y 4 Nhen a new user account is to be created a keyboard screen OO E sae is displayed Enter a user ID COR Ws A and then select Save BeBe BeeweeE Je E JO JJOO More Characters Space J eJl gt com 5 Configure the required settings recount oom create Dete 6 Select Close e a A mm e Passcode tar e User ID Allows you to enter a user ID using the screen keyboard You can enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters including spaces User Name Allows you to enter a user name using the screen keyboard You can enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters including spaces Passcode Allows you to enter a passcode using the screen keyboard You can enter 4 to 12 alphanumeric characters 133 6 Setups NOTE The Passcode button appears when you have chosen the use of a passcode and you have enabled Login to Local Accounts in Authentication Security Settings E mail Address Allows you to enter the E mail address The specified address is the sender s address displayed on the E mail screen Enter up to 128 characters NOTE The E mail Address button appears when you have enabled Login to Local Accounts in Authentication Se
293. eate and edit mailboxes Mailbox icons Clicking the icon of a registered mailbox displays the Mailbox Document List page for that mailbox Mailbox Number Displays the mailbox numbers Clicking the number of a registered mailbox displays the Mailbox Document List page for that mailbox 165 7 CentreWare Internet Services Mailbox Name Displays the names of mailboxes Clicking the name of a registered mailbox displays the Mailbox Document List page for that mailbox Number of Documents in this Mailbox Displays the number of documents stored in each mailbox Document List Displays the Mailbox Document List page where you can set the document processing settings for the selected mailbox Delete Deletes the selected mailbox Edit Displays the Edit Mailbox page which allows you to edit the selected mailbox Create Displays the Mailbox Setup page which allows you to create the selected mailbox Mailbox Document List The following table shows the information fields on the Mailbox Document List page Mailbox Number Displays the number of the selected mailbox Mailbox Name Displays the name of the selected mailbox Document Number Displays the numbers of the documents stored in the mailbox Document Name Displays the names of the documents Stored Date Displays the dates on which the documents were stored Compression Format Displays the compression formats of the documen
294. eception mode Select from Auto Receive and Manual Receive Border Limit Specifies the value to divide a document onto two pages when the received documents are longer than the loaded paper size Enter a value within the range of 0 127 mm 0 5 0 inches using the scroll buttons or the numeric keypad on the control panel We recommend you use this feature with the following Auto Reduce on Receipt feature Auto Reduce On Receipt Specifies whether to reduce and reproduce an image onto a single page if the received document length exceeds the length of the loaded paper but is within the value set in the Border Limit feature We recommend you use this feature with the Border Limit feature If this feature is set to No and the document length exceeds the paper length image loss may occur 112 System Settings Tray for Printing Incoming Faxes Specifies the trays for incoming faxes You can select one or more trays except Tray 5 Bypass If the trays selected here run out of paper Tray 5 Bypass is used 2 Pages Up On Receipt Specifies whether to print consecutively received two documents onto one page It is effective in saving paper If the number of received pages is odd a blank page will be added at the end If the sizes of received pages are different the larger size will be used NOTE If the same size paper as the received document size is available that paper will be printed even when you set this feature
295. ecification protocol error 68 entry already exists during the address book query The entry already exists update related problem Check the LDAP server status 018 769 An LDAP server protocol error occurred in the address book operation The server returned the RFC2251 specification protocol error 69 object class mods prohibited during the address book query Object class modifications are prohibited update related problem Check the LDAP server status 018 770 An LDAP server protocol error occurred in the address book operation The server returned the RFC2251 specification protocol error 70 search result too large during the address book query Review the search conditions and search root entry then repeat the same operation Contact the network administrator if the problem persists 018 771 An LDAP server protocol error occurred in the address book operation The server returned the RFC2251 specification protocol error 71 affects multiple DSAs during the address book query Check the LDAP server status 018 780 An LDAP server protocol error occurred in the address book operation The server returned the RFC2251 specification protocol error 80 unknown error during the address book query Check the LDAP server status 401 15 Problem Solving Code Description and Remedy 018 781 An LDAP server protocol error occurred in the address book operation The machine could not
296. ecure Access and Accounting For accounting purposes Xerox Secure Access works with Network Accounting To configure Xerox Secure Access with Network Accounting refer to Network Authentication Setup on page 335 NOTE Secure Access cannot be enabled at the same time as Foreign Device Interface Information Checklist 1 2 Ensure that the machine is fully functional on the network TCP IP and HTTP protocols must be configured so that Internet Services can be accessed Ensure that the Xerox Partner authentication solution Secure Access Server Controller and Card Reader is installed and communicating with the machine Follow the installation instructions from the manufacturer of the authentication solution to correctly set the devices up Ensure that SSL Secure Sockets Layer is configured on the machine The Xerox Partner authentication solution communicates with the machine via HTTPS Ensure that Network Accounting is configured Enter the machine s IP address on your web browser to access CentreWare Internet Services Click the Properties tab expand the Security folder click Authentication Configuration and select Xerox Secure Access for Login Type matched to Network Accounting for Accounting Type For instructions on setting up your Network Accounting server refer to the instructions that came with your accounting package as well as Network Authentication Setup on page 335 You may also need another A
297. ed Power Saver Energy Saver Settings Time to Low Power Mode Allows you to specify the time out period before the machine enters the Low Power Mode from user operation Time to Sleep Mode Allows you to specify the time out period before the machine enters the Sleep Mode from the Low Power Mode Stored Minimum Passcode Length for Stored Jobs Document Allows you to specify the minimum number of digits the Settings passcodes for the Secure Print jobs must contain Memory Allows you to change the settings for the free space Settings available and the print page buffer size for USB EtherTalk SMB NetWare LPD IPP Port9100 and PostScript memory Free Space Displays the free memory space Print Page Buffer Displays the memory buffer size USB Enter the print page buffer for the USB interface between 64 KB and 1024 KB in 32 KB increments EtherTalk Enter the print page buffer for the EtherTalk interface between 1024 KB and 2048 KB in 32 KB increments SMB Select the spool destination for the job Spool to Memory Enter a value between 512 KB and 32 MB 32768 KB in 256 KB increments Spool to Hard Disk The print page buffer text box will be blank and the value cannot be updated No Spooling Enter a value between 64 KB and 1024 KB in 32 KB increments NetWare Enter the print page buffer for NetWare between 64 KB and 1024 KB in 32 KB increments 177 7 CentreWare Inte
298. ed Use Adobe Reader to cancel the print protection 016 756 The use of the service is restricted 016 757 A wrong password was entered Enter the correct password 016 758 The account is not authorized for copying 016 759 The maximum number of copies has been reached 016 760 An error occurred during PostScript processing Take one of the following actions e Change to the high speed print mode on the print driver Increase PostScript memory 016 761 An image output error occurred Change to the high speed print mode on the print driver 016 762 The specified print language is not supported on the machine Specify the print language in Print Mode under Port Settings 016 763 The POP server was not found Check if the address of the POP server is correctly set on the machine Also check the network cable connection 016 764 Unable to connect to the SMTP server 016 765 Unable to send e mail due to insufficient hard disk space on the SMTP server 392 Fault Codes Code Description and Remedy 016 766 An error occurred on the SMTP server 016 767 Unable to send e mail due to the wrong e mail address Verify the e mail address and try sending the e mail again 016 768 Unable to connect to the SMTP server due to the incorrect e mail address of the machine Check the e mail address of the machine 016 769 The SMTP server does not support delivery
299. ed with the job number Enter Change Name Selecting this button and then selecting a job number allows you to enter a name for the job number using the screen keyboard The name can be up to 18 characters long 124 Setup Assign Change Icon Selecting this button and then selecting a job number allows you to give an icon to the job number Create Job Flow Sheet This feature allows you to create and edit job flow sheets Job flow sheets are data that defines how to process scanned documents or documents stored in mailboxes By using a job flow sheet you can execute the defined flow automatically Job flow sheets are categorized into the following types created on a remote application and stored on the machine created and stored on the machine and created on the machine and stored on a remote application Only the job flow sheets created on the machine can be edited on the machine You can program job flow sheets with the following processing e Document forwarding Fax Internet Fax E mail FTP and SMB e Multiple document forwarding multiple processing execution e Printing Output ta Printer Fax Ta E mail FTP SMB Te Fax for polling O O O O O O X Scan O O O O O X Received fax 0 1 O O O O X Received O O 2 2 O O X Internet Fax Print Stored X X X X X X X O Available X Not available 1 If the fax USB cable is disconnected while a received f
300. ed by the Ipadmin command as the d option If this option is omitted the default printer p will be used e n number of copies This option specifies the number of copies If one p command is issued to print multiple files the number of copies specified will apply to all the files However this is only effective when the machine is in the spool mode In the non spool mode the client must be a Windows NT machine to use this option NOTE Some options which are not listed here e g m option and which are not processed by the workstation sending the print instructions will not be valid NOTE In the spool mode up to 32 files can be printed by one Ip command Any files specified after the 32nd file will be ignored Example To print a file named file1 to a printer named fxPS enter the following command lp dfxPS filel To output three copies of file1 and then three copies of file 2 to fxPS enter the following command lp dfxPS n3 filel file2 Delete cancel The cancel command is used to delete print data Command format cancel printer name job number Command options The following command options are available e Printer name This option specifies the printer name The cancel command can be effectively used with the combined use of a e and u as shown below This option is only valid in the spool mode 240 UNIX TCP IP SunOS a Deletes all the print data belonging to the user issuing
301. ed by the System Administrator to be applied to all jobs If Disable Active Settings is selected the setting automatically returns to Enable Active Settings when the login user is logged out NOTE If this setting is set to Disable Active Settings while a job is in progress the setting is not effective for the job 1 2 3 Select Allow User to Disa ble Allow User to Disable Active Settings Cancel Active Settings in the Group Enable Active menu Select the required option O Disable Active Settings This feature allows privileged users to temporarily disable certain active settings such as Force Watermark Universal Unique ID that have been enabled by the System Administrator to be applied to all jobs Select Disable Active Settings to temporarily disable the active settings when running a job Return to this screen again and select Enable Active Settings at the end of your job Otherwise the settings will automatically become active again when a job session is ended and logged out Select Save Job Status Default This section describes the settings related to Job Status 1 Select Job Status Default in the Machine Faults Vses Y tam N Toos Information ormation Group menu Features Active Jobs View a Completed Jobs View Authentication y Security Settings L 144 Authentication Security Settings Active Jobs View Th
302. ed establishing TCP IP select Close on the Protocol Settings screen When IPv6 Mode or Dual Stack is selected in step 2 3 Set IPv6 Address Manual Configuration NOTE Select Enabled when the machine is connected to a network on which IPv6 stateless address autoconfiguration is disabled or when you want to set a static IPv6 address If you selected Enabled in step 3 proceed to step 4 Otherwise proceed to step 10 4 Select Manually Configured IPv6 Address and then Change Settings 5 Use the keypad on the screen to enter an IP address for the machine in the format XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX Select Save 6 Select Manually Configured IPv6 Prefix and then Change Settings 7 Enter an IP address prefix and then select Save 8 Select Manually Configured IPv6 Gateway and then Change Settings 9 Using the same method as in step 5 set a gateway address 70 Select IPv6 IP Filter and then select Enabled or Disabled NOTE If you do not wish to use the IP filter feature select Disabled NOTE Use CentreWare Internet Services to register the IP addresses which are not allowed to access the machine Refer to CentreWare Internet Services on page 147 11 When you have finished establishing TCP IP select Close on the Protocol Settings screen E mail Setting Setup Finally set the other items required for the e mail feature 7 Select System Settings in the menu
303. ed its maximum Delete unnecessary Secure Print jobs from the machine 016 707 The Sample Print feature is not available due to a malfunction of the hard disk Contact the Xerox Welcome Center 016 708 An annotation cannot be added due to insufficient hard disk space Delete unnecessary documents from the disk 016 710 The Delayed Print job could not be executed Take one of the following actions e Delete unnecessary data from the hard disk to increase free space e Reset the settings of Print to Mailbox and Sample Print e Reduce the number of stored Delayed Print jobs to less than 100 jobs 016 711 Refer to 016 985 016 712 Refer to 003 751 016 713 The entered mailbox passcode is not correct Enter the correct passcode 016 714 The specified mailbox does not exist Create a new mailbox or specify an existing mailbox 016 716 The TIFF file could not be spooled as the size of the file exceeded the remaining space on disk Increase the size of the PCL form area 016 717 A Transmission Report Job Undelivered or Activity Report was requested but the information was not in memory Take one of the following actions e Divide Internet Fax document pages to reduce the size of a job to increase memory and HDD s free space Execute a new scan job or an Internet Fax job after scan and Internet Fax jobs stored in the memory space are finished Output a report before 200 or more jobs are logged 016 718 Unable to process PCL print data d
304. ed on the document can only be accessed by 1 client Documents stored or read by a client cannot be seen by other clients In either case documents can be added to an accessed mailbox e Documents retrieved using CentreWare Internet Services cannot be deleted using CentreWare Internet Services regardless of the Delete Document After Retrieval setting Using a network scan driver and Mailbox Viewer 3 simultaneously A single computer using a network scan driver and Mailbox Viewer 3 simultaneously cannot connect to the machine A maximum of 3 computers can retrieve a document from the machine simultaneously using either a network scan driver or Mailbox Viewer 3 When polling from another fax machine A scanned document is not transmitted when polling the machine from another fax machine Using TIFF files TIFF files created using a Network Scanning server application or Mailbox Viewer 3 are compressed using MMR MH or JBIG compression method Software that supports these compression methods is required to open TIFF files NOTE Mailbox Viewer 3 cannot create TIFF files using the JBIG compression method Write capacity limit The maximum write capacity for a single page is 297 x 432 mm The largest standard size is A3 or 11 x 17 inches Number of stored document pages mailbox The maximum number of document pages that can be written to a mailbox in a single write operation is 999 pages The maximum number also changes in resp
305. eduction enlargement ratio buttons that appear when Proportional is selected for the Reduce Enlarge feature on the Layout Adjustment screen 7 Select Reduce Enlarge Ra Presets in the Features menu tems Current Settings euan a 2 Change the required settings PL Preset 2 77 sag 3 R E Preset 3 81 B4 gt A4 Use the scroll buttons to switch a a between screens 5 RIE Preset 5 15 B4 gt A3 ly 3 Select Close R E Preset 1 to 7 e Preset Specifies the reduce enlarge ratios assigned to each of the seven buttons Select from 25 options in the range of 25 400 e Variable Specifies the reduce enlarge ratios using the scroll buttons in the range of 25 to 400 in 1 increments Other Settings This feature allows you to configure or change other machine settings specific to the scan features 7 Select Other Settings in the NE Features menu Items Current Settings 1 Mernory Full Procedure 2 Change the required settings 2 Matar Stored Pages 999 Use the scroll buttons to switch me Ime 7 4 Image Transfer Screen Disabled z between screens 3 Select Close Memory Full Procedure Specifies the default process to execute if the hard disk becomes full while reading documents A message asking how to process the data read up to that point is displayed You can predefine a processing method to be performed after
306. eeds to be created on the FTP server to hold the scanned document 4 Confirm that the following ports are enabled 1 TCP IP 2 FTP Client Data to Set Up Scan to PC Install Comments FTP Requirement Repositories need to be setup on Required This is the location or path of the directory the FTP server for saving scanned documents 283 10 Scanner Environment Settings Data to Set Up Scan to PC Install Comments FTP Requirement Server IP Address Required This is the IP address of the FTP server FTP Login password information Optional This is required if the FTP server requires login password authentication Most FTP servers require a login password Remote Authentication Server s IP Optional If Remote Authentication is required then Address the Authentication feature needs to be enabled Procedure for Scan to PC Setup FTP A On the control panel select Scan to PC Enter all the information required See the User Guide for more detailed information Load a sample document into the document feeder Press the lt Start gt button on the machine Log on to the FTP server Navigate to the directory path repository that was set up earlier on the server Your scanned document can be found in the specified directory NOTE If Remote Authentication has been enabled a separate login screen appears when the Scan to PC FTP service is selected Documents are not scanned unless the aut
307. eeeeceeceeeeeeeeeees 116 Machine Ready Tone ccccesseeeeeesteeeeeeenaees 67 machine specifications seeeeeeeeeeeeees 421 Machine Status cooooooccccconnncccocccocononconnncconcnnnnnnnnns 49 Billing Information s es 59 ote LU Ceara per ea a ae re ree ereree ES 58 Fax Receiving Mode eeens 58 Overwrite Hard Disk 2 ceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 52 Paper Tray Status 00 eceeeeeeesneeeeeenaes 50 Print Mode oraren ansia enee 51 TODOS a a a at ao 60 User Account Billing Information 59 Machine s E mail Address Host Name Connectivity amp Network Setup eee 93 Mailbox authenticating different types 314 mailbox OS 165 Mailbox CentreWare Internet Services 165 Mailbox Document Expiration Date 121 Mailbox Receive Display Priority 114 Mailbox Report ssis ineine 57 73 Mailbox Selector Setup cee 113 114 Mailbox Service Settings Mailbox Stored Document Settings 120 Mailbox Stored Document Settings 120 Mailbox Service Settings eeeeee 120 Stored Document Settings 121 maintenance 2 cece eeeeececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeaeeeeeeeteees 29 Maintenance Common Service Settings 74 Manual Send Receive Default 112 Manually Configured IPv6 Address 93 Manually Configured IPv6 Gat
308. eeeeeeeee 55 Mailbox Selector List cceeeeeeee 55 Scan Fax Configuration Report 55 437 Index Fax Screen Default cccceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeees 109 FAX S rvice idad tenn ates 77 Fax Service Settings oooocoonnnccccnnnnncccccnnnanccccnnn 109 Fax Control iii 111 Fax Defaults ccecceeceeeeeeeeteeeeeseenees 109 Fax Received Options eseeeees 114 Internet Fax Control cceeceeeeeeeeees 116 Local Terminal Information 0 000 115 Original Size Defaults 2 0 0 eect 115 Reduce Enlarge Presets aaan 114 Screen Defaults cccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 109 Fax Transfer from Address Book 2 0 0005 117 Fax Transfer Maximum Data Size 05 117 Feature ACCESS c eceeceecceececeeeeeeeeeeeeneeaees 141 features and services Account Administration cccccceceeeeeeeeeesecceeeeeeeeeees 320 File Format iii aaa 105 File Transfer Report Fax Server 5 57 74 Fine tune 100 eeceeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeteeesetsneaeeees 89 Finisher Adjustment s es 75 FONESIZE iii dad 76 Force Watermark Client Print ooooonnninnnn 77 Force Watermark Mailbox Print 77 Forth Watermark Copy Job ee 76 FTP Clie t sakini e e 92 G G3 Line 1 2 ANd 4 ooo eee eee cette eee eeeee ttt 116 General Information Machine Status
309. eeeeeeeeeeetneeeeeeeees 33 Inserting the New Toner Cartridge cc ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeennaaeees 34 Loading Staples in the Integrated Office Finisher Optional 34 Loading Staples in the Office Finisher LX Optional ee 35 Loading the Booklet Staples in the Office Finisher LX Optional 37 Emptying the Hole Punch Waste Container Optional 37 JOD AUS iaa 39 NS A A 39 Active J ODS mtrs laredo nda cd tado caves dette or dota lo al 40 Completed Jobs sims a a A e e E eE 41 Secure Print Jobs amp More coooocccocccicociconoooncoonnnonononnonononnnnnnonnnnnncnnncnnnnnns 42 C arge Prusia E EA A E ENa 43 Private Charge PriNt darane an 44 SECUIE Plisadas a 44 SAMP Set iii A 45 Delay d Print ci a 46 Public Mailbox iconos oa a a arena doin aha 46 Undelivered Faxes ooooocoocococoooooconoconononnnnnoonononnnnnnonnnonnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 47 5 Machine Status ciao 49 Machine Information ooooooccccncccnccnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnninoneninininnnns 49 General Information oooooocccccccccccnnnnncnnnnnnnininnnnnnnnnnnnr rn 50 Paper Tray Status iii iodo 50 Fit O 51 Overwrite Hard Disk iniit peaini en atn piese aari tape apaiia 52 Print Reports e aE A aA aes 52 Automatically Printed Reports Lists s eeseeeseeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeee 57 Fax Receiving Mode cooocococcccccccoocooononononononnononnnnnnoncnoncnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn
310. eeeeneeeees 90 Connectivity amp Network Setup oocomoonnicccncnnncnnnononcncnnnnnnnnnnnnccnnrenannns 90 Port Settings vitrinas 90 Protocol Settings sri sies sass cee tracanspeendan eo 92 Machine s E mail Address Host Name cccceeeeeeeeeeereeeeees 93 Proxy Server Settings snssssisssseoorrrrrnnrnsessrnnnnnnssserenasneeeeecessae 94 Outgoing Incoming E mail Settings oooooooccccnnnnnncccoconancccncnnnnnnnnns 95 Remote Authentication Server Settings cceeeeeeseeeeeeeeees 96 SECUNLY Settings ii cd 97 Other SettiNgS veia ltda ie ini tide 100 Print Service Settings visir ria errata 100 Allocate Memory sito is 101 Other OSCUROS susi ci cai 103 Scan Service Settings A Gaui estate sen stoence staan ler searroats 105 SCAN Defaults ica cece ru aeei ie E aE Aseet 105 Scan to PGC Deraults isc ias 106 Original Size Defaults avo cases mirra rra ea 107 Output Size Defaults oooooocccccccccccconcconcnoncnnnnnnncnnnnnononinenonons 107 Reduce Enlarge Presets cccececcersesseneeceeeeseseeseeneeeeeenees 108 Other Settings criada 108 Fax Service Settings je csn tt cicadas sentyshoanataunbant denia thaccteaaabiet act 109 Screen Delauls aci AA 109 Fax Defaulls it a ii eee 109 Pax Control sacada liada lead idas 111 Fax Received Options ccccccccccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 114 Reduce Enlarge Presets ccccssececccceeeeeseeseeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 114 Origina
311. een when the mailbox has been linked with any job flow sheet Checking the Auto Start check box causes the linked job flow sheet to be automatically executed when a new document is saved in the mailbox Selecting Start causes the execution of the linked job flow sheet to be started Stored Programming This feature allows you to register a series of operations with job numbers Registering Operations with a Job Number You can store up to 58 consecutive operations for each job number To register the required operations with a job number follow the steps below 7 Select Stored Programming in Fraga the G rou p menu O Not in Use O Not in Use 2 Select Store and then select a Qe nuw 9 Proma job number that reads Not in Of menus mn 3 Use Qs o O Not in Use 8 Ce Program B ly 3 Perform the operations to be stored for the job number NOTE You can store operations performed on the control panel except operations performed in the Setup menu on the Tools screen 4 Press the lt Start gt or lt Clear All gt button on the control panel Store Selecting this button and then selecting a job number allows you to register a series of operations with the job number To complete registering operations press the lt Start gt or lt Clear All gt button on the control panel Delete Selecting this button and then selecting a job number deletes the operations register
312. ees 109 Tray 1 Configuration i e 83 Tray 5 Bypass Paper Size Defaults 71 Tray 5 Bypass paper jams ooo eee 349 Tray for Printing Incoming Faxes n 113 Trays 1 2 and 3 4 paper jams 2 05 348 troubleshooting problems COMMON sseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 358 troubleshooting tables 358 Two Tray Module coooccccccnoncccccccnonnnnccnnanann cnn 17 types of Authentication 0 ec eeereeeetees 308 U Unauthenticated Users cceeeeeeetteeeees 308 Undelivered Faxes 0 cccceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 47 UNIX problem solving oo eeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeees 369 UNIX TCP IP ocn eliana di 232 COPHON diana 245 Index HP UX aa a ees 238 Information Checklist ceeeeeeees 232 Installation Procedure seeeeeeees 233 Network Communication Setup 233 Printer Status c cccecceceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 243 E ae REE ETA tn 240 problem solving neseser 369 Sol is neien aee e er eraai e 236 SUNOS unica adds 237 TeSt PrN a5 fests Meader aad tad da 239 UNIX TCP IP Environments 0006 233 Workstation Setup cceceeeeeeettteeeee 235 Unregistered Forms coooccccccnconcccccnnnnncccnnnannncninnnn 103 upgrade machine software c ccceeceeeeeeeeeseeneees 430 UPNP DiSCOVETSY cocccccococccccccnnoncnncnonannncccnananccncnnnnns 92 USB srera ll tan A a N 91 U
313. eeseneeaeees 37 Booklet Offset ccceceeceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeessenenaeees 77 Border Limit insien n e 112 Broadcast Internet Fax Profile 116 Broadcast Starting Rate a e 117 Broadcast Multi Poll Report 008 57 73 Build Job Segment Separator Tray 008 88 Bypass Tray 5 cccccinnocccccnononccnnnnnanncncnnnannncncnnnnns 19 C COP ul ri ica 245 Cautin das 15 CentreWare Internet Services ee 147 ACUVOJODS leran iu eai AEE ARANE 156 default user ID and passcode 5 154 Environments cccccceceeeeeeseeeeeneeneees 148 Information Checklist c eeeeeeeees 147 installations cas Pete had sated ceed beech ladder naat 148 Job History List eceran 156 Job Submission ceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeteees 158 job templates scoi e R 160 JODS E E E E 156 Network Communication Setup 148 PrN ea a a a e E 158 problem solving oooocccccnnnncccconinioncccnnnannncnns 375 Properties aasi ie a a detect tae 173 properties features ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 174 e i fe ah Oe 160 sereen layQUt seisa ei 151 SOIVICES 2 eveied feeb eda desenitidenueiatee ee ds 152 StAtUs ii ade tia 154 status of consumables n 155 Status of the trays eese 154 submitting jODS eee eee eeeetteeeeeeeneees 158 DUPPOMM ida rs ati tats 224 Test ACCESS cnica ae edna 150 Transport Protocols ooooooccccinnniccon
314. egistered on the network and the client can access the machine using the new machine name If the machine is switched off and on again after the machine name is changed the machine attempts to start with the changed machine name At this point if there is another machine on the network with the same name the machine name is changed following the rules above It is recommended that all machines on the network be setup with unique machine names Zone Name The zone name can be set using the Protocol Settings in the Properties tab of CentreWare Internet Services However if the assigned zone name does not exist on the network connected to the machine the zone name is changed to the default zone name When setting the zone name make sure that the zone name exists on the network connected to the machine Restrictions This section explains the restrictions for Bonjour Bonjour operating environment Bonjour can be used on Macintosh computers running Mac OS X 10 2 or later using the Printer Setup Utility or Safari The Bonjour discovery function is enabled on the same subnet Machine Name Ifthe machine name or host name settings are changed print jobs may be printed on printers other than the specified printer 374 Network related Problems If there are multiple machines on the network with the same machine name or host name a numeral is appended automatically to one of the names so that all names on the net
315. elect Close Local Terminal Information Items Current Settings MyTerminal 2 Company Logo 3 Machine Password 01234567890123456789 4 G3 Line O Extension Fax ID Not Set 5 G3 Line O Extension Dial Type__ Tone Settings 115 6 Setups Local Name Specifies the local name so that the remote machine can identify your machine Enter up to 20 characters using the screen keyboard on the touch screen The local name will be shown in the display or communication management report of the destination For information on the screen keyboard refer to Cover Page in the Fax chapter of the User Guide Company Logo Specifies the sender name company logo Enter up to 30 characters using the screen keyboard on the touch screen The sender name is printed in the Transmission Header Text or Cover Page Machine Password Specifies a password to restrict the remote machines which can send documents By setting a machine password your machine can accept receiving or polling only from remote machines that send a correct machine password in F Code Enter up to 20 digits using the screen keyboard on the touch screen Permissible characters are 0 to 9 and lt space gt When using this feature you cannot receive documents from remote machines without the F Code function G3 Line 1 e Fax ID Specifies the G3 ID fax number Enter up to 20 digits comprising 0 9 an
316. elect a paper size and a binding option The following parameters can be specified Parameter Description A3D a3d Double sided printing on A3 297 x 420 mm 11 7 x 16 5 inches paper and long edge binding A3T a3t Double sided printing on A3 297 x 420 mm 11 7 x 16 5 inches paper and short edge binding A4D a4d Double sided printing on A4 210 x 297 mm 8 3 x 11 7 inches paper and long edge binding A4T a4t Double sided printing on A4 210 x 297 mm 8 3 x 11 7 inches paper and short edge binding B4D b4d Double sided printing on B4 257 x 364 mm 10 1 x 14 3 inches paper and long edge binding B4T b4t Double sided printing on B4 257 x 364 mm 10 1 x 14 3 inches paper and short edge binding A5D a5d Double sided printing on A5 148 x 210 mm 5 8 x 8 3 inches paper and long edge binding A5T a5t Double sided printing on A5 148 x 210 mm 5 8 x 8 3 inches paper and short edge binding B5D b5d Double sided printing on B5 182 x 257 mm 7 2 x 10 1 inches paper and long edge binding B5T b5t Double sided printing on B5 182 x 257 mm 7 2 x 10 1 inches paper and short edge binding NOTE If multiple parameters are specified in an lpr command data may not print correctly NOTE The system default is used if no parameter is specified NOTE If the print data specifies double sided or single sided printing those specifications take priority over any C option Specifying collation The fol
317. elected for the Copy service for example the Copy service is automatically set to Disable Accounting in the Accounting feature 140 Authentication Security Settings Feature Access Specifies whether to verify users when they print or retrieve documents stored in mailboxes You can select Unlocked or Locked for each mailbox operation Feature Access Items Current Settings Unlocked 1 Print Documents from Mailbox 2 Retrieve Documents from Mailbox Unlocked Settings Create View User Accounts This feature is the same as Create View User Accounts displayed under Accounting For details refer to Create View User Accounts on page 133 Reset User Accounts This feature is the same as Reset User Accounts displayed under Accounting For details refer to Reset User Accounts on page 135 Create Authorization Groups This feature allows you to create the authorization groups to be assigned to users The created groups will be selectable in User Role of Create View User Accounts Use the following procedure to create groups The machine displays the DEFAULT authorization group at the top of the group list Users registered on the Create Authorization Groups Cancel Group Name 00 DEFAULT Default a 01 Managers machine belong to this DEFAULT group by default If necessary you can also change the settings of this 03 G
318. em Administrator Shared Mailbox The System Administrator Shared Mailbox is a mailbox created by a System Administrator When the Authentication feature is not enabled this mailbox is shared by all users 314 Authentication for Job Flow Sheets and Mailboxes When the Authentication feature is enabled this mailbox is shared by all Authenticated Users Only a System Administrator can change the settings To create a System Administrator Shared Mailbox operate the machine as a System Administrator Personal Mailbox This is a mailbox created by an Authenticated User using the Authentication feature Only the Authenticated User that created the mailbox can use it When the Authentication feature is not enabled this mailbox can only be operated by a System Administrator Operation of the mailboxes differs depending on whether the Authentication feature is enabled The following explains the operations available When the Authentication feature is not enabled e When the Authentication feature is enabled When the Authentication Feature is Not Enabled The following table shows the relationship with the mailboxes for each user type when the Authentication feature is not enabled General Users System Administrator Mailbox Shared by Shared by Operations Generall the Generall the y System Personal y System Personal Shared ze Shared ie Adminis Adminis trator trator Create O
319. en Button Settings page 68 Paper Tray Settings page 70 Image Quality page 72 Reports page 72 Maintenance page 74 Watermark page 76 Other Settings page 77 7 Select System Settings and Machine Y Fa then select Common Service IS Features Settings in the Group menu EE O e Audio Tones Y Supplies Y Billing W Tools Information 1 Connectivity amp Screen Button Settings Authentication O Network Set y v Security Settings 65 6 Setups Machine Clock Timers This feature allows you to set the correct date time and other related values 7 Select Machine Clock Timers fimameaoauames in the Features menu Hams 2 Change the required settings Use the side tabs to switch between screens 5 NTP Time Synctronizaton Off 3 Select Close Date Specifies the current date Select from three date formats Y M D M D Y and D M Y The date set here is printed on lists and reports Time Specifies the current time Selecta 12 or 24 hour display format If you select 12 Hour Clock the buttons for specifying AM or PM are displayed The time set here is printed on lists and reports Time Zone Specifies the time zone relative to Greenwich Mean Time GMT Daylight Savings Specifies whether to automatically adjust the machine clock for Daylight Savings Select Adjust On and then specify the star
320. ens 7 Select Screen Defaults in the ma Features menu tems Current Settings 2 Change the required settings 3 Transmission Screen Off 3 Select Close Fax Screen Default Specifies the fax default screen to display when you select the Fax Internet Fax service Select from Fax Recipients Programming Screen General Settings and Address Book Address Book Speed Dial Default Specifies the default address book entry number to display at the top of the Address Book screen Set the key number within the range of 1 to 500 using the scroll buttons or the numeric keypad on the control panel Transmission Screen Specifies whether to display the transmission status while sending documents Fax Defaults This feature allows you to set the default for each Fax Internet Fax service The settings are returned to the defaults set here when the power is switched on when the Energy Saver mode is cancelled or when the lt Reset gt button is pressed If you set a default for the functions you frequently use you can quickly send documents without changing the settings each time 109 6 Setups 7 Select Fax Defaults in the Fax Defaults Features menu Items Current Settings 1 Lighten Darken A 2 2 Change the required settings ZawwWie_____lw_______J gt ution fan i Use the scroll buttons to switch LEE _ Mixed Sized Originals Off Chang
321. enter an IP address for the machine in the format XXX XXX XXX XXX When you have finished entering all values select Save 12 Select IPv4 Subnet Mask and then Change Settings 73 Using the same method as in step 11 enter a subnet mask 14 Select IPv4 Gateway Address and then Change Settings 75 Using the same method as in step 11 enter a gateway address NOTE If you do not wish to set the gateway address leave this field blank 76 Select IPv4 IP Filter and then Change Settings 17 Select Enabled to filter access to the machine NOTE If you do not wish to use the IP filter feature select Disabled NOTE Use CentreWare Internet Services to register the IP addresses which are not allowed to access the machine Refer to CentreWare nternet Services on page 147 78 When you have finished establishing TCP IP select Close on the Protocol Settings screen When IPv6 Mode or Dual Stack is selected in step 7 8 Set IPv6 Address Manual Configuration NOTE Select Enabled when the machine is connected to a network on which IPv6 stateless address autoconfiguration is disabled or when you want to set a static IPv6 address If you selected Enabled in step 8 proceed to step 9 Otherwise proceed to step 15 9 Select Manually Configured IPv6 Address and then Change Settings 234 UNIX TCP IP 70 Use the keypad on the screen to enter an IP address for the machine i
322. entreWare Internet Services uses the embedded HTTP Server that resides in the machine This allows communication with the machine through a web browser with access to the Internet or an intranet By entering the IP Address of the machine as the URL Universal Resource Locator in the browser direct access to the machine becomes available CentreWare Internet Services allows you to make not only the same basic settings as from the control panel but also more specialized settings for the machine User ID and Passcode Many of the features available within Internet Services will require the System Administrator login ID and passcode The default user ID is 11111 and the default passcode is x admin This ID and passcode can be changed by the System Administrator A user will only be prompted for the System Administrator login ID and passcode once in a single browser session System Configuration To use CentreWare Internet Services you need to enable TCP IP on the machine CentreWare Internet Services Installation This section describes the settings required to use CentreWare Internet Services Installation Procedure There are two stages required to enable CentreWare Internet Services Network Communication Setup This requires the machine to be set up for CentreWare Internet Services Test Access To make sure that CentreWare Internet Services has been set up correctly you should access CentreWare Internet Services Net
323. enu poise Sali O Meter Print Jobs 2 Select the item to be printed or Da Accam urs reset O Total Impressions 3 Select Print Report or Reset 4 Select Close All User Accounts Resets Prints all the parameters of all accounts All Feature Access Settings Resets Prints the access settings for all features All Account Limits Resets Prints the upper limit imposed on the total number of pages to be copied and or scanned Resetting the account limits for all accounts returns them to the default value of 9 999 999 Total Impressions Resets Prints all data tracked for all accounts including the System Administrator All Authorization Groups Delinks users from authorization groups and links those users to the Default Group The settings configured in Create Authorization Groups are not reset Meter Print Jobs Resets Prints all data about the number of prints recorded by the machine Print Report Prints the report that allows you to see the user account parameters and records before resetting them Reset Resets selected parameters or records 135 6 Setups System Administrator s Meter Copy Jobs This feature allows you to check the System Administrator s Copy meter on the screen and to reset all System Administrator s meters 7 Select Accounting and then select System Administrator s Meter Copy Jobs in the Group menu 2 To clear the System System Administ
324. er eeeeeees 96 SMTP Server Settings oocoononccccnnncoccccccnnanccncnnnns 96 SNMP tiara att 92 SOAP aia AA A AAA 92 Software Download oooccccccccononcononcccnncnncnnnnannnnnnns 83 Software Options ccceeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeee 75 software Version cooococccccccnccccccccnnnnnnnncnnccnnnnnnnnnnns 50 software upgrading ocoocnnccccnnnnococcnonincnnncnnnnnnnns 430 Solaris iia ta 236 specifications SS ancl iie 425 TAXING rte R SAA 426 MACHING eia a 421 paper output 20 eee cece eee eeeeeeeeteeneees 424 Paper supply 2 ccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeseenees 423 Specify Addressee IPV6 eiee 99 SSL TLS Settings oo unies aiii 97 Standard Size Threshold Value ceees 120 staple jams Integrated Office Finisher eee 355 Office Finisher LX cccecceeteseeeeeeeeees 356 Staple vuestro cda 34 35 Starting Rate sicuierneiiisa iiei e pikt 110 Statio IP wink Gada ee aa aa ida 226 Status CentreWare Internet Services 154 Stored Document Expiration Date 121 Stored Document List ceceeeeettteeeeeeeee 53 Stored Document Settings Mailbox Stored Document Settings 0 eeeeeeeeeeenteeeeeees 121 Stored Documents AE iiias eria 43 Delayed Print ooocccoinnncccccnnnoccccconananccinannno cnn 46 Private Charge Print ecese 44 Public Mailbox coooooooocccccocnccccccccoconanncnncnnnnnnnns 46 Sample Set cceceeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeee
325. er Tray Status This feature allows you to check the status of each paper tray including the bypass tray and optional trays It also displays the size type and remaining amount of media in each tray 7 Select Paper Tray Status on Paper Tray Status th e M a ch i ne nfo rm ati on Tray Status Full Paper Size Paper Type Tray 1 Ready 100 A4D Plain scree n E Tray 2 Ready 25 AID Plain Tray 3 Ready 75 85 x D Plain Tray 4 Ready 50 A4D Plain Tray5 ae Auto Size Detect Plan ly 50 Machine Information Print Mode This feature allows you to change the default printer mode and emulation parameter settings For the lists of emulation parameters and their values refer to Emulation Parameters in the Appendix chapter on page 427 7 Select Print Mode on the Print Mode Close Machine Information screen 2 Select the required option Ou a B Orrline Off line Takes the printer off line The printer is unavailable in this mode On line Puts the printer on line ready to accept data PCL Emulation Allows you to set parameter values for PCL emulation to print documents For a list of parameters refer to PCL Emulation on page 427 7 Select PCL Emulation on the PCL Emulation Print Mode screen Item Number Current Value 2 Enter a 3 digit parameter item gt coran number in the Item Number field Change Vale 3 Select Change Valu
326. er and operation time limit Protocol Settings This feature allows you to configure the machine settings that correspond with the protocol being used 7 Select Protocol Settings in the Frias Features menu Items Current Settings 1 Ethernet Rated Speed 10 Mbps Half Duplex a 2 Change the required settings emme T 7J Use the scroll buttons to switch 5 ress in Progress Change betwee n scree n S 5 IPv4 Subnet Mask DHCP in Progress ly 3 Select Close Ethernet Rated Speed Specifies the Ethernet port speed according to the network environment to which the machine is connected TCP IP IP Mode Specifies the IP operation mode Selecting Dual Stack enables both IPv4 and IPv6 communications 92 System Settings IPv4 IP Address Resolution Specifies how to get an IPv4 address for the machine Selecting STATIC allows you to manually configure the IPv4 settings IPv4 IP Address Specifies the IP address in IPv4 format IPv4 Subnet Mask Specifies the subnet mask in IP v4 format IPv4 Gateway Address Specifies the gateway address in IPv4 format IPv4 IP Filter Specifies whether to filter access from remote machines The IP addresses to be filtered can be specified in CentreWare Internet Services For more details refer to Properties Features on page 174 IPv6 Address Manual Configuration Specifies whether to set the IPv6 address manually Selecting
327. er could not be deleted from the SMB server due to one of the following reasons e The file does not exist The directory is not empty The specified directory name does not exist If any lock directory LCK exists in the forwarding destination manually delete it and then try again 027 527 During data transfer via SMB using the Scan to PC service a folder could not be deleted from the SMB server due to one of the following reasons The file does not exist The directory is not empty The specified directory name does not exist Check whether or not the file is not being used by another user at the specified save location 027 528 During data transfer via SMB using the Scan to PC service no space is available at the save location on the SMB server Check if the save location has free space 406 Fault Codes Code Description and Remedy 027 529 During data transfer via SMB using the Scan to PC service an unexpected error has occurred on the SMB server or an unexpected internal error has occurred on the machine Log in to the server from another computer using the same user name to see if a file can be written into the same save location on the server If the problem persists it may be an internal error Contact the Xerox Welcome Center 027 530 During data transfer via SMB using the Scan to PC service a file could not be saved because Do Not Save had been se
328. er login name Enter a login name of up to 64 characters e POP3 Password Specifies the POP3 server password Enter a password of up to 32 characters and then re enter the password for confirmation 95 6 Setups e POP Password Encryption Specifies whether to enable the POP password encryption using APOP SMTP Server Settings Specifies the SMTP server settings Use the scroll buttons to switch between screens e SMTP Server Name IP Address Specifies the domain name or IP address of the SMTP server SMTP Server Port Number Specifies the SMTP server port number E mail Send Authentication Specifies the SMTP server authentication method If you select POP before SMTP POP server authentication is required before transmitting e mails to the SMTP server If you select SMTP AUTH the SMTP server authentication is enabled SMTP AUTH Login Name Specifies the SMTP AUTH login name Enter a login name of up to 64 characters This entry is required only when SMTP AUTH is selected on the E mail Send Authentication screen SMTP AUTH Password Specifies the SMTP AUTH password Enter a password of up to 36 characters and then re enter the password for confirmation This entry is required only when SMTP AUTH is selected on the E mail Send Authentication screen Domain Filtering Specifies domain name restrictions to filter incoming e mail e Domain Filtering Specifies whether to enable domain filtering and
329. er selecting Initialize Hard Disk select a partition and then select Start Then select Yes to execute initialization After the initialization is completed select Confirm NOTE This process may take a while depending on the machine configuration 74 System Settings Delete All Data This feature allows you to delete all document data on the machine Select Delete All Data and then select Start Then select Yes to execute deletion After the deletion finishes you need to switch the machine off and then on NOTE This process may take a few hours depending on the machine configuration Software Options Specifies software options For information on setting procedures and software codes refer to the instructions for the required software option package Enter passwords for the software options using the keyboard screen and select Reboot Finisher Adjustment This feature allows you to configure the punch and booklet functions of the Office Finisher LX Hole Punch Tool Displays the available hole punch tools Select the hole punch tool installed on the Finisher e Adjust Punch Position Booklet Fold Position Punch Position B4 or smaller Allows you to adjust the punch position for paper smaller than the B4 size Punch Position B4 or larger Allows you to adjust the punch position for B4 or larger paper The following explains how to adjust the punch position 7 Select Punch Posi
330. er the IP addresses which are not allowed to access the machine Refer to CentreWare nternet Services on page 147 12 When you have finished establishing TCP IP select Close on the Protocol Settings screen 254 TCP IP LPD or Port9100 Computer Setup Install the print driver on the client computer Refer to the HTML document on the PCL Print Driver CD ROM Test Print Make sure the machine has been installed on the network correctly by submitting a test print from each client computer Perform the following steps 7 Open a document on a client computer 2 Select the machine as the printer 3 Print the document on the machine and verify that it prints correctly 4 Make sure that the print driver is installed on every computer that will be sending jobs to the machine 5 Repeat the test for all computers that will be sending jobs to the machine The installation process is now complete If the test print fails refer to Problem Solving on page 341 TCP IP LPD or Port9100 This section explains how to set up the machine to print from a Windows computer through LPD or Port9100 The following information is provided Information Checklist page 255 TCP IP LPD or Port9100 Environments page 256 TCP IP LPD or Port9100 Installation page 256 Installation Procedure page 256 Network Communication Setup page 257 Computer Setup page 257 Test Print page 257 Information Checkli
331. er to Login Type on page 140 Direct Fax Direct Fax from a computer is restricted To use the Authentication feature use the fax driver to set authentication information such as user ID and passcode The fax jobs sent to the machine that fail authentication are set to Charge Print and are either saved to the machine or deleted depending on the selected setup option NOTE Direct Fax is not restricted when Login Type is set to Login to Remote Accounts in the System Administration mode For more information about Login to Remote Accounts refer to Login Type on page 140 CentreWare Internet Services If the Authentication feature is enabled authentication is required to access the CentreWare Internet Services home page even if you are not using the Authentication feature for any service NOTE Only the System Administrator is allowed access when Login Type is set to Login to Remote Accounts in the System Administration mode For more information about Login to Remote Accounts refer to Login Type on page 140 Authentication for Job Flow Sheets and Mailboxes The following explains the restrictions for job flow sheets and mailboxes when the Authentication feature is enabled NOTE When a user account is deleted the mailboxes and job flow sheets associated with the account are also deleted Any documents stored in the mailboxes will also be deleted NOTE When the Authentication feature is used with a remote account se
332. er to Problem Solving on page 341 for assistance NetWare Environments System configuration The machine supports NetWare PServer mode in Bindery or NDS NetWare 3 x 4 x 5 x 6 x is required to support Bindery NetWare 4 11 or later is required to support NDS In the PServer mode the machine will function as a print server and print jobs from the print queue The machine uses one file server user license NOTE The machine does not support RPrinter mode 228 NetWare Target computers The NetWare versions and NetWare client computers require the following environments NetWare versions A Novell accredited computer which can be installed with NetWare 3 x 4 x 5 x 6 x NetWare client computers A Novell accredited computer which can run Windows 2000 Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 NOTE When using the LPD port by Novell Distributed Print Services NDPS activate the LPD port on the machine and set the IP address IPX SPX frame types The machine supports the following Ethernet interfaces e 10Base T Twisted Pair Cable e 100Base TX Twisted Pair Cable The machine supports the following frame types e Ethernet Il specification e 1EEE802 3 specification e IEEE802 3 802 2 specification e IEEE802 3 802 2 SNAP specification The machine sends out packets of each frame type on the connected network It automatically uses the frame type which corresponds to the first response However if more than one protocol is run
333. er together with the Windows Internet Name Server WINS server If you selected STATIC in step 4 then proceed to step 5 to configure the protocol settings Otherwise proceed to step 11 5 Select IPv4 IP Address and then Change Settings 230 NetWare 6 Use the keypad on the screen to enter an IP address for the machine in the format XXX XXX XXX XXX Enter a value 0 to 255 into the highlighted field and select Next The next 3 digits are highlighted When you have finished entering all values select Save 7 Select IPv4 Subnet Mask and then Change Settings 8 Using the same method as in step 6 enter a subnet mask 9 Select IPv4 Gateway Address and then Change Settings 70 Using the same method as in step 6 enter a gateway address NOTE If you do not wish to set the gateway address leave this field blank 11 Select IPv4 IP Filter and then Change Settings 72 Select Enabled to filter access to the machine NOTE If you do not wish to use the IP filter feature select Disabled NOTE Use CentreWare Internet Services to register the IP addresses which are not allowed to access the machine Refer to CentreWare Internet Services on page 147 73 When you have finished establishing TCP IP select Close on the Protocol Settings screen NetWare Setup Use PCONSOLE or NetWare Administrator NWADMIN to create a print queue print server and printer and assign the
334. erox Welcome Center if the problem persists 027 400 A communication error occurred If another error message is displayed clear the problem first If the control panel is being used by a user wait until the user operation is completed If the machine is communicating with a remote device wait until the communication is completed If the problem persists even after you take the above actions switch off the machine and then switch it on again If the problem still persists contact the Xerox Welcome Center 027 442 The auto stateless IPv6 address 1 of the machine is duplicated on the network Change the auto stateless IPv6 address 1 of the machine or the address of the other device 403 15 Problem Solving Code Description and Remedy 027 443 The auto stateless IPv6 address 2 of the machine is duplicated on the network Change the auto stateless IPv6 address 2 of the machine or the address of the other device 027 444 The auto stateless IPv6 address 3 of the machine is duplicated on the network Change the auto stateless IPv6 address 3 of the machine or the address of the other device 027 445 The IPv6 address manually set for the machine is invalid Correct the IPv6 address 027 446 The IPv6 address manually set for the machine is duplicated on the network Change the IPv6 address of the machine or the address of the other device 027 447 The link local IPv
335. ers Cause Confirmation Method Action If the SMB Auto Master Mode is On there are limits to the number of machines that can retain the machine information The number varies with the network environment The machine or other SMB machines cannot be found using the network computer icon Check the SMB Auto Master Mode setting If set to On change the setting to Off When printing fails Cause Confirmation Method Action The machine is processing a print request from another client The receiving buffer is set to non spool mode Check that the machine has a print job in progress This indicates whether there are files ready to print and displays any write error dialogs After the machine has processed the print request send a print job or change the mode to the spool mode The number of sessions exceeds the maximum Check that the machine is processing simultaneous requests such as a print request or status inquiry request from multiple clients This indicates remote clients unable to use the machine and displays any write error dialogs Wait for a while and send a print request again When the document cannot be deleted from the printer window Cause Confirmation Method Action An attempt is made to delete all documents displayed in the printer window System Administrator only Check whether the at
336. ertificates with CentreWare Internet Services 299 Configuration of E mail Encryption Digital Signature cee 300 Installation Overview ooooconcoccncnnnnccnonononencncnnnnnnnonononinnncnnnnnnnnononos 300 Configuring S MIME Certificates with CentreWare Internet Services ooococcccccnnncnccconnnnnnnnnnnnninnnnnnnnnnnnns 300 Configuration of Scan File Signatures PDF XPS Documents 303 Installation Overview oooooooococcncnnnnccnonononencncnnnnonnnnnnoncnnnnnnnnnnnnononos 303 Configuring Scan File certificates with CentreWare Internet Services ocococcccccnnncnnncnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 303 Configuration of IPsec tico a 305 Authentication and Account Administration sssssssssssssssnnnnnnnnnnns 307 Overview of Authentication oooonccccncnccccconononcnnnnonnnnnnnnnoroconononnnonononos 307 Users Controlled by Authentication oooniononccccnnnnccconcnccncccnnnnnanannns 307 AAA ni gded Ried auusneuanes 308 Functions Controlled by Authentication ooooocccccnnnccccccccccccccccnnnnnn ns 309 15 Authentication for Job Flow Sheets and Mailboxes 310 Job Flow Sheet Types ooocccccccconccnnncnncnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnoness 311 Types Of Milk S rian a a ae ee a 314 Linking Job Flow Sheets to Mailboxes seeiis 318 Overview of Account Administration c eeseeeseeeeeereeetteetteeeee 320 Types of Account Administration ooooooocccccn
337. ervices Printing continued Language Emulation continued Quantity Enter the number of sets to print when stored jobs is selected for Print Quantity Setup 2 Sided Printing Allows you to select whether to print on both sides of paper Origin Allows you to specify the origin of the coordinates Image Orientation Allows you to select the orientation of the document Multiple Up Allows you to specify the settings for Multiple Up Zoom Allows you to specify the zoom ratio Independent Y Allows you to specify the Y between 25 and 100 Independent X Allows you to specify the X between 25 to 100 Up Down Adjustment Allows you to specify a value between 250 and 250 mm 9 8 9 8 inches to adjust the vertical position Left Right Adjustment Allows you to specify a value between 250 and 250 mm 9 8 9 8 inches to adjust the horizontal position Paper Margin Allows you to specify a value between 0 and 99 mm for the paper margin Collated Allows you to specify whether to collate the output Staple Allows you to select the stapling method Image Enhancement Allows you to enable or disable image enhancement Bypass Tray Wait User Allows you to specify whether to enable or disable this feature when Tray 5 Bypass is selected 199 7 CentreWare Internet Services Feature Setting items Services E mail Allows you to configure e m
338. es to staple Hole Punch Specify the hole punch position and the number of holes to punch 170 Scan Send as Fax The following table shows the information fields on the Send as Fax page Job Flow Sheet Name Displays the name of the job flow sheet Name Enter the recipients name Recipient Address Enter the recipient s address Line Type Displays the line type Extension or Outside Line Starting Rate Select the fax communication mode from G3 Auto and Forced 4800 bps Mailbox Number Enter the mailbox number Mailbox Passcode Enter the mailbox passcode Relay Broadcast Select whether to enable relay broadcasting Print at Relay Station Select whether to enable printing at the relay station NOTE This setting is valid only when the Relay Broadcast check box is selected Relay Station ID Broadcast Recipients Enter the speed dial codes of the relay station and relay broadcast destinations separating each dial code with a comma The first dial code you enter will be the code for the relay station You can register up to 21 relay broadcast destinations The dial code for the relay station must be a number between 0 and 99 Enter the dial codes for the relay broadcast destinations as follows When entering an individual code enter it between O and 99 When entering all codes enter When enteri
339. estination is unknown or not specified is displayed Host Interface Displays the name of the host that has sent the group parent job If the host interface is unknown or not specified is displayed Time Completed Displays the date and time the group parent job was completed 157 7 CentreWare Internet Services Error History This page displays a list of errors that have occurred Date amp Time Displays the date and time an error occurred Error Code Displays the error code of the error Print The Print tab allows you to specify printing and paper parameters enter accounting information and select the delivery method for your print job Follow the steps below to select the features available on the Print tab 7 Click Print on the Header Panel of the home page The Job Submission page is displayed 2 Set the required options Job Submission Allows you to print documents stored in your computer Specify the following settings and click Start to submit the job Feature Description Printing Quantity Enter the number of sets to print within the range of 1 to 999 Collated Specify whether or not to collate the output 2 Sided Printing Specify whether to print 1 sided or 2 sided flip on long edge or flip on short edge Staple Allows you to specify the staple position and the number of places to staple NOTE This option is displayed when a finishe
340. etBEUI TCP IP SNMP UDP IPX 7 On the CentreWare Internet Services home page for the machine select the Properties tab 2 In the Properties frame select Port Status 3 Select the required transport protocol NetWare IPX SPX TCP IP SMB NetBEUI TCP IP SNMP UDP IPX 4 Select Apply Screen Layout The CentreWare Internet Services home page contains four panels without visible Header Panel boundaries You can change the left and right panel sizes by dragging the boundary between them L SE Menu Panel Main Panel Header Panel Displays the header for all pages The header includes the CentreWare Internet Services Logo logo and the model of the machine Justunder 2 this panel on most pages is the tab bar which corresponds to the five functions or page buttons These are Status Jobs Print Scan Properties and Support You can navigate through the pages when you click the text on each tab Logo Panel Displays the company logo Menu Panel Displays a navigation tree listing the items available within each category with the currently displayed item highlighted 151 7 CentreWare Internet Services Services Main Panel Displays information and settings for an item selected on the Menu Panel For more information about each function refer to the following Services page 152 Status page 154 Jobs page 156 Print p
341. etection mode TIFF TIF TIFF direct print TIFF n TIFF n Logical Printer Numbers 1 to 20 which were registered through CentreWare Internet Services PS n PostScript Yon Logical Printer Numbers 1 to 10 which were registered through CentreWare Internet Services Requires PostScript Kit You can also add output parameters to the above printer name The parameters are the same as those for C option Insert _ between the printer name and output parameter for example PS_A4 235 8 Printer Environment Settings Solaris NOTE If a different printer name is specified the print language or mode specified on the touch screen of the machine is used NOTE When setting print languages modes from the same workstation to a single printer it is recommended to set one kind of each If two or more kinds of languages modes are set the workstation may display the same job number for some queues Ipq NOTE To print an ASCII format PostScript file specify PSASC for data processing with TBCP enabled NOTE To print a binary format PostScript file specify PSBIN for data processing with TBCP disabled NOTE When specifying PS the machine functions as if PSBIN is specified NOTE You cannot use C option when specifying the printer name with the output parameter NOTE For details about C option refer to C Option on page 245 NOTE Lowercase characters can also be used for a printer name NOTE Up to
342. ether to add the user name to the path of the home directory Automatically Create User Name directory if one does not exist Specify whether to create a directory of the user name Directory Structure Select the format of the directory path Machine Software Allows you to upgrade the machine s software Upgrades Upgrades Select whether to upgrade the machine software Manual Upgrade Allows you to manually upgrade the machine software Last Successful Upgrade Displays the current software version of the machine s controller Manual Upgrade Specify the latest software file Xerox Services Xerox Communication Server This page enables machine communication with the Xerox Communication Server The server is required for the Meter Assistant and Supplies Assistant features General e Machine Serial Number Displays the machine s serial number e Xerox Communication Server URL Displays the address of the Xerox Communication Server e Communication Server Registration Status Displays whether the machine is registered with the Xerox Communication Server To request registration select the Request Registration check box Communication Setup Server Communication Allows you to specify whether to communicate with the Xerox Communication Server when Communication Server Registration Status is Registered The check box cannot be selected when the status is Not Reg
343. etting is effective when you select Enter Twice under Re enter Recipients Selecting Re enter Fax Number or E mail prompts you to manually re enter a fax number or e mail address for confirmation Re enter Group Recipients Specifies whether to re enter group addresses after once entering them or whether to enable or disable the group dialing feature itself This setting is effective when you select Enter Twice under Re enter Recipients and also when you select Enter Once Only or Enter Twice under Re enter Broadcast Recipients Transmission Header Text Polling Specifies whether to send header information when you send documents with the Store for Polling feature on the More Fax Options screen Polled Documents Auto Delete Specifies whether to automatically delete the document data for the Store for Polling feature on the More Fax Options screen from memory after the remote machine has polled your document Rotate 90 degrees Specifies whether to determine to rotate the image before reducing the image size This setting is effective when you select Auto in the Reduce Enlarge feature Mixed Sized Originals Scan Mode Specifies whether to scan non standard size documents for fax or Internet Fax transmissions Selecting Standard Size Mode is recommended if you always scan only standard size documents NOTE When Standard Size Mode is selected some areas of the images may be lost in the following c
344. ettings in the Setups chapter on page 78 Paper Supply NOTE The standard sizes of documents that can be detected vary depending on the paper size table specified by the System Administrator For information on setting the paper size table refer to Paper Size Settings in the Setups chapter on page 78 Tray 1 Tray 2 and Trays 3 amp 4 Two Tray Module 2 Capacity 500 sheets of 80 g m 20 Ib bond paper per tray NOTE The paper stack must not exceed 54 mm 2 1 inches in height Paper Weights 60 to 105 g m for Tray 1 60 to 215 g m for Tray 2 Trays 3 amp 4 Two Tray Module Paper Sizes For width 139 7 to 297 0 mm 5 5 to 11 8 For length 182 0 to 431 8 mm 7 2 to 17 2 Auto Size Sensing Yes Tray 5 Bypass Capacity Approx 100 sheets Standard paper 4200 3R2047 20lb NOTE The paper stack must not exceed 10 mm 0 4 inch in height Paper Weight 60 to 215 g m Paper Sizes For width 88 9 to 297 0 mm 3 6 to 11 8 For length 98 4 to 431 8 mm 3 9 to 17 2 Auto Size Sensing Yes Trays 3 amp 4 High Capacity Tandem Tray Capacity Approximately 2 000 sheets 800 1 200 sheets Paper Sizes A4 LEF 7 25 x 10 5 LEF 8 5 x 11 LEF Paper Weight 60 to 215 g m Tray 6 High Capacity Feeder Capacity Approximately 2 000 sheets Paper Sizes A4 LEF 7 25 x 10 5 LEF 8 5 x 11 LEF Paper Weight 60 to 215 g m Double sided Module Paper Sizes For width 148 7 to 2
345. etup Using TCP IP 7 Power on the machine 2 Wait a minute or so while the machine negotiates an IP address 3 Print the Configuration Report 1 Select the lt Machine Status gt button on the machine 2 On the Machine Information screen select Print Reports 3 Select Printer Reports 225 8 Printer Environment Settings 4 Select Configuration Report 5 Press the lt Start gt button on the machine 4 Read the Configuration Report to confirm that an IP address has been allocated and that it is a valid IP address on your network NOTE If the IP address starts with 169 xxx xxx xxx then the DHCP server has not properly allocated an address or DHCP is not enabled on your network 5 Record the IP address allocated 6 From a computer open a web browser such as Internet Explorer and then enter the machine s IP address If connected properly you should see the CentreWare Internet Services web page for your machine NOTE CentreWare Internet Services is a powerful tool for configuring the machine remotely The default user ID is 11111 and the passcode is x admin The user name and passcode are case sensitive and should be changed after install 7 Load the print drivers on the computers that will be accessing the machine Quick Network Setup Static IP Prerequisites for Manual Setup of the Network Using a Static IP Address NOTE On startup the WorkCentre multifunction machine defaults to DHCP to
346. etup cooooooccccccccccccccccnnoncnnccnnnnnnns 265 Information Checklist eeeeeeeees 262 IPP Environment 2 0 cccccceceeeeeeeseeeeees 262 Network Communication Setup 263 TestiPrint atascada dd tica 265 IPS cualidad 305 IPSec Communication ooocccccccnconocconcncccnncnnnnnnnns 99 IPSec SA Life Time cccceeceeeeeeeeteeeeenees 99 IPSEC Settings oenen e aa 99 IPv4 Gateway Address 93 IPv4 IP Address cocoocccccccoccononnononcncnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnns 93 IPv4 IP Address Resolution ccceeeceee 93 IPV4 IP Filter EE E 93 IPv4 Subnet Mask 00 cceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 93 IPV6 IP Fitek vies tise ene tidad esieies 93 IPv6 Address Manual Configuration 93 J jams Cover Avia conan ates 345 Cover Buda ad 346 Cover OT EE lve atin at 347 Gover Escrita 347 document o 24 ceee dated ica 353 Duplex Module Cover D c cece 349 A ected eae 351 438 Index High Capacity Tandem Tray n se 348 Tray 5 BYPASS coccccnonoccccccononccnncnacanancnnnnons 349 Trays 1 2 ANd 3 4 ou eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ett 348 Job Complete Tone 1 ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 67 Job Complete Tone 2 ccceceeceeeseteceeeeeeeeeeees 67 Job Counter Report ccooccccccccccccccononnononnncncnnncnnnnns 56 Job Flow Error Report 0sseseeeereees 57 74 Job Flow Service Settings 0 121 Job Flow Service Setup
347. evice certificate This setting is valid when IKE Authentication Method is set to Authenticate by Digital Signature IPSec Communication Specifies whether to enable IPSec communications IKE SA Life Time Specifies the IKE SA lifetime in the range of 60 to 28800 minutes in 1 minute increments The value must be greater than the value set in IPSec SA Life Time IPSec SA Life Time Specifies the IPSec SA lifetime in the range of 300 to 28800 seconds in 1 second increments The value must be smaller than the value set in IKE SA Life Time DH Group Specifies the DH group G2 ensures higher security than G1 PFS Settings Specifies whether to enable the PFS Perfect Forward Security Destination IPv4 Address Specifies the destination address or the range of addresses in IPv4 format Destination IPv6 Address Specifies the destination address or the range of addresses in IPv6 format Communicate with Non IPSec Device Specifies whether to enable communication with non IPSec devices IEEE 802 1x Settings Allows you to configure the IEEE 802 1x authentication settings 99 6 Setups EEE 802 1x Specifies whether to enable IEEE 802 1x authentication e Authentication Method Specifies the IEEE 802 1x authentication method e Login User Name Specifies the login user name for IEEE 802 1x authentication e Login Password Specifies the password for the login user name specified in Login User Name e Server Certificate
348. eway 00 93 Manually Configured IPv6 Prefix aaeeea 93 Manuals related occoooonnnnccnccoconocanononononanonennnos 16 Max number of pages per Split Send 119 Maximum Address Entries ooooooninninnnnnnnncnccccc 118 Maximum E mail Size oooocooonnncnnnnnccocccconccccnnnnn 118 Maximum Login Attempts Authentication 143 Maximum Number of Sets asasena eenen 89 Maximum Stored Pages 05 88 108 114 Memory Full Procedure 0 88 108 113 Message Digest Algorithm sses 98 Message Encryption Method 98 439 Index Microsoft Networking cocoononccccnnnnocccccnnnanccninnn 251 Computer Setup cooccoccncccocconcccccccccncnncnann monos 255 Information Checklist ooooooooonioiinnnnnnnnonnccnoo 251 Network Communication Setup 253 SMB Environment c cccceeeeseeeeeeeees 252 SMB Installation c ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 252 Test Print icara n aes ee dee 255 Millimeters INCNES ccecceeeeeeeeeeeeseteeeeeees 83 Min Passcode Length for Stored Job 121 Mixed Sized Original Scan Mode 111 Mixed Sized Originals 85 106 110 Mixed Sized Originals 2 Sided Copy 88 N NetWare ciu ab 91 228 Computer Setup cooccoioncccocccccccccnnccncnnanann nono 231 Information Checklist oooooooooninninicnnnnnnnnncno 228 Installation Procedure oooococincncococc
349. ey Device Certificate Displays the following message Device Certificate becomes effective when Digital Signature is selected as IKE Authentication Method This certificate is set up on the Certificate Management page IKE SA Life Time Specify the IKE SA lifetime IPSec SA Life Time Specify the IPSec lifetime DH Group Select a DH Group G2 ensures higher security than G1 PFS Select whether or not to enable the PFS Perfect Forward Security feature Specify Destination IPv4 Address Specify the destination address in IPv4 format Specify Destination IPv6 Address Specify the destination address in IPv6 format Communicate with Non IPSec Device Select whether or not to allow communication with non IP Sec devices Certificate Category Management Select the category of certificates to be displayed in the Certificate List The following options are available Local Device Displays all certificates Trusted Certificate Authorities Displays SSL server certificates Intermediate Certificate Authorities Displays SSL server certificates Others Displays S MIME certificates and scan file certificates Certificate Purpose Select the type of certificates to display in the Certificate List 220 Properties Feature Setting items Security Certificate Certificate Order Management Select the display order of certificates continued Display the list Displays the Certificate
350. f the machine and then switch it on again Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 133 700 The staple punch settings were cancelled Specify appropriate staple punch positions 133 710 The received fax data was printed using Tray 5 Bypass as the selected tray was not available for fax printing 134 210 134 211 A fax error occurred Switch off the machine and then switch it on again Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists Screen Messages Along with fault codes the following messages are displayed on the touch screen on some occasions Message Description and Remedy A fault has occurred A fault has occurred Switch off the machine Switch off the machine Ensure that the and wait until the touch screen is completely screen disappears before switching it on off and then restart the machine If the If the problem persists call for service problem persists write down the fault code xxx yyy displayed on the screen Switch off the machine and contact the Xerox Welcome Center 419 15 Problem Solving Message Description and Remedy service A fault has occurred The machine has rebooted If the problem persists call for The machine was restarted due to a fault Resume normal operations If the problem persists contact the Xerox Welcome Center error Processing has been cancelled due to an See User
351. fication protocol error 86 unknown authentication method specified during the address book query Check the LDAP server status 018 787 An LDAP server protocol error occurred in the address book operation The server returned the RFC2251 specification protocol error 87 invalid search filter supplied during the address book query Review the search conditions Contact the network administrator if the problem persists 018 788 An LDAP server protocol error occurred in the address book operation The server returned the RFC2251 specification protocol error 88 operation cancelled during the address book query Check the LDAP server status 018 789 An LDAP server protocol error occurred in the address book operation The server returned the RFC2251 specification protocol error 89 parameter error during the address book query Check the LDAP server status 018 790 An LDAP server protocol error occurred in the address book operation The server returned the RFC2251 specification protocol error 90 memory allocation error during the address book query Check the LDAP server status 018 791 An LDAP server protocol error occurred in the address book operation The server returned the RFC2251 specification protocol error 91 server connection error during the address book query Check the LDAP server status 018 792 An LDAP server protocol error occurred in the address book operation The server returned the R
352. figuration Report Lists common settings such as hardware configuration network information and print and copy feature settings 53 5 Machine Status Printer Reports 7 Select Printer Reports on the Printer Reports Ghose Print Reports screen O Oz OTE 2 Select the required option Use Cpr sous Q Tates O riur O PCL Macro List Sd the scroll bars to switch between screens O POF Settings List PS Logical Printers List Font List 3 Select the lt Start gt button on the control panel Configuration Report Lists common settings such as hardware configuration network information and print and copy feature settings PCL Settings List Lists the PCL emulation mode settings PCL Macro List Lists the macros registered for use with PCL emulation PDF Settings List Lists the settings for PDF print mode TIFF JPEG Settings List Lists the settings for TIFF JPEG print mode TIFF JPEG Logical Printers List Lists the settings for up to 20 logical printers created in TIFF JPEG print mode PS Logical Printers List Lists the logical printers created in PostScript mode Font List Lists all the fonts available on the machine PCL Font List Lists the fonts available in PCL emulation mode PostScript Font List Lists the PostScript fonts available Scan Reports NOTE When Server Fax is enabled the Scan Fax Reports feature is displayed instead of the Scan Reports and Fax Reports fea
353. figure the following Bonjour protocol settings Host Name Specify the Bonjour host name Printer Name Specify the printer name WSD Allows you to configure the following WSD protocol settings General Port Number Specify the WSD port number TBCP Filter Select the check box to enable TBCP Filter when processing PostScript data This is only available when the optional PostScript kit is installed When the transmission data includes binary data or EPS data disable this feature Data Receive Time Out Enter the time out period for receiving data from WSD clients Notification Delivery Time Out Enter the time out period for notification delivery to WSD clients e Maximum TTL Enter a value for the maximum TTL Maximum Number of Subscribers Enter the maximum number of WSD clients 195 7 CentreWare Internet Services Feature Setting items Services Printing Print Mode Allows you to specify the type of printer language to use when a print job is sent using USB EtherTalk SMB NetWare LPD IPP etc Only the enabled protocols will be displayed Auto Allows you to set the machine so that it will automatically determine and use the most suitable language to print data received from the host device PostScript Sets PostScript as the printer language PCL Sets PCL as the printer language TIFF JPEG Sets TIFF as the printer
354. file named file1 to a printer named fxPS enter the following command S lpr PfxPS filel To print three copies of file1 and three copies of file 2 to fxPS enter the following lpr Pf xPS 3 filel file2 To print a file named file1 to a printer named fxPS as an A4 sized 210 x 297 mm 8 3 x11 7 inches duplex job enter the following command Slpr PfxPS C DUP A4 filel Delete Iprm The Iprm command is used to delete print data Command format usr ucb lprm P printer name job number Command options The following command options are available e P printer name This option specifies the printer name registered with etc printcap If this option is omitted the default printer Ip will be used e job number This option specifies the job number of the print data to be deleted A job number is a serial number between 1 and 999 determined by the workstation These numbers can be checked by issuing an Ipq command Instead of a job number you can specify a user name or This option is invalid in the non spool mode User name is only valid when you log in as a superuser When this option is taken all the print data you specify will be deleted This option is only valid in the spool mode 242 UNIX TCP IP e You can delete all your print data by specifying this option If this option is issued by a superuser all the print data received by the machine will be deleted This option is only valid in the spo
355. g The Accounting feature is used to impose different restrictions on individual users accounts and to track the total numbers of copied faxed scanned and printed pages for each account When the Accounting feature is active users are prompted to enter their individual user information to use the machine The type of user information prompted depends on the Accounting and Authentication settings The Accounting 132 Accounting menu allows you to start configuring various Accounting settings For more information refer to the following sections Create View User Accounts page 133 View Accounts page 134 Reset User Accounts page 135 System Administrator s Meter Copy Jobs page 136 Accounting Type page 136 Accounting Login Screen Settings page 137 Fax Billing Data page 137 Auto Reset of User Billing Information page 138 Copy Activity Report page 138 NOTE The items listed in the Group menu depend on the machine configuration Create View User Accounts This feature allows you to register user account information such as user IDs user names and passcodes and to impose restrictions on the numbers of copied faxed printed and scanned pages for each user Up to 1 000 users can be registered NOTE Create View User Accounts is not displayed when Network Access or Xerox Standard Accounting is selected in Accounting Type 7 Select Cr
356. g Domain 1 to 50 Other Settings E mail Receive Protocol Output Destination for E mail Security Settings gt S MIME Settings Device Certificate S MIME S MIME Communication Receive Untrusted E mail Receive Untrusted Internet Fax Message Digest Algorithm Message Encryption Method Digital Signature Outgoing E mail Signature Outgoing Internet Fax Certificate Auto Store 3 Select Save Test Internet Fax To make sure that Internet Fax has been set up successfully perform the following steps Sending 7 Load a document 2 Select Internet Fax on the All Services screen 3 Select the required features for the job 291 11 Internet Fax 4 Enter the E mail address of the recipient 5 Press the lt Start gt button The document will be scanned and converted to TIFF format Then it will be sent as an e mail attachment Receiving When the machine receives an Internet Fax printing starts automatically 292 12 Server Fax This chapter explains how to set up the Server Fax service of the machine The following information is provided Server Fax Overview page 293 Server Fax Environments page 293 Server Fax Installation page 294 Installation Procedure page 294 Fax Server Installation and Configuration page 294 Machine Configuration page 295 Test Server Fax Transmission page 296 Server Fax Overview
357. g table shows the information fields on the Job Flow Sheets Common Print Attributes page Job Flow Sheet Name Enter or change the name of the selected job flow sheet Description Enter or change the description of the job flow sheet Job Flow Displays the type of command set for the job flow sheet Total Destinations Displays the number of destinations defined in the job flow sheet Sheet Type Displays the access type Personal or Shared of the job flow sheet This item is displayed only when the Authentication feature is enabled Keyword Enter a keyword to be used when searching the job flow sheet The keyword can be up to 12 characters Edit Job Edit Select a command to assign to the job flow sheet from Print Flow Destination Send as Fax Send as Internet Fax Send as E mail FTP Sheet Transfer or SMB Transfer Then click the Edit Job Flow Sheet button to display a page where you can configure the selected job flow sheet command The following table shows the information fields on the Print page Job Flow Sheet Name Displays the name of the job flow sheet Paper Supply Select the paper tray for the job flow sheet Output Destination Select the output paper tray Quantity Specify the number of printouts 2 Sided Printing Select 1 sided or 2 sided output Staple Specify the staple position and the number of plac
358. ge 331 Remote Authentication Setup page 332 Network Authentication Setup page 335 Xerox Secure Access Setup page 337 Overview of Authentication This section is an overview of the Authentication feature used with the machine Users Controlled by Authentication The following is an explanation about the different user types that are controlled by the Authentication feature Users are classified into the following six types The Authentication feature restricts operations according to the user type e System Administrator e Authenticated Users with System Administrator Privileges Authenticated Users with Account Administrator Privileges e Authenticated Users with no System Administrator or Account Administrator Privileges Unauthenticated Users e General Users System Administrator This is a user who can enter the System Administration mode and change the machine settings The System Administrator uses a special user ID called a System Administrator ID 307 14 Authentication and Account Administration To enter the System Administration mode enter the System Administrator ID into the user ID entry field on the authentication screen Authenticated Users with System Administrator Privileges These are users who are assigned System Administrator privileges When a restricted service is used this type of user must enter a user ID on the authentication screen This type of user has
359. ged in user and thus provides security and privacy to documents stored in the machine NOTE This feature is displayed only when System Settings gt Authentication Security Settings gt Authentication gt Charge Private Print Settings gt Receive Control gt Save in Private Charge Print is selected 7 Press the lt Log In Out gt button 2 and select Confirm Enter your user ID using the screen board or numeric keypad on the control panel 3 Select Private Charge Print on the Secure Print Jobs amp More screen NOTE If you log in to the machine with the System Administrator s ID a list of login user IDs is displayed on the screen Select the desired user ID from the list or enter it in Go to and select Document List The Private Charge Print User ID List Refresh 001 Brown01 002 Fuji01 a 003 Smith01 004 Smith02 gt El 005 Williams01 J 006 WhiteD1 007 No User ID 008 No User ID 009 No User ID 010 No User ID 011 No User ID 012 No User ID documents stored for the selected user ID will be displayed 4 Select a document to print or delete 5 Select the required option Refresh Refreshes the displayed information Select All Selects all documents in the list Delete Private Charge Print Refresh Document Name Stored Date Pages 5 Document s
360. gistered When a phone conversation took place including the one before a transmission Scan The items you can manage for scan jobs using the Account Administration feature are as follows Account Services Information User Type Manageable Items Required E mail Yes Verified Scanned pages sent pages Scan to Mailbox Yes Verified Scanned pages stored pages Scan to PC Yes Verified Scanned pages uploaded pages Network Scanning Yes Verified Scanned pages sent pages 325 14 Authentication and Account Administration Xerox Standard Accounting Overview When enabled Xerox Standard Accounting XSA tracks the numbers of Copy Print Network Scanning E mail Internet Fax and Fax jobs when these features are installed on the machine for each user Usage limits can also be applied to users to restrict the total numbers of copy print fax and scan jobs that a user can perform Administrators can print a report which contains all XSA data XSA is set up through CentreWare Internet Services the machine s HTTP pages displayed on your web browser Administrators must create accounts and specify limits before users are authorized to access the machine When XSA is set up users must enter their account details at the machine to use the device When they have finished their job their XSA allocation is reduced by the number of prints copies or scans performed When XSA is enabled users m
361. group name during SMB transmission Auto Master Mode Allows you to enable or disable Auto Master Mode Password Encryption Allows you to enable or disable password encryption during SMB transmission WINS Server Server Information Protocol Displays whether the protocol is enabled or disabled Obtain WINS Server Address Automatically Select whether to obtain the WINS server address via DHCP The check box can be selected only when a TCP IP address is obtained via DHCP or DHCP Autonet 189 7 CentreWare Internet Services Feature Setting items Connectivity Protocols continued Microsoft Networking continued Primary Server IP Address amp Port Displays the primary server WINS IP address when Obtain WINS Server Address Automatically is disabled Change the address as necessary e Secondary Server IP Address amp Port Displays the secondary server WINS IP address when Obtain WINS Server Address Automatically is disabled Change the address as necessary LPD Allows you to configure the LPD protocol settings Protocol Displays whether the protocol is enabled or disabled Physical Connection Displays Ethernet Port Number Enter the port number within the range of 1 to 65535 TBCP Filter Select the check box to enable TBCP Filter when processing PostScript data This is available only when the optional PostScript kit is inst
362. gs on page 138 67 5 Machine Status 62 6 Setups This chapter describes how to change the various defaults preset on the machine how to register the various items such as mailboxes and destinations and how to configure or change the System Administrator settings Setting Procedure This section describes the basic setting procedure available in the System Administration mode Follow the steps below 1 Enter the System Administration Mode page 63 2 Configure a Feature page 64 3 Exit the System Administration Mode page 64 1 Enter the System Administration Mode 7 Press the lt Log In Out gt button E on the D Y GS amp S rc O O zo D O 2 tO os CO 2 Enter the correct user ID using the numeric keypad on the control panel or the screen keyboard For information on how to use the keyboard refer m y re jaracters J ice com to New Recipients in the Fax es E E chapter of the User Guide Cancel NOTE The default System Administrator ID is 11111 If the Authentication feature is enabled you may also be required to enter a passcode The default passcode is x admin To change the user ID or passcode refer to System Administrator Settings on page 138 63 6 Setups 2 Configure a Feature 1 Press the lt Machine Status gt 5 6 button on the control panel On the Ma
363. gs pages Some items may not appear depending on your machine configuration e EtherTalk Clicking the Configure button displays the EtherTalk Compatible System page For details on the page refer to EtherTalk on page 183 e NetWare Clicking the Configure button displays the NetWare page For details on the page refer to NetWare on page 183 e TCP IP Clicking the Configure button displays the TCP IP page For details on the page refer to TCP IP on page 185 e Microsoft Networking Clicking the Configure button displays the Microsoft Networking page For details on the page refer to Microsoft Networking on page 189 e LPD Clicking the Configure button displays the LPD page For details on the page refer to LPD on page 190 e Port 9100 Clicking the Configure button displays the Port 9100 page For details on the page refer to Port 9100 on page 190 e HTTP Clicking the Configure button displays the HTTP page For details on the page refer to HTTP on page 193 Services Clicking the Settings button for each service displays a configuration page which displays links to various setting pages Fill out the setting pages to set up each service To display the configuration page for the next service click the Configure Next Service button Some items may not appear depending on your machine configuration E mail Settings e SMTP Server Clicking the Configure button di
364. h Print Select whether or not to batch print the selected documents Print Document Select this button to print the selected document s 167 7 CentreWare Internet Services Edit Mailbox The following table shows the information fields on the Edit Mailbox page Mailbox Mailbox Number Displays the number of the selected mailbox Mailbox Name Allows you to edit the name of the selected mailbox Mailbox Passcode Allows you to edit the passcode to the mailbox The passcode can be up to 20 characters long The passcode is optional you can leave the text box blank Retype Passcode Re type the passcode for verification Check Mailbox Allows you to select whether and when the passcode Passcode for the mailbox is required Owner Displays the owner of the mailbox If the mailbox is a shared mailbox this shows Shared Linked Job Flow Displays the name of the job flow sheet linked to the Sheet mailbox This is only displayed when the mailbox has a linked job flow sheet Auto Start Job Allows you to enable or disable the linked job flow Flow Sheet sheet This is only displayed when the mailbox has a linked job flow sheet Delete Documents Allows you to set whether to automatically delete after Print or documents after they are printed or retrieved Retrieve Delete Expired Allows you to set whether to automatically delete Documents documents when they reach the
365. haracters for the template that will appear in Template Details on the machine s touch screen c On the Determine Home Directory line select the method of determining the home directory Selecting LDAP Query queries the LDAP server with the user s authenticated login name and retrieves the user s home directory to set up the template scanning path to that directory Selecting No LDAP Query uses the path specified under Network Home Path d When LDAP Query was selected in step c click LDAP Mapping for Home Directory and then specify an LDAP home directory When No LDAP Query is selected in step c specify a base directory path in Network Home Path e If required create a scanning subdirectory within the user s home directory by enabling Automatically Create Subdirectory and then specifying a general name in Subdirectory f If required set Append User Name to Path Automatically Create User Name directory if one does not exist and Directory Structure Scan to PC Setup FTP Files can be scanned on the multifunction machine and routed on to a server or a client using FTP protocol Directory structures repositories need to be created on the server to hold the scanned documents Prerequisites for Scan to PC Setup FTP 1 Confirm that an existing operational network utilizing TCP IP is available 2 FTP Server Client exists and is running 3 Arepository folder n
366. hat the AC outlet is supplying voltage Connect another appliance to the outlet to verify the voltage supply The document will not feed through the document feeder Check that the document feeder is not overloaded The document feeder can hold a maximum of 50 sheets Check that the document is fully inserted into the document feeder The machine does not display the High Capacity Tandem Tray or one of the paper trays as one of the Paper Supply selections Check that no paper trays are open If a tray is ajar the machine cannot sense its connection Open and close each paper tray and the High Capacity Tandem Tray If this does not rectify the problem then power the machine off and then on The machine does not display the finisher options Check that the cables from the finisher are securely connected to the machine Slide the Finisher into its correct position The machine configures itself when additional options are attached The machine does not accept documents into memory Check with the System Administrator about available memory If memory is almost full print and delete unnecessary files The machine displays a memory full error message Check with the System Administrator about available memory Divide the remaining pages of the job into several small jobs and run the job again The machine displays a tray fault Follow the steps below 1 Open the paper tray 2 Mo
367. he machine status including consumables status parts status and paper tray status This is displayed when E mail Notification Service under Port Settings is set to Enabled e Recipients E mail Address Enter the e mail addresses of the recipients of machine status e mails You can specify up to three e mail addresses e Send Notice Allows you to enable or disable sending regular notices to the specified recipients Mail Notice Status Settings e Mail Notice Status Allows you to specify the type of notification messages to send including consumables paper jams paper tray status and errors e Recipient 1 3 Allows you to specify which recipient will receive what notice 179 7 CentreWare Internet Services Feature Setting items General Setup Alert Notice Frequency Settings Notification e Notice Frequency Allows you to select the continued frequency for sending status e mails e Notice Week Day Allows you to select the day of the week on which to send status e mails Notice Month Date Allows you to select the date of the month on which to send status e mails e Notice Time Allows you to specify the time to send status e mails Next Notice Date Displays the date on which the next e mail will be sent Billing Meter Read Alerts Allows you to set up the automatic notification of the machine s billing meter status Recipient Group Addresses
368. he CentreWare Internet Services settings the port settings protocol settings emulation settings and the memory settings The items displayed will depend on the model and configuration of the machine NOTE Some settings with data entry use bytes as units of data volume Each character that you enter is one byte 7 Click Properties on the Main Panel on the home page 2 Select an item from the collapsible menu on the Menu Panel To open each folder click on its left side to expand and access the items beneath the folder 3 To change settings use the drop down list box text boxes and check boxes on the page The default settings in the drop down list box are indicated with an asterisk 4 After changes have been made click Apply To cancel any changes you have made click Undo e To display the current machine settings click Refresh NOTE Some settings will be available only after you restart CentreWare Internet Services or after the machine is switched off and on 173 7 CentreWare Internet Services Properties Features The following table lists the items that can be set Some items may not be displayed depending on your machine configuration Feature Setting items Configuration Overview Connectivity and Printing Print Protocols Clicking the Settings button displays the Connectivity and Printing page which displays links to the following property settin
369. he context name of the Print Server Object Up to 511 characters can be entered with the exception of plus sign backslash and tilde SLP SLP will only be displayed when NetWare is selected in Port Status and TCP IP is selected as the transport protocol e Active Discovery Allows you to enable or disable the automatic detection of the SLP directory agent 184 Properties Feature Setting items Connectivity Protocols TCP IP continued Allows you to configure the TCP IP settings IP Mode IP Mode Select an IP mode from IPv4 IPv6 and Dual Stack General e Protocol Displays whether the protocol is enabled or disabled e Physical Connection Displays Ethernet This is a display only item Host Name Enter the host name If you change the host name of TCP IP the host name of SMB also changes IPv4 IP Address Resolution Allows you to set the method for obtaining the IPv4 address by using the drop down menu to access the following options STATIC The user will specify all the addresses DHCP The addresses will automatically be set via DHCP BOOTP The addresses will automatically be set via BOOTP RARP The addresses will automatically be set via RARP DHCP Autonet The addresses will be automatically set by Autonet via DHCP IP Address Enter the IP address allocated to the machine in xxx xxx xxx xxx format Sub
370. he default passcode is x admin To change the default user ID or passcode refer to System Administrator Settings on page 138 3 Press the lt Machine Status gt button 4 Select the Tools tab 5 Select the required option Machine Y Faults 7 Supplies Billing Y Tools Information Information Features J Settings Machine Clock Timers O Copy Service Settings Audio Tones i Connectivity amp Screen Button Settings Authentication A Network A v 3 v Security Settings System Settings This menu allows you to change various default presets on the machine For more information on the features available refer to System Settings on page 65 Setup This menu allows you to program various items such as mailboxes job flow sheets and the Address Book NOTE This feature is available on the Tools screen even when you enter the screen in the general user s mode when you skip Steps 1 and 2 For more information on the features available refer to Setup on page 122 60 Tools Accounting This menu allows you to configure accounting functions and view jobs performed by each account For more information on the features available refer to Accounting on page 132 Authentication Security Settings This menu allows you to set up the authentication and security features For more information on the features available refer to Authentication Security Settin
371. he machine when the machine is switched on However if the machine is switched off immediately after a print request the print data may be stored on the client In this case the print request can be reissued when the machine is switched on and the print data is printed on the machine When printing e When Receiving Buffer SMB is set to Spool to Hard Disk or Spool to Memory Print data cannot be received if the print data size exceeds the available capacity of the hard disk or memory allocation NOTE If the print data exceeds the receiving buffer capacity the client may retransmit the same print data In this case stop the client and make sure that the client does not transmit the print data When Receiving Buffer SMB is set to No Spooling Print requests cannot be received from a client if a print request from another client is being processed When the client IP address or computer name is changed The machine cannot perform query processing and cancel processing Switch off the machine and then switch it on with the receiving buffer empty of print data NOTE Stopping printing or forced deleting of print data in the machine receiving buffer can be performed using the control panel For information refer to Job Siatus on page 39 When the machine is offline If a client issues a print request when the machine is offline the print data cannot be received and a write error is generated and displayed in an
372. he number of maximum pages Reduce the print pages or disable the Booklet Creation feature 024 746 The selected option i e paper size paper tray output tray or double sided printing is incompatible with the specified paper type Check the print parameters 024 747 An invalid print parameter combination was set Check the print parameters 024 748 In Bates Stamping settings the number of digits specified in Number of Digits does not match the value specified in Starting Number For details on these settings refer to the Annotation feature in the Copy chapter of the User Guide 024 775 Refer to 024 742 024 985 An error occurred in the bypass tray Check the document size orientation and paper type and then try executing the same operation again 026 700 A protocol which is not supported on the machine was received from the LDAP server during the address book query Try executing the same operation again Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 026 701 The number of address book queries exceeded the handling capacity of the machine Wait a while and perform the same operation again If there was only one address book query the problem may be in the machine software Contact the Xerox Welcome Center 026 702 The number of transactions from the LDAP server exceeded the handling capacity of the machine Wait a while and perform the same operation Contact the X
373. he relationship with the job flow sheet for each user type when the Authentication feature is not enabled The job flow sheet operations available vary depending on whether the job flow sheet was created using Create Mailbox or Create Job Flow Sheet on the Setup screen Created using Create Mailbox on the Setup screen General Users System Administrator Job Flow Shared by Shared by Operations pene Mailbox peice Personal ce Mailbox nian Personal trators trators Create xX O xX X Xx Xx O Xx Display O O O xX O O O O Edit O O Xx Xx O O O O Copy O O O X O O O O Delete O O xX X O O O O Select Run O O O X O O O O Link to O O O Xx O O O O Mailbox O Operation available X Operation not available The owner of a copied job flow sheet becomes a duplicate user NOTE Job flow sheets created from Create Mailbox on the Setup screen can only be used changed copied and deleted from the mailbox where they were created The applicable users are all the users that can use the mailbox NOTE When job flow sheets not available for operation depending on changes made to the authentication status are linked to a mailbox you can still use them but are not allowed to change copy them If you release the link the job flow sheet will no longer be displayed and will be disabled Created using Create Job Flow Sheet on the Setup screen General Users System
374. heck that frame types of the file server are unified in the network Set the machine to the frame type specified for the file server to be connected A fault occurred on the network between the client and the machine Use NWADMIN to check whether the target printer object is viewed Replace the network cable between the client and the machine The user name or group name of the print job is not registered in the print queue Use NWADMIN or PCONSOLE to check whether the user name or group name of the job has been registered in the print queue Re send the print job to a print queue in which the user name or group name has been registered correctly Use NWADMIN or PCONSOLE to register a user name or group name of the job in the print queue Print jobs cannot be sent to the print queue Use NWADMIN or PCONSOLE to check whether the Allow Users To Submit Print Jobs option is set to Yes Use NWADMIN or PCONSOLE to set the Allow Users to Submit Print Jobs to Yes The user name or group name of the job is not defined in the print server Use NWADMIN or PCONSOLE to check whether the user name or group name of the job is registered in the target print server Re send the print job to a print queue in which the user name or group name has been registered correctly Use NWADMIN or PCONSOLE to register the user name or group name of the job in the print server The print
375. heck with the sample printout that the fold and staple positions have been adjusted This feature allows you to set the defaults for date and text information which can be added to the output as a watermark for document management control 7 Select Watermark in the A Features menu Items Current Settings i 2 Change the required settings 2 Default Watermark Effect Off ae aul fermar rohibi tes Use the side tabs to switch HA AA between screens 5 Background Pattern Fan ly 3 Select Close Date Format Specifies the current date Select from three date formats 20yy mm dd dd mm 20yy mm dd 20yy Default Watermark Effect Specifies the default setting of the Text Effect feature e Off Does not use the Text Effect feature e Embossed Embosses background text e Outline Prints the outline of background text Default Watermark Specifies the default watermark text from a list of preset and custom text strings Font Size Specifies the default watermark font size You can select from three preset font sizes or specify a value between 24 and 80 points using the scroll buttons Background Pattern Specifies the background pattern to be used for the Watermark feature Density Specifies the output density of the watermark text You can select from Lighten Normal and Darken Watermark Background Contrast Specifies the level of contrast between watermark text and its bac
376. hen Change Settings 13 Select Enabled to filter access to the machine NOTE If you do not wish to use the IP filter feature select Disabled NOTE Use CentreWare Internet Services to register the IP addresses which are not allowed to access the machine Refer to CentreWare Internet Services on page 147 14 When you have finished establishing TCP IP select Close on the Protocol Settings screen When IPv6 Mode or Dual Stack is selected in step 3 4 Set IPv6 Address Manual Configuration NOTE Select Enabled when the machine is connected to a network on which IPv6 stateless address autoconfiguration is disabled or when you want to set a static IPv6 address If you selected Enabled in step 4 proceed to step 5 Otherwise proceed to step 11 5 Select Manually Configured IPv6 Address and then Change Settings 6 Use the keypad on the screen to enter an IP address for the machine in the format XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX Select Save 7 Select Manually Configured IPv6 Prefix and then Change Settings 8 Enter an IP address prefix and then select Save 9 Select Manually Configured IPv6 Gateway and then Change Settings 70 Using the same method as in step 6 enter a gateway address 11 Select IPv6 IP Filter and then select Enabled or Disabled NOTE If you do not wish to use the IP filter feature select Disabled NOTE Use CentreWare Internet Services to regist
377. hen an attempt is made to print out or delete any document in the mailbox Delete Documents After Retrieval Specifies whether to delete documents in the mailbox after they are printed out or retrieved or after they are transferred and printed out through a job flow sheet Delete Expired Documents Specifies whether to delete documents in the mailbox after the preset time or period elapses Link Job Flow Sheet to Mailbox Displays the Link Job Flow Sheet to Mailbox screen Link Job Flow Sheet to Mailbox Screen This feature allows you to link the mailbox to a job flow sheet that instructs how documents in the mailbox are to be processed For more information on a job flow sheet refer to Create Job Flow Sheet on page 125 123 6 Setups 7 Select Link Job Flow Sheet to aimustewsenwname Mailbox on the Mailbox XXX Job Flow Sheet that has been linked to this Mailbox Create Delete screen Pen vf aut Sir Description Change Link 2 Change the required settings Fax orders to Sales 3 Select Close Cut Link Removes linkage with a job flow sheet if any linkage has already been made Create Change Link Allows you to select a job flow sheet to be linked with the mailbox For the displayed Sheet Filtering Create and Edit Delete buttons refer to Create Job Flow Sheet on page 125 NOTE The Auto Start check box and the Start button also appear on the Link Job Flow Sheet to Mailbox scr
378. hentication server authenticates user access Scan to PC Setup SMB Files can be scanned on the multifunction machine and routed on to a server or a client using the SMB protocol Directory structures repositories need to be created on the server to hold the scanned documents Prerequisites for Scan to PC Setup SMB 1 Confirm that an existing operational network utilizing TCP IP is available An SMB Server exists and is running A repository folder needs to be created on the SMB server to hold the scanned document Confirm that the following ports are enabled 1 TCP IP Port 2 SMB Port Data to Set Up Scan to PC Install SMB A Comments Requirement Server IP address Required This is the IP address of the SMB server 284 Job Flow Service Setup Data to Set Up Scan to PC Install mmen SMB Requirement Comments Server Shared Name Required This is the name assigned to the shared folder on the SMB server Repository directory path where Required This is the location or path of the directory for the document will be stored on the saving scanned documents SMB server SMB Login password information Optional This is required if the SMB server requires login password authentication Most SMB servers require a login password Remote Authentication Server s IP Optional If Remote Authentication is required then the Address Authentication feature needs to be e
379. hether to display the Login screen automatically when power is switched on or when the Energy Saver mode is canceled All Services Specifies the services and features available on the All Services screen Select a button and then select a service or feature to assign to the button Use the scroll buttons to switch between screens NOTE Assigning the Setup feature to a button enables users to directly access the Tools screen from the All Services screen The button for the Setup feature will be displayed on the All Services screen as Tools in the System Administration mode and as Setup in the general user mode Job Type on Job Status screen Specifies the job types to be displayed when you select Completed Jobs on the Job Status screen Default Language Specifies the default language to be displayed on the touch screen Reconfirm E mail Recipient Specifies whether to reconfirm e mail recipients before transmission Select Confirmation Not Required to disable this setting Always Reconfirm Recipient to always require reconfirmation of recipients or Reconfirm If Multiple Recipients to require reconfirmation only when multiple recipients are specified Reconfirm Fax Recipient Specifies whether to reconfirm fax recipients before transmission Select Confirmation Not Required to disable this setting Always Reconfirm Recipient to always require reconfirmation of recipients or Reconfirm If Multiple Recipients
380. hine refer to Problem Solving chapter on page 341 232 UNIX TCP IP UNIX TCP IP Environments System configuration The machine uses the Line Printer Daemon Protocol LPD that supports TCP IP as the transport protocol With the LPD use the machine as a UNIX network printer The LPD supports spool mode this is where print jobs from clients are spooled once before output It also supports non spool mode this is where print jobs are output sequentially without spooling Target computers The target computers are as follows e Workstation or personal computer with RFC 1179 Line Printer Daemon Protocol Interface The LPD is available on the following interfaces Ethernet 100Base TX Ethernet 10Base T The applicable frame types conform to Ethernet II Ethernet interface UNIX TCP IP Installation This section explains how to install the machine in a UNIX TCP IP environment Installation Procedure There are three stages Network Communication Setup The machine needs to be set up and configured for TCP IP Computer Setup The computer OS needs to be configured for the machine Test Print A print job should be submitted to make sure that the machine has been installed and configured correctly Network Communication Setup Use this procedure to set up the network communication parameters of the machine NOTE Keep the SNMP port enabled while you use the machine on the TCP IP network NOTE Some of the conf
381. hine Status on page 49 3 Follow the steps below to enable the Server Fax service to set the fax repository the directory on the Server Fax server to store transferred images and then to set the protocol 1 Start a web browser on a computer 2 In the URL field enter http followed by the Internet address of the machine Then press the lt Enter gt key on the keyboard NOTE If you use the IP address to specify the machine use one of the following formats depending on your machine configuration The IPv6 format is supported on Windows Vista only An IPv6 address needs to be enclosed in square brackets For IPv4 http xxx xxx XXxX XXX For IPv6 http XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX NOTE If you have changed the port number from the default port number 80 append the number to the Internet address as follows In the following examples the port number is 8080 For IPv4 http xxx xxx xxx xxx 8080 For IPv6 http XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 8080 The following describes how to enable the Server Fax service If the Fax service is not installed on the machine skip steps 3 to 7 and proceed to step 8 3 In CentreWare Internet Services click the Properties tab 4 Expand the Services folder and then expand the Fax folder 5 Click Fax Settings and then under Fax Service select Scan to Fax Server 6 Click the Apply button 7 On the right frame of the screen click
382. hod as in step 5 enter a gateway address 70 Select IPv6 IP Filter and then select Enabled or Disabled NOTE If you do not wish to use the IP filter feature select Disabled NOTE Use CentreWare Internet Services to register the IP addresses which are not allowed to access the machine Refer to the CentreWare Internet Services on page 147 11 When you have finished establishing TCP IP select Close on the Protocol Settings screen Finally set the other items required for the Internet Fax service 7 Select Connectivity amp Network Setup in the Group menu and then select Protocol Settings in the Features menu 2 Select the following items and then Change Settings e Machine s E mail Address Host Name E mail Address Machine Name Host Name 290 Internet Fax Installation Domain Name Outgoing Incoming E mail Settings gt POP3 Server Settings when receiving E mail via POP3 POP3 Server Name IP Address POP3 Port Number POP3 Polling Interval POP3 Login Name POP3 Password POP Password Encryption Outgoing Incoming E mail Settings gt SMTP Server Settings when sending or receiving E mail via SMTP SMTP Server Name IP Address SMTP Server Port Number E mail Send Authentication SMTP AUTH Login Name SMTP AUTH Password e Outgoing Incoming E mail Settings gt Domain Filtering if required Domain Filterin
383. ialized NOTE Encrypted data cannot be recovered if a problem occurs on the hard disk Encryption Key for Confidential Data Setting an encryption key allows you to encrypt confidential information such as the passcodes of the System Administrator and mailboxes This prevents interceptions and unauthorized access to the information during transmission across networks Select Keyboard and then use 4 to 12 alphanumeric characters to enter an encryption key NOTE Once you change an encryption key confidential information may not be able to be restored from a backup Service Rep Restricted Operation Specifies whether the Service Representative has full access to the security features of the machine including the ability to change System Administrator settings NOTE If you set Service Rep Restricted Operation to On be careful not to forget the System Administrator ID and passcode If you forget them contact your Xerox Welcome Center to have all the machine settings returned to the factory default values Software Download Specifies whether the machine is to allow software downloads 83 6 Setups Country Specify the country code for the line type used in your area NOTE When setting up Fax options users in European countries and North American countries may be required to set the country code for the line Also refer to Country Code for Fax Option in the Fax chapter of the User Guide Recipient Selec
384. ication Servers Authentication System Authentication System Settings Allows you to select the remote authentication method to use Server Response Time Out Specifies the time out value for connection to the server Search Time Out Specifies the time out value for search on the server Kerberos Server Allows you to configure Kerberos servers 1 to 5 Primary Server Name IP Address Enter the server name or IP address of the primary server Primary Server Port Number Enter the port number of the primary server Secondary Server Name IP Address Enter the server name or IP address of the secondary server Secondary Server Port Number Enter the port number of the secondary server Realm Name Specify a realm name 217 7 CentreWare Internet Services Feature Setting items Security Remote SMB Server Authentication SMB Server Setup Specify the setup method for an Servers SMB server The options available for SMB servers 1 continued to 5 are Domain Name Specify a domain name Server Name IP Address Specify a server name IP address Xerox Secure Access Settings Default Prompt Displays the default prompt message to be displayed on the Xerox Secure Access login screen To change the message enter it using up to 255 characters Default Title Displays the default title for the Xerox Secure Access login screen Local Login Specify
385. ice Finisher Top Cover Integrated Office Finisher Top Cover 7 Open the Integrated Office Finisher top cover 2 Turn the wheel to remove the jammed paper 3 Close the Integrated Office Finisher top cover NOTE If a paper jam message appears again or you cannot see the jammed paper inside the machine the Integrated Office Finisher must be removed to clear the jam For details on how to remove the Integrated Office Finisher refer to the manual provided with the Integrated Office Finisher Paper Jams in the Office Finisher LX Optional Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the Office Finisher LX optional Office Finisher LX Top Cover 7 Use the lever shown in the illustration to open the Office Finisher LX top cover The top cover opens 351 15 Problem Solving 2 Remove the jammed paper 3 Close the Office Finisher LX top cover Office Finisher LX Transport Cover F 7 Open the Office Finisher LX Transport Cover F 2 Remove the jammed paper 3 Close the Office Finisher LX Transport Cover F NOTE If a paper jam message appears again or you cannot see the jammed paper inside the machine the Office Finisher LX must be removed to clear the jam For details on how to remove the Office Finisher LX refer to the manual provided with the Office Finisher LX 352 Document Jams Document
386. ies the HTTP proxy server login name HTTP Proxy Server Password Specifies the HTTP proxy server password Enter a password and then re enter the password for confirmation HTTPS Proxy Server Name Specifies the HTTPS proxy server name HTTPS Proxy Server Port Number Specifies the HTTPS proxy server port number HTTPS Proxy Server Authentication Specifies whether to enable HTTPS proxy server authentication HTTPS Proxy Server Login Name Specifies the HTTPS proxy server login name HTTPS Proxy Server Password Specifies the HTTPS proxy server password Enter a password and then re enter the password for confirmation Outgoing Incoming E mail Settings This feature allows you to set the outgoing and incoming mail server settings 1 S e e ct O u tg oi n g ncom i n g E Outcoming Incoming E mail Settings Close m a l l Setti n g s l n th e Featu re s B POP3 Server Settings B SMTP Server Settings m Domain Filtering menu 2 Change the required settings 3 Select Close POP3 Server Settings Specifies the POP3 server settings Use the scroll buttons to switch between screens e POP3 Server Name IP Address Specifies the server name or IP address of the POP3 server POP3 Port Number Specifies the POP3 server port number e POP3 Polling Interval Specifies the POP3 server interval to poll the POP3 server Enter a time in the range of 1 to 120 minutes e POP3 Login Name Specifies the POP3 serv
387. iguration options for this protocol are only available from CentreWare Internet Services Refer to CentreWare Internet Services on page 147 Follow the steps below to establish TCP IP 71 Connect the machine to the network 233 8 Printer Environment Settings 2 Press the lt Log In Out gt button on the control panel and then type in the System Administrator login ID to enter the System Administration mode NOTE The passcode may also be required depending on the machine configuration 3 Press the lt Machine Status gt button on the control panel and then select the Tools tab on the screen Select System Settings in the menu at the left side of the screen 4 5 Select Connectivity amp Network Setup in the Group menu 6 Select Protocol Settings in the Features menu 7 Under TCP IP IP Mode select IPv4 Mode IPv6 Mode or Dual Stack When IPv4 Mode or Dual Stack is selected in step 7 8 Select IP Address Resolution and then Change Settings 9 Select a method for establishing an IP address from DHCP BOOTP RARP DHCP Autonet and STATIC and then select Save NOTE Use the DHCP server together with the Windows Internet Name Server WINS server If you selected STATIC in step 9 then proceed to step 10 to configure the protocol settings Otherwise proceed to step 16 70 Select IPv4 IP Address and then Change Settings 17 Use the keypad on the screen to
388. in Min Passcode Length for Stored Job 016 701 An error occurred due to insufficient memory for the PCL decomposer Lower the resolution if possible 016 702 A page compression error occurred The machine could not compress any page due to insufficient free space in the buffer Change the Print Mode setting to High Speed or add memory to increase the page buffer size 016 703 An e mail specifying a non registered or invalid mailbox number was received When sending a fax or Internet Fax e Contact the Xerox Welcome Center When receiving e mail fax or Internet Fax e Register the mailbox with the specified number e Send an e mail to a valid mailbox e Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 016 704 The hard disk runs out of space because the mailboxes are full Delete unnecessary documents from the mailboxes 016 705 The Secure Print Print to Mailbox or Charge Print data was not stored in the mailbox or the data scanned on the machine was not stored in the mailbox The probable causes are as follows The optional kit is not installed on the machine The print driver is not for the machine Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 389 15 Problem Solving Code Description and Remedy 016 706 The hard disk ran out of space because the number of Secure Print users reach
389. in a UNIX TCP IP environment The UNIX Workstation Operating Systems OS supported are Solaris SunOS and HP UX The following information is provided Information Checklist page 232 UNIX TCP IP Environments page 233 UNIX TCP IP Installation page 233 Installation Procedure page 233 Network Communication Setup page 233 Workstation Setup page 235 Test Print page 239 Printing page 240 Solaris HP UX page 240 SunOS page 241 Printer Status page 243 Solaris HP UX page 243 SunOS page 244 C Option page 245 Information Checklist Before installing the UNIX TCP IP features on the machine make sure that the following items are available or have been performed Item By An existing operational network utilizing a UNIX TCP IP protocol is Customer required These steps are not designed to install the UNIX TCP IP network SunOS 4 1x Solaris 1 x 2 x 7 x 8 x 9 x 10 x HP UX 9 x 10 x 11 x Customer Make sure that the correct IP Address is being used for the machine Customer Make sure that the Gateway Address is set correctly Customer Make sure that the Subnet Mask for IPv4 or Prefix for IPv6 is set Customer correctly Make sure that the Host Name is set correctly Customer Test the machine to make sure that it is fully installed and functioning Customer correctly If you encounter problems during the installation of the mac
390. ine 200 x 200 dpi 8 x 7 7 lines mm Superfine 400 x 400 dpi 16 x 15 4 lines mm Superfine 600 x 600 dpi Resolution Conversion Available for sending and receiving smooth on receiving Image Compression JBIG MH MR MMR Long Page Scan Feature 600 mm 23 6 inches maximum length NOTE This feature is only available when the document feeder is used NOTE This feature is not available in double sided mode NOTE When using this feature to scan long documents which exceed 432 mm 17 0 inches the operator must feed the document one sheet at a time The paper weight should be between 60 and 90 g m Connection Approvals EU EEA certified to TBR21 USA approved to FCC Pt 68 Canada approved to DOC CS 03 Other countries certified to national PTT standards 426 Emulation Parameters Emulation Parameters The emulation parameters for PCL and PDF direct printing can be changed as necessary For information on how to change parameter values refer to Print Mode in the Machine Status chapter on page 57 PCL Emulation Parameter Item Value No Paper Tray 201 0 Auto Default 1 Tray 1 2 Tray 2 3 Tray 3 4 Tray 4 5 Tray 5 Bypass 6 Tray 6 HCF Selects the paper tray When Auto is selected the machine automatically selects the tray that contains the paper whose size is specified on the Paper Supply screen Auto Size 202 3 A3 4 A4 Default 5 A5 14 B4 15 B5
391. ine Refer to the Configuration of E mail Encryption Digital Signature on page 300 for full information 7 Enter the shared secret a password in the Shared Secret and Verify Shared Secret boxes 8 Select Enabled default setting for Communicate with Non IPsec Device so that computers not set up for encryption can still communicate with this machine 9 Configure other available settings by referring to Properties in the CentreWare Internet Services chapter on page 173 305 13 Security Encryption Digital Signature 70 Click Apply and enter the System Administrator user ID and passcode if prompted The default is 11111 and x admin 306 14 Authentication and Account Administration The machine has a unique Authentication feature that restricts the ability to use functions and an Account Administration feature that manages the use of each machine feature Some models do not support some of the features described in this chapter Some models require an optional kit to use some of the features described in this chapter This chapter contains information on the features used to change the settings and on the setting procedures Overview of Authentication page 307 Authentication for Job Flow Sheets and Mailboxes page 310 Overview of Account Administration page 320 Xerox Standard Accounting page 326 802 1x Authentication page 330 Local Machine Authentication Setup pa
392. ing Code Description and Remedy 033 735 A fax error occurred Switch off the machine and then switch it on again Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 033 736 The transmission was cancelled because the data size exceeded its upper limit 033 737 A fax error occurred Perform the same operation again 033 738 Abnormal JBIG image data was received No user action is required 033 740 The print job for the received fax document was cancelled No user action is required 033 741 A fax error occurred Perform the same operation again Contact the Xerox 033 742 Welcome Center if the problem persists 033 743 A fax error occurred Switch off the machine and then switch it on again 033 744 Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 033 745 033 746 033 747 The job was suspended No user action is required 033 749 The machine rectified a memory problem automatically for printout No user action is required 033 750 A fax error occurred Switch off the machine and then switch it on again Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 033 751 Outputting an activity report was suspended because the machine was in Sleep mode After the machine exits the Sleep mode the machine will output the report 033 755 Unable to print the fax document due to a malfunction of the fax service Take one of the following actions e Switch
393. insufficient memory Close unused ports or delete unnecessary data 116 740 A print error occurred A parameter value is greater than the limit value Check the print settings 116 749 The print job was stopped because the specified font was not found Install the font or enable the font substitution setting in the print driver 116 752 The description in the PDF print job ticket has a problem Repeat the same procedure Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 116 771 The parameter values were corrected because the machine encountered a 116 772 problem when printing the data If the received image is incomplete or 116 773 damaged ask the sender to check the image and to resend the data When 116 774 Internet Fax forwarding is enabled check with the recipient if the image has no 116 775 problem 116 776 116 777 116 778 116 780 The document attached to the received e mail has a problem Check the attached document 116 790 e Ifthe machine did not staple any print sets check that the specified stapling position is appropriate and then try again e Ifa user stops a confidential Fax or Internet Fax print job while the machine is printing the data of the job the machine will not staple the first print set Manually staple the first set in that case 123 400 The machine has detected a software related problem Switch off the machine and then switch it on again Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persist
394. int request again When the print data size exceeds the maximum size in multiple files reduce the number of files to be printed at one time A fault occurred during print processing Check the error message on the touch screen Switch the machine off and on and then retry printing The selected transport protocol does not conform with the client Check the selected transport protocol on the touch screen Select a transport protocol conforming with the client The print data format to be processed by the machine does not match the data format sent from the client Disable the output function of Ctrl D When the required printing result is not obtained Cause Confirmation Method Action The specified print language is different from the print language of the print data Check the specified print language and the print language of the print data Specify a print language matching that of the print data The print driver that accompanies the machine is not being used a third party print driver is being used Check whether the print driver that accompanies the machine is selected Select the print driver that accompanies the machine If the print driver is not found install and select it If a third party print driver is used you may have unexpected results 371 15 Problem Solving When using Macintosh OS X When printi
395. int a confirmation sheet When enabled a sheet showing the success or failure of a job will be printed e Localization Displays the type of measurement inches or millimeters Distribution Templates Maximum Number of Job Templates Displays the maximum number of job templates Refresh Start Time Allows you to set the time the machine will retrieve templates from a server and store a copy on the machine for viewing from the control panel Template Distribution Repositories e Login Source Select whether to prompt user login on the machine s control panel Job Log Optional Information Specify whether user names and or domains are to be included with job logs File Repository Setup Allows you to view and modify the file repository on the remote pool server Default File Destination Allows you to specify the default file destination for scanning Click the Edit button to edit the following settings for the default file destination Friendly Name Give a name to the file repository using up to 64 characters e Protocol Select a transfer protocol from FTP Netware SMB HTTP and HTTPS Host Name IP Address amp Port Enter the host name IP address and post number of the transfer protocol This appears only when FTP SMB HTTP or HTTPS is selected in Protocol e Validate Repository SSL Certificate Place a check mark into this check box to validate the reposi
396. inter Environment Settings 266 9 E mail Environment Settings This chapter explains how to set up the e mail feature on the machine Some models do not support the e mail feature Some models require optional kits to use the e mail feature For details contact the Xerox Welcome Center In this chapter the following information is provided E mail Overview page 267 Information Checklist page 268 E mail Environments page 269 E mail Installation page 269 Installation Procedure page 269 Network Communication Setup page 270 Test Mail page 272 E mail Overview You can send and receive e mails using the machine When sending and receiving an e mail the following features are available Scan to E mail E mail Print e E mail Notification Service e Notify Job End by E mail Scan to E mail You can send the scanned documents as an e mail attachment to one or more e mail address destinations You can select the format of the scanned data to be TIFF PDF or XPS E mail Print You can send an e mail from a computer to the machine with a TIFF or PDF document attached Upon receiving the e mail the machine will print it out automatically E mail Notification Service You can configure the machine to send an e mail to a specified address The e mail will give notice whenever an error occurs on the machine or a history of failed e mail reception requests or print requests You can also
397. ired settings Ze Preset 2 means 3 3 R E Preset 3 81 B4 gt A4 Use the scroll buttons to switch a CT between screens TREPA COA Y 3 Select Close R E Preset 1 to 7 Specifies the reduce enlarge ratios assigned to each of the seven buttons Select from 25 options in the range of 25 400 Connectivity amp Network Setup This section describes the features that allow you to change the default settings for the network configuration For more information on network setups refer to Printer Environment Settings on page 225 NOTE The options available may vary with the usage environment Port Settings page 90 Protocol Settings page 92 Machine s E mail Address Host Name page 93 Proxy Server Settings page 94 Outgoing Incoming E mail Settings page 95 Remote Authentication Server Settings page 96 Security Settings page 97 Other Settings page 100 1 Select System Settings and Machine Faults Y Supplies Y Billing Y Tools Information Information then select Connectivity amp Group Features N etwo rk S etu p i n th e G rou p D Common Service Settings Port Settings m e n u O Copy Service Settings Protocol Settings A Machine s E mail Authentication w Address Host Name y Security Settings Port Settings This feature allows you to set the print mode port status communication mode and auto eject time for the communication
398. is feature allows you to hide the details of active jobs from general users on the Active Jobs screen in Job Status 1 Select Active Jobs View in the Active Jobs View Cancel Save Features menu Hide Job Details 2 Select the required option O 3 Select Save QO Hide Job Details Select No to display or Yes to hide the details of active jobs Completed Jobs View This feature allows you to select PAPA E an whether to permit unauthenticated O iem To Hie oh Det users or non job owners to view the TENG O completed jobs executed by other Orn users on the Completed Jobs 10 0 rg Oz screen in Job Status 7 Select Completed Jobs View in the Features menu 2 Select the required options 3 Select Save Access To Displayed when Require Login to View Jobs is selected Select All Jobs to allow every user to view all completed jobs or Jobs Run by Login User Only to view only the completed jobs executed by the login user Hide Job Details Displayed when Allow Viewing at All Times or Required Login to View Jobs is selected Select No to display or Yes to hide the details of completed jobs Overwrite Hard Disk In order to protect data stored on the hard disk from unauthorized retrieval you can set the overwrite conditions to apply to data stored on the hard disk NOTE When the Audit Log feature is enabled the start and end times of every overwriting p
399. is procedure is used to set up the USB communication parameters for the machine At the machine perform these steps NOTE Some of the configuration options for this protocol are only available from CentreWare Internet Services Refer to CentreWare Internet Services on page 147 7 Press the lt Log In Out gt button on the control panel and then type the System Administrator login ID to enter the System Administration mode NOTE The passcode may also be required depending on the machine configuration 2 Press the lt Machine Status gt button on the control panel and then select the Tools tab on the screen 260 USB Port Select System Settings in the menu at the left side of the screen Select Connectivity amp Network Setup in the Group menu Select Port Settings in the Features menu Select USB and Change Settings Select the item to be set and then select Change Settings S amp S NDA A amp Select the required value and then Save 9 Repeat steps 7 and 8 if required Depending on your requirements select the following communication parameters on the machine e Port Status e Print Mode e PJL Auto Eject Time e Adobe Communication Protocol NOTE Adobe Communication Protocol can be set when the PostScript Kit optional has been installed Computer Setup Test Print Before starting Computer Setup make sure that the USB cable is disconnected from the computer Then perf
400. isplay only the selected type of jobs Owner Displays the owner of each job Name Identifies each job by job number and type Status Displays the status of each job such as printing transferring and sending Pop up Menu Job Screen Selecting an active job in the Active Jobs screen displays the pop up menu that allows you to delete the job release the job or view the details of the job The items displayed on the menu are different depending on the job type and status la Delete Deletes the job or Active Jobs Ves Jobs Y Secure Print e by Jobs amp More aiting Jobs pe displays a page that asks whether owner Name Status or not to delete the job depending m wi grat ooo pm Delete R 007 Fuji FileName1234 00003 Job in Pref Job Details on the job type 008 Smith FTP Transfer 00004 Transferri MAA A 009 Brown Fax Send 00005 Sending Release Prints the stored D0 Smith FileName234 00040 Held Sample v document e Promote Processes the job immediately after the one that is currently being processed e Job Details Details Displays a job screen where you can view the details of the job e Close Menu Closes the pop up menu A job screen allows you to view the details of a job or stored document and select the following buttons The content of the screen and the buttons displayed vary depending on the service type and status of the job or stored document 40 Comp
401. isplay the items in the folder c Click PDF XPS Security Settings and then set the following items PDF Signature Select Do not add signature Always add visible signature Always add invisible signature or Select during send e XPS Signature Select Do not add signature Always add signature or Select during send d Click the Apply button 304 Configuration of IPsec Configuration on a Computer Confirm that the digital certificate to be used by the machine to encrypt PDF and XPS files has been imported and registered on the recipient s computer This will assure the ability to conduct two way digital signing of files should this capability be required Configuration of IPsec IPsec IPsecurity is comprised of the IP Authentication Header and IP Encapsulating Security Payload protocols which secure IP communications at the network layer of the protocol stack using both authentication and data encryption techniques The ability to send IPsec encrypted data to the printer is provided by the use of a public cryptographic key following a network negotiating session between the initiator client computer and the responder printer or server To send encrypted data to the printer the computer and the printer have to establish a Security Association with each other by verifying a matching password shared secret to each other If this authentication is successful a session public key will be bui
402. ist of completed jobs Job Name Displays the name of a job Owner Displays the name of the client user who sent the job Status Displays the status of the job The status includes Completed Error Deleted Shutdown Cancelled Aborted and Unknown 156 Jobs Type Displays the type of job Page Count Displays the number of pages printed printed jobs only Output Destination Displays the output destination address document receipt number or name of the recipient server or file If the output destination is unknown or not specified is displayed Host Interface Displays the name of the host that has sent the job If the host interface is unknown or not specified is displayed Time Completed Displays the date and time the job was completed Job History Group Parent Jobs This page displays a list of completed group parent jobs Job Name Displays the name of a group parent job Owner Displays the name of the client user who sent the group parent job Status Displays the status of the group parent job The status includes Completed Error Deleted Shutdown Cancelled Aborted and Unknown Type Displays the type of group parent job Page Count Displays the number of pages printed printed jobs only Output Destination Displays the output destination address document receipt number or name of the recipient server or file If the output d
403. istered or Pending 207 7 CentreWare Internet Services Feature Setting items Xerox Services continued Services Transmission Time If the Xerox Communication Server support is enabled specify the time at which Meter Assistant readings and supplies data are uploaded e Transmission Interval Supplies Assistant Displays the interval at which the supplies data is transmitted Date of Last Transmission Displays the last Meter Assistant or Supplies Assistant transmission Communication Log Displays the transmission logs of the Xerox Communication Server Transmitted Data Displays the transmitted data Date amp Time Displays the time and date the data was transmitted Custom Services Validation Options Export User Name Select the check box to have a user name sent with a validation request if the user is authenticated via the remote authentication server Custom Services Allows you to enable or disable the Custom Services service by selecting or deselecting the check box Xerox Standard Accounting Accounting Manage Accounting This page displays a list of registered users If registered users are listed over two or more pages use the Previous or Next button to move between pages The list can be sorted by clicking ID or Name Add New User Click this button to register new user information User User ID
404. istrator Create X X X X Display X X X X Edit X X X X Copy X X X X Delete X X X X Select Run X X X X Link to Mailbox X X X X Authenticated Users Shared by vob Flow Operations Generally Mailbox System Personal Personal Shared Adminis owner other trators Create X O Display O O 313 14 Authentication and Account Administration Authenticated Users Job Flow Operations Generally Mailbox aay Personal Personal Shared Adminis owner other trators Edit X X X O X Copy X X O O X Delete X X X O X Select Run X X O O X Link to Mailbox X X O O X System Administrator Job Flow Operations Generally An Shared by the Shared ailbox System Personal Administrator Create X X O X Display O O O O Edit O O O O Copy O O O O Delete O O O O Select Run O O O O Link to Mailbox O O O O O Operation available X Operation not available The owner of a copied job flow sheet becomes a duplicate user Types of Mailboxes The following three types of mailboxes can be used with the machine Generally Shared Mailbox This is a mailbox created by a General User without using the Authentication feature When the Authentication feature is not enabled this mailbox is shared and its settings may be changed by all users When the Authentication feature is enabled this mailbox can only be operated by a System Administrator Syst
405. ize 2 Ma ES Original Size Use the scroll buttons to switch AH Original Size 4 ASO Change between screens OTERO y Select Close Original Size 1 to 11 e A B Series Size Specifies standard document sizes in A B series Use the scroll buttons to switch between screens Inch Size Specifies standard document sizes in Inch series Use the scroll buttons to switch between screens Others Specifies other miscellaneous sizes Use the scroll buttons to switch between screens Custom Size Specifies a user defined size set using the scroll buttons Output Size Defaults This feature allows you to configure or change the output size buttons displayed when Enter Output Size is selected for the Reduce Enlarge feature on the Layout Adjustment screen 1 2 3 Select Output Size Defaults in aig size beans the Features menu Items Current Settings 1 Output Size 1 A3 A N Change the required settings 2 Output Size 2 MD a Output Si Use the scroll buttons to switch Gems Mw Output Size 4 A5D Change between screens METE zE ly Select Close Output Size 1 to 8 e A B Series Size Specifies standard document sizes in A B series Inch Size Specifies standard document sizes in Inch series Others Specifies other miscellaneous sizes 107 6 Setups Reduce Enlarge Presets This feature allows you to configure or change the r
406. job is in a print queue that is not assigned to the machine Use NWADMIN or PCONSOLE to check whether the machine is assigned to the print queue Re send the print job to the print queue assigned to the machine Use NWADMIN or PCONSOLE to assign the target queue to the machine The data format of the print job does not match the print environment setting of the client If using Windows on the client disable Ctrl D 366 Network related Problems Cause Confirmation Method Action The number of print queues assigned exceeds the maximum number that the machine can support Use NWADMIN or PCONSOLE to check whether the required print queue is assigned to the machine Re send the print job to the print queue assigned to the machine No slave file server is specified bindery service mode Use PCONSOLE to check whether a slave file server is registered Use PCONSOLE to register a slave file server Incorrect printer type Use PCONSOLE to check the printer type Use PCONSOLE to specify Remote Parallel LPT1 Then reboot the machine The setting for the slave file server is incorrect bindery mode Use PCONSOLE to check the setting Use PCONSOLE to specify the correct setting The actual number of the page of the print job is different from the page number set in the machine Use NWADMIN to check whether the starting
407. jobs e According to Print Auditron The receiving control depends on the setting made on the machine The options for Job Login Success Job Login Failure and Job without User ID are displayed Save in Private Charge Print Saves jobs with incorrect User ID in Private Charge Print The Job without User ID option is available for printing the job When Save in Private Charge Print is selected a user ID must be 24 bytes or less If the specified user ID on the print driver exceeds 24 bytes the jobs will be cancelled without being saved Save in Charge Print Saves jobs in Charge Print No other option is available Unwanted jobs should be discarded on a regular basis Job Login Success Available only when According to Print Auditron is selected Specifies how to treat the print jobs with a user ID or passcode authentication success Select from Print Job and Save in Private Charge Print Job Login Failure Available only when According to Print Auditron is selected Specifies how to treat the print jobs with a user ID or passcode authentication failure Select from Save in Charge Print and Delete Job Job without User ID Specifies how to treat the jobs without a user ID such as e mail print jobs Select from Print Job Save in Charge Print and Delete Job Allow User to Disable Active Settings This feature allows privileged users to temporarily disable the Watermark feature if it has been enabl
408. kground Force Watermark Copy Job Specifies whether to always enable the Watermark feature for copy jobs 76 System Settings Force Watermark Client Print Specifies whether to always enable the Watermark feature for print jobs submitted from client computers Force Watermark Mailbox Print Specifies whether to always enable the Watermark feature for Mailbox Print jobs Custom Watermark 1 to 3 Specifies three user defined text strings that appear in the Text Default list A maximum of 32 alphanumeric and symbol characters can be entered Other Settings This feature allows you to configure various other settings common to the main services such as copy fax and scan 7 Select Other Settings in the ee Featu re s menu Items Current Settings 2 Ch ange the req u i red setti ngs A 2 a Center Tray aa Set E 3 Offset Stacking Right Middle Tray Offset per Set Use the side tabs to switch 4 Booklet Offset Offset per Subset Gane between screens 5 Extended Tray Module Offset Stacking Module ly 3 Select Close Fax Service Switches between the Fax and Server Fax services NOTE This setting appears when both Fax and Server Fax services are installed on the machine Offset Stacking xxx Tray Specifies the output paper stacking position for the tray The tray name displayed for this setting depend on the machine configuration When printing the machine
409. l and then Printer s 2 Click Add Printer 3 When the Add Printer Wizard screen displays click Next 4 Select Local Printer Make sure that the Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play printer box is unchecked Click Next 5 Select Create a new port and choose Secure Access Port from the Type drop down menu Secure Access Port becomes available when it is installed Click Next 6 When prompted enter the IP address of the machine 7 Enter a name for the print queue such as raw If you selected the Standard TCP IP port you can accept the default name provided by Windows Click Next 8 You will be prompted for a print driver Select Have Disk and browse to the location of your print driver 9 Select the INF file and then click Open 70 When the Install from Disk screen displays verify that the path and file name are correct and click OK 11 Select the model that corresponds to your machine and then click Next 72 Enter a name for your machine and select either Yes or No for making the machine your default Windows printer Select Yes if you will be printing primarily to the machine from your Windows applications Click Next 73 If the Printer Sharing screen displays select Do not share this printer unless the machine is directly connected to your workstation and you wish to share it with other network users Click Next 14 Select Yes to print
410. l Size Defaults suas 115 Local Terminal Information ccseccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeees 115 Internet Fax Control aiinsir sranie innies 116 E mail Internet Fax Service Settings oooooocccccnncnnnnococcccccnncccnnnnnnnnos 118 E mail Control iii eo 118 Mailbox Stored Document Settings oococcinccncnccccccccinnnccancccncnnnnns 120 Mailbox Service Settings oocooonmncccccnnnnnsssacccrrccnnnnnnnnnanencnnos 120 Stored Document Settings ooocoonoocococccccnnnnncnonncnnnneninnnnnnoos 121 Job Flow Service Settings litiasis 121 ELIE o E EE EA EA EAT 122 Create Mailbox unirte 122 Link Job Flow Sheet to Mailbox Screen cecceeceeeeeeeeeees 123 Stored Programming avril iii dacs 124 Registering Operations with a Job Number cee 124 Create JOD FIOW SNGGCE ce te 125 Mailbox Link Job Flow Sheet to Mailbox Screen 125 Create Job Flow Sheet Screen cccccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 126 Create Job Flow Sheet Keyword cccececeseseeenceeeeeeeeeeeeneeee 127 Add Address Book Entry ccesesecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseseneeeeeeeees 127 Create Fax Group Recipients 0eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeneeenneeaes 131 Add Fax Comment ccone aa e das 132 Paper Tray Attributes sicarios 132 O 132 Create View User Accounts coocoocococccccoccocnoconnonnnnn nono no nono nro nono nonnnnnnns 133 VIEWSACCOUMS 2 A
411. l to the paper as shown in the illustration above Note however that excessively bending or folding the paper might cause paper jams NOTE When loading envelopes make sure the flaps are closed and that the envelopes are oriented on the tray so that the edge with the flaps will enter the machine first However when loading C5 size envelopes set them long edge feed so that the edge with the flaps will face toward you 2 Slide the side guides towards the paper until they are just touching the edge of the stock 19 2 Paper and Other Media High Capacity Feeder Tray 6 The High Capacity Feeder Tray 6 allows you to load up to 2 000 sheets of paper NOTE You cannot load custom size paper into the High Capacity Feeder 7 Pull out Tray 6 2 Remove the screw from the guide at the back of the tray and remove the guide from the tray 3 Insert the projections on the bottom of the guide into the paper size holes on the tray 1 Insert the projection on the tray into the paper size hole on the guide 2 and then tighten the screw removed in step 1 4 Remove the screw from the guide at the front of the tray and remove the guide from the tray 5 Insert the projections on the bottom of the guide into the paper size holes on the tray 1 Insert the projection on the tray into the paper size hole on the guide 2 and then tighte
412. language PJL Allows you to enable or disable PJL printer job language PJL is a command independent of printer languages You can specify the printer language to use for the next job regardless of the printer language that is currently being used Language Emulations PostScript Allows you to configure the following settings when PostScript is enabled e Logical Printer Number Enter the number of the logical printer to use e Memory Settings Select the logical printer to be used as the default when the machine is switched on e Print Position of User Details Select whether or not to print user information on outputs When printing user information select the print position Print User Details with Date If printing user information select whether to print the date with the user information Font Size of User Details If printing user information select the font size Edit Displays a page which allows you to set the print parameters for the selected logical printer Logical Printer Number Displays the logical printer number specified in the Language Emulations PostScript page Paper Supply Allows you to select the paper tray Output Size Allows you to select the paper size Output Destination Allows you to select the destination for your output Print Quantity Setup Allows you to select the print quantity setup that has priority over other settings Quantity Allow
413. le name already exists as a directory e Illegal characters are used in the file name Take one of the following actions e Check if the specified file name can be used in the save location Check whether or not the specified file name has been used by another user Check whether or not the specified file name has been used for another file or folder 027 523 During data transfer via SMB using the Scan to PC service a lock folder could not be created on the SMB server due to the following reason The specified lock folder already exists Take one of the following actions e If any lock directory LCK exists in the forwarding destination manually delete it and then try again e Check if the same name is being used for another folder 027 524 During data transfer via SMB using the Scan to PC service a folder could not be created on the SMB server because the same folder already exists Check if the specified name is being used for another file or folder on the SMB server 027 525 During data transfer via SMB using the Scan to PC service a file could not be deleted from the SMB server due to one of the following reasons The file does not exist The file is opened The specified file name is being used as a directory Check whether or not the file is not being used by another user at the specified save location 027 526 During data transfer via SMB using the Scan to PC service a lock fold
414. lected for File Name Conflict Select any option other than Do Not Save for File Name Conflict 027 531 During data transfer via SMB using the Scan to PC service an error occurred because the filing policy was invalid When selecting Rename New File in File Name Conflict make sure that the file format is not Multi Page 027 532 During data transfer via SMB using the Scan to PC service an error occurred when accessing to the NEXTNAME DAT file If Rename New File has been selected for File Name Conflict check if the NEXTNAME DAT file is correct 027 533 During data transfer via SMB using the Scan to PC service an internal error occurred Try executing the same operation If the problem persists contact the Xerox Welcome Center 027 543 The SMB server NetBIOS name is invalid Check if the name of the SMB server is correct 027 547 An SMB protocol error occurred Prohibited characters were detected in the specified domain name Check the domain name and that the correct domain name is set on the machine Check the domain using the following procedure 1 Select System Settings gt Connectivity amp Network Setup gt Remote Server Directory Service gt SMB Server Settings in System Administration mode 2 Select the corresponding SMB server and check the domain name 027 548 An SMB protocol error occurred Prohibited characters were detected in the specified user name
415. led Login to Local Accounts in Authentication Security Settings Reset Total Impressions Deletes all data tracked for the selected account Reset User Account Clears all settings and data for the selected account View Accounts Selecting Xerox Standard Accounting in Accounting allows you to check the following for each registered user or group 1 the maximum number of times that the account can be used for each service and 2 how many times the account has been used for each service NOTE You can register users and groups in CentreWare Internet Services For more information refer to CentreWare Internet Services on page 147 134 Accounting 7 Select Accounting and then MEA dos User ID User Name select View Accounts in the G rou p menu User Account 800200000000 auditron accountName0000 800300000000 auditron accountWame0000 2 Select User Account or Group Door accom eooo aa Acco un t If you se ect U ser 800500000000 auditron accountName0000 Account select also the User ID to be checked 3 Click Details Reset User Accounts This feature allows you to reset the parameters set for all users accounts and clear all data tracked by the machine It also allows you to print an Auditron report for all services 1 Select Accounting and then Reset User Accounts select Reset User Accounts in Q sue scons O al uassto the G rou p m
416. leted Jobs Delete Cancels a job that is being processed or on hold or deletes a stored document from the machine s memory Promote Job Promotes a job to be processed immediately after the one being processed Last Original Indicates the current scan batch is the last in a job to be scanned Next Original Sequentially scans more sections in the same scan job Start Starts scanning the next document or prints a job being held on the machine Release Prints a stored document Completed Jobs This screen allows you to view the completed jobs in the machine You can select a job in the list to display detailed attributes for that job The contents of each screen may differ depending on the type or status of the job 7 Press the lt Job Status gt button Active Jobs Y Completed Jobs Y Secure Print PO Gon Paren Jobs jol pe Jobs amp More on th e con trol pa ne Owner Name Status CompletionTime 001 Userl23 Copy Job 01234 Completed 4 6 810 AM 2 Select the Com pleted J obs tab 02 userz3 FTP Trasfer 02468 Completed Error 4 6 8 10 AM Use the scroll bar to switch 003 User001 Fax Send 03702 Deleted 4 6 810 AM 004 Userl11 Copy Job 04936 Shutdown 4 6 810 AM between screens 005 Userf01 Report 06170 Completed Wamed 4 6 8 10 AM v Group Parent Jobs Select this check box to group all parent jobs such as fax broadcasting jobs and jobs executed using a job flow sheet View by Job Type All
417. lists automatically 57 Private Charge Print seess 44 Problem Solving BONJOU cum dictada 374 E mail Services coooiccccccoccccnccccccccncnanncnn nono 378 Internet Intranet Connection c 379 NetWare o cceceeceeeeeeeececceeceeeeeeeeteeeeeneeaees 366 SCANNING Services 376 SME ti 362 TOP ec e a ee 371 problem solving ocoocococccccnconocccccononancccnnannnccnnnnno 341 procedures fault clearance cocoocccccnnccccccononcnononccnncnnnnnnnns 341 A a i a eaten 63 Properties CentreWare Internet Services 173 Protocol Settings Connectivity amp Network Setup ou 92 Proxy Server Settings Connectivity amp Network Setup eens 94 Proxy Server Setup eeeccceeeesseeeeeeeestteeeeeeenaees 94 Pseudo Photo Gradation Mode 89 113 Public Mailbox cccceccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeees 46 R RE Preset axccscehviciee i n akd as 90 115 Read Receipts cccccceceeeeseseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeees 119 Receive E mail cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeteees 92 Receive Untrusted E mail cccceeeeeeees 98 Receive Untrusted Internet Fax eeeee 98 Receiving Buffer RA A iA 102 IPP ta a an 102 LPB it ia 101 NetWare A 102 PORO TOU traca dd cocotero lacados 103 SMB aleen n da 102 US Be ce coi ltd a aTh 101 Recipient on Activity Report ceceeeeeees 74 Recipient Selection Method cceceee
418. lolo o lo 11 x 17 SEF 279 4 431 8 O O o lol o Jot ot o lo 7 25 x 10 5 SEF 184 2 266 7 Executive 7 25 x 10 5 LEF 266 7 184 2 O o o o o Executive C4 Envelope SEF 229 0 324 0 C5 Envelope LEF 229 0 162 0 C5 Envelope SEF 162 0 229 0 Commercial 10 241 3 104 8 Envelope LEF DL Envelope LEF 220 0 110 0 Monarch Envelope 190 5 98 4 LEF European 0 235 0 120 0 Envelope LEF A6 SEF 105 0 148 0 o lol o O A6 LEF 148 0 105 0 Postcard SEF 100 0 148 0 Postcard LEF 148 0 100 0 4 x 6 LEF 152 4 101 6 4 x 6 SEF 101 6 152 4 O Prepaid Postcard 200 0 148 0 LEF 3 5 x 5 5 SEF 89 0 139 7 5 x 7 SEF 127 0 177 8 O B6 LEF 182 0 128 0 B6 SEF 128 0 182 0 o o o O O Available Blank Not available 79 6 Setups 1 When scanning mixed sized originals automatic size detection is not available e Paper Size The machine automatically recognizes the sizes listed on the following pages when recording media is loaded in Trays 1 2 Trays 3 and 4 Two Tray Module Trays 3 and 4 High Capacity Tandem Tray Envelope Tray or Tray 6 High Capacity Feeder NOTE For Tray 5 Bypass 11 paper sizes can be selected as presets by the System Administrator from the sizes listed in the table on the following pages 80 System Settings Tray 1 2 T
419. low sheet Recipient Name 1 10 Enter the names of the recipients within 36 characters You can enter the names of up to 10 recipients Recipient Address 1 10 Enter the addresses of the recipients within 128 characters You can enter the addresses of up to 10 recipients Subject Enter the subject of the e mail File Format Select the format of documents that will be attached to the e mail e mTIFF Multiple Pages per File e TIFF File for Each Page PDF Images Multiple Pages per File e Optimize PDF For Fast Web View e XPS NOTE For a description of each option refer to File Format under the Scan E mail chapter in the User Guide FTP Transfer The following table shows the information fields on the FTP Transfer page Job Flow Sheet Name Displays the name of the job flow sheet Name Enter the recipient name with up to 36 characters Server Name Enter the FTP server name or IP address of the transfer destination Save in Specify the directory in which to save documents Login Name Ifthe FTP server of the transfer destination requires user login set the login name of the server with up to 32 characters Password If the FTP server of the transfer destination requires password entry set the password to the server with up to 32 characters File Format Select the file format to be used when saving scanned documents e mTIFF Multiple Pages per File
420. lowing parameter can be specified Parameter Description COLLATE collate Sorts prints electronically NOTE For some print languages the collation parameter may be invalid 247 8 Printer Environment Settings Specifying the print mode The following print mode parameters can be specified Parameter Description GC gc Selects quality priority GB gb Selects speed priority NOTE If several parameters are specified in the first lpr command data may not print NOTE The system default is used if no parameter is specified Specifying stapling The following parameters can be specified for stapling Parameter Description STAPLETL Places one staple in the upper left corner of the prints STAPLETD Places two staples at the top of the prints STAPLETR Places one staple in the upper right corner of the prints STAPLELD Places two staples on the left side of the prints STAPLERD Places two staples on the right side of the prints STAPLEBL Places one staple in the lower left corner of the prints STAPLEBD Places two staples at the bottom of the prints STAPLEBR Places one staple in the lower right corner of the prints NOTE If several parameters are specified in the first lpr command data may not print NOTE For some print languages the stapling parameter may be invalid Printing To specify the output format for printing enter the followi
421. lt and used to send IPsec encrypted data over the TCP IP network to the printer Providing additional security during the Public Key negotiating process Digital Certificates can alternatively be used in place of the Shared Secret to encrypt the Public Key information being exchanged between communicating parties The Digital Certificate resides on the machine managed as stated in Configuration of E mail Encryption Digital Signature on page 300 and MUST also have been imported and stored on the computer that is encrypting data being sent to the machine Certificates add digital signatures individualized checksums verifying data integrity to datagrams during the public key negotiating process greatly assisting in securing data from network sniffers To enable IPsec 7 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of the machine in the Address box to access CentreWare Internet Services In CentreWare Internet Services click the Properties tab Expand the Security folder Select IPsec in the directory tree Enable the protocol by placing a checkmark in the Enabled box HAD dh Select Pre Shared Key to use the Shared Secret between this machine and remote computers also possessing the secret Note that if you select Digital Signature the Shared Secret boxes will be grayed out and you will have to supply a certificate stored on this machine to the remote computer that wishes to send IPsec encrypted data to this mach
422. lts Scan Service Settings 107 Original Type oooooncccnnnnocccccnnnonncccnnnnns 85 105 110 Original Type See Through Paper sasse 89 Other Settings Common Service Settings 77 Other Settings Connectivity amp Network Setup 100 Other Settings Print Service Settings 103 Other Settings Scan Service settings 108 Out of Paper Warning Tone 68 Outgoing Incoming E mail Settings Connectivity amp Network Setup eee 95 Outgoing Incoming E mail Settings Network SENGE siira aa A cata 95 Output Color Recognition s es 72 Output Destination c cccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeees 86 Output Destination for E mail 0 0 ee 100 Output Destination Setup ccceeeeeeeeees 114 QUIPUL SIZE ati 107 Output Size Defaults Scan Service Settings 107 overview account administration 00cee 320 authentication 2 0 00 cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeees 307 SOCUITLY inicio 297 Overwrite Hard Disk ccccccccccccncc 52 83 145 P paper E 17 Storing and handling s es 23 supported paper types seeeeeeeeeeeees 23 supported SIZES coocococcocccccccccccccncnnannononnnnnnnos 23 paper and other Media ooooociccncnnoccocccccccccnnccnnnns 17 PAPEL jams iioi i ei aada 342 Cover A nearer te aa epa eerie eset 345 Cover Boneia a e at 346 Cover Ce uta 347 Cover Enoi niin ea iinet 347 Duplex Module Cover D onococccccccc
423. m Solving Integrated Office Finisher Top Cover Paper Jams in Cover A page 345 Paper Jams in Cover B page 346 Paper Jams in Cover C page 347 Paper Jams in Cover E page 347 Paper Jams in Trays 1 and 2 Trays 3 and 4 Optional and the Envelope Tray Optional page 348 Paper Jams in the High Capacity Tandem Tray Optional page 348 Paper Jams in Tray 5 Bypass page 349 Paper Jams in the High Capacity Feeder Optional page 349 Paper Jams in the Integrated Office Finisher Optional page 351 Paper Jams in the Office Finisher LX Optional page 351 Media jams happen for a variety of reasons Check the guidelines below to reduce potential jams in the machine Use only recommended media Refer to Supported Paper Sizes in the Paper and Other Media chapter on page 23 and Appendix on page 427 for a list of recommended media types e Protect unused media by storing it in its wrapper on a flat surface The orientation of the media in the paper tray must match the orientation of the documents e Check the maximum fill line in the tray to make sure the paper tray is not overloaded Do not use media that is torn wrinkled or folded 344 Paper Jams Paper Jams in Cover A Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in Cover A using green levers A1 and A2 Follow the messages on the touch screen and remove jammed paper from the specified location Green Lever A1
424. main 1 to 50 Other Settings E mail Receive Protocol Output Destination for E mail 4 Select Save To make sure that the e mail feature has been set up successfully perform the following steps Scan to E mail 1 2 3 4 Load a document Select E mail on the All Services screen Select the required features for the job Enter the e mail address of the recipient 272 E mail Installation 5 Press the lt Start gt button The document will be scanned and converted to the format that you specified Then it will be sent as an e mail attachment E mail Print 1 Use your e mail software to create an e mail and then attach a TIFF or PDF document 2 Enter the e mail address of the receiving machine 3 Send the e mail 4 After the machine has received the e mail printing starts automatically 273 9 E mail Environment Settings 274 10 Scanner Environment Settings This chapter explains how to set up scanning services in the supported environments Some models do not support scanning services Some models require optional kits to use scanning services For details contact the Xerox Welcome Center In this chapter the following information is provided Scanning Overview page 275 Scanning with the machine page 275 Scanning Process page 276 Scan to E mail Setup page 276 Scan to Mailbox Setup page 278 Network Scanning Setup page 280 Scan to Home
425. mary server port number Secondary Server Name IP Address Specifies the domain name or IP address of the secondary server Secondary Server Port Number Specifies the secondary server port number Domain Name Specifies the Kerberos domain name Enter a domain name up to 64 characters SMB Server Settings Specifies the SMB server settings e SMB Server Setup Specifies the settings for the SMB server Select Domain Name or Domain amp Server Names Address SMB Server 1 to 5 Domain Name Specifies the domain name This setting is mandatory The domain name for SMB Server 1 will be the default domain name Server Name IP Address Specifies the server name or IP address of up to 64 characters This setting is effective when Domain amp Server Names Address is selected in SMB Server Setup Security Settings This feature allows you to set up the security settings NOTE It is necessary to specify the device certificate for the machine in order to specify the HTTP SSL TLS communications and S MIME settings For more information refer to Security Encryption Digital Signature on page 297 7 Select Security Settings in the Features menu 2 Change the required settings 3 Select Close SSL TLS Settings Specifies the SSL TLS settings e Device Certificate Server Security Settings Close J SSL TLS Settings D IPSec Settings m S MIME Setti
426. mation on the paper sizes and media types for each tray refer to Supported Paper Sizes and Types on page 23 For information on the acceptable range of paper sizes and capacity for each tray refer to Paper Supply in the Appendix chapter on page 423 Preparing Paper for Loading Before loading paper into the paper trays fan the edges This procedure separates any sheets of paper that are stuck together and reduces the possibility of paper jams NOTE To avoid paper jams and misfeeds do not remove paper from its packaging until required Trays 1 amp 2 Two Tray Module Trays 3 amp 4 Trays 1 to 4 can be loaded with standard and non standard sized paper NOTE If the machine is processing a job do not open the active paper tray 7 Pull out the paper tray towards you NOTE To avoid jams and misfeeds do not load paper on top of any remaining paper in the tray Remove the paper and reload it on top of the new stock loaded 2 f required move the paper tray guides further out to load the new stock To adjust the side and rear guides pinch the guide lever on each guide and slide the guides to their new position To secure the guides in position release the levers 17 2 Paper and Other Media NOTE When changing the size or type of stock in the tray refer to Paper Tray Settings in the Setups chapter on page 70 3 Load the paper neatly and tightly against the left hand sid
427. n Authentication service on a remote server is not supported on the machine Basic authentication only is supported on the machine NTLM digest is not supported Change to authentication using SSL as security considerations require The remote cooperation service and the machine model options do not match If using remote services purchase the corresponding product model or options as necessary The IP address is not set correctly Check the IP address setting If the IP address is not set correctly supply a fixed IP address or use DHCP or Autonet to assign an IP address The IP gateway address is not set correctly Enter the correct IP gateway address if connected to a proxy server or a web server through an IP gateway The subway mask is not set correctly Enter the correct subway mask that matches the operating environment The DNS server address is not set correctly Check the DNS server address The DNS server address cannot be resolved Set the DNS server for resolving addresses When using a proxy server Enter the DNS server address for resolving the proxy server address e When not using a proxy server Enter the DNS server address for resolving the recipient addresses The address to bypass proxy server setting is incorrect Check whether only the address to bypass proxy is specified If the server is accessed using a direct IP address while specifying an add
428. n LDAP server SSL authentication error occurred The server name set on the machine is not the same as the information in the certificate Set the correct LDAP server address on the machine and in the certificate Or set LDAP SSL TLS Communication under SSL TLS Settings to Disabled to avoid the error 016 527 An LDAP server SSL authentication error occurred The error was caused by the software Contact the Xerox Welcome Center 016 529 A timeout error occurred upon connection to the Remote Download server Check if the Remote Download server is correctly installed and working on the network 016 533 A Kerberos server authentication protocol error occurred The machine and the Kerberos server clocks have a time difference that exceeds the Kerberos server clock skew value Check that the machine and Kerberos server clocks have the correct time 016 534 A Kerberos server authentication protocol error occurred The realm name set on the machine does not exist on the Kerberos server or the Kerberos server address set on the machine is not correct If the machine is to be connected to Windows 2000 or Windows 2003 Server make sure the realm name is in uppercase 016 535 The specified file does not exist on the Remote Download server Check the name of the file 016 536 The host name of the Remote Download server could not be resolved on the DNS server Check if the machine is connected to the DNS serve
429. n displays all the information e u user name This option displays information about print data received from specified users e v printer name This option displays the printer name and the path name for the machine The printer name is specified in the argument 243 8 Printer Environment Settings SunOS NOTE Long file names will be truncated NOTE Information for a maximum of 64 print instructions can be displayed NOTE If two or more types of print languages modes are set up on a single workstation identical job numbers may be displayed when an inquiry command Ipstat is issued Example To inquire about the print data received by a printer named fxPS enter the following command S lpstat ofxPS The lpg command is used to inquire about the status of the machine NOTE In the non spool mode this function is available to Windows NT clients but not to SunOS clients Command format usr ucb lpq P printer name 1 user name interval Command options The following command options are available e P printer name This option specifies the printer name registered at etc printcap If this option is omitted the default printer Ip will be used e 1 This option displays information about the workstation which is sending the print instruction in long format e User name This option displays information about print data received from a specified user e interval This option is use
430. n the folder Click Machine Digital Certificate Management Click on Upload Signed Certificate NOTE When a certificate is to be imported if the same certificate has been already registered in Local Device or Others the certificate cannot be imported Delete the existing certificate before importing the new one a Enter the password into Password b Re enter the password into Re enter Password c Enter the name of the file you want to import or select the file to be imported by clicking the Browse button d Click the Import button Enter the System Administrator user ID and passcode and then click OK NOTE The default System Administrator user ID and passcode are 11111 and x admin respectively 7 8 9 Refresh the web browser Click on the left of Security to display the items in the folder Configure the certificate a Click on Digital Certificate Management b Select Local Device for Category select Scan File for Certificate Purpose and then click the Display the List button c Place a check mark in the box in front of the certificate you wish to view details for d Click the Certificate Details button e Click the Use this certificate button f Click Reboot Machine The machine will reboot and the setting values will be reflected 70 Configure the settings for PDF XPS signatures a Refresh the web browser b Click on the left of Security to d
431. n the format XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX Select Save 11 Select Manually Configured IPv6 Prefix and then Change Settings 72 Enter an IP address prefix and then select Save 73 Select Manually Configured IPv6 Gateway and then Change Settings 14 Using the same method as in step 10 enter a gateway address 15 Select IPv6 IP Filter and then select Enabled or Disabled NOTE If you do not wish to use the IP filter feature select Disabled NOTE Use CentreWare Internet Services to register the IP addresses which are not allowed to access the machine Refer to CentreWare Internet Services on page 147 16 When you have finished establishing TCP IP select Close on the Protocol Settings screen Workstation Setup This section explains how to set up Solaris SunOS and HP UX workstations Refer to the relevant instructions below Solaris page 236 SunOS page 237 HP UX page 238 Print language mode logical printer A printer name for the logical printer should correspond to the print language mode to be used for printing or to the Logical Printer Number which was registered through CentreWare Internet Services Printer Name Print Language Mode Logical Printer PS PostScript PSASC PSA PostScript PSBIN PSB PostScript PCL PCL LP Print language specified on the touch screen of the machine DUMP DMP Dump mode AUTO ATO Auto d
432. n the screw removed in step 4 20 Loading Paper 6 Pull up the end guide lever along the slot 1 adjust the position of the lever to the size of the paper 2 and then push the lever back into its position 3 NOTE Do not use the slot at the left of the 8 5 slot on the end guide 7 Open the end guide and place the paper stack tightly against the right edge of the tray NOTE Do not load paper above the maximum fill line 8 Close the end guide 9 Push the tray in gently until it stops 21 2 Paper and Other Media Envelope Tray The Envelope Tray allows you to stack up to 43 mm of envelopes NOTE Insert the Envelope Tray in the slot for Tray 1 only Inserting the Envelope Tray in any other slot will damage it 7 Pull out the Envelope Tray 2 Load the envelopes in the Envelope Tray with the side to be printed face up and the edge with the flap against the left edge of the tray 3 Adjust the paper guides to the size of the envelopes Auto Tray Switching The machine automatically switches from one tray to another under the following conditions e When an active tray runs out of paper during printing When the paper size of the selected tray differs from that detected upon document scanning When the selected tray is open upon paper feeding When the selected tray malfun
433. n to access all services listed on this page select Lock All To not require user authentication select Unlock All Set access controls for the following services by selecting one of the following options Unlocked Does not require user authentication upon accessing a service Locked Hide Icon Requires user authentication and does not show the service menus to unauthenticated users Locked Show Icon Requires user authentication but shows the service menus to unauthenticated users e Copy Select an access control option for the copy service e Fax Select an access control option for the fax service Internet Fax Select an access control option for the Internet Fax service Scan to Mailbox Select an access control option for the Scan to Mailbox service e E mail Select an access control option for the E mail service e Network Scanning Select an access control option for the Network Scanning service Scan to PC Select an access control option for the Scan to PC service e Print Select an access control option for the Print service Send from Mailbox Select an access control option for Send from Mailbox service Stored Programming Select an access control option for the Stored Programming service Job Flow Sheets Select an access control option for the Job Flow Sheets service e Custom Services Select an access control option for the Cust
434. nabled Procedure for Scan to PC Setup SMB 7 On the control panel select Scan to PC Enter all the information required See the User Guide for more detailed information 3 Load a sample document into the document feeder A Press the lt Start gt button on the machine 5 Logon to the SMB server Navigate to the directory path repository that was set up earlier on the server Your scanned document can be found in the specified directory NOTE If Remote Authentication has been enabled a separate login screen appears when the Scan to PC SMB service is selected Documents are not scanned unless the authentication server authenticates user access Job Flow Service Setup To use the Job Flow service you need to enable the SOAP port the SNMP port and the Internet Services HTTP port and then to set the IP address The procedure for configuring the machine is as follows NOTE The configuration can also be performed using CentreWare Internet Services For details refer to CentreWare Internet Services on page 147 7 Enter the System Administration mode and press the lt Machine Status gt button on the control panel and then select the Tools tab on the touch screen NOTE For details on how to enter the System Administration mode refer to Setting Procedure on page 63 2 Enable the SOAP port 285 10 Scanner Environment Settings a Ensure that System Settings is selected in the menu a
435. nations reaches the limit the sender will not be added to the CC field even if this setting is set to Yes Edit E mail Recipients Specifies whether to permit users to edit e mail recipients To CC BCC Selecting No prevents emails from being sent to incorrect destinations NOTE If you set Edit E mail Recipients to No set Add Me to To Field to Yes 119 6 Setups Mailbox Stored Document Settings This section describes the features that allow you to configure various settings for mailboxes created for saving confidential incoming fax documents or scanned documents For more information refer to the following Mailbox Service Settings page 120 Stored Document Settings page 121 1 Select System Settings and Machine Y Faults Y Supplies Y Billing Y Tools Information Information then select Mailbox Sto red System Group Features Settings Document Settings in the Group menu O E mail Internet Mailbox Service Settings a Fa tings A b Flow Service Authentication Settings Security Settings Stored Document Settings v Mailbox Service Settings This feature allows you to specify whether to discard documents once received from a client and whether received Internet Fax documents can be forwarded 1 Select Mailbox Service TZ Settings in the Features items Current Settings 1 Documents Retrieved By Client Delete
436. nd to reboot the machine lt Log In Out gt Y O OS O os Ly 2 button 64 Main Menu on the Tools Screen Main Menu on the Tools Screen The main menu displayed on the left side of the Tools screen provides the following menu items Refer to the respective sections for details Setup is also available for general users System Settings page 65 Machine Faults Suppies Veig Toots Features Setup E page 122 n Con gs Machine Clock Timers a Accounting page 132 Bato Tees E Authentication Security Settings patenteaton ewok seus ae page 138 System Settings The System Settings menu on the Tools screen is categorized into the following groups For details refer to the respective sections Common Service Settings page 65 Copy Service Settings page 84 Connectivity amp Network Setup page 90 Print Service Settings page 100 Scan Service Settings page 105 Fax Service Settings page 109 E mail Internet Fax Service Settings page 118 Mailbox Sitored Document Settings page 120 Job Flow Service Settings page 121 Common Service Settings This section describes how to configure or change machine settings common to main services such as copy fax and scan For more information refer to the following Machine Clock Timers page 66 Audio Tones page 67 Scre
437. nded printing sequence e No Spooling Specifies no spooling Allows you to change the input buffer memory capacity within the range of 64 1 024 KB in 32 KB increments using the scroll buttons or the numeric keypad e Spool to Hard Disk Specifies spooling to the hard disk Receiving Buffer EtherTalk Specifies the input buffer memory capacity for EtherTalk interface within the range of 1024 2048 KB in 32 KB increments using the scroll buttons or the numeric keypad The currently available memory will be displayed at the top of the screen with the following message Memory Available XXX MB 102 System Settings Receiving Buffer Port 9100 Specifies the input buffer memory capacity for Port 9100 interface within the range of 64 1024 KB in 32 KB increments using the scroll buttons or the numeric keypad The currently available memory will be displayed at the top of the screen with the following message Memory Available XXX MB Other Settings This feature allows you to specify a printable area and replacement method when paper runs short 7 Select Other Settings in the a ATA Features menu Items Current Settings 2 Change the required settings DETIENE TE e Mismatcl ispla nfirmati reen Use the scroll buttons to switch HEM Pures Unregistered Forms Print Change between screens 5 rt Vea D Ei y 3 Select Close Print Area Specifies the printable a
438. ne characters become more easily recognizable as text Select More Photo to make halftone images on newspapers and flyers become more easily recognizable as photos Background Suppression B W Copy Specifies the method for detecting the background color for background suppression when making copies Select High Quality to pre scan the whole document to detect the background color Select High Speed to sample a portion of the document to detect the background color NOTE This function is available only for documents placed on the document glass NOTE When High Quality is selected a picture fragment may be produced if the Corner Shift option is set and Reduce Enlarge is set to less than 60 Background Suppression Scan Jobs Specifies the method for detecting the background color for background suppression when making scans Select High Quality to pre scan the whole document to detect the background color Select High Speed to sample a portion of the document to detect the background color NOTE This function is available only for documents placed on the document glass Image Enhancement Specifies whether to perform smoothing on print data for copy and fax jobs This will give smoother images on printed paper This feature allows you to specify how reports are to be automatically printed 7 Select Reports in the nE Featu res menu Items Current Settings 1 Print Reports Butt
439. ne generated when an inappropriate button on the control panel is pressed Machine Ready Tone Specifies the volume level of the tone generated when the machine becomes ready to copy or print for example after the power is switched on Job Complete Tone 1 Job Complete Tone 2 Specifies the volume level of the tone generated when a job is completed successfully Select a volume level and then under Targeted Jobs select the job types to apply the volume level to 67 6 Setups Fault Tone Specifies the volume level of the tone generated when a job did not finish properly Alert Tone Specifies the volume level of the tone generated when a job is suspended due to an error Out of Paper Warning Tone Specifies the volume level of the tone generated when the machine runs out of paper Low Toner Alert Tone Specifies the volume level of the tone generated when it is time to replace the toner cartridge Line Monitor Volume Specifies the volume level of the tone generated for the line monitor which allows you to hear call and response signals when connecting to a destination Ringing Volume Specifies the volume level of the tone generated when a call is received Stored Programming Tone Specifies the volume level of the tone generated each time an operation is performed during job memory registration You cannot completely turn off the volume for this tone Auto Clear Alert Tone Specifies the volume level of the ton
440. net Mask Enter the subnet mask in XXX XXX XXX XXX format e Gateway Address Enter the gateway address in XXX XXX XXX XXX format IPv6 e Enable Manual Address Select the check box to manually enter the IPv6 address and gateway address IP Address Enter the IPv6 address in XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX format e Automatically Configured Address 1 3 Displays the automatically configured IPv6 global unicast addresses e Link Local Address Displays the automatically configured IPv6 link local address e Gateway Address Enter the gateway address in XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX format e Automatically Configured Gateway Address Displays the automatically configured gateway address Domain Name e Domain Name Enter the domain name 185 7 CentreWare Internet Services Feature Setting items Connectivity Protocols continued TCP IP continued DNS Configuration IPv4 Obtain DNS Server Address Automatically Allows you to enable or disable the automatic setting of the IPv4 DNS server address via DHCP Preferred DNS Server Enter the IPv4 address for the DNS domain primary server Alternate DNS Server 1 2 Enter the IPv4 addresses for the DNS domain alternate server 1 and 2 IPv6 Obtain IPv6 DNS Server Address Automatically Allows you to enable or disable the automatic setting of the IPv6 DNS se
441. nfiguration This chapter explains how to enable and use CentreWare Internet Services for the machine The following information is provided Information Checklist page 147 CentreWare Internet Services Environments page 148 Centre Ware Internet Services Installation page 148 Installation Procedure page 148 Network Communication Setup page 148 Test Access page 150 Selecting Transport Protocols page 151 Screen Layout page 151 Services page 152 Status page 154 Jobs page 156 Print page 158 Scan page 160 Properties page 173 Support page 224 NOTE For troubleshooting CentreWare Internet Services refer to CentreWare Internet Services in the Problem Solving chapter on page 375 Information Checklist Before enabling the CentreWare Internet Services feature make sure that the following items are available or have been performed Item By An existing operational computer with TCP IP Internet or intranet Customer accessibility is required These procedures are not intended to install the TCP IP stack itself Obtain and record the following information Customer A Unique IP Address e Gateway Address e Subnet Mask for IPv4 Prefix for IPv6 Test the machine to make sure that it is fully installed and functioning Customer correctly 147 7 CentreWare Internet Services CentreWare Internet Services Environments C
442. ng Searching as another computer Start gt Find gt Computer on the client the machine can be found When opening the network computer to search for the machine it cannot be found Match the SMB transport protocol between the machine and each client The network subnet is invalid When selecting Searching as another computer Start gt Find gt Computer on the client the machine can be found When opening the network computer to search for the machine it cannot be found Set up the machine and client computers on the same networks 362 Network related Problems Cause Confirmation Method Action The host name specified for the machine is already defined for a different machine Check if the host name is duplicated in the SMB status information of the System Settings List Use CentreWare Internet Services to change the host name to a different name or reset the machine settings to the initial values The function to search for computer names is not available in IPv6 environment Check if Windows Vista displays the machine in a list of networked computers Edit the file hosts saved in C Windows system32 driver etc to associate the computer name with the IPv6 address and then type computer name in the Address bar on Explorer When the machine or other SMB machines are not found from client comput
443. ng all codes between nO to n9 for example 20 to 29 enter n When entering a group code enter n for example 1 when entering the group code 1 NOTE When the Relay Broadcast check box is not selected this item becomes inactive and cannot be configured F Code Enter the F code within 20 digits using numbers number signs and asterisks Password F Code Communication Enter the password for the F code within 20 digits using numbers number signs and asterisks Send as Internet Fax The following table shows the information fields on the Send as Internet Fax page Job Flow Sheet Name Displays the name of the job flow sheet Recipient Name 1 10 Enter the name of the recipient using up to 36 characters You can enter the names of up to 10 recipients Recipient Address 1 10 Enter the address of the recipient using up to 128 characters You can enter the addresses of up to 10 recipients Message Enter the body message of the e mail Internet Fax Profile Select the TIFF profile of Internet Fax from TIFF S TIFF F and TIFF J Header Select the check box if adding the Internet Fax header at the top of scanned images 177 7 CentreWare Internet Services Send as E mail The following table shows the information fields on the Send as E mail page Job Flow Sheet Name Displays the name of the job f
444. ng command C parameter parameter Enter a comma after C followed by the parameters which specify the output format To specify multiple parameters separate them with For example to print a file named file1 two sided on A4 210 x 297 mm 8 3 x 11 7 inches on printer fxPS enter the following command lpr PfxPS C DUP A4 filel NOTE If a parameter string of the C option exceeds 64 characters the operation may not function correctly 248 EtherTalk EtherTalk This section explains how to set up the machine to operate on an EtherTalk network The following information is provided Information Checklist page 249 EtherTalk Environments page 249 EtherTalk Installation page 250 Installation Procedure page 250 Network Communication Setup page 250 Computer Setup page 250 Test Print page 251 Information Checklist Before installing EtherTalk on the machine make sure that the following items are available or have been performed Item By An existing operational EtherTalk network with Macintosh workstations Customer equipped with Ethernet network interface cards is required These procedures are not designed to install an EtherTalk network Macintosh System versions 7 5 or later 8 x 9 x or Mac OS X 10 x Customer Test the machine to make sure that it is fully installed and functioning Customer correctly Install the Adobe PS print
445. ng fails Cause Confirmation Method Action The LPD port is not active Check whether the LPD port Activate the port if printing on has been activated a machine detected using Bonjour Restrictions This section explains the restrictions for TCP IP Machine settings e The IP address is a unique address administered system wide Consult with the system administrator when setting the necessary parameters The subnet mask and gateway settings may also be required depending on the networking environment Consult with the system administrator when setting the necessary parameters When a port status is enabled and there is insufficient memory the port status may be disabled automatically In this case disable all unused ports and reallocate the memory The Receiving Buffer LPD memory allocation needs to be set in response to the operating environment If the memory allocation is too small it may prevent receiving messages Client settings e The IP address is a unique address administered system wide Consult with the system administrator when setting the necessary parameters e Consult with the Network Information Service NIS administrator when setting up the network parameters IP address and other parameters from a host running NIS When the machine is switched off The following actions take place when the machine is switched off When Receiving Buffer LPD is set to Spool to Memory
446. ngs U dad ettings m IEEE 802 1x Settings Specifies the server certificate to attach to the e mail address 97 6 Setups HTTP SSL TLS Communication Specifies whether to enable SSL TLS communications HTTP SSL TLS Port Number Specifies the SSL TLS communications port number LDAP SSL TLS Communication Specifies whether to enable SSL TLS communication using LDAP Device Certificate Client Specifies the client certificate to attach to the E mail address Verify Remote Server Certificate Specifies whether to enable verification of the remote server certificate S MIME Settings Specifies the S MIME settings Use the scroll buttons to switch between screens e Device Certificate S MIME Specifies the S MIME certificate to attach to the E mail address S MIME Communication Specifies whether to enable S MIME communications Receive Untrusted E mail Specifies whether to receive an untrusted E mail Select No to block a non S MIME E mail when S MIME communication is enabled and to block an E mail with an incorrect signature validation Receive Untrusted Internet Fax Specifies whether to receive an untrusted Internet Fax Select No to block a non S MIME Internet Fax when S MIME communication is enabled and to block an Internet Fax with an incorrect signature validation Message Digest Algorithm Specifies the message digest algorithm Select from SHA1 and MD5 Message Encryption Method
447. ngs on page 144 User Details Setup This feature allows you to configure the settings for user ID authentication The setting items displayed on the screen depend on what authentication type you have selected under Login Type in Authentication 7 Select User Details Setup in User Details Setup the Featu res menu Items Current Settings e i A E 2 Configure the required settings Rexx HE 3 Failed Access Log Error logged every 5 attempts 3 Select Save y 4 Display Login Status Disabled 5 Logout Confirmation Screen Enabled ly Alternative Name for User ID Displays a keyboard screen Enter an alternative name for the user ID which is to be displayed on the touch screen and in CentreWare Internet Services and is to be printed on reports The name can be up to 15 characters long Mask User ID Specifies whether to display a user ID or hide it with asterisks on a screen Failed Access Log Displays the Failed Access Log screen This feature allows you to specify the number of authentication failures within a certain period before the attempt is logged as an error 7 Select Failed Access Log on Ta Tarcal the User Details Setup screen e 1 600 attempts to access the system 2 Select O n to enable the Q on gt 5 within a specified time before feature m it is logged as an error Failed Attempts Enter the maximum number
448. ning simultaneously on the same network the machine will use the same frame type as used by the NetWare server NOTE Some network components such as the hub may not support automatic frame type setup If the data link indicator light of the port does not light up match the IPX SPX setting of the frame type of the machine to the frame type of the file server NetWare Installation This section describes the installation procedures to use the machine in a NetWare environment Installation Procedure The installation procedure is as follows Network Communication Setup Enable the NetWare port When using IPX Set the Netware port to Enabled using the touch screen or CentreWare Internet Services When using TCP IP Set the Netware port to Enabled using the touch screen or CentreWare Internet Services Set the IP address on the control panel or CentreWare Internet Services For more information refer to Network Communication Setup on page 230 229 8 Printer Environment Settings NetWare Setup For more information refer to NetWare Setup on page 231 Computer Setup For more information refer to Computer Setup on page 231 Test Print For more information refer to Test Print on page 237 Network Communication Setup Use this procedure to set up the network communication parameters of the machine At the machine perform these steps NOTE Keep the SNMP port enabled while you use the machine on the TCP I
449. nistration using the user information managed by a remote server This is for unified management of user information and Account Administration by multiple devices Xerox Standard Accounting Account Administration is performed based on the user information and account information pre registered on the machine Account Administration uses each counter created automatically for individual users Auditron reports are created in CSV format using CentreWare Internet Services For information on the print driver or fax driver settings refer to the online help of each driver For information on the user information settings account information settings and how to create a report refer to Xerox Standard Accounting on page 326 NOTE When setting the user information or account information for another WorkCentre 5222 5225 5230 machine it is recommended to use the Cloning feature of CentreWare Internet Services Management Features and Services The following explains the features and services that can be managed using the Account Administration feature Features and Services that Can be Managed with Account Administration The features and services that can be managed using the Accounting feature vary depending on whether the user information is stored in the machine or in a remote account server NOTE For more information on the Accounting feature refer to Accounting Type on page 136 e Local Accounting e Network Accounting e Xe
450. nnncccconannccnononananananncnnnnnns 320 Management Features and Services ooooocononcccccccccccconacnnncncncnnnnnnns 320 Xerox Standard Accounting v ecconiaciimenciccie nazi rd 326 OVA Wii a diia 326 Installation Checklist oo oooooooocoococooncoccconccoooaconcnoncnoncnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononoss 326 Enabling Xerox Standard Accounting from Internet Services 326 Creating a Group Account accep released ento lit iodo dover 327 Creating a User Account and Setting Usage Limits 327 Maximum Usage Limits and Resetting Individual Usage Limits 327 Using XSA at the machine ss cocino 328 Resetting Usage Data seccatid ie arc n 328 Printing a Usage Report corsmorcornaia ce picadas 329 Enabling XSA in your Print Drivers oooonooccoccccccccconccconcccnnnnnnnnnannnnno 329 Backing Up XSA data and settings and Cloning to another device 329 802 1x Authentication oooooooocinncconccococcocononononcrnnnonnon no nono nenne nenen ennenen enn 330 Local Machine Authentication Setup oooocccccccccnnccccoccccncccnanananrncnnnnnnnns 331 Remote Authentication Setup ooococcccccccnnnccnncnnnennnenonenineninininininininns 332 Configuring Remote Authentication for Kerberos Windows 2000 333 Configuring Remote Authentication for Kerberos Solaris 333 Configuring Remote Authentication for SMB osasse 333 Configuring Remote Authentication for LDAP assecc 334 Network Authentication Setup oooccccccccccncccnncnnncnn
451. nnnnnnnannnnnns 97 Searchable Fetra inni aae i aa a 106 Secure Print E EEE EA E 44 security digital Signature eee eeeeeeeeeeeeneees 297 QNCIYPLION erra a a nadia a lis 297 Security Settings Connectivity amp Network Setup neeese 97 Send E mail iisisti ii das 92 Sender IDo a a dsd 112 serial NUMber cocccccccnncncnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnninnns 13 50 420 Server Certificate Verification 000 100 Server Fax iii dic nied 293 ONADING 77 Fax Server Installation and Configuration 294 Information Checklist oooooooonnnninninnoo 293 Installation Procedure seeeeeeees 294 Machine Configuration 0 cecseeeeeeees 295 Network Communication Setup 294 Server Fax Environments 0 e 293 Test Server Fax Transmission 296 Server Response Time Out 0seeeeeees 97 Service ACCESS oiii e aiei aaia 140 Service Rep Restricted Operation 83 Service Screen After Auto Clear 0000 69 Service Screen Default cceeceeeeeeeeeeees 69 Services CentreWare Internet Services 152 setting procedure 2 0 0 eerie 63 settings ACCOUNTING scissa ainiin ainn it a 132 Authentication Security cece 138 COMMON siete oh ltd 65 connectivity and network sses 90 COPY Service arar a A A EAA 84 E mail Internet Fax Service n 118 Fax S rviCe i i e i aai 109 Mailbox Stored Document
452. nnnnnnnnnnnininnnnininininns 335 Xerox Secure ACCESS Setup ccecceecceecceeeeee cess eeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeesseeees 337 Configuring Xerox Secure Access to Work with Remote Authentication ooooooococoncconccncncnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnononononineninnnos 338 Enabling Specific Xerox Secure Access Settings 0 0 0 338 Problem SOlVING sis ciisdiccesscestscicoas conssccctectenssccedstcbedcsentscendccedecdeteeuessace 341 Fault Clearance Procedure cccecccceeeeeeeeseeeeeeteeeeseeseeneeeeeeeeeeeeeees 341 PaperJams ide 342 Paper Jams in Cover A ccooccccccoccconoccncnnonnnn non nnnnnnn nn nn nnnnn nn nn nn nnnnnnnnns 345 Paper Jams in Cover B coooociicccocicoccccoonnnnnnnonnn nono no nono nnnnn nn nn nn nnnnnnnnns 346 Paper Jams in Cover concccccnccccnoncnnnnnnnnnnn non nnnnnnn nono nn nn n nn nono nnnnnnnnos 347 Paper Jams in Cover E coooococcccocicaciccoonnonnnnonnn nn nono nono nn nn nro nn nnnnnnnnnnns 347 Paper Jams in Trays 1 and 2 Trays 3 and 4 Optional and the Envelope Tray Optional ccceeceeeseeeeeceeeeeeseeeeeneeceeetens 348 Paper Jams in the High Capacity Tandem Tray Optional 348 Paper Jams in Tray 5 Bypass coooooccccccccnccocancnonoconcnonnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnns 349 Paper Jams in the Duplex Module Cover D Optional 349 Paper Jams in the High Capacity Feeder Optional 349 Paper Jams in the Integrated Office Finisher Optional 3
453. nnoncnncnnnnn 86 Annotations Comment Position 87 Annotations Date Stamp eeseeeeeeeees 87 Annotations Date Stamp Position 87 Annotations Edit Comment 1 to 8 aaisan 89 Annotations Font Size oooooococcccccccncccocnoncnnccnnnn 86 Annotations Page Numbers sasse 87 Annotations Page Numbers Position 87 Annotations Position on Side 2 0 86 Annotations Starting Number eeeeeeee 87 Annotations Stored Comment ee 87 AD DONGIK ES 421 Apply Page Numbers TO seeen 87 Audio Tones Common Service Settings 67 Auditron Reports ee aaa eeraa a aaae eana 56 Auditron Report Copy Jobs assesses 56 Auditron Report Fax Jobs essee 56 Auditron Report Print Jobs aeee 56 Auditron Report Scan Jobs assesses 56 Authenticated Users ceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 308 Authentication cccccccncncnnncnnnnccccccnananonos 139 307 Access Control eseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 140 Charge Private Print Settings 143 Create Authorization Groups 06 141 Create View User Accounts 6 141 Generally Shared Job Flow Sheet 311 Generally Shared Mailbox n 314 job flow sheets and mailboxes 310 Linking Job Flow Sheets to Mailboxes 318 lOCA ACCESS en 309 local machine authentication
454. nns 58 Faults y m ire e e a a a E A E OEA e a a N 58 Supplies ua aia 58 Billing Information ercana EA ae 59 Billing Informatio sia ii 59 User Account Billing Information oonoocccccccncncccnnnccconcccnnnnnnnnnann conce 59 A E OY 60 System SOUING nad dao 60 DSOUUP eii dada tildado les din 60 ACCOUNT econ eee Got 61 Authentication Security Settings oooooooconcconccccccnncnnnncnnnnnncnnnonnnoss 61 6 SOLU PS A Iran cave IAEA UA RAEE A EA LAA Aia iia ia iia 63 Setting Procedure esoo a 63 1 Enter the System Administration Mode n se 63 2 Configure a Feature eii de de 64 3 Exit the System Administration Mode n se 64 Main Menu on the Tools Screen ococcccncccnnccnnnccnnnconnnnnnnonenininininns 65 System Settings O ere eee oe 65 Common Service Settings et nececnesis reas ds yeesil deren eeu tnceeres 65 Machine ClocCk TiMerS 2 cecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee tee teeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 66 Audio TONES vivia ibas 67 Screen Button Settings sio corno tarada ac 68 Paper Tray Settings ais 70 limage Quality sssaaa aaaea aaa Aia eesis 72 REPOTIS itea ane e a eaei da aa a aa Sa Ae bai 72 METI 74 Wat rmarK eeiiy dasad ea ads 76 Other Settings erstes leds cuates 77 Copy Service Settings cvicicii a ide dia 84 Copy TaD estaa dd 84 Copy Detalla aa 85 COPY CONTOR aia 88 Original Size Defaults ui caeet ane raiieansleenevayeeeet 89 Reduce Enlarge Presets escssccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeesen
455. ns as stated under Configuration of HTTP Communication Encryption in this section Next import an S MIME certificate from a Certificate Authority in PKCS7 format Finally enable S MIME 7 Start a web browser 300 Configuration of E mail Encryption Digital Signature 2 Enter the machine s Internet address beginning with https into the Address box of your web browser to access CentreWare Internet Services Example https 192 168 1 1 3 Click the Properties tab 4 Confirm that the machine s e mail address under Description is filled in To use the E mail service with this machine E mail has to be enabled and configured 5 Click on the left of the Security folder to display the items in the folder 6 Click Machine Digital Certificate Management 7 Click Upload Signed Certificate NOTE When a certificate is to be imported if the same certificate has been already registered in Local Device or Others the certificate cannot be imported Delete the existing certificate before importing the new one a Enter the password into Password b Re enter the password into Retype Password c Enter the name of the file you want to import or select the file to be imported by clicking the Browse button d Click the Import button When a screen to enter a user name and passcode appears enter the System Administrator user ID and passcode and then click OK NOTE The default System
456. nsure your 802 1x authentication server and authentication switch are available on the network Configuring 802 1x with CentreWare Internet Services Use the following procedure to configure 802 1x with CentreWare Internet Services NOTE 802 1x can be configured also on the control panel of the machine For details refer to EEE 802 1x Settings on page 99 7 In CentreWare Internet Services click the Properties tab Expand the Security folder Select 802 1x in the directory tree Select the Enabled check box for Enable IEEE 802 1x From Authentication Method select the required authentication method A WwW N 330 Local Machine Authentication Setup 8 9 In Login Name Device Name Password and Retype Password enter the user name and password required by your authentication switch and server If you selected PEAP MS CHAP v2 in step 5 set whether or not to validate the server certificate under Certificate Validation Click Apply If prompted enter the System Administrator user ID and passcode NOTE The default System Administrator user ID and passocde are 11111 and x admin respectively Local Machine Authentication Setup When Login to Local Accounts is enabled the System Administrator can define passcodes for authorized users and guests when the selection is available to use to authenticate to the system and access restricted services Preparations 7
457. nt a Jane Smith 2 Select an Address Number 002 James Sith a 003 Joan Smith 3 Select Create Delete ems J 005 Joshua Smith y Ene bette 4 Change the required settings SEE a Use the scroll buttons to switch tems Current Settings 1 Address Type Fax 3 between screens 2 Fax Number 0 0462359226 E 3 Jane ami 5 Select Save HO O_O OOOO NOTE Depending on the selection 5 Relay Station Setup Off Setting for Address Type in step 4 the following items are displayed on the screen With Fax selected Item Description Default Fax Number Enter a fax number up to 128 digits Name Enter a recipient name up to 18 characters Index Enter a single alphanumeric character to use as a keyword for searching the Address Book Relay Station Setup Specify whether or not the registered Off Address Number is to be identified as an initiating relay broadcast station when the machine is used as a relay broadcast station NOTE Before using the Relay Broadcast feature enter the Address Numbers for initiating stations regardless of the initiating method from the stations Starting Rate Select a communication mode from among G3 Auto and Forced 4800 bps G3 Auto 128 Setup Item Description Default Resolution Select a resolution level to be used for transmission from among Panel Standard 200x100
458. nt sets on the screen Selecting Disabled does not display a confirmation screen and prints one print set only Min Passcode Length for Stored Job Set the minimum number of digits allowed for a passcode between 0 and 12 digits A passocde is required when Secure Print or Private Charge Print documents are to be stored or printed A passcode must have digits equal to or longer than the value specified here Job Flow Service Settings This feature allows you to configure the settings for accessing a pool server A pool server is a remote server that stores and manages job flow sheets To use a pool server the machine must be registered on the pool server in advance 7 Select System Settings and Machine J Faults Y supplies V oig N Tois then select Job Flow Service System coup Settings in the Group menu fa ote dead 2 Select the required setting Authentication Security Settings 121 6 Setups Setup Pool Server Specifies whether to use a pool server Pool Server Login Method Specifies the pool server login method Selecting Show login screen displays a login screen to enter the login name and the password each time the machine accesses the pool server Job Flow Sheet List Default Specifies the default job flow sheet list to be displayed on the Job Flow Sheets screen Selecting Local Machine displays the job flow sheet list stored in the machine Selecting Pool Server displa
459. o 65535 KB by using the scroll buttons or the numeric keypad If On is selected and you attempt to forward a received e mail with a larger data size than specified forwarding will not be executed and e mail data will be discarded 117 6 Setups E mail Internet Fax Service Settings This section describes the features that allow you to configure or change machine settings for sending scanned documents as e mail attachments For more information refer to the following NOTE When the Server Fax feature is enabled E mail Internet Fax Service Settings is displayed as E mail Service Settings E mail Control page 118 7 Select System Settings and A A i then select Email Internet Fax t g Features ls E Mail Control Service Settings in the Group i Mailbox Stored menu o Document Settings O Job Flow Service 2 Select E mail Control in the rl Or Features menu E mail Control This feature allows you to configure or change other machine settings for sending scanned documents as e mail attachments 7 Select E mail Control in the A Featu res menu Items Current Settings 1 Maximum E mail Size Off PS 2 Change the required settings 2 Maximum Adtres Entries 00 H ing E mail Prini ions j nt e Use the scroll buttons to switch Nl rrr between screens PATA ly 3 Select Close Maximum E mail Size Specifies
460. o Copy Activity Report in the Setups chapter on page 138 57 5 Machine Status Fax Receiving Mode This feature allows you to set the fax reception mode to Manual Receive or Auto Receive NOTE This feature is not displayed when Server Fax is enabled 7 Select Fax Receiving Mode on the Machine Information screen Manual Receive Fax Receiving Mode Cancel Save O Manual Receive Auto Receive Starts receiving a fax or polling after you have answered the call and confirmed it is a fax Auto Receive Receives a fax automatically Faults This tab allows you to print a report of recent errors the date and time of the errors the error codes and the status of each error The status is either active or cleared NOTE Error History Report is displayed when System Settings gt Common Service Settings gt Reports gt Print Reports Button is enabled For more information refer to Reports in the Setups chapter on page 72 7 Press the lt Machine Status gt Machine Y Fauits BE As i ys button on the control panel i OUE 2 Select the Faults tab Demo 3 Select Error History Report and press the lt Start gt button on the control panel Supplies This tab allows you to view the status of consumables 7 Select the Supplies tab on the acte Y Faults iy Supplies Ye x y Machine Status screen Status 1 Toner Cartridge 100 Remaining OK 2 Drum Cartridge SMar
461. o filter incoming e mail Allow Authenticated Users to Edit From Field when Select from Address Book LDAP Search Successful and Address Book LDAP Search Failure e Allows Guest Users to Edit From Field Select whether to allow guest users to edit the From field Edit From Field when Authorization is not Required Select whether to allow users to edit the From field when user authentication is not performed Allow Authenticated Users to send E mail despite LDAP Search Failure Select whether authenticated users have permission to send e mail after a search failure on a remote directory service e Subject Specify the default e mail subject e 200 Properties Feature Setting items Services E mail Default continued continued e Message Specify the default e mail message User Select whether to include the sender s user name and e mail address in the e mail message Attachment Select whether to include information about attachments such as the number of pages and file format in the e mail message Device Information Select whether to include machine information such as the name location serial number IP address and Mac address in the e mail message e Signature Enter the default signature using up to 128 characters e Confirmation Sheet Specify whether to have a confirmation sheet printed after
462. o retrieve scanned documents install the scan driver or activate CentreWare Internet Services For more information about the operating environment for the scan driver and the installation method refer to the HTML document on the PCL Print Driver CD ROM For more information on how to retrieve the document refer to CentreWare nternet Services on page 147 Network Scanning Setup Network Scanning uses the FTP SMB HTTP HTTPS HTTP over SSL TLS or Netware protocol to transfer scanned documents onto a server or a client Templates and repositories folders need to be set up to enable Network Scanning For details on how to set up templates and repositories refer to CentreWare Internet Services on page 147 Prerequisites for Network Scanning Setup 1 Confirm that an existing operational network utilizing TCP IP is available Confirm that the following ports are enabled 1 TCP IP Port 2 FTP Client SMB or Netware Port if the FTP SMB or Netware protocol is used Confirm that your transfer protocol FTP SMB HTTP HTTPS or Netware is configured correctly 280 Scan to Home Setup For more details about each protocol settings refer to the following section FTP Scan to PC Setup FTP on page 283 SMB Scan to PC Setup SMB on page 284 HTTP HTTPS HTTP on page 193 For HTTPS also refer to Configuration of HTTPS SSL TLS Communication Encryption on page 298 Netware NetWare on page 183 4
463. o the document feeder 5 Select the E mail button on the touch screen 6 There are three ways to specify an e mail destination e Select New Recipients to type in e mail addresses using the screen keyboard Select Address Book and then select List all public entries or Search Public from the drop down menu to select e mail addresses If LDAP is enabled you can select Address Book and then select Search Network from the drop down menu to select e mail addresses 7 Press the lt Start gt button on the machine 8 Verify that the recipient s received the e mail with the document attached 2 7 10 Scanner Environment Settings Scan to E mail Troubleshooting For internal corporate mail servers substitute the word Corporate for ISP in the following troubleshooting table Symptom Possible Cause Resolution Validation SMTP error at Incorrect Mail Server of Host Validate that the correct ISP mail server name has multifunction Name been entered in the SMTP Host Name field machine Incorrect settings in Microsoft Outlook Express Verify that you can access the ISP mail server from within Microsoft Outlook Express and that all settings are correct Incorrect multifunction machine e mail address entered Verify that the machine is using the correct e mail address in the From field The E mail address must match what the ISP s mail server is expecting ISP requires S
464. o the original recipient a o 2 Recipient s Alternatively select to delete the Time Submitted 6 4 2002 6 10 AM Time Completed 6 4 2002 1 15 PM document or send the document 5s 20 Delete This um ae farting Rate G4 Auto D A to a different recipient Delete This Document Deletes the selected document A confirmation screen will be displayed before the document is deleted Change Recipients Displays the Resend Fax screen where you can specify a new fax recipient Resend Fax Screen 7 Select the Change Recipients esenarax button on the Undelivered Fax Starting Rate Document 00200 Outside Line scree n B Speed Dial Name Fax Number y New 7 se Recipients a 2 Specify a new recipient using a E on the New Recipients or y Address Book button New Recipients Displays a keyboard which allows you to directly enter a recipient For information on how to enter a recipient on the keyboard refer to the Fax chapter in the User Guide 47 4 Job Status Address Book Displays a page which allows you to select a recipient from the Address Book For information on how to select a recipient from the Address Book refer to the Fax chapter in the User Guide Starting Rate Displays the Starting Rate screen where you can select the G3 Auto or Forced 4800 bps communication mode for fax transmissions For more information refer to
465. o transfer data via FTP using the Scan to PC service because file creation was not successful on the FTP server after connection Take one of the following actions e Check if the specified file name can be used in the save location e Check if enough space is available in the save location 016 583 The machine failed to transfer data via FTP using the Scan to PC service because lock folder creation was not successful on the FTP server after connection Take one of the following actions e If any lock directory LCK exists in the forwarding destination delete it manually and then try executing the job again Check if the specified folder name can be used in the save location Check if the same folder name exists in the save location e Check if enough space is available in the save location 016 584 The machine failed to transfer data via FTP using the Scan to PC service because folder creation was not successful on the FTP server after connection Take one of the following actions e Check if the specified folder name can be used in the save location Check if the same folder name exists in the save location e Check if enough space is available in the save location 016 585 The machine failed to transfer data via FTP using the Scan to PC service because file deletion was not successful on the FTP server after connection Check the access privilege to the FTP server 016 586 The machine failed to tr
466. od and hyphen In the second text box enter the SMTP port number e WorkCentre E mail Address Enter the e mail address of the machine Optional Information e Maximum Message Size Message amp Attachment Allows you to specify the maximum e mail size Maximum Number of Pages per Split Send Allows you to set the size in pages of an outgoing e mail e Login Credentials for the WorkCentre to access the SMTP Server to send automated emails Specify the SMTP server authentication method e Login Name Specify the login name for SMTP authentication e Password Specify the password for SMTP authentication e Retype Password Re enter the password for verification LDAP Allows you to configure the LDAP protocol settings LDAP Server Server Information IP Address Host Name amp Port In the first text box enter the server name or IP address of the primary LDAP server in IPv4 or IPv6 format In the second text box enter the port number of the primary LDAP server Backup IP Address Host Name amp Port In the first text box enter the server name or IP address of the secondary LDAP server in IPv4 or IPv6 format In the second text box enter the port number of the secondary LDAP server LDAP Server Select a directory application from Microsoft Active Directory Novell NetWare IBM Lotus Domino 6 Microsoft Exchange and Other Applications Optional Information Search Di
467. of rejected domain names Set Domain Filtering to Off Or remove your domain name from the list of rejected domain names Check if your SMTP or POP3 server functions correctly Check your SMTP or POP3 server Cannot send e mail E mail Notification Service Internet Fax Scan to E mail Check if the E mail address of the machine is set Set the E mail address of the machine Check if E mail Notification Service is activated Activate Mail Notice Service Check if Send E mail is activated Activate Send E mail Check if the SMTP Server IP Address or POP3 Server IP Address is set correctly Set the SMTP Server IP Address or POP3 Server IP Address Use CentreWare Internet Services to check if the E mail Notification Service settings are set correctly Set the E mail Notification Service settings Use CentreWare Internet Set the recipient e mail Services to check if the addresses recipient e mail addresses are set correctly Check if your SMTP or POP3 Check your SMTP or POP3 server functions correctly server 378 Network related Problems Internet Intranet Connection This section explains the troubleshooting procedures and restrictions while using Internet and intranet connections Troubleshooting The possible problems and actions are as follows When you cannot connect to the Internet intranet Problem Actio
468. off the machine and then switch it on again Make sure that the Fax Card is connected to the machine Print an error history report to clear problems Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 034 211 An error occurred in the fax controller Contact the Xerox Welcome Center 034 212 034 500 An incorrect telephone fax number was dialed Check the number then perform the same operation again 034 501 The telephone cable may not be connected securely Check the cable connection and resend the document Refer to Machine Components in the Product Overview chapter of the User Guide 034 505 A fax error occurred Switch off the machine and then switch it on again Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 034 506 The remote copy function to make multiple copies of a received document may not be supported on the destination machine Check if the destination machine supports the remote copy function 034 507 Communication failed because the specified password was not correct Make sure that the password and telephone number are correct The destination machine may be set not to release its ID number This error code is also displayed when a polling request is rejected 034 508 A fax error occurred If sending a fax check the fax settings fax number and 034 509 other settings then perform the same operation again Contact the Xerox 034 510 Welcome Center if the problem persists 412 Faul
469. ol mode NOTE Print data which consist of multiple files sent in one print instruction cannot be deleted file by file All the files will be deleted together NOTE This command is invalid if no options are specified or if there is no print data which matches the option NOTE You can delete only print data from the same workstation used to send the print data You cannot delete print data sent by other workstations NOTE When a command to delete print data is received the file will be deleted even if it is in the process of being printed Any unprinted data will be cancelled after the file has been deleted Example To delete the print data from printer fxPS for job number 351 enter the following command S lprm PfxPS 351 Printer Status Solaris HP UX The Ipstat command is used to inquire about the status of the machine NOTE In the non spool mode this function is available to Windows NT clients but not to HP UX Solaris clients Command format lpstat option Command options The following command options are available If no option is specified all the print data related information will be displayed The sequence of the options does not affect the outcome To use more than one argument at the same time separate them by commas and enclose all the arguments with E g lpstat u userl user2 user3 e o printer name This option displays the print data for the specified printer e t This optio
470. om Services service 213 7 CentreWare Internet Services Feature Setting items Accounting Accounting Accounting Login Screen Settings Login Screen Alternative Name for User ID Enter an alternative Settings name for User ID which is to be displayed in a login screen on the touch screen and in CentreWare Internet Services and is to be printed on reports The name can be up to 15 characters long Mask User ID Specifies whether to display a user ID or hide it with asterisks on the login screen 214 Properties Feature Setting items Security Authentication Configuration Allows you to set up the Authentication feature Authentication Configuration Login Type Select the user login method No Login Required Does not perform authentication Login to Local Accounts Performs authentication using user information pre registered on the machine Login to Remote Accounts Performs authentication using user information pre registered on a remote server Xerox Secure Access Performs authentication using Xerox Secure Access Mailbox Print Select whether to require user authentication when printing documents stored in mailboxes Mailbox to PC Server Select whether to require user authentication when retrieving documents from mailboxes Non account Print Select whether to allow processing of print jobs without user name o
471. om a client The machine name used by the client to recognize the machine cannot be registered if the machine is switched on when not connected to the network Switch on the machine after connecting to the network If the machine is switched on when not connected to the network switch off the machine connect to the network and switch on the machine again 373 15 Problem Solving Restrictions Bonjour This section explains the restrictions that apply while using EtherTalk Machine Name The machine name recognized by the client cannot have duplicates on the network If another machine on the network has the same machine name the machine name is changed automatically when the machine starts Name Change Rules The machine name is changed as follows e When the machine name is 31 characters or less in length A numeral is appended to the end of the machine name If another machine on the network still has the same name as the machine the numeral is incremented When the machine name is 32 characters in length The last character in the machine name is replaced with a numeral If another machine on the network still has the same name as the machine the numeral is incremented If the Protocol Settings in the Properties tab of CentreWare Internet Services is accessed after the machine is initialized with a changed name the old machine name is displayed However the changed machine name is r
472. on The server returned the RFC2251 specification protocol error 2 protocol error during the address book query Review the LDAP server settings and repeat the same operation 018 703 An LDAP server protocol error occurred in the address book operation The server returned the RFC2251 specification protocol error 3 time limit exceeded during the address book query Review the search conditions and search root entry then repeat the same operation Contact the network administrator if the problem persists 398 Fault Codes Code Description and Remedy 018 704 An LDAP server protocol error occurred in the address book operation The server returned the RFC2251 specification protocol error 4 size limit exceeded during the address book query Review the search conditions and search root entry then repeat the same operation Contact the network administrator if the problem persists 018 705 An LDAP server protocol error occurred in the address book operation The server returned the RFC2251 specification protocol error 5 compare false during the address book query The compare operation returned false Check the LDAP server status 018 706 An LDAP server protocol error occurred in the address book operation The server returned the RFC2251 specification protocol error 6 compare true during the address book query The compare operation returned true indicating there is no problem
473. on P 2 Change the required settings PETT a Activity Report jor Use the side tabs to switch HA Transmission Report Job Undelivered Print Report Thange between screens 5 Transmission Report Job Deleted No Report ly 3 Select Close Print Reports Button Specifies whether to display the Print Reports button on the Billing Information tab of the Machine Information screen Refer to Print Reports in the Machine Status chapter on page 52 72 System Settings Job History Report Specifies whether to automatically print a Job History Report for every 50 jobs Activity Report Specifies whether to automatically print an Activity Report for every 100 fax jobs An Activity Report shows the result of transmissions and receptions Transmission Report Job Undelivered Specifies whether to automatically print a Transmission Report Job Undelivered report for fax jobs A Transmission Report Job Undelivered report shows the list of documents where transmission failed Transmission Report Job Deleted Specifies whether to automatically print a Transmission Report Job Deleted report for fax jobs when fax transmission jobs are interrupted A Transmission Report Job Deleted report shows the list of documents where transmission was cancelled Mailbox Report Specifies whether to automatically print a Mailbox Report for fax jobs A Mailbox Report shows the accumulation of do
474. on the machine To create or change job templates from this screen follow the steps below 7 Click the Scan tab on the Header Panel of the CentreWare Internet Services home page 2 Select Job Templates The New Distribution Template page is displayed 3 To add a new job template enter information for the template in Template Name Description Optional and Owner Optional and click the Add button To edit an existing job template select the name of the template from the Templates list in the Menu Panel The Distribution page is displayed 4 Perform the necessary operations NOTE When creating a new template you cannot assign a template name that is already used by a different template If the same template name is used an error message will be displayed NOTE To use the Network Scanning feature make sure you also configure Network Scamning in the Properties tab This list in the Menu Panel is displayed only when there are any job templates registered on the machine and displays the names of existing job templates Clicking New Template displays the New Distribution Template page where you can create a new job template Clicking the name of an existing job template displays the Distribution page where you can edit the scan options and filing destination of the existing job template 160 Scan New Distribution Template The following table shows the information fields on the New Dist
475. oner inside 2 Insert the cartridge as shown in the illustration and slide it into the machine until it clicks 3 Close the front cover NOTE If the front cover is not completely closed a message will appear and the machine will not operate Loading Staples in the Integrated Office Finisher Optional The Integrated Office Finisher contains an automatic stapler When the finisher runs out of staples a message appears on the touch screen When this message is displayed load a new staple case into the staple cartridge 7 Make sure that the machine is not operating and open the front cover of the finisher 2 Take the staple cartridge out of the finisher 3A Loading Staples in the Office Finisher LX Optional 3 After removing the staple cartridge check the inside of the finisher for any remaining staples 4 Pinch both sides of the empty staple case with your fingers 1 and remove the staple case from the cartridge 2 5 Insert the front side of the new staple case into the staple cartridge 1 and then push the rear side into the cartridge 2 6 Return the staple cartridge to its original position 7 Close the front cover of the finisher NOTE If the front cover is not completely closed a message will appear and the machine will not operate Loading Staples in the Office Finisher LX Op
476. onfiguration HB Machine Serial Number Default IP Address Software Version J 210000 NOTE The serial number is also found on the metal plate on the left side of the machine behind Cover A For more information refer to Ser a Number in the Before Using the Machine chapter on page 13 420 16 Appendix This chapter describes the machine specifications emulation parameters supported on the machine how to upgrade the machine software and how to configure Xerox Extensible Interface Platform Specifications page 421 Emulation Parameters page 427 Machine Software Upgrade page 430 Xerox Extensible Interface Platform XEIP page 431 Specifications Use the specifications listed below to identify the capabilities of the machine The machine adheres to strict specifications approvals and certifications These specifications are designed to provide for the safety of users and to ensure that the machine operates in a fully functional state Note that improvements in specifications and the appearance of the product may be made without prior notice For more information on the specifications contact your Xerox Representative Machine Specifications Machine Size Standard Configuration With the Document Feeder and Tray 5 Bypass W x D x H 640 x 650 x 832 mm 25 2 x 25 7 x 32 8 inches With the Document Glass Cover and Tray 5 Bypass W x D x H 640 x 652 x 751 mm 25 2 x 25 7 x 29 6
477. onnect the machine to the network 2 Press the lt Log In Out gt button on the control panel and then type the System Administrator login ID to enter the System Administration mode NOTE The passcode may also be required depending on the machine configuration 3 Press the lt Machine Status gt button on the control panel and then select the Tools tab on the screen Select System Settings in the menu at the left side of the screen Select Connectivity amp Network Setup in the Group menu Select Port Settings in the Features menu NDAMA If you are using the LPD port select LPD and Change Settings If you are using Port9100 select Port9100 and Change Settings 8 Select Port Status and Change Settings 9 Select Enabled and Save Next establish TCP IP 1 Select Connectivity amp Network Setup in the Group menu and then select Protocol Settings in the Features menu 2 Under TCP IP IP Mode select IPv4 Mode IPv6 Mode or Dual Stack When IPv4 Mode or Dual Stack is selected in step 2 3 Select IP Address Resolution and then Change Settings 4 Select a method for establishing an IP address from DHCP BOOTP RARP DHCP Autonet and STATIC and then select Save NOTE Use the DHCP server together with the Windows Internet Name Server WINS server If you selected STATIC in step 4 then proceed to step 5 to configure the protocol settings Otherwise
478. ons Page Numbers Position Specifies the default for Page Number gt Position in the Annotations feature on the Output Format screen Annotations Bates Stamp Specifies whether to enable the Bates Stamp feature by default Annotations Apply Bates Stamp To Specifies the default pages that bates stamps are to be printed on Select from All Pages and All Pages Except First Bates Stamp Starting Number Specifies the default starting number to use when bates stamps are printed on copies Bates Stamp Number of Digits Specifies the default value for Number of Digits displayed when Bates Stamping is selected for Page Number under Annotations on the Output Format tab Bates Stamp Stored Prefix Specifies the prefix strings for bates stamps 87 6 Setups Bates Stamp Position Specifies the default value for Position displayed when Bates Stamping is selected for Page Number under Annotations on the Output Format tab Sample Job Specifies the default for the Sample Job feature on the Job Assembly screen Booklet Creation Cover Tray Specifies the default for Covers gt Paper Supply gt Cover Tray in the Booklet Creation feature on the Output Format screen Covers Cover Tray Specifies the default for Paper Supply gt Cover Tray in the Covers feature on the Output Format screen Build Job Segment Separator Tray Specifies the default for Copy Jo
479. onse to the size of the document and resolution Network access in an SMB environment e On Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Server 2003 and Windows Vista if the number of shared resources other than those of shared folders such as printers is 256 or more the shared resources are displayed in the shared resources list e The list of workgroup names server names shared names and others on the network are not displayed in alphabetical order 377 15 Problem Solving E mail Services This section explains what to do when a problem occurs while using E mail Print Mail Notice Service Internet Fax or Scan to E mail feature Troubleshooting The possible causes confirmation methods and actions are as follows Problem Confirmation Method Action Cannot receive e mail E mail Print Internet Fax Check if the E mail address of the machine is set Set the E mail address of the machine Check if Receive E mail is activated Activate Receive E mail Check if the SMTP Server IP Address or POP3 Server IP Address is set correctly Set the SMTP Server IP Address or POP3 Server IP Address Check if the POP3 Server Login Name or POP3 Server Password is set correctly Set the POP3 Server Login Name or POP3 Server Password Use CentreWare Internet Services to check if Enter Rejected Domain Names is selected in Domain Filtering and your domain is included in the list
480. or network communication by checking the following The IP address of the server is set correctly The network cables are plugged in securely 016 577 Connection to the FTP service of the destination server failed Take one of the following actions e Check if the FTP service of the server is activated e Check if the FTP port number of the server is correctly registered on the machine 016 578 The machine failed to transfer data via FTP using the Scan to PC service due to unsuccessful login to the FTP server Check if the login name user name and password are correct 387 15 Problem Solving Code Description and Remedy 016 579 The machine failed to transfer data via FTP using the Scan to PC service because the scanned image could not be saved in the FTP server after connection Check if the FTP server s save location is correct 016 580 The machine failed to transfer data via FTP using the Scan to PC service because the file or folder name on the FTP server could not be retrieved after connection Check the access privilege to the FTP server 016 581 The machine failed to transfer data via FTP using the Scan to PC service because the suffix of the file or folder name exceeded the limit after connection Change the file name or change the destination folder on the FTP server Or move or delete files from the destination folder 016 582 The machine failed t
481. or connecting a printer to a Windows network through SMB System configuration As the machine supports SMB protocol you can send print data directly to the machine on the same network without going through the server You can use either NetBEUI TCP IP or even both as the transport protocol for SMB You will need to set up the IP address on the machine and the computer if you are using TCP IP NOTE Windows XP Windows Server 2003 Windows Vista do not support NetBEUI NOTE You can make SMB settings through CentreWare Internet Services For more information on how to make SMB settings refer to CentreWare Internet Services on page 147 Target computers The following computers support printing through SMB Connection OS Protocol Windows network Windows 95 NetBEUI Windows 98 TCP IP Windows Me Windows NT 4 0 NetBEUI TCP IP Windows 2000 NetBEUI TCP IP Windows XP TCP IP Windows Server 2003 Windows Vista NOTE NetBEUI is not recommended by Microsoft to be used as a protocol in new networks It is recommended that this protocol is only used in small networks where existing legacy clients require it SMB Installation This section describes the installation procedure for using the machine on an SMB network Installation Procedure The installation procedure is as follows Network Communication Setup Enable the SMB port When using NetBEUI Set the SMB port to Enabled using the touch
482. orm the following steps 7 Refer to the HTML document on the PCL Print Driver CD ROM or to the document provided with the optional PostScript Kit and install the print drivers for the machine on the computer that will be sending jobs to the machine 2 Connect the USB cable to the machine and the computer 3 Continue with 7est Print on page 261 To make sure that the machine has been installed on the USB port correctly submit a test print from each client computer Perform the following steps 7 Open a document on a computer 2 Select the machine as the printer 3 Print the document on the machine and verify that it prints correctly 4 Repeat the test for all computers that will be sending jobs to the machine The installation process is now complete If the test print fails refer to Problem Solving on page 341 261 8 Printer Environment Settings IPP Internet Printing Protocol This section explains how to set up the machine to operate in an IPP Internet Printing Protocol environment The following information is provided Information Checklist page 262 IPP Environment page 262 IPP Installation page 263 Installation Procedure page 263 Network Communication Setup page 263 Computer Setup page 265 Test Print page 265 Information Checklist Before starting the IPP installation procedures make sure that the following items are available or have been performed
483. ou to configure test and save the settings for the System Administrator Access Group This group is used to control access to the Tools settings on the machine Account Administrator Authorization Account Administrator Access Group Allows you to configure test and save the settings for the Account Administrator Access Group This group is used to control access to the Accounting settings on the machine Custom Filters E mail Address Filter Specify the text string to be used when searching e mail addresses upon network authentication POP3 Setup Allows you to configure the POP3 protocol settings Server Information IP Address Host Name amp Port In the first text box enter the host name or IP address of the POP3 server in domain IPv4 or IPv6 format using up to 128 characters Enter the port number in the second text box POP Receive Password Encryption Select to enable APOP authentication e Login Name Enter the POP user name Password Enter the POP user password e Retype Password Re type the password for verification POP3 Settings Polling Interval Enter the interval to check the POP3 server between 1 and 120 minutes in 1 minute increments HTTP Allows you to configure the following HTTP protocol settings Connection Displays whether the protocol is enabled or disabled Physical Connection Displays Ethernet This is a display only item
484. ounting settings Account Number Enter the account number of the authentication configuration you want to edit Edit Displays the User Account Settings page which allows you to edit the authentication configurations for the specified account number User Identification Account Number Displays the specified account number User Name Enter the user name User ID Enter the user ID e Passcode Enter the passcode for the user ID e Retype Passcode Re enter the passcode for verification e Card ID Enter the card ID for the user Feature Access e Copy Service Feature Access Specify the type of access control for copy jobs e Fax Service Feature Access Specify the type of access control for sending faxes e Scan Service Feature Access Specify the type of access control for scan jobs e Print Service Feature Access Specify the type of access control for print jobs Impressions Limits e Black amp White Copy Limit Specify the limits for black and white copies e Black amp White Scan Limit Specify the limits for black and white scans e Black amp White Print Limit Specify the limits for black and white prints User Role User Role Select a user role for the user Add This User to Authorization Group Select an authorization group for the user By default users belong to Authorization Group 00 Default Group The groups in the list a
485. ow sheet and Direct Fax are not available when the Server Fax service is enabled Server Fax Environments System Requirements The following are required to set up and use the Server Fax service e Network Scanning Kit e Server Fax Kit e Machine connection to a network using TCP IP e A fax server installed on the same network 293 12 Server Fax Server Fax Installation This section describes how to enable the Server Fax service Installation Procedure To use the Server Fax service configure the following for the machine and a fax server For details refer to the following sections Fax Server Installation and Configuration 1 2 3 4 Install and configure a fax server Create a fax repository on the server Create a user account login name and password for the machine on the server Set to monitor the fax repository for incoming documents Machine Configuration 1 2 3 4 Set TCP IP and HTTP Enable the port to be used for the Server Fax service Enable the Server Fax service Configure the Server Fax settings Test Server Fax Transmission Submit a Server Fax job to make sure that the Server Fax service has been configured correctly Fax Server Installation and Configuration 1 Install and configure a Xerox certified third party fax server following the fax management software manufacturer s instructions The transfer protocols available for the Server Fax service are
486. ows you to display only the selected type of jobs Owner Displays the owner of each job Name Identifies each job by job number and type Status Displays the status of each job such as completed deleted and shutdown Completion Time Displays the completion date and time of each job 41 4 Job Status Job Attributes Select a job on the Completed Jobs screen to display the job attributes The attributes displayed vary depending on the type of job Fax Send Document 01234 Close Status Completed Job Started 10 10 2007 3 15 PM Job Ended 10 10 2007 3 17 PM Pages 15 15 Communication Mode G4 33 6k Show Children Job History Resolution Superfine 600dpi Jobs Report Show Children Jobs Select this button to show all child jobs for the selected job The button is displayed only when there are child jobs available Job History Report Select this button to print a job history report for both parent and child jobs NOTE The Job History Report feature is enabled by setting System Settings gt Common Settings gt Reports gt Print Reports Button to Enabled For more information refer to Reports in the Setups chapter on page 72 Secure Print Jobs amp More This screen allows you to check print or delete documents stored in the machine NOTE Some of the features on this screen may not be displayed depending on the system settings and machine configuration For mor
487. ox Canada Welcome Center 1 800 93 XEROX 1 800 939 3769 Serial Number When you call the Welcome Center you will need to provide the serial number which is located on the left side of the machine behind Cover A as shown in the diagram Serial Number Keep a record of any error messages This information helps us solve problems faster 13 7 Before Using the Machine Language Displayed on the Touch Screen The language of the touch screen can be changed in the following two ways To change the language for temporary use press the lt Language gt button on the control panel and then select the required language NOTE The language returns to the default language after rebooting the machine To change the default language enter the System Administration mode press the lt Machine Status gt button and then select Tools gt System Settings gt Common Service Settings gt Screen Button Settings gt Default Language On the Default Language screen select the required language as the default language For more information refer to the Setups chapter on page 63 Conventions Orientation This section describes the conventions used throughout this System Administration Guide In this guide you will find that some terms are used interchangeably e Paper is synonymous with media e Document is synonymous with original e Xerox WorkCentre 5222 5225 5230 is synonymous with the m
488. p account select the check box for the group account and click the Delete Account button Report and Reset Generate Report Click this button to generate a report of registered group accounts users in CSV format To download the generated report click Download report by CSV format Reset Usage Data Click this button to reset the usage data for all the registered group accounts users Auto Reset Click this button to set the automatic reset of the usage data The usage data can be reset every month every quarter or every year You can also set the start date and time of the automatic reset Reset to Default Click this button to return all the registered group account user settings to their defaults 210 Properties Feature Setting items Accounting Accounting Configuration Allows you to manage the Accounting feature Accounting Type Select the type of account management to perform Verify User Details Specify whether to check user details upon user authentication This item becomes active only when Accounting Type is set to Network Accounting Verify User Details for Printer Direct Fax Jobs Specify whether to check user details upon user authentication for print and fax jobs This item becomes active only when Accounting Type is set to Network Accounting Customize User Prompts Specify whether to prompt entry of both a user ID and account ID or only
489. p on page 203 e General Settings Clicking the Configure button displays the General page For details on the page refer to Defaults on page 207 Internet Fax Settings e SMTP Server Clicking the Configure button displays the SMTP Server page For details on the page refer to SMTP Server on page 191 e POP3 Setup Clicking the Configure button displays the POP3 Setup page For details on the page refer to POP3 Setup on page 193 LDAP Directory Clicking the Configure button displays the LDAP Server page For details on the page refer to LDAP Server on page 191 LDAP User Mappings Clicking the Configure button displays the LDAP User Mappings page For details on the page refer to LDAP User Mappings on page 192 e Internet Fax Settings Clicking the Configure button displays the Internet Fax page For details on the page refer to Internet Fax on page 207 175 7 CentreWare Internet Services Feature Setting items Description Allows you to set and view information related to the machine such as the name and installation location of the machine and the System Administrator s e mail address Machine Model Displays the model of your machine Serial Number Displays the serial number of the machine Machine Name Enter the name of the machine Location Enter the location of the machine Contact Person Enter the name of the System Administr
490. paper number is the same as that of the print job Use NWADMIN or PCONSOLE to match the Starting paper number with the paper number of the print job The IPX checksum is set to an invalid level Use the Set command on the file server console to check whether the IPX checksum is set to level 2 Enter the following command on the file server console to set the IPX checksum to level O or level 1 Set Enable IPX Checksum X x 0 or 1 The NCP packet signature is set to an invalid level Use the Set command on the file server console to check whether the NCP packet signature is set to level 3 Enter the following command on the file server console to set the NCP packet signature to level 0 1 or 2 and then restart the file server set NCP Packet Signature Option x x 0 1 or 2 The default machine name is invalid Print the System Settings List and then check that the 6 least significant digits of the Ethernet address are correct Specify the correct Ethernet address or assign a name other than the default No directory tree name is specified Print the System Settings List and then check that a tree name is specified Specify a tree name No context is specified Print the System Settings List and then check that a context is specified Specify a context Another printer object has been connected Use NWADMIN to check that the object is correctly assigne
491. pe LEF Commercial 10 Envelope LEF Monarch Envelope LEF DL Envelope LEF C4 Envelope SEF C5 Envelope LEF Integrated Office Finisher Capacity 500 sheets of A4 LEF 8 5 x 11 LEF 250 sheets of A4 SEF 8 5 x 11 SEF B5 SEF B4 SEF 200 sheets of A3 SEF 11 x 17 SEF NOTE When selecting the Mixed Sized Originals feature to output the different size documents the maximum capability is 250 sheets Paper Sizes A6 LEF A5 SEF A5 LEF A4 SEF A4 LEF A3 SEF B6 SEF B5 SEF B5 LEF B4 SEF 5 5 x 8 5 SEF 5 5 x 8 5 LEF 7 25 x 10 5 SEF 7 25 x 10 5 LEF 8 5 x 11 SEF 8 5 x 11 LEF 8 5 x 13 SEF 8 5 x 14 SEF 11 x 17 SEF 16K Taiwan SEF 16K Taiwan LEF 8K Taiwan SEF 16K China SEF 16K China LEF 8K China SEF Postcard LEF European 3 Chouyoukei 3 Envelope LEF Commercial 10 Envelope LEF Monarch Envelope LEF DL Envelope LEF C4 Envelope SEF C5 Envelope LEF Paper Weight 60 to 215 g m Set Size 50 sheets of 90 g m or less paper 24 Ib bond Staples 5 000 or more per cartridge Staples up to 50 sheets of 90 g m or lighter paper 424 Specitications Office Finisher LX Capacity Center Tray Exit 2 200 sheets Finisher Tray without Booklet Maker For paper of more than 216 0 mm in length When not stapled 1000 sheets When stapled 75 sets or 750 sheets For paper of 216 0 or less in length When not stapled 2000 sheets When stapled 100 sets or 1000 sheets 1 staple 7
492. pecification protocol error 54 loop detect during the address book query A loop was detected service related problem Check the LDAP server service operating status 018 764 An LDAP server protocol error occurred in the address book operation The server returned the RFC2251 specification protocol error 64 naming violation during the address book query A naming violation occurred update related problem Check the LDAP server status 018 765 An LDAP server protocol error occurred in the address book operation The server returned the RFC2251 specification protocol error 65 object class violation during the address book query An object class violation occurred update related problem Check the LDAP server status 018 766 An LDAP server protocol error occurred in the address book operation The server returned the RFC2251 specification protocol error 66 not allowed on nonleaf during the address book query The operation is not allowed on a nonleaf object update related problem Check the LDAP server status 018 767 An LDAP server protocol error occurred in the address book operation The server returned the RFC2251 specification protocol error 67 not allowed on RDN during the address book query The operation is not allowed on an RDN update related problem Check the LDAP server status 018 768 An LDAP server protocol error occurred in the address book operation The server returned the RFC2251 sp
493. ple files when PDF or multi page TIFF is selected as the file format Allow Casual Users to Edit From Field Specifies whether unauthorized users have permission to edit the From field mail address in the Recipient s feature on the E mail screen Allow Guest Users to Edit From Field Specifies whether guest users have permission to edit the From field mail address in the Recipient s feature on the E mail screen Allow to edit From if Search found Specifies whether registered authorized users have permission to edit the From field E mail address after a successful search on a remote directory service in the Recipient s feature on the E mail screen Allow to edit From if Search failed Specifies whether registered authorized users have permission to edit the From field E mail address after a search failure on a remote directory service in the Recipient s feature on the E mail screen E mail Sending When Search Failed Specifies whether registered authorized users have permission to send an E mail after a search failure on a remote directory service Add Me to To Field Specifies whether to automatically add the sender to the To field NOTE If the number of specified destinations reaches the limit the sender will not be added to the To field even if this setting is set to Yes Add Me to CC Field Specifies whether to automatically add the sender to the CC field NOTE If the number of specified desti
494. pool jobs to the machine This is set by the orplp command 2 Type lpsched to start the print service 3 Type enable queuename to enable the queue to print to the machine 4 Type accept queuename to enable the queue to start accepting jobs from the HP UX workstation NOTE The queuename is the name of the print queue that has been created 5 Type exit to exit the Bourne shell 6 Type exit to exit superuser mode 7 Type exit to close the command window 238 UNIX TCP IP Test Print 8 Continue with 7est Print on page 239 Using the System Administrator Manager SAM GUI Method Follow the steps below to use the HP System Administrator Manager SAM GUI Graphical User Interface NOTE Refer to the HP UX documentation for additional information on using the System Administrator Manager SAM 7 Start the SAM application Select the Printers and Plotters icon Select Actions from the Menu Bar Select Add Remote Printer Plotter from the pull down menu A gt N Enter the following information into the form displayed in the Add Remote Printer Plotter dialog box 1 Printer Name 2 Remote System Name 3 For the Remote Printer Name enter Ip NOTE The Printer Name is the name of the print queue being created The Remote System Name is the PrinterName for the machine from the etc hosts file The Remote Printer Name must be set to Ip to spool jobs to the machine 4 Enable Remote Printer
495. port number e Authentication Specify whether to enable HTTPS proxy server authentication Login Name Specify the HTTPS proxy server login name e Password Specify the HTTPS proxy server password e Retype Password Re enter the password for verification 194 Properties Feature Setting items Connectivity Protocols continued IPP Allows you to configure the following options when using IPP Internet Printing Protocol Port Number The default IPP port number 631 is displayed Add Port Number Enter the port number TBCP Filter Select the check box to enable TBCP Filter when processing PostScript data This is only available when the optional PostScript kit is installed When the transmission data includes binary data or EPS data disable this feature e Administrator Mode Allows you to enable or disable the System Administration Mode e DNS Select whether to enable or disable DNS e Connection Time Out Allows you to specify the connection time out period when transmission fails UPnP Discovery Allows you to specify the port number for UPnP Port Number Specify the UPnP port number WebDAV Allows you to configure the following Web DAV protocol settings Port Number Specify the Web DAV port number Connection Time Out Allows you to specify the connection time out period when transmission fails Bonjour Allows you to con
496. ports 7 Select Port Settings in the Port Settings Featu res menu Items Current Settings 7 2 Change the required settings Qe fs JA NetVVare nal Use the scroll buttons to switch BE between screens SPP raia E 90 System Settings 3 Select Close USB Specifies whether to enable the USB port and configures the port settings e Port Status Specifies whether to enable the USB port e Print Mode Specifies the PDL to be used for print jobs Only pre installed PDLs are available e PJL Specifies whether to enable the PJL Printer Job Language e Auto Eject Time Specifies the time out period when print data is not sent to the machine sequentially If the specified time elapses the remaining data inside the machine is automatically printed out You can enter a time within the range of 5 1 275 seconds in 5 second increments Adobe Communication Protocol Specifies the communication protocol format for Adobe Communication Protocol Standard Select this option when the communication protocol is in ASCII format Binary Select this option when the communication protocol is in binary format Depending on the data the print job may be completed faster than Standard TBCP Select this option to switch the specific control codes when the communication protocols involve both ASCII and binary formats RAW Select this option when the communication protocol is in RA
497. r Information Checklist Before enabling this service make sure that the following items are available or have been performed Item By An existing operational network utilizing TCP IP is required These Customer procedures are not designed to install a network Obtain and record the following information Customer e IP address e Gateway address Subnet mask for IPv4 Prefix for IPv6 e Host name Set up the mail server and e mail accounts Customer Test the machine to make sure that it is fully installed and functioning Customer correctly Install the Fax Kit and the Internet Fax Kit Customer 287 11 Internet Fax Internet Fax Environments System Requirements The following are required for the machine The Fax Kit and the Internet Fax Kit The machine connected to the network using TCP IP The environment allowing the sending and receiving of e mails Item Correspondent Specifications ITU T Recommendations ITU T T 37 T 30 F 185 and E 164 Internet Fax format Sending RFC2301 TIFFprofileS F J and 600 x 600 dpi Receiving RFC2301 TIFFprofileS F J C Facsimile forwarding RFC2304 RFC2305 DSN function RFC1891 1894 MDN function RFC2298 SMTP receiving RFC821 822 POP3 receiving RFC1939 MIME version Version1 0 RFC2049 NOTE A file may not be printed if the format differs from those in the
498. r Check the quality of the document Select Lighten Darken on the touch screen Run off more prints until the copy quality improves Replace the drum cartridge Uneven print Replace the drum cartridge Replace the toner cartridge if the screen message for replacement is displayed Blurred images Load fresh paper Replace the drum cartridge Replace the toner cartridge if the screen message for replacement is displayed Missing characters Load fresh paper Reinstall the drum cartridge Replace the toner cartridge if the screen message for replacement is displayed Replace the drum cartridge Gloss variations coining Check the quality of the documents If the document has large areas of solid density adjust the contrast 359 15 Problem Solving Symptom Recommendation Light copies when scanning glossy shiny or coated documents through the document feeder e Use the document glass instead of the document feeder Bluish or reddish copies It is not recommended to place the machine near a window as the images of printed sheets may become bluish or reddish If the machine is placed near a window follow these precautions Do not power on the machine with the platen cover opened e Wake up the machine from Energy Saver mode with the platen cover closed e Power the machine off on with the platen cover closed if images are bluish or reddish Repe
499. r and if the Remote Download server is registered on the DNS server 016 537 A timeout error occurred upon connection to the Remote Download server Check the status of the port on the Remote Download server 016 538 A data write error occurred upon downloading data from the Remote Download server Remove unnecessary data from the HDD or replace the HDD 016 539 A Kerberos server authentication protocol error occurred The problem was caused by the software Contact the Xerox Welcome Center 016 543 The specified realm or domain may have been deleted from Authentication Agent Try refreshing the realm list on the machine or re register the domain name with Authentication Agent 016 545 A clock skew error occurred between Authentication Agent and Active Directory Adjust the time on the computers If Windows Time is deactivated on the computer which Authentication Agent is installed on activate it For more details refer to the manual provided with Authentication Agent 016 546 A general user tried to obtain the information of another user Contact the Xerox Welcome Center 016 548 The machine has not been registered on Authentication Agent Register the machine with Authentication Agent For details refer to the manual provided with Authentication Agent 016 553 The current version of Authentication Agent is not supported by the interface installed on the machine Upgrade Authenti
500. r sometimes pages between different jobs may not be printed in the intended sequence if for example printing multiple copies of a single 1 page job In this case set spooling to Off the default to maintain the intended printing sequence NOTE If Job Submission Order is selected under LPD Print Queue in Other Settings this setting is fixed to Spool to Hard Disk No Spooling Specifies no spooling Allows you to change the input buffer memory capacity within the range of 1024 2048 KB in 32 KB increments using the scroll buttons or the numeric keypad Spool to Memory Specifies spooling to memory Allows you to change the input buffer memory capacity within the range of 0 50 32 00 MB in 0 25 MB increments using the scroll buttons or the numeric keypad e Spool to Hard Disk Specifies spooling to the hard disk 101 6 Setups Receiving Buffer NetWare Specifies the input buffer memory capacity for the NetWare interface within the range of 64 1024 KB in 32 KB increments using the scroll buttons or the numeric keypad The currently available memory will be displayed at the top of the screen with the following message Memory Available XXX MB Receiving Buffer SMB Specifies the input buffer memory capacity for the SMB interface The currently available memory will be displayed at the top of the screen with the following message Memory Available XXX MB NOTE When printing with the receiving
501. r driver For more information refer to the printer driver online help Banner Sheet Specifies whether to add sorting sheets banner sheets This is effective for sorting classifying to differentiate printed sheets from the rest You can add banner sheets before and or at the end of the print job NOTE Even if the Finisher is used banner sheets will not be stapled Banner sheets from print jobs from a Macintosh do not display the document name Printing banner sheets also increments the billing meter Banner Sheet Tray Specifies the tray for banner sheets PostScript Paper Supply Specifies whether to use the DMS Deferred Media Selection feature of PostScript or to select a paper tray PostScript Font Absence Specifies whether to substitute fonts automatically and continue the print job when a required font is not found The substitute font is Courier NOTE This feature is available only when PostScript is loaded PostScript Font Substitution Specifies whether to use ATCx during font substitution NOTE This feature is available only when PostScript is loaded XPS Print Ticket Processing Specifies how the machine processes the print tickets written in XPS documents Selecting Off does not process print tickets Selecting Standard Mode uses the standard mode and Compatible Mode uses the Microsoft compliant mode to process print tickets NOTE XPS stands for XML Paper Specification LPD Print Queue Specifies
502. r establishing an IP address from DHCP BOOTP RARP DHCP Autonet and STATIC and then select Save NOTE Use the DHCP server together with the Windows Internet Name Server WINS server If you selected STATIC in step 4 then proceed to step 5 to configure the protocol settings Otherwise proceed to step 11 5 Select IPv4 IP Address and then Change Settings 6 Use the keypad on the screen to enter an IP address for the machine in the format XXX XXX XXX XXX When you have finished entering all values select Save 7 Select IPv4 Subnet Mask and then Change Settings 8 Using the same method as in step 6 enter a subnet mask 9 Select IPv4 Gateway Address and then Change Settings 70 Using the same method as in step 6 enter a gateway address NOTE If you do not wish to set the gateway address leave this field blank 11 Select IPv4 IP Filter and then Change Settings 72 Select Enabled to filter access to the machine NOTE If you do not wish to use the IP filter feature select Disabled NOTE Use CentreWare Internet Services to register the IP addresses which are not allowed to access the machine Refer to Properties on page 173 73 When you have finished establishing TCP IP select Close on the Protocol Settings screen When IPv6 Mode or Dual Stack is selected in step 2 3 Set IPv6 Address Manual Configuration NOTE Select Enabled when the ma
503. r is installed on the machine Hole Punch Allows you to specify the hole punch position and the number of holes to punch NOTE This option is displayed when the Office Finisher LX is installed on the machine Output Allows you to select an output tray Destination Paper Paper Supply Allows you to select a paper tray Paper Size Allows you to select the output paper size Paper Type Allows you to select the type of paper to be used 158 Print Feature Description Delivery Immediate Print Allows you to send a file directly to the machine to print Sample Set Allows you to print one set of a document prior to printing the whole quantity User ID Enter the user ID for the Sample Set feature with up to 32 characters Delayed Print Allows you to print documents at the specified time within 24 hours Hour Specify the hour value Minute Specify the minute value Secure Print Allows you to print or delete passcode protected stored documents User ID Enter the user ID using up to 32 characters Enter Passcode Enter the passcode for the user ID The passcode can be up to 12 digits Retype Passcode Re enter the passcode for verification Accounting Account Type Specify the account type to be used NOTE This item is displayed only when Xerox Standard Accounting is enabled Account ID Specify the account type of Xerox Standard
504. r password entry Verify User Details for Printer Direct Fax Jobs Select whether to verify user details before processing print and direct fax jobs Guest User Select whether to allow non registered users to use the machine as guest users Guest Passcode Enter a guest passcode The password can be 4 to 12 digits Retype Guest Passcode Re enter the passcode for verification Save remote accounts in this machine Select whether or not to save remote accounts on this machine Delete Remote Accounts This setting is active when Save remote accounts in this machine is set to Enabled Select whether or not to automatically delete remote accounts saved on the machine and how often to delete them Week This setting is active when Delete Remote Accounts is set to Weekly Select a day of the week to delete remote accounts saved in the machine Day This setting is active when Delete Remote Accounts is set to Monthly Select a date of the month to delete remote accounts saved on the machine Time This setting is active when Delete Remote Accounts is set to Weekly or Monthly Select a time to delete accounts saved on the machine Authentication Required For details on each item refer to Authentication Required on page 211 215 7 CentreWare Internet Services Feature Setting items Security Authentication Configuration Authentication Configuration
505. r this user Delete User To delete a user select the check box for the user and then click the Delete User button To delete all the users listed click the Select All button and then the Delete User button Group Accounts This page displays a list of registered group accounts If group accounts are listed over two to more pages use the Previous or Next button to move between pages The list can be sorted by clicking ID or Name 209 7 CentreWare Internet Services Feature Setting items Accounting Xerox Standard Accounting continued Add Account Click this button to register new group account information Account ID Enter up to 32 characters for an account ID Account Name Enter up to 32 characters for an account name View Usage To see how many impressions have been used select the check box for a group account and click the View Usage button Manage To change group account information select the check box for the group account and click the Manage button Account ID e Account ID Displays the Account ID Account Name Enter up to 32 characters for a new account name Default for new users To set this group account as default for new users select the Enable check box User Access Select users to link to the group account To link all the users click Select All Delete Account To delete a grou
506. rPS 13 Antique Olive Italic 55 CourierPS Oblique 14 Antique Olive Bold 56 CourierPS Bold 15 CG Omega 57 CourierPS Bold Oblique 16 CG Omega Italic 58 SymbolPS 17 CG Omega Bold 59 Palatino Roman 18 CG Omega Bold Italic 60 Palatino Italic 19 Garamond Antiqua 61 Palatino Bold 20 Garamond Kursiv 62 Palatino Bold Italic 21 Garamond Halbfett 63 ITC Bookman Light 22 Garamond Kursiv Halbfett 64 ITC Bookman Light Italic 23 Courier Default 65 ITC Bookman Demi 24 Courier Italic 66 ITC Bookman Demi Italic 25 Courier Bold 67 Helvetica Narrow 26 Courier Bold Italic 68 Helvetica Narrow Oblique 27 Letter Gothic 69 Helvetica Narrow Bold 28 Letter Gothic Italic 70 Helvetica Narrow Bold Oblique 29 Letter Gothic Bold 71 New Century Schoolbook 30 Albertus Medium Roman 31 Albertus Extra Bold 72 New Century Schoolbook Italic 32 Clarendon Condensed 73 New Century Schoolbook Bold 33 Coronet 74 New Century Schoolbook Bold 34 Marigold Italic 35 Arial 75 ITC Avant Garde Book 36 Arial Italic 76 ITC Avant Garde Book Oblique 37 Arial Bold 77 ITC Avant Garde Demi 38 Arial Bold Italic 78 ITC Avant Garde Demi Oblique 39 Times New 79 ITC Zapf Chancery Medium 40 Times New Italic Italic 80 ITC Zapf Dingbats 428 Emulation Parameters Item Parameter Value No Symbol Set 208 0 Roman 8 Default 18 Microsoft Publishing 1 ISO 8859 1 Latin 1 19 Math 8 2 ISO 8
507. rade Click Browse and move through your file system to the new software Click Install Software to install the software NOTE The Manual Upgrade link provides the ability to upgrade software manually after enabling with the Upgrades link Xerox Extensible Interface Platform XEIP Xerox Extensible Interface Platform enables independent software vendors and partners to develop customized programs to access directly from the machine Users can enter their user ID at the machine and access a set of features and options designed specifically for their business needs For example a hospital could customize the machine to help better manage patient forms By selecting Custom Services on the All Services screen and then selecting a button on the Custom Services screen a healthcare worker could access the hospital s web based document management system and browse a list of patient forms Users can quickly scan and capture paper documents preview thumbnails and add them to frequently used document storage location For example A tutor can scan notes directly to a specific course repository for students to access A student can scan assessment papers to their course folder for their tutor to mark Xerox Extensible Interface Platform utilizes web based Xerox Partner solutions including Omtool Equitrac and FreeFlow SMARTsend to enable users to access document repositories at the machine s control panel A
508. ration Restricted Use Total Usage Services Featun z Account Per Account Accounting Restrictions 40 4 Limit Direct Fax Report List X O Manageable X Not manageable 4 You can select features available for each user For more information refer to Account Limit on page 134 2 This feature forbids any actions beyond the number of pages specified For more information on setting the restrictions refer to Account Limit on page 134 Xerox Standard Accounting The features and services that can be managed in Xerox Standard Accounting are as follows Restrictions on Use Corresponding Per user Service Accounting Feature gt Account Limit Usage Count Restrictions 2 Copy O O O O Print O O O O Charge Print Private Charge O O O O Print Scan Service O O O O Fax Internet Fax O O O O Direct Fax O O O O Report List X X X X O Manageable X Not manageable 4 You can select features available for each user For more information refer to Account Limit on page 134 2 This feature stops further machine operation if the number of pages has reached the specified maximum number For more information refer to the CentreWare Internet Services online help Jobs that Can be Managed for Each Service The types of jobs you can manage using the Account Administration feature vary for print scan and fax services This section
509. rator s Meter Close Total Impressions Eo Administrator s meters select Reset 3 Select Close Accounting Type This screen allows you to enable or disable the Accounting feature and to specify the types of jobs that require account administration NOTE The buttons displayed on the screen vary depending on the Login Type setting in Authentication 7 Select Accounting and then aie Caneel Save select Accounting Type in the Oi Auditron Mode Group menu Local Accounting 2 Select an accounting type If O buttons are displayed on the on right part of the screen select the required buttons to configure the detailed settings for the selected accounting type 3 Select Save Accounting Disabled Disables the Accounting feature Local Accounting Enables the Accounting feature User registration can be performed using the touch screen or the PC application Network Accounting Performs Account Administration using user information managed by an external accounting service on a network User registration is performed by the external server Xerox Standard Accounting Performs Account Administration based on accounting users registered on the machine When an accounting type is selected the following buttons may appear The buttons displayed on the screen vary depending on the combination of the login type of the Authentication feature and the accounting type
510. rch allows you to search for the job flow by keyword Up to 12 characters are allowed for a job flow search keyword Add Address Book Entry This feature allows you to program the Address Book with recipients of documents Register destinations to which documents are to be occasionally sent through fax Server Fax Internet Fax e mail FTP protocols or SMB protocols Destinations are registered under 3 digit Address Numbers by which you can quickly specify destinations when sending documents 127 6 Setups NOTE You can program the Address Book with up to 500 destinations in total NOTE When a new Address Book in CSV format is imported all the previous addresses are replaced with the new data NOTE Do not open the CSV file using software such as Microsoft Excel Once opening the CSV file on the software it is automatically edited and the edited file cannot be used for the machine NOTE Address Numbers registered in the Address Book can be used as speed dial codes NOTE If a recipient s name and number in the Address Book is modified after assignment to a new job flow those changes are not reflected in the job flow which can result in documents being sent to the previous destination The job flow must also be updated in order to send documents to the correct destination 7 Select Add Address Book PRAT a Entry in the Group menu Address Recipie
511. rd 200 0 148 0 LEF 3 5 x 5 5 SEF 88 9 139 7 B6 LEF 182 0 128 0 B6 SEF 128 0 182 0 O Available Blank Not available 82 System Settings Millimeters Inches Specifies Millimeters or Inches as the unit for entering document or scan sizes Tray 1 Configuration Specifies whether Tray 1 is used as the standard paper tray or is replaced with the Envelope Tray optional NOTE Some models do not support the Envelope Tray optional Keyboard Input Restriction Specifies whether the machine is to allow entry of standard ASCII characters only or characters including those specific to the selected language Select On Standard ASCII Only to display standard ASCII characters only on the keyboard screen Operation of Up Down Buttons Specifies whether the machine is to allow the up and down buttons scroll buttons on the touch screen to provide fast scrolling when they are pressed continuously Display Consumables Screen Specifies whether to display the consumables screen and the event that causes the machine to display the consumables screen Data Encryption Specifies whether to enable encoding when data is saved to RAM NV RAM backed up memory chips or the hard disk of the machine Enter a 12 digit encoding code using the screen keyboard When the setting is changed the machine needs to be switched off and then on to make it effective Note that all data corresponding to the encoding then will be init
512. re Setting items Connectivity Protocol continued SNMP Configuration Allows you to configure the following options when accessing the machine via SNMP SNMP Properties Enable SNMP v1 v2c Protocols Allows you to enable or disable the SNMP v1 v2c protocols Edit SNMP v1 v2c Properties Displays the page which allows you to set the following SNMP v1 v2c properties Community Names e Community Name Read Only Enter the community name used for display e Community Name Read Write Enter the community name used for display and update Default Trap Community Name TRAP Community Name Enter the trap notification community name System Administrator s Login ID e System Administrator s Login ID Enter the ID of the System Administrator Enable SNMP v3 Protocol Allows you to enable or disable the SNMP v3 protocol Edit SNMP v3 Properties Displays the page which allows you to set the following SNMP v3 properties This button is active only when the Secure HTTP SSL feature is enabled Administrator Account Account Enabled Select to enable the System Administrator s account e User Name Displays the user name of the System Administrator Authentication Password minimum 8 characters Enter the authentication password using 8 to 32 characters Confirm Authentication Password Re enter the authentication password for verification e Privacy P
513. re ACCESS ccccccccccccccnonononononononos 309 337 Xerox Standard Accounting 0 0 0 136 326 DaCkUP ieee died neice eevee 329 CIONIN tdi 329 330 enabling ecc ii cid da 326 group account creating eee 327 installation checklist ooo 326 maximum usage limits eee eee 327 Print drivers 2 cece eeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 329 restoring Settings oeiee 330 usage data resetting i 328 usage limits resetting e cc ceeeeeeeeeee 327 usage limits Setting eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 327 usage report printing c 329 user account creating s es 327 XSA at the machine ccseeeeeeeteees 328 Xerox website eee eeeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeneaeees 224 Xerox Welcome Center cccceceeeeteeeesene 13 XPS Print Ticket Processing ccceeeeeee 104 XPS SiQGnature ooo cece e E e Ara 99 444
514. re defined under Create Authorization Groups in the Security folder Device Default State Configuration This item may not appear depending on your authentication and accounting settings Device Access Displays the Authentication Configuration gt Device Access page This page allows you to control access to the machine features The following settings are invalid when Login Type is set to No Login Required Authentication required for All Services Pathway To require user authentication to access the pathway to all services select Locked To not require user authentication select Unlocked 212 Properties Feature Setting items Accounting Accounting Configuration continued Job Status Pathway To require user authentication to access the pathway to job status information select Locked To not require user authentication select Unlocked e Machine Status Pathway To require user authentication to access the pathway to machine status information select Locked To not require user authentication select Unlocked Service Access Displays the Authentication Configuration gt Service Access page which allows you to set access control to certain services on the machine The following settings are invalid when Login Type is set to No Login Required Authentication required for e Installed Services To require user authenticatio
515. re required Domain name The IPv6 format is not supported E mail address display format 16 Click Apply to reflect the settings Test Server Fax Transmission To make sure that Server Fax has been set up correctly perform the following steps BH AHN NA Load a document Make sure that the Server Fax service is enabled Select Fax on the All Services screen Select the required features for the job Specify a destination Press the lt Start gt button 296 13 Security Encryption Digital Signature This chapter describes how to configure the encryption and digital signature features for the machine The following information is provided Types of Encryption Digital Signature Services Available page 297 Configuration of HTTPS SSL TLS Communication Encryption page 298 Configuration of E mail Encryption Digital Signature page 300 Contiguration of Scan File Signatures PDF XPS Documents page 303 Configuration of IPsec page 305 NOTE Some of the features described in this chapter are optional and may not apply to your machine configuration Types of Encryption Digital Signature Services Available The communication data between the machine and computers on a network can be encrypted Encryption for the machine as described in this chapter is set up using CentreWare Internet Services NOTE For details on CentreWare Internet Services refer to Centre Ware Internet Service
516. re required on a recipient computer Sending S MIME Encrypted E mail by E mail Printing from a Computer to the Machine It is necessary to register the S MIME certificate of the machine on the computer 302 Configuration of Scan File Signatures PDF XPS Documents There are two methods to set an S MIME certificate of the machine on the computer e Sending e mail attached with an S MIME digital signature from the machine to the computer In the Digital Signature Outgoing E mail settings configure to attach the digital signature to e mails Exporting an S MIME certificate to the computer using CentreWare Internet Services and registering the exported S MIME certificate in the certificate store of the e mail application Exporting of certificates is accomplished under Trusted Certificates Management of the Security folder on the Properties page of CentreWare Internet Services For information on exporting certificates with CentreWare Internet Services refer to Properties in the CentreWare Internet Services chapter on page 173 For information on how to register a certificate in an e mail application refer to the manuals provided with the e mail application Sending E mail Attached with an S MIME Digital Signature from a Computer to the Machine It is necessary to register a personal certificate of a sender s e mail address an intermediate certificate authority certificate of the personal certificate and a root ce
517. rea Select Standard to crop a margin 4 1 mm 0 16 inches wide along all four edges ofthe paper Select Extended to crop a margin of 2 mm 0 08 inches along the edges Substitute Tray Specifies the substitute tray when the machine cannot detect the paper tray corresponding to the document size with the auto paper selection e Display Message Specifies a message prompt requesting paper supply be displayed without switching paper trays e Use Larger Size Specifies switching to the tray loaded with the next larger size of paper and prints the document in its original size Use Closest Size Specifies switching to the tray loaded with the paper in the size closest to the selected paper Image size may be automatically reduced as required NOTE A job sent from a computer takes priority over a job instigated on the machine Select Tray 5 Bypass Specifies switching to the bypass tray Paper Type Mismatch Specifies whether to print display the confirmation screen or display the paper supply screen when a paper type mismatch occurs Unregistered Forms Specifies whether to abort a job which is specified to use form overlay when a form is not found not registered in the machine 103 6 Setups Print User ID Specifies whether to print the user ID and the position to print the ID when printing using a printer driver to distinguish between users The user ID is a maximum of 64 characters set by the printe
518. rectly 269 9 E mail Environment Settings Network Communication Setup NOTE Some of the configuration options for this protocol are only available from CentreWare Internet Services Refer to CentreWare Internet Services on page 147 NOTE Keep the SNMP port enabled while you use the machine on the TCP IP network Initially activate the ports for e mail 71 Connect the machine to the network 2 Press the lt Log In Out gt button on the control panel and then type the System Administrator login ID to enter the System Administration mode NOTE The passcode may also be required depending on the machine configuration 3 Press the lt Machine Status gt button on the control panel and then select the Tools tab on the screen Select System Settings in the menu at the left side of the screen Select Connectivity amp Network Setup in the Group menu Select Port Settings in the Features menu NAMA Select the required port and then Change Settings Scan to E mail Send E mail E mail Print Receive E mail e E mail Notification Service Notify Job End by E mail E mail Notification Service 8 Select Port Status and then Change Settings 9 Select Enabled and then Save Next establish TCP IP 7 Select Connectivity amp Network Setup in the Group menu and then select Protocol Settings in the Features menu 2 Under TCP IP IP Mode select IPv4 Mode IPv6 Mode
519. rectory Root Enter a distinguished name that represents the search start point Up to 255 characters can be used Login Name Enter the login name of the LDAP server that requires authentication Up to 128 characters can be used 191 7 CentreWare Internet Services Feature Setting items Connectivity Protocols continued LDAP continued Password Enter the password for the search login name using up to 32 characters If the server does not require authentication or a password is not required upon authentication leave this text box blank Retype Password Re enter the password for verification Maximum Number of Search Results Specify the maximum number of search result entries Search Time Out Specify whether the server timeout limit will be used or how many seconds the search should last LDAP Referrals Allows you to enable or disable LDAP referrals LDAP Referral Hop Limit Specify the referral hop limit from 1 to 5 e Search Name Order Search Name Order Specify the attribute for searching by name Search Entries by Name will return matches for the first name and last name of the individual being searched Search Entries by Last Name will return matches for the last name of the individual being searched Search Entries by First Name will return matches for the first name of the individual being searched LDAP User Mappings e Server Information IP Ad
520. red with SSL but the SSL was disabled on the machine Enable the SSL or use the HTTP protocol 027 736 A server certificate verification error occurred Enable the server certificate verification setting on the machine 027 737 An error occurred during reading of data from the job template server Check the access rights of the directory in which the job template is stored 027 739 Unable to find the specified job template server Check the path to the job template server 027 740 Unable to log in to the job template server Verify that the correct login user name password and other information are entered 027 741 Unable to connect to the job template server Ask the network administrator to check the network or server 027 742 The job template could not be stored into memory due to insufficient disk space Delete unnecessary data from the disk 027 743 The settings on the job template server are incorrect Check the settings of the job template server 409 15 Problem Solving Code Description and Remedy 027 744 There is a problem in the domain name of the job template server Check the connection to the server Also check if the domain name is registered on the DNS server 027 745 The address of the DNS server is not registered on the machine Register the address of the DNS server on the machine or directly specify the job template server with
521. ress to bypass proxy in FQDN format the registered server does not become an excluded object Therefore an IP address can be used as the bypass proxy address Similarly if the server is accessed using FQDN format while specifying a direct IP address for the bypass proxy address the registered server does not become an excluded object Therefore an FDQN format can be used as the bypass proxy address The connected server or proxy server is down Check that the server or proxy server you wish to connect to is operating normally The network drops out or is disconnected Check the network cable connections A spanning tree environment is recommended to construct a strong environment against network interruptions Cannot communicate due to the load on the server application Wait a while and try again 379 15 Problem Solving Restrictions Problem Action An error occurred but no message is displayed on the control panel No message is displayed on the control panel even when an error occurs during execution of background processes Display the Job Status screen or print a job history report and check the results Cannot connect due to proxy server firewall or web server access restrictions Check if any of the following access restrictions are set Address port restrictions e SSL usage restrictions User access restrictions including access privileges e Con
522. rface 7 Select Allocate Memory in the Pamat mmay Features menu Items Current Settings 1 PostScript Memory 16 00 MB 2 Change the required settings 2 Receiving Buffer USB ee d Use the scroll buttons to switch 3 Receiving Buffer LPD No Spooling 1024 KB 4 Receiving Buffer NetWare 64 KB chan between screens 5 Receiving Buffer SMB No Spooling 1024 KB ly 3 Select Close PostScript Memory Specifies the PostScript memory capacity within the range of 16 00 96 00 MB in 0 25 MB increments using the scroll buttons or the numeric keypad The currently available memory will be displayed at the top of the screen with the following message Memory Available XXX MB Receiving Buffer USB Specifies the input buffer memory capacity for the USB interface within the range of 64 1024 KB in 32 KB increments using the scroll buttons or the numeric keypad The currently available memory will be displayed at the top of the screen with the following message Memory Available XXX MB Receiving Buffer LPD Specifies the input buffer memory capacity for the LPD interface The currently available memory will be displayed at the top of the screen with the following message Memory Available XXX MB NOTE When printing with the receiving buffer spooling set to Memory or Hard Disk each page within a job is printed in the sequence assigned by the operating system Howeve
523. ribution Template page Feature Description General Template Name Enter the name of a new job template Information Description Enter the description of the new job template This setting Optional is optional Owner Enter the owner of the new job template This setting is Optional optional Add Displays the Distribution page where you can set up the scan options and filing destination for the new job template Distribution The following table shows the information fields on the Distribution page Destinations Feature Description Description Displays the description of the job template Click this link to edit the description Owner Displays the owner of the job template Click this link to edit the owner Delete Deletes the job template Copy Makes a copy of the job template File File Displays the defined scan file repository Edit Displays a page where you can set a new scan file repository or edit an existing repository Filing Policy Specify the filing policy for saving a new file when a file of the same name already exists in the file repository e Rename New File Adds a three digit number from 001 to 999 to the name of the new file File names increment sequentially when additional documents of the same name are scanned e Append to Existing File Adds a newly scanned file to the existing file e Overwrite Existing File Ove
524. rinterName is alive 3 Edit the etc printcap file to contain an entry for the machine queue using the following example PrinterName 1lp rm PrinterName mx 0 sd var spool lpd PrinterName 1 var spool lpd PrinterName log 1 PrinterName is the local client name of the machine 2 1p is the local device name for the printer output For remote printers this parameter must be set to nothing NOTE The recommended remote queue name is Ip 3 rm is the remote device This is the IP hostname for the machine on the local client The remote printer name defaults to Ip the default printer 4 mx 0 indicates that there is no limit on the document size 5 sd is the path to the queue for the machine 6 1 is the error log file name 4 The machine can be designated as the default print queue It will then be unnecessary to include the PrinterName in the lpr command line 1 To designate the machine as the default print queue add the following to the etc printcap file This is an addition to the information entered in the previous step lp PrinterName 1p rm PrinterName mx 0 sd var spool lpd PrinterName 5 Create the spool directory identified in the printcap file and set the access attributes as shown in the example below The spool directory should be located 237 8 Printer Environment Settings HP UX on a disk partition large enough to hold copies of documents that will be s
525. rnet Services Feature Setting items General Setup Memory LPD Settings Allows you to select the spool destination for the job continued Spool to Memory Enter a value between 512 KB and 32 MB 32768 KB in 256 KB increments Spool to Hard Disk The print page buffer text box will be blank and the value cannot be updated e No Spooling Enter a value between 1024KB and 2048KB in 32 KB increments IPP Allows you to select the spool destination for the job Spool to Hard Disk The print page buffer text box will be blank and the value cannot be updated e No Spooling Enter a value between 64 KB and 1024 KB in 32 KB increments Port 9100 Enter the print page buffer for the Port9100 interface between 64 KB and 1024 KB in 32 KB increments PostScript Memory Enter the PostScript working memory between 16384 KB and 98304 KB in 256 KB increments Internet Allows you to configure the settings for CentreWare Services Internet Services Settings Auto Refresh Interval Enter a time in seconds when the contents of the browser display will be refreshed automatically Pool Server Allows you to set the pool server related information for Settings job flow services Pool Server Select to enable the pool server Login Details from Device Select whether or not to use the login details defined by the machine User Name Enter the user name to be used when accessing the pool server with up to
526. rocess are recorded 7 Select Overwrite Hard Disk in pmm heen Y Supplies Y Biling Y Toots L Information z Information the Group menu ten Features LO Allow User to Disable Number of Overwrites a Active Settings O Job Status Default Scheduled Image Overwrite PEA Overwrite Hard Disk Authentication v v Security Settings L Number of Overwrites Specifies whether to enable overwriting the hard disk You can select the number of overwrite passes from one time or three times When 1 Overwrite is selected 0 is written to the disk area When 3 Overwrites is selected overwriting is carried out with the method recommended by the National Security Agency NSA 3 Overwrites 145 6 Setups ensures higher security than 1 Overwrite The setting also overwrites temporarily saved data such as copy documents Scheduled Image Overwrite Specifies how often and when to overwrite data on the hard disk At the specified time overwriting starts and all jobs in progress including a fax being received are canceled The machine will reboot after the overwriting process 146 7 CentreWare Internet Services The CentreWare Internet Services program uses the embedded web user interface which enables communication between a networked computer and the machine via HTTP CentreWare Internet Services can be used to check the machine status and the status of each job and to change the machine co
527. rocess to create a new job Up to three jobs can be transferred via networks at the same time Or the system has too small space to create a new scan job Wait for a while and try again If the problem persists switch off the machine and then switch it on again 018 543 The following problems were identified with the shared name specified when you logged into the SMB server to save scan data using the Scan to PC service The shared name does not exist on the server The shared name includes illegal characters e Macintosh computers do not have access right to the shared name Make sure that the shared name you specified is correct 018 547 The maximum number of users had already been reached when you logged in to the SMB server to save scan data using the Scan to PC service Take one of the following actions e Check the maximum number of users that are allowed to simultaneously access the shared folder e Check whether the number of users that are allowed to simultaneously access the server has reached the maximum 018 556 An HTTP server error occurred Check if the specified drive and folder is available on the HTTP server and try again Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 018 557 The specified file name contains invalid characters Modify the file name and try again 018 558 The specified folder or file does not exist on the HTTP server Check the folder and file names
528. rocessing mode If the problem persists add memory If the problem still persists use a print driver on XPS Viewer to submit a print job 016 516 An XPS print ticket error occurred Check if you used the correct print steps on your application If the problem persists contact the application vender 016 518 A PostScript error occurred Disable either the booklet creation or Watermark feature 016 519 The print volume reached the limit If necessary change the limit of print volume 016 522 An LDAP server SSL authentication error occurred An SSL client certificate could not be acquired The LDAP server requires an SSL client certificate Set the SSL client certificate on the machine 016 523 An LDAP server SSL authentication error occurred The LDAP server s SSL certificate is not trusted Register the root certificate of the LDAP server SSL certificate on the machine 016 524 An LDAP server SSL authentication error occurred The server certificate will expire soon Change to a valid LDAP server SSL certificate or set LDAP SSL TLS Communication under SSL TLS Settings to Disabled to avoid the error 016 525 An LDAP server SSL authentication error occurred The server certificate has expired Change to a valid LDAP server SSL certificate or set LDAP SSL TLS Communication under SSL TLS Settings to Disabled to avoid the error 385 15 Problem Solving Code Description and Remedy 016 526 A
529. rox Standard Accounting 320 Overview of Account Administration Local Accounting The features and services that can be managed using the local Account Administration feature are as follows Restricted Use i Total Usage Services Feature Accounting Restrictions Account Per Account 4 Limit Copy O O O O Print Charge Print and Private Charge Print Scan O O O Fax Internet Fax O x x O Direct Fax O xX x O Report List x xX X x O Manageable X Not manageable 1 You can select features available for each user For more information refer to Account Limit on page 134 2 This feature forbids any actions beyond the number of pages specified For more information on setting the restrictions refer to Account Limit on page 134 For more information on the setting methods refer to Create View User Accounts in the Setups chapter on page 133 Network Accounting When you are using Network Accounting with the machine user information is managed through a remote account server The features and services that can be managed using the Network Accounting feature are as follows Restricted Use Total Usage Senvices Pean Account Per Account Accounting Restrictions at 4 Limit Copy O O Print O O Charge Print and O O Private Charge Print Scan O Fax Internet Fax O X 321 14 Authentication and Account Administ
530. rred during communication with the server When the File Name Conflict feature is set to an option other than Do Not Save check if NEXTNAME DAT is correct 018 590 The same file name exists on the server Ensure the folder is not accessed from other clients and try again Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 018 591 The number of suffixes attached to folder or file names exceeded the limit Change the names of existing folders or files or move the folders or files into another folder 018 592 A LOCK directory could not be created Manually delete the exiting lock directory LCK from the save destination and try again Or if the same folder name exists in the save destination specify another folder name 018 593 The LOCK directory could not be deleted Manually delete the exiting lock directory LCK from the save destination and try again 018 596 An LDAP protocol error occurred Try again If the problem persists contact the Xerox Welcome Center 018 701 An LDAP server protocol error occurred in the address book operation The server returned the RFC2251 specification protocol error 1 operations error during the address book query Check that the LDAP Server Directory Service settings in Remote Server Directory Service are correct and check if the problem occurred on the server side 018 702 An LDAP server protocol error occurred in the address book operati
531. rs or image bleed through when scanning Resolution Allows you to specify the scan resolution e 200 x 200 dpi e 300 x 300 dpi e 400 x 400 dpi e 600 x 600 dpi 163 7 CentreWare Internet Services Feature Description Layout Original Displays the original orientation setting Adjustment Orientation Original Size Displays the original paper size setting Reduce Displays the scan ratio setting Enlarge Output Size Displays the output paper size setting Edge Erase Displays the top bottom or left right edge erase setting Edit Displays a page where you can edit the Layout Adjustment settings NOTE Some of the following options may not be available depending on other settings Original Orientation Allows you to specify the orientation of originals e Upright Images e Sideways Images Top to Left Original Size Allows you to specify the size of originals Auto Detect Manual Size Input e Mixed Sized Originals Reduce Enlarge Allows you to specify a reduction enlargement ratio e Auto e Preset e Calculator Output Size Allows you to specify the output scan size Auto Detect Edge Erase Allows you to erase unwanted marks from each edge of scanned documents Top Edge Bottom Edge e Left Edge Right Edge 164 Scan Mailbox Feature Description Filing Options Document Name Displays the document name Document
532. rt protocol for the SNMP port using CentreWare Internet Services a Start a web browser on a computer b Access CentreWare Internet Services by referring to CentreWare Internet Services on page 147 In CentreWare Internet Services click the Properties tab Click Port Status Select the UDP check box next to SNMP Click Apply e If prompted enter the System Administrator user ID and passcode and click OK Click the Reboot button when it is displayed If a Reboot button fails to be displayed click the Status tab and then click Reboot Machine on the Status screen c d c d mh 286 11 Internet Fax This chapter explains how to set up the Internet Fax service of the machine The following information is provided Internet Fax Overview page 287 Information Checklist page 287 Internet Fax Environments page 288 Internet Fax Installation page 288 Installation Procedure page 288 Network Communication Setup page 289 Test Internet Fax page 291 Internet Fax Overview If the Fax Kit and the Internet Fax Kit are installed on the machine you can send and receive scanned data as attachments via an intranet or the Internet This differs from a facsimile that transmits the data via a telephone line Some models do not support the Internet Fax service Some models require optional kits to use the Internet Fax service For details contact the Xerox Welcome Cente
533. rties settings of your user account to see if your computer has access permission to the SMB server 018 504 Connection to the Xerox Secure Access server has timed out Try the authentication process again 018 505 018 506 One of the following problems has occurred If the error occurred during SMB authentication The user ID or passcode you entered was not correct and thus the authentication failed The time setting of the SMB server and that of the machine do not match Windows Server 2003 only If the error occurred during SMB file transfer using Scan to PC The user ID or passcode you entered was not correct and thus the login to the SMB server failed The time setting of the SMB server and that of the machine do not match Windows Server 2003 only The user is not permitted to use Windows Sharing Mac OS X 10 4 only Take one of the following actions e Check with the System Administrator for the correct user ID and passcode Make sure to match the time setting of the SMB server and that of the machine Windows Server 2003 only e Check if you are permitted to use Windows Sharing Mac OS X 10 4 only 018 507 The authentication with the Xerox Secure Access server was not successful due to a communication error machine internal error or code error Try the authentication process again 018 508 The Xerox Secure Access server did not recognize the user ID or password you entered Enter
534. rtificate on the machine For information on importing certificates with CentreWare Internet Services refer to Properties in the CentreWare Internet Services chapter on page 173 Supported E mail Applications E mail applications that can send and receive e mail to and from the machine are as follows e Outlook 2000 2002 2003 e Outlook Express 6 e Netscape 7 x Configuration of Scan File Signatures PDF XPS Documents Installation Overview Configuration on the Machine Import a certificate from a Certificate Authority in PKCS12 format and then configure the certificate on the machine using CentreWare Internet Services Configuration on a Computer Prepare for verification of the PDF or XPS signature Configuring Scan File certificates with CentreWare Internet Services To configure certificates with CentreWare Internet Services first enable HTTP communications as stated under Configuration of HTTP Communication Encryption in this section Next import a certificate from a Certificate Authority in PKCS12 format Finally set the certificate as a scan file certificate 303 13 Security Encryption Digital Signature N SAA Start a web browser Enter the machine s IP address beginning with https into the Address box of your web browser to access CentreWare Internet Services Example https 192 168 1 1 Click the Properties tab Click on the left of Security to display the items i
535. rver Preferred DNS Server Enter the IPv6 address for the DNS Domain primary server address Alternate DNS Server 1 2 Enter the IPv6 addresses for the DNS Domain alternate server 1 and 2 e Dynamic DNS Registration IPv4 Specify whether to enable dynamic DNS server updates and or to overwrite DNS settings upon updates e Dynamic DNS Registration IPv6 Specify whether to enable dynamic DNS server updates and or to overwrite DNS settings upon updates e Generate Domain Search List Automatically Select whether or not to automatically generate the domain search list Domain Name 1 3 Enter the domain names for the domain name 1 to 3 e Connection Time Out Specify the maximum time period allowed for searching domains DNS Resolution via IPv6 First Select whether or not to prioritize the resolution of the IPv6 DNS name over the IPv4 DNS name when IP Mode is set to Dual Stack DHCP DDNS e Release Registration Allows DHCP resources to be released when the machine is powering down This is a display only item and shows Enabled Zero Configuration Networking Self Assigned Address IPv4 Allocates an IPv4 address without using a DHCP server This check box is selected when IP Address Resolution is set to Autonet This is a display only item Self Assigned Address IPv6 Displays Enabled This is a display only item 186 Properties Featu
536. rver the user information stored in the machine may be temporarily deleted to restrict user access When this happens the mailboxes and job flow sheets associated with the 310 Authentication for Job Flow Sheets and Mailboxes user will also be deleted When using a remote authentication server to manage authentication use of mailboxes and job flow sheets in the System Administration mode is recommended NOTE For mailboxes and job flow sheets Authenticated Users who are given the System Administrator privileges have the same access level as Authenticated Users with no System Administrator privileges Job Flow Sheet Types There are four types of job flow sheets that can be used with the machine NOTE You can create Mailbox Job Flow Sheets with the machine Generally Shared Job Flow Sheet This job flow sheet is created by a General User without using the Authentication feature When the Authentication feature is not enabled this job flow sheet is shared and its settings may be changed by any user When the Authentication feature is enabled this job flow sheet can only be operated by a System Administrator Mailbox Job Flow Sheet This job flow sheet is created by a General User or a System Administrator using Mailbox on the Setup screen The owner of this job flow sheet is set to the mailbox it was created from Any user who has access to the mailbox can use and change its settings This job flow sheet is a
537. rwrites the previously scanned file with the new file Do not Save Does not save the new file if a file with the same name already exists Add Date to Name Adds the current date to the name of the new file File Destination Select the desired file repository from the list of file repositories set in Properties gt Network Scanning gt File Repository Setup 161 7 CentreWare Internet Services Feature Description File continued Edit continued Protocol Displays the filing protocol set in Properties gt Network Scanning gt File Repository Setup Host Name IP Address amp Port Displays the host name IP address and port number of the filing protocol set in Properties gt Network Scanning gt File Repository Setup Document Path Displays the path to the file repository set in Properties gt Network Scanning gt File Repository Setup Login Name Displays the login name set in Properties gt Network Scanning gt File Repository Setup Document Field Name Displays the meta data attributes for the job template Management Field Label This setting is optional Fields Default Value Optional Add Displays the Add Document Management Field page where you can add field names labels and default values and specify whether the fields are editable or not Edit Select an existing field and click this button to make
538. s page 57 Fax Receiving Mode page 58 49 5 Machine Status 1 Press the lt Machine Status gt Machine Y Faults A Supplies y Biling i Tools Information ormation button on the control panel _ EERST i General Information Paper Tray Status Orrline 2 Select the Machine Information m B liad m ta b i Overwrite Hard Disk Fax Receiving Mode m Standby ia DB Auto Receive 3 Select the required option General Information This feature allows you to view user support information the machine s serial number and configuration and the software versions of the machine components 7 Select General Information on pemeamemam Ghose the Mach i ne Inform ation For enquiry on maintenance and operation screen http www xeroxcom Machine Configuration Machine Serial Number m 2 Select the required option sic oe Version For enquiry on maintenance and operation Displays the contact for technical support Machine Serial Number Displays the serial number of the machine IP Address Displays the IP address of the machine Machine Configuration Displays the Machine Configuration screen where you can view the status of the machine components The screen displays the hardware components and the options installed on the machine Software Version Displays the Software Version screen where you can identify the software versions of the machine components Pap
539. s 124 328 A punch unit was not found Specify a punch unit following the screen instructions 124 701 Due to a malfunction in the specified tray left side tray the output destination was changed to the center tray Contact the Xerox Welcome Center The other trays are available 124 702 Due to a malfunction in the specified tray finisher tray the output destination was changed to the center tray Contact the Xerox Welcome Center The other trays are available 124 705 The punch setting was cancelled Check the punch position and try again 418 Fault Codes Code Description and Remedy 124 706 The folding setting was cancelled Check the folding setting and try again 124 708 The output destination was changed to the center tray Check if the specified size paper is loaded in a paper tray 124 709 The document exceeded the maximum number of pages that can be stapled Reduce the number of pages or cancel the stapling setting then try printing again 133 210 133 211 133 212 133 213 133 214 133 215 133 216 133 217 133 218 133 219 133 220 133 221 133 222 133 223 133 224 A fax error occurred Switch off the machine and then switch it on again Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 133 226 The specified country code is not supported Contact the Xerox Welcome Center 133 280 133 281 133 282 133 283 A fax error occurred Switch of
540. s Auditron Reports cceeeseeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeees 56 Copy Reports cececeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeseees 53 Fax Reports iore a a aiaa 55 Job Counter Report cccceceeeeeeeeeeee 56 Job Counter Reports ceceeeeetteeeee 56 Job Status Activity Report eee 53 Printer Reports cc ceeccceeeeeeeeessesseeneneees 54 Scan Reports e eecceeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 54 Print Reports Machine Status 0 0000 52 Print Reports Button cccceceeeeeteeeseseeteeeees 72 Print Service Settings oooononccccnonnccccnnnncnccccnnn 100 Allocate Memory cooccccccccoccccccnononcnccnnnancncninnn 101 Other Settings oooonnnnccnnnnnncocinnnnccccnncnnnannno 103 Print User ID nacio ee ee 104 printer environment settings cece 225 Printer Lockout Duration e seeeeeeeeeeees 67 Printer Report PCL Settings List orincccrniiurii iiia 54 Printer Reports ceceecceceeeeeeeeteeesenenaeeees 54 Configuration Report ceeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 54 EONtLISt aaa a ar a Aerie ar ite 54 POL Font Liste enaere a 54 PCL Macro List c cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeees 54 PDF Settings List 2 0 00 eeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 54 PostScript Font List eeeeeeeeees 54 PS Logical Printers List eeeeeeeeees 54 TIFF Settings List ee eeeeeeecteeeeeenees 54 TIFF JPEG Logical Printers List 54 printing reports
541. s Selecting Mirror Side 1 prints annotations in the position symmetrical to the print position on side 1 Annotations Comment Specifies whether to enable the Comment feature by default Annotations Apply Comment To Specifies the default pages a comment is to be printed on Select from First Page Only All Pages and All Pages Except First 86 System Settings Annotations Stored Comment Specifies the default text strings for Comment in the Annotations feature on the Output Format screen Annotations Comment Position Specifies the default for Comment gt Position in the Annotations feature on the Output Format screen Annotations Date Stamp Specifies whether to enable the Date Stamp feature by default Annotations Apply Date Stamp To Specifies the default pages a date is to be printed on Select from First Page Only All Pages and All Pages Except First Annotations Date Stamp Position Set the default value for Position displayed when Date is selected under Annotations on the Output Format tab Annotations Page Numbers Specifies whether to enable the Page Numbers feature by default Apply Page Numbers To Specifies the default pages that page numbers are to be printed on Select from All Pages and All Pages Except First Annotations Starting Number Specifies the default starting number to use when page numbers are printed on copies Annotati
542. s numeric or symbol buttons lights on the control panel or symbols on the power switch label For example e Press the lt Machine Status gt button to display the Machine Information screen e Press the lt C gt button on the control panel to clear the suspended job Italic Typeface Italic typeface is used to indicate references to other sections and chapters For example For more information refer to Loading Paper on page 17 e Job Status page 39 Warnings Warnings are statements that alert you to the possibility of personal harm For example Z WARNING e If you need to pull out a tray to remove paper jam contact your local Xerox representative Cautions Cautions are statements that suggest the possibility of mechanical damage as a result of an action For example Z CAUTION Always follow all warning instructions marked on or supplied with this product Notes Notes are statements that provide additional information For example NOTE If the document feeder is not installed this feature is not available 15 7 Before Using the Machine Related Information Sources The following sources of information are available for the machine User Guide This guide is intended for general users and describes how to use the features of the machine such as copy scan and fax System Administration Guide This guide is intended for the System Administrator an
543. s to available machine services Enabling Network Authentication To enable Network Authentication for use with this machine at your networked workstation perform the following steps 335 14 Authentication and Account Administration 7 Open your web browser and enter the TCP IP address of the machine in the Address or Location field Click Enter to access CentreWare Internet Services 2 Click the Properties tab 3 Expand the Security folder and then click Authentication Configuration On the page displayed select Login to Remote Accounts from the Login Type drop down list 4 Click Apply to reboot the machine 5 Expand the Accounting folder and then click Accounting Configuration On the page displayed select Network Accounting from the Accounting Mode drop down list 6 Click Apply to reboot the machine 7 Expand the Security folder and then click Authentication Configuration On the page displayed place a checkmark in the Enabled box for each service that you wish to restrict access to Do not place a checkmark in the Non account Print box if you wish to enable users without accounts to continue to print 8 From the Verify User Details drop down menu select either Yes or No keep logon records The Yes selection will verify user information When No keep logon records is selected a user ID and account ID must be entered at the machine but user information
544. s on page 127 The quickest and easiest although not the most reliable method to use to set up initial HTTP communication encryption is the generation of a self signed certificate as stated under Configuration of HTTPS SSL TLS Communication Encryption on page 298 To manage digital certificates stored in the machine click Machine Digital Certificate Management in the Security folder on the Properties page of CentreWare Internet Services Encryption of HTTP Communications from a Client to the Machine Server Certificate The SOAP port Internet service HTTP port IPP port and WebDAV port use the HTTP server of the machine The SSL TLS suite of protocols is used in the encryption of HTTP communications from a client to the machine A user of a client computer accesses the machine s HTTP server by typing https followed by the Internet address of the machine into the Address box of a web browser application The machine then offers the client a Digital Certificate which the client accepts after reviewing the validity of same Upon acceptance of the Digital Certificate a Public Key exchange takes place encryption algorithms are agreed upon between the two parties and the client uses the server s Public Key to communicate with the server using digitally signed and encrypted data Digital certificates imported from a Certificate Authority or self signed certificates created with CentreWare Internet Services can be u
545. s the copy operation when a different paper size is detected when making 2 sided copies from mixed sized originals Select Copy to new sheet to print to a new page Select Copy to Side 2 to copy onto the reverse side of the current page NOTE Some areas of images may be cropped if you select Copy to Side 2 88 System Settings Fine tune 100 Specifies the actual magnification ratio for making copies on the document glass when 100 is selected on the Reduce Enlarge screen Fine tune the value in the range of 98 0 to 102 0 Pseudo Photo Gradation Mode Specifies whether to perform gradation level correction for documents containing photographs Select from Error Diffusion and Dither Original Type See Through Paper Specifies whether to display the Text on See Through Paper option when Text is selected on the Original Type screen Annotations Edit Comment 1 to 8 Specifies whether to allow users to edit Comment 1 to Comment 8 in the Annotation settings Bates Stamp Edit Prefix 1 to 8 Specifies whether to allow users to edit Prefix 1 to Prefix 8 in the Annotation settings Maximum Number of Sets Allows you to specify the maximum number of allowed copy sets between 1 and 999 Users will not be able to specify the number of copy sets larger than the value set here Original Size Defaults This feature allows you to assign preset document size buttons These are displayed when you use the Original
546. s you to specify the print quantity 2 Sided Printing Allows you to select whether to print both sides of paper 196 Properties Feature Setting items Services Printing continued Language Emulation continued Collated Allows you to specify whether to collate the output Offset Stacking Allows you to select the offset method Staple Allows you to select the stapling method Image Enhancement Allows you to specify whether to enable or disable image enhancement Resolution Allows you to select output resolution Bypass Tray Wait User Allows you to specify whether to enable disable this feature when Tray 5 Bypass is selected PostScript Paper Supply Allows you to select how PostScript files created by UNIX applications are printed PCL Allows you to configure the settings when PCL is enabled PCL Font Pitch Allows you to specify the font pitch between 6 00 and 24 00 points in 0 01 point increments Font Size Allows you to specify the font size between 4 00 and 50 00 points in 0 25 point increments Font Name Allows you to select the required font from the list of fonts available e Symbol Set Allows you to select the desired symbol set from the list of symbol sets available e Lines Per Page Allows you to specify the page length printing area of one page Treat LF as CR LF and FF as CR FF Allows you
547. screen or CentreWare Internet Services 252 Microsoft Networking When using TCP IP Set the SMB port to Enabled and set the IP address using the touch screen or CentreWare Internet Services Computer Setup Install the print driver on the computer Test Print A print job should be submitted to make sure that the machine has been installed and configured correctly Network Communication Setup This procedure is used to set up the network communication parameters of the machine At the machine perform these steps NOTE Keep the SNMP port enabled while you use the machine on the TCP IP network NOTE Some of the configuration options for this protocol are only available from CentreWare Internet Services Refer to the CentreWare Internet Services on page 147 Initially boot the SMB port 71 Connect the machine to the network 2 Press the lt Log In Out gt button on the control panel and then type the System Administrator login ID to enter the System Administration mode NOTE The passcode may also be required depending on the machine configuration 3 Press the lt Machine Status gt button on the control panel and then select the Tools tab on the screen Select System Settings in the menu at the left side of the screen Select Connectivity amp Network Setup in the Group menu Select Port Settings in the Features menu Select SMB and then Change Settings Select Port Status an
548. sed as SSL TLS certificates on the machine s HTTP server 297 13 Security Encryption Digital Signature Encryption of HTTP Communications from the Machine to a Remote Server Client Certificate The SSL TLS suite of protocols is used to encrypt HTTP communications with a remote server No client certificate is typically required for this activity However if a remote server is set to require an SSL client certificate an SSL TLS client certificate must be registered on the machine Digital certificates imported from a Certificate Authority can be used as SSL TLS certificates on the machine s HTTP server NOTE When Remote Server Certificate Validation is enabled under SSL TLS Settings in CentreWare Internet Services the root certificate of the remote server must be registered to the machine imported with Internet Services to verify the digital certificate E mail Encryption Digital Signature S MIME certificates imported from a Certificate Authority in PKCS7 format can be used on the machine s HTTP server for e mail encryption To import S MIME certificates use Machine Digital Certificate Management in the Security folder on the Properties page of CentreWare Internet Services Encryption Digital Signature of Scanned Files PDF XPS Documents IPsec While no digital signatures are required to encrypt PDF and XPS documents these documents can be signed with imported PKCS12 digital signatures
549. see the new group Creating a User Account and Setting Usage Limits NOTE At least one group account must be created before you create user accounts 1 On the Properties tab of Internet Services expand the Accounting folder and then the Xerox Standard Accounting folder Click Manage Accounting Click Add New User Enter an ID for the user The user ID can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters for example A10 User ID s must be unique NOTE Up to 9999 User ID s can be registered 5 6 7 Enter a user name for example Jane Smith The user name can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters User names must be unique Specify the usage limits for this account in the User Limits boxes The maximum value for each limit is 9999999 Click the Apply button when you have finished setting the usage limits Maximum Usage Limits and Resetting Individual Usage Limits The first time users log in to the device after they have reached their maximum usage limit a message displays on the user interface The message notifies the users that they have reached their limit for the feature The users will not be able to use the feature until their limit is reset 327 14 Authentication and Account Administration If a user performs a copy job at the machine and midway through the job the limit is exceeded the job will not continue If a user performs a scan job at the machine and midway through the job their
550. ser Accounts Accounting Create View User Accounts Authentication Custom Paper Name Color ccccccseeeeeeeees Custom Watermark oooooooccnnccnconoccnncconcnnncnnnnnnns Customer Replaceable Units ccocoo D Data Encryption Date Date Format medicina tds Daylight SAVINGS oooonoonccccnnnonccccnnnonnccccnnaanccncnnnn Default Language Default Print Paper Size Default User ID and Password CentreWare Internet Services c cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeteteeeeeeeeees Default Watermark cccccceeeeeeeeeeeenteaees Default Watermark Effect 0 eeeeeeeeeees Delay Start Specific Time Delayed Print Delete All Data 0 cceceeccecceececeeeeeeteeeeeseenees Delivery Confirmation Method Delivery Receipts Read Receipts Density entidad Destination IPv4 Address Destination IPv6 Address Device Access Device Certificate c cccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeetentees Device Certificate Client Device Certificate S MIME e Device Certificate Server eeeeeeeees DENGFOUP isis DHO P aeaea En n AEA EIE I TEN digital signature cece e cece eeeeeenteeeeeeeaes Digital Signature Outgoing E mail Direct Fax Display Consumables Screen seee Document Glass Maintaining Cleaning seese document jams documents storing and handling Documents Retrieved By Client Domain Filtering erinedes aaea Domain
551. settings the machine will reboot Enable the ports a Click the Properties tab b Click the Connectivity folder and then Port Settings c On the SNMP line place a check mark in the Enabled box d On the SMB line place a check mark in the Enabled box e On the FTP line place a check mark in the Enabled box f On the SOAP line place a check mark in the Enabled box g Click Apply Ensure that TCP IP is configured a Click the Properties tab b Click the Connectivity folder and then the Protocols folder c In the Protocols folder click TCP IP d In IP Mode ensure that TCP IP is configured 432 Xerox Extensible Interface Platform XEIP f Click Apply EIP applications can now register to the machine 433 16 Appendix 434 Index 17 Index Numerics 2 Pages Up On Receipt cooccoccccccccncnnccnoncnnccnncnnn 113 2 Sided COpying orae a E 85 2 Sided Printing eisio i ORRA 113 2 Sided RE POM ssa eceste shes liliana dani iaa 74 802 1x authentication ooooonnnnncnocccnccnncnnccnnnnnnns 330 A Access Control Authentication 140 Account Administration features and services eeseeeeeeeeees 320 Local ACCOUNTING coooccccccnnocccccnnnnonccinnnann cnn 320 management features and services 320 Network Accounting neeesser 320 YPES ia Sein E a ina 320 Xerox Standard Accounting oocccconcoccccccnnos 320 ACCOUNT eeri A
552. sheets Receive automatically Print z l Automatic No Incoming Receptions pages confidential Internet Fax receiving Printing confidential Yes Verified Printed pages sheets documents Forward Receiving relayed No Incoming Receptions pages Internet Internet Fax Internet Fax Fax documents Documents 7 Automatic fax No Incoming Sent faxes pages forwarding Internet Fax forwarded faxes transmissions 324 Overview of Account Administration 1 If Print Service on the Auditron Mode screen is set to Off in the System Administration mode no authentication is required to access mailboxes shared by the System Administrator and the machine will print the job as unauthenticated When using the Account Administration feature for fax jobs note the following Sending documents from different user accounts to the same destination will not be counted as combined sending e The communication rate is calculated using the machine s built in timer Accordingly the fees calculated may be slightly different from those calculated by the telephone company When you receive faxes divided into pages the machine counts the page numbers received instead of the page numbers printed e Fax jobs are not counted in the following cases When dialing a fax number using the numeric keypad on the control panel or the On hook feature When using a speed dial code in which the billing information is not re
553. sonal Shared ial Administrator Generally Shared X Shared by the System X Administrator Personal own Personal other Mailbox Authenticated Users Shared by Job Flow Generally the System Personal Personal Shared Adminis owner other trator Generally Shared X Shared by the System X Administrator Personal own Personal other X Mailbox System Administrator Generall Shared by the Job Flow y System Personal Shared ee Administrator Generally Shared O O O Shared by the System O O O Administrator Personal own O O O Personal other O O O O Relationship available X Relationship not available 319 14 Authentication and Account Administration Overview of Account Administration This section is an overview of the Account Administration feature used with the machine Types of Account Administration The Account Administration feature operates in conjunction with the Authentication feature when the authentication type is Login to Local Accounts and operates independently when the authentication type is No Login Required Login to Remote Accounts or Xerox Secure Access The machine supports the following three Account Administration types Local Accounting Account Administration is performed based on the user information registered on the machine using a variety of counters automatically created for each user Network Accounting You can perform Account Admi
554. specified expiration dates Number of Displays the number of documents stored in the Documents in this mailbox Mailbox Link Job Sheet Type Select the type of sheets to be displayed in the Job Flow Sheet Flow Sheet List page to thi aibes Sheet Order Select the display order of job flow sheets to be displayed in the Job Flow Sheet List page Display Job Flow Displays the Job Flow Sheet List page where you can Sheets List link job flow sheets to the mailbox and create edit or delete job flow sheets 168 Scan Mailbox Setup The following table shows the information fields on the Mailbox Setup page Mailbox Mailbox Number Displays the number of the selected mailbox Mailbox Name Allows you to enter the name of the mailbox Mailbox Passcode Allows you to enter the passcode to the mailbox The password can be up to 20 characters long The password is optional you can leave the text box blank Retype Passcode Re type the passcode for verification Check Mailbox Passcode Allows you to select whether and when the passcode for the mailbox is required Delete Documents after Print or Retrieve Allows you to set whether to automatically delete documents after they are printed or retrieved Delete Expired Documents Allows you to set whether to automatically delete documents when they reach the specified expiration dates Job Flow Sheets This pag
555. splayed as Ready Drum Cartridges Displays the status of the drum cartridge as OK Reorder Replace or Fault It also displays the remaining drum life in percentages NOTE If Replace is displayed replace the drum cartridge Staple Cartridge Displays the status of the staple cartridge as OK Reorder Replace or Fault NOTE If Replace is displayed replace the staple cartridge 155 7 CentreWare Internet Services Jobs The Jobs tab displays a list of active and completed jobs You can also delete jobs on this tab NOTE The details displayed may differ from those shown on the machine s touch screen Follow the steps below to select the features available on the Jobs tab 7 Click Jobs on the Header Panel of the home page 2 On the collapsible menu of the Menu Panel click Active Jobs to view the list of active jobs click Job History List and then Job History or Job History Group Parent Jobs to view the list of completed jobs or group parent jobs or click Error History to view the list of errors Active Jobs This page displays the list of active jobs being processed Job Name Displays the name of a job Owner Displays the name of the client user that has sent the job Status Displays the status of the job Type Displays the type of job Quantity Displays the number of sets that have been processed Job History List Job History This page displays a l
556. splays the SMTP Server page For details on the page refer to SMTP Server on page 191 e LDAP Directory Clicking the Configure button displays the LDAP Server page For details on the page refer to LDAP Server on page 191 174 Properties Feature Setting items Configuration Overview Services continued LDAP User Mappings Clicking the Configure button displays the LDAP User Mappings page For details on the page refer to LDAP User Mappings on page 192 LDAP Authentication Clicking the Configure button displays the LDAP Authentication page For details on the page refer to LDAP Authentication on page 192 E mail Settings Clicking the Configure button displays the E mail page For details on the page refer to E mail on page 200 Network Scanning e File Repository Setup Clicking the Configure button displays the File Repository Setup page For details on the page refer to File Repository Setup on page 204 e General Settings Clicking the Configure button displays the General page For details on the page refer to General on page 204 Fax Settings e Fax Settings Clicking the Configure button displays the Fax Settings page For details on the page refer to Fax Settings on page 202 e Fax Repository Setup Clicking the Configure button displays the Fax Repository Setup page For details on the page refer to Fax Repository Setu
557. st Before starting these procedures make sure that the following items are available or have been performed Item By An existing operational network utilizing TCP IP is required These Customer procedures are not designed to install a network Obtain and record the following information Customer e IP address e Gateway address e Subnet mask for IPv4 Prefix for IPv6 e Host name Test the machine to make sure that it is fully installed and functioning Customer correctly Install the print driver Customer 255 8 Printer Environment Settings If problems are encountered during machine setup refer to Problem Solving on page 347 TCP IP LPD or Port9100 Environments System configuration As the machine supports the LPD and Port9100 protocol you can print directly from a Windows computer When printing from Windows NT4 0 Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Server 2003 Windows Vista computers through the LPD port use the OS standard LPR port When printing through Port9100 change the necessary settings on the computers The transport protocol for LPD and Port9100 can be TCP IP You will also need to set up the IP address on the machine and the Windows computers NOTE Windows NT 4 0 does not support printing through Port9100 Target computers The following computers support printing through LPD or Port9100 Connection OS Protocol LPD port Windows NT 4 0 TCP IP
558. stalled also clean the film and document feeder glass Feeder film 7 Wipe the document cover and document glass with a soft cloth moistened with water or Xerox approved cleaner to remove any marks and then wipe with a soft dry cloth 2 Ifthe document feeder is Y installed wipe the document feeder glass and the film on the 5 cover with a soft cloth moistened with water or Xerox approved cleaner to remove any marks and then wipe with a soft dry cloth Document cover Document feeder glass Document glass Document Feeder Rollers If the machine is installed with a document feeder clean the feeder rollers monthly to prevent streaks appearing on the output and to prevent document feeder paper jams 7 Open the document feeder cover 2 Wipe the document feeder rollers while turning them with a soft cloth moistened with water to remove any dirt gt Document feeder rollers 3 Close the cover Replacing the Drum Cartridge The drum cartridge is a customer replaceable unit The machine will display a warning message before the drum reaches the end of its life When the message is displayed order a replacement cartridge to ensure continuous operation CAUTION Keep the drum and toner cartridges out of the reach of children If a child accidentally swallows toner spit it out rinse mouth with water drink water and consult a physician immediately
559. t Installation Procedure There are three stages Network Communication Setup The machine needs to be set up for IPP Computer Setup The computer needs to be configured to submit print data to the machine Test Print A print job should be submitted to make sure that the machine has been installed and configured correctly Network Communication Setup This section describes how to set up the network communication parameters for the machine At the machine perform these steps NOTE Keep the SNMP port enabled while you use the machine on the TCP IP network NOTE Some of the configuration options for this protocol are only available from CentreWare Internet Services Refer to CentreWare Internet Services on page 147 Initially enable the IPP port 71 Connect the machine to the network 2 Press the lt Log In Out gt button on the control panel and then type the System Administrator login ID to enter the System Administration mode NOTE The passcode may also be required depending on the machine configuration 3 Press the lt Machine Status gt button on the control panel and then select the Tools tab on the screen 4 Select System Settings in the menu at the left side of the screen 5 Select Connectivity amp Network Setup in the Group menu 263 8 Printer Environment Settings 6 Select Port Settings in the Features menu 7 Select IPP and then Change Settings 8 Select Port
560. t IPv4 Gateway Address and then Change Settings 70 Using the same method as in step 6 enter a gateway address NOTE If you do not wish to set the gateway address leave this field blank 11 Select IPv4 IP Filter and then Change Settings 12 Select Enabled to filter access to the machine NOTE If you do not wish to use the IP filter feature select Disabled NOTE Use CentreWare Internet Services to register the IP addresses which are not allowed to access the machine Refer to CentreWare Internet Services on page 147 73 When you have finished establishing TCP IP select Close on the Protocol Settings screen When IPv6 Mode or Dual Stack is selected in step 2 3 Set IPv6 Address Manual Configuration NOTE Select Enabled when the machine is connected to a network on which IPv6 stateless address autoconfiguration is disabled or when you want to set a static IPv6 address If you selected Enabled in step 3 proceed to step 4 Otherwise proceed to step 10 4 Select Manually Configured IPv6 Address and then Change Settings 5 Use the keypad on the screen to enter an IP address for the machine in the format XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX Select Save 6 Select Manually Configured IPv6 Prefix and then Change Settings 7 Enter an IP address prefix and then select Save 8 Select Manually Configured IPv6 Gateway and then Change Settings 9 Using the same met
561. t Port Settings in the Features menu Select Receive E mail and then Change Settings Select Port Status and then Change Settings Select Enabled and then Save 10 On the Port Settings screen select Send E mail and then Change Settings 11 Select Port Status and then Change Settings 12 Select Enabled and then Save 6S amp MNA HA Next establish TCP IP 7 Select Connectivity amp Network Setup in the Group menu and then select Protocol Settings in the Features menu 2 Under TCP IP IP Mode select IPv4 Mode IPv6 Mode or Dual Stack When IPv4 Mode or Dual Stack is selected in step 2 3 Select IP Address Resolution and then Change Settings 4 Select a method for establishing an IP address from DHCP BOOTP RARP DHCP Autonet and STATIC and then select Save NOTE Use the DHCP server together with the Windows Internet Name Server WINS server If you selected STATIC in step 4 then proceed to step 5 to configure the protocol settings Otherwise proceed to step 11 5 Select IPv4 IP Address and then Change Settings 6 Use the keypad on the screen to enter an IP address for the machine in the format XXX XXX XXX XXX When you have finished entering all values select Save 289 11 Internet Fax 7 Select IPv4 Subnet Mask and then Change Settings 8 Using the same method as in step 6 enter a subnet mask 9 Selec
562. t Codes Code Description and Remedy 034 511 An error occurred during relay broadcasting Check that the relay station is correctly registered with the speed dial code Also check the destination numbers registered at the relay station 034 512 An endless loop was detected in the remote relay broadcasting Check that the relay station is correctly registered with the speed dial code Also check the destination numbers registered at the relay station 034 513 Received an invalid command This is a Xerox remote maintenance system operational error No user action is required 034 514 Received an unsupported request This is a Xerox remote maintenance system operational error No user action is required 034 515 There is a problem on the remote machine Check the remote machine status 034 519 The number of broadcasting destinations exceeded the limit value Wait until the active and pending jobs are completed or reduce the number of destinations and then try again 034 520 The number of active and pending jobs exceeded the limit value Wait until the jobs are completed and then try again 034 521 An internal error occurred Switch off the machine and then switch it on again Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 034 522 There is no telephone line available for manual fax transmission Wait until the job in progress is completed and try again 034 5
563. t Kit 100 Life Remaining OK 3 Staple Cartridge Ri SMart Kit OK 4 Hole Punch Waste Container R4 SMart Kit OK Consumables 58 Billing Information Billing Information This tab allows you to view the billing meter information For more information refer to the following Billing Information page 59 User Account Billing Information page 59 1 Press the lt Machine Status gt Machine Y Faults V Supplies A Biling Ye Information information button on the control panel a a User Account LJ Billing Information m Billing Information 2 Select the Billing Information tab 3 Select the required option Billing Information This feature allows you to view the total number of prints made on the machine You can also view the machine s serial number 7 Select Billing Information on Biling Information Coso the Billin Inform ation screen Machine Serial Number Current Meter Reading 9 XXXXXXXX Total Impressions 1 23456 7 Machine Serial Number Displays the serial number of the machine Current Meter Reading Total Impressions Displays the number of total copies and prints User Account Billing Information This feature displays the billing information of the currently logged in user NOTE This feature is available only when Accounting gt Accounting Type is set to Local Accounting and the corresponding Auditron Mode is enabled
564. t after the machine sends scanned data using the Server Fax service e No Print Does not print a report regardless of whether data transmission is successfully completed or not Print Report Automatically prints a transmission report for a successful transmission and a Transmission Report Job Undelivered for a transmission failure e Print when delivery fails Prints a Transmission Report Job Undelivered for a transmission failure NOTE When IPv4 IP Address is not set under Protocol Settings in Connectivity amp Network Setup no destination will be written in reports 2 Sided Report Specifies whether a report is to be automatically output to both sides of paper or one side only Recipient on Activity Report Specifies the section of the destination s information to be printed on an Activity Report Select First 40 characters or Last 40 characters Job Flow Error Report Specifies whether to automatically print a Job Flow Error Report Maintenance This feature allows you to initialize the hard disk on the machine to delete all document data stored in the machine and to enter software options 7 Select Maintenance in the amare Featu res menu H vritasizo Hard Disk 2 Change the required settings petete an vata E sortware options 3 Select Close E Fnisner Adjustment Initialize Hard Disk This feature allows you to initialize the hard disk on the machine Aft
565. t and end dates of the Daylight Savings time to automatically adjust the current time when the Daylight Savings time starts and ends NTP Time Synchronization Specifies the parameters used to synchronize the time of the machine with that of the specified time server using the Network Time Protocol NTP NOTE If the time server connection fails the machine maintains its own time without synchronization Connection to Time Server Specifies whether to enable the connection to a time server e Connection Interval Specifies the time span between connections to the specified server in the range from 1 to 500 hours e Time Server Address Specifies the IP address of the time server using the numeric keypad on the control panel Auto Clear Specifies whether to automatically display the default screen if you do not perform any operation within the selected period of time Select On and then select the time period in the range from 30 to 240 seconds 66 System Settings Auto Job Release Specifies whether to automatically release the current job to allow execution of the next job if a problem such as a paper jam interrupts the current copy or scan job and is not resolved within the selected period of time Select On and then select the time period in the range from 4 to 99 minutes Auto Print Specifies whether to automatically print jobs if you do not perform any operation within the selected period of time Select
566. t approval from the U S Government or its agency Products Subject To Supplementary Export Regulations An export of this product is strictly limited in accordance with Laws concerning Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade of Japan and or the export control regulations of the United States You must obtain if you know the product is to be used or was used for development manufacturing or use of any mass destructive weapons including nuclear weapon chemical weapon or biological weapon because of a dealing document such as legal contract or information from the importer any appropriate export license from the Japanese Government or its agency and or re export approval from the U S Government or its agency Table of Contents 1 Before Using the Machine ccceeecssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeensenseees 13 Xerox Welcome Candelas iria 13 Serial Number ca e 13 Language Displayed on the Touch Screen nncccccccccnnccccoconaccnnnnnnnnnnnannnns 14 CONVENUONS e a e r A E a eA Eie 14 Related Information Sources ooocooocccccccncccconononnncnnncccnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnno 16 Paper and Other Media wiscsicisciessivectseitscccesssesnssersssivenivensdbisdantnensteesasiess 17 Loading Paper ii 17 Preparing Paper for Loading msi Neck ideeiwhandes 17 Trays 1 amp 2 Two Tray Module Trays 3 amp 4 oooooonoooncccnnnnnnnccconcccccn ns 17 High Capacity Tandem Tray Trays 38 4 co0oocccccnnnnncocicccccccncccnnnnnnns 18 Bypass Tray Tr
567. t the left side of the screen b Select Connectivity amp Network Setup in the Group menu c Select Port Settings in the Features menu d Select SOAP and then select Change Settings e Select Port Status and then select Change Settings f Select Enabled and then select Save g Select Close to display the Port Settings screen Enable the SNMP port a Select SNMP and then select Change Settings b Select Port Status and then select Change Settings c Select Enabled and then select Save d Select Close to display the Port Settings screen e Enable the Internet Service HTTP port using the same procedure as stated above f Select Close repeatedly until the Tools screen is displayed Set an IP address a Select Protocol Settings in the Features menu b Select TCP IP IP Mode and then select an IP operation mode c According to the selected mode configure the required protocol settings NOTE For details on the protocol settings refer to Protocol Settings on page 92 d Select Close until the Tools screen is displayed 5 Press the lt Log In Out gt button on the control panel NOTE If you changed any settings the machine will reboot to register and enable the new settings After the machine is rebooted print a Configuration Report to confirm that the ports are enabled and TCP IP is correctly configured 6 Configure the SNMP port Start the transpo
568. tact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 047 216 An error occurred in the Finisher Switch off the machine and then switch it on again Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 416 Fault Codes Code Description and Remedy 047 217 A communication error occurred between the main unit and the High Capacity Feeder Switch off the machine and then switch it on again Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 047 218 A communication error occurred between the main unit and a tray module Switch off the machine and then switch it on again Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 062 210 The document feeder malfunctioned Contact the Xerox Welcome Center 062 211 An error occurred in the document feeder Contact the Xerox Welcome Center 062 277 A communication error occurred between the scanner and the feeder Contact the Xerox Welcome Center 062 394 Data could not be written in memory space Switch off the machine and then switch it on again 062 790 The scanned document is copy prohibited Refer to Illegal Copies in the Before Using the Machine chapter in the User Guide to verify the types of documents that can be copied 071 210 An error occurred when Tray 1 was used Switch off the machine and then 071 211 switch it on again Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 0
569. taple rising up with center pressed in 354 Stapler Faults Staple Jams in the Integrated Office Finisher Optional The following describes how to clear staple jams when the Integrated Office Finisher optional is installed 7 Make sure that the machine has stopped and then open the front cover on the Integrated Office Finisher 2 Take the staple cartridge out of the finisher 3 After removing the staple cartridge check the inside of the Integrated Office Finisher for any remaining staples 4 Pull up the front lever on the staple cartridge 5 Remove the entire staple sheet including the jammed staple NOTE Remove the entire staple sheet Do not remove the jammed staple only 355 15 Problem Solving 6 Pull down the front lever on the staple cartridge until it clicks into place 7 Return the staple cartridge to its original position 8 Close the front cover of the Integrated Office Finisher If the staples cannot be removed after carrying out the above procedures contact your Xerox Welcome Center Staple Jams in the Office Finisher LX Optional The following describes how to clear staple jams when the Office Finisher LX optional is installed 7 Make sure that the machine has stopped and then open the front cover on
570. ted user ID in the list The following options are available 45 4 Job Status e Select All Selects all documents in the list e Delete Deletes a document selected in the list Print Prints a document selected in the list After printing the document will be deleted Delayed Print This feature allows you to store documents on the machine for printing at a later time You can check print or delete the stored documents before the specified print time 7 Select Delayed Print on the Delayed Print Refresh Secu re Print Jobs amp More Document Name Print Time Pages 91 Documents 4 Document 115 PM screen 2 Document2 216 PM 100 ocumen elete 2 Select a document to print or ee is delete 5 Documents 1146 PM 5 D Print NOTE Use the scroll buttons to switch between screens 3 Select the required option Refresh Refreshes the displayed information Delete Deletes a document selected in the list Print Prints a document selected in the list Public Mailbox This feature allows you to check print and delete documents stored in the public mailbox polling box on the machine for polling For more information refer to the Fax chapter in the User Guide 1 Select Public Mailbox on the Public Mailbox Refresh Secu re Pri nt J obs amp More Document Type Stored Date Pages _ 5 Document s 1 00010 Store for Polling 3 2 2001 10 20 AM 655
571. teeeeeneees 45 Secure Print eeun e oaar aetas 44 Undelivered Faxes coooococccccccccccccccnnonconcononnnnns 47 Stored Programming Setup o e 124 Stored Programming Tone eeen 68 storing and handling paper nnccccicnnnnnicccnnnncccccnns 23 Substitute Tray sessies aa 103 SUNOS A ae See ai 237 Supplies Machine Status eeeeeeeeees 58 supplies ordering 2 2 0 cecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeees 29 Support CentreWare Internet Services 224 supported paper sizes and types ceeee 23 System Administrator Settings cee 138 System Administrator s Login ID System Administrator Settings 139 System Administrator s Meter Copy Jobs System Administrator Settings 136 System Administrator s Passcode System Administrator Settings 139 System Administrators ooooonnncccnnnnnococinnninnncnnnns 307 System Settings 0 ee eeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 60 T Tandem Tray Module TTM nccc 18 TCP IP problem solving oo eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeettteeeeeees 371 TCP IP IP Mode cccccceceeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeees 92 TCP IP LPD or Port9100 0 eee 255 Computer Setup cooooocccccccccnccncnncnnoncnnccnnnnnnns 258 Information Checklist oooooooncnnnnniinnn 255 Network Communication Setup 257 TCP IP LPD or Port9100 Environments 256 Test Print ascii lletra 259 TCP IP UNIX ui hini eade 23
572. tempt has been made to delete the print job from the Printer menu in the printer window Delete the print job from the Document menu in the printer window 363 15 Problem Solving Restrictions Cause Confirmation Method Action The document owner is invalid Check whether the owner of the selected document matches the Windows log in name Use the owner name of the document to log in to Windows and then delete the document Service Pack 4 0 or later is not installed in the system In Windows NT 4 0 Check the Service Pack version displayed when you start Windows NT 4 0 Install Service Pack 4 0 or later Other Problem Action Job history displays a message that the document name is undefined instead of the correct job name Change the Receiving Buffer SMB Spool setting from Memory to Hard Disk This section explains the restrictions that apply while using SMB Machine settings e The IP address is a unique address administered system wide Consult with the system administrator when setting the necessary parameters The subnet mask and gateway settings may also be required depending on the networking environment Consult with the system administrator when setting the necessary parameters When a port is enabled and there is insufficient memory the port may be disabled automatically In this case disable all unused por
573. tent blocking e Scheme restrictions for example HTTP disable Transfer data size restrictions e Used method restrictions for example POST disable e HTTP header restrictions for example specific browsers Time restrictions for example time limited access A certificate is not registered for using the Flow service The Flow service cannot be used without certificate authentication Obtain a certificate for the required machine and register the certificate on the machine When you cannot connect to a web server Problem Action The settings are not for using the proxy server In a proxy environment the web server cannot be connected without the proxy server settings Enter the settings for using the proxy server The settings are for using a proxy server in a non proxy environment For environments where connecting via a proxy is not required such as connecting to an intranet the settings should not be set for using a proxy server The proxy server address is not set correctly When setting up a proxy server the web server cannot be connected if the proxy server address is not set correctly Enter the correct proxy server address The user name and or password are entered incorrectly when proxy server authentication is set Register the user name and password on the machine to grant connection access to the proxy server This section explains the restric
574. ternet addresses beginning with https in web browser applications Configuring Certificates with CentreWare Internet Services Configuration on the Machine Two methods are available to configure certificates with CentreWare Internet Services creating a self signed certificate for SSL server and importing a signed certificate from a Certificate Authority This section describes how to create a self signed certificate for SSL server NOTE When SSL communication is performed using a self signed certificate created on the machine or using a certificate with which the character code is indicated by UTF 8 the following occur If Internet Explorer is used with Windows 98SE or earlier the issuer issuing place of the certificate will not be displayed correctly SSL connection will not be made if Internet Explorer is used with Mac OS X 10 2 or later This is because the operating system cannot recognize the character code UTF 8 of the certificate Use Netscape 7 in the above mentioned OS environments For information on importing certificates with CentreWare Internet Services refer to Properties in the CentreWare Internet Services chapter on page 173 NOTE When a certificate is to be imported if the same certificate has been already registered in Local Device or Others the certificate cannot be imported Delete the registered certificate before importing 7 Start a web browser 2 Enter the machine s Internet
575. the Fax chapter in the User Guide 48 5 Machine Status This chapter describes how to check the machine status billing meter and status of consumables It also describes how to print various reports lists and how to access the System Administration mode For information on each tab refer to the following Machine Information page 49 Faults page 58 Supplies page 58 Billing Information page 59 Tools page 60 1 Press the lt Machine Status gt e X button on the control panel VA O O S O NOTE Press the lt Features gt or lt All O OOO o gt Services gt button at any time to exit 35 OOO o OOO ke a OQO No Sos CoD lt Machine Status gt button 2 Select the requi red option Machine Faults Supplies Billing Tools Information Information Print Mode D General Information m Paper Tray Status D orie Overwrite Hard Disk Fax Receiving Mode Standby Print DB Auto Receive Reports Machine Information This section describes how to view general information about the machine the status of paper trays and the hard disk and how to change the print mode or fax receiving mode For more information on the features available refer to the following General Information page 50 Paper Tray Status page 50 Print Mode page 51 Overwrite Hard Disk page 52 Print Reports page 52 Automatically Printed Reports List
576. the Office Finisher LX 2 Hold the staple cartridge by Lever R1 and slide the cartridge rightward 3 Hold the staple cartridge by the amp orange lever and lift up to remove the cartridge Check the inside of the Office Finisher LX for any remaining staples 356 Stapler Faults 4 Pull up the front lever on the staple cartridge 5 Remove the entire staple sheet including the jammed staple NOTE Remove the entire staple sheet Do not remove the jammed staple only 6 Pull down the front lever on the staple cartridge until it clicks into place 7 Hold the staple cartridge by the orange lever and return the cartridge to its original position 8 Close the front cover of the Office Finisher LX If the staples cannot be removed after carrying out the above procedures contact your Xerox Welcome Center 357 15 Problem Solving Common Problems If you are experiencing difficulties using the machine check the suggestions in the following tables for advice If this does not remedy the problem refer to Fault Clearance Procedure on page 341 Symptom Recommendation The machine will not power on Check the power cord Check that the power switch is in the ON position Check that the RESET button on the back of the machine is not in the tripped popped up position Push the button to reset Check t
577. the command from the specified printer e Deletes all the print data from the specified printer u user name Deletes all the print data belonging to the specified user from the specified printer e job number This option specifies the job number of the print data to be deleted These numbers can be checked by issuing an Ipstat command This option is only valid in the spool mode NOTE Print data which consists of multiple files sent in one print instruction cannot be deleted file by file All the files will be deleted together NOTE This command is invalid if no options are specified or if there is no print data which matches the option NOTE You can only delete print data from the same workstation used to send the print data You cannot delete print data sent by other workstations NOTE When a command to delete print data is received the file will be deleted even if it is in the process of being printed Any unprinted data will be cancelled after the file has been deleted Example To delete the print data from printer fxPS for job number 27 enter the following command Scancel xPS 27 To delete all the print data from printer fxPS enter the following command Scancel xPS e This section describes printing from a workstation running SunOS See the manuals supplied with the workstation for full details Print Ipr The lpr command is used to print Command format usr ucb lpr P printer name number
578. the default for Reduce Enlarge is set to Auto Auto Paper Select cannot be selected for Paper Supply Reduce Enlarge Specifies the default for the Reduce Enlarge feature on the Copy screen NOTE If the default for Paper Supply is set to Auto Paper Select Auto cannot be selected for Reduce Enlarge The preset options of the Reduce Enlarge feature can be changed For more information refer to Reduce Enlarge Presets on page 90 Original Type Specifies the default for the Original Type feature on the Image Quality screen Lighten Darken Specifies the default for the Lighten Darken feature on the Image Quality screen Sharpness Specifies the default for the Sharpness feature on the Image Quality screen Background Suppression Specifies the default for the Background Suppression feature on the Image Quality screen 2 Sided Copying Specifies the default for the 2 Sided Copying feature on the Copy screen Mixed Sized Originals Specifies whether to enable Mixed Sized Originals on the Layout Adjustment screen by default Edge Erase Top Bottom Edges Specifies the defaults for top and bottom margins of the Edge Erase feature on the Layout Adjustment screen Setthe margins within the range of 0 50 mm 0 2 0 inches using the scroll buttons or the numeric keypad on the control panel 85 6 Setups Edge Erase Left amp Right Edges Specifies the defaults for left
579. the jammed paper Gently remove the paper taking care not to tear it If paper is torn while it is being removed from the machine remove all the torn pieces making sure that none remain inside If a paper jam message is displayed again paper is probably jammed at another location Clear this by following the message on the display When you have finished clearing a paper jam printing automatically resumes from the point before the paper jam occurred NWARNING If you need to pull out a tray to remove paper jam contact your local Xerox representative CAUTION Do not attempt to remove a paper jammed deeply inside the product particularly a paper wrapped around a fuser or a heat roller Switch off the product promptly and contact your local Xerox representative This section describes how to clear paper jams in the following locations Document Feeder Cover aa Cover E es Y i Duplex Modul Y YI uplex Module X Cover D O oo Tray 1 or Cover A Be Envelope Tray Tray 5 eee BOSA A Bypass lt q E o 2 Cover B gt __Tray3 O _ 7 Tray 4 Cover C Two Tray 9 Module Cl 342 Paper Jams Tray 6 High Capacity K Feeder Top Cover AN Tray 6 High Capacity Feeder Front Cover Office Finisher LX Top Cover Office Finisher LX Transport Cover F Tray 3 Tray 4 High Capacity Tandem Tray y 343 15 Proble
580. the message has been displayed for a specified period If you select Cancel Job the data will be discarded If you select Run Job the data read up to that point will be processed Maximum Stored Pages Specifies the maximum number of pages to be stored in memory through scanning Select a number in the range from 1 to 999 TIFF Format Specifies the type of the TIFF format to be used when TIFF is selected for saving scanned data Image Transfer Screen Specifies whether to display a confirmation message when scanning is finished Select from Disabled Display Message Only and Display Message and Screen 108 System Settings Fax Service Settings This section describes the features that allow you to change the default settings for the fax mode For more information refer to the following Screen Defaults page 109 Fax Defaults page 109 Fax Control page 111 Fax Received Options page 114 Reduce Enlarge Presets page 114 Original Size Defaults page 115 Local Terminal Information page 115 Internet Fax Control page 116 1 Select System Settings and Machina Faults Y Supplies y Biling i Tools then select Fax Service E Features Settings in the Group menu sees Defaults ti Fax Defaults Authentication ngs Fax Control Security Settings Screen Defaults This feature allows you to define the initial settings for the fax feature scre
581. they wish to log into 5 When the user is logged in the selected service screen will be displayed The user can now use that service with usage tracked by XSA Resetting Usage Data At Your Computer 7 Open your web browser and enter the TCP IP address of the machine in the Address or Location field Press lt Enter gt 2 Click the Properties tab 3 Expand the Accounting folder and then the Xerox Standard Accounting folder 4 Click Report and Reset 328 Xerox Standard Accounting 5 6 To reset all usage data to zero click the Reset Usage Data button Click OK to confirm NOTE Do not click the Reset to Default button unless you intend to delete all users accounts and usage data from your machine Printing a Usage Report At Your Computer 1 MAA wN Open your web browser and enter the TCP IP address of the machine in the Address or Location field Press lt Enter gt Click the Properties tab Expand the Accounting folder and then the Xerox Standard Accounting folder Click Report and Reset Click the Generate Report button Follow any additional displayed prompts to save the XSA Report csv comma separated value file to your computer Enabling XSA in your Print Drivers Refer to the driver Help for the steps to follow to enable XSA in your print drivers Backing Up XSA data and settings and Cloning to another device The Cloning feature enables you to
582. till use them but are not allowed to change copy them If you release the link the job flow sheet will no longer be displayed and will be disabled When the Authentication Feature is Not Enabled The following table shows the relationship with the mailboxes for each user type when the Authentication feature is not enabled Mailbox General Users System Administrator General Shared by the Generall Shared by the Job Flow y System Personal y System Personal Shared ae Shared ae Administrator Administrator Mailbox O X X O O O Generally O X X O O O Shared Shared by the O X X O O O System Administrator Personal X X X O O O O Relationship available X Relationship not available 318 Authentication for Job Flow Sheets and Mailboxes When the Authentication Feature is Enabled The following table shows the relationship with the mailboxes for each user type when the Authentication feature is enabled When Login to Local Accounts is selected or when a user is authenticated as a user other than a guest user in Login to Remote Accounts NOTE If authenticated as a guest user in Remote Authentication you are treated as an unauthenticated user general user and cannot operate job flow sheets or mailboxes Mailbox Unauthenticated Users General Users Generall Shared by the Job Flow y System Per
583. time If you enter 01 Address Numbers from 010 to 019 are specified If you enter all the Address Numbers are specified NOTE To delete a registered Address Number in a group enter the Address Number and then select Delete from this group NOTE If a recipient s name and number in the Address Book is modified after assignment to a new job flow those changes are not reflected in the job flow which can result in documents being sent to the previous destination The job flow must also be updated in order to send documents to the correct destination Add Fax Comment This feature allows you to register a comment to be used when attaching a cover note to a fax You can register up to 50 comments each comment can include up to 18 alphanumeric characters NOTE This feature is not displayed when the Server Fax service is enabled 7 Select Add Fax Comment in A the Group menu Comment 1 Report for Month a 2 Change the required settings EI f i 4 Not in Use 3 Select Close 5 Not in Use y Paper Tray Attributes This is the same as Paper Tray Attributes under System Settings gt Common Service Settings gt Paper Tray Settings For details of the settings refer to Paper Tray Settings on page 70 For information on how to display or hide Paper Tray Attributes in the Setup menu refer to Paper Tray Attributes on Setup Screen on page 70 Accountin
584. tion Select automatic detection of the paper size or specify a fixed size Select a paper type from the list of preset types NOTE The machine also displays a screen for changing confirming the following settings when a paper tray is pulled out and then closed e Paper Size Specifies automatic detection ofthe paper size for Tray 1 to Tray 4 and Tray 6 using the tray guide levers If the guide levers in a paper tray are not in the correct position for the size of paper loaded in the tray a size error will occur This setting is not available for Tray 5 Bypass NOTE When loading trays with postcards contact the Xerox Welcome Center to have the tray settings changed specially for the use of postcards Custom Size Displays the Custom Size screen When you load non standard size paper in Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 or Tray 4 specify the paper width X and the paper height Y for that tray NOTE Tray 6 does not support the Custom Size setting Auto Detect Enables the Auto Detect feature e Paper Type Color Specifies the paper type and color for each paper tray NOTE When the Envelope Tray is installed place a check mark in the Envelope Feeder check box on the Tray 1 screen Paper size type and color options for the Envelope Tray will then be selectable under Paper Size and Paper Type Paper Tray Attributes on Setup Screen Specifies whether to display the paper tray attributes on the Setup menu 70
585. tion B4 or smaller or Punch Position B4 or larger and then select Change Settings N On the screen displayed select Sample Printout and then select the tray to output a sample printout for Press the lt Start gt button Enter the value of the current punch position into Value A Before Adjustment Enter the desired punch position into Desired Value A Select Adjust to apply the setting SAA Select Sample Printout and then select the tray again to output a sample printout Check with the sample printout that the punch position has been adjusted Booklet Fold Position B4 or smaller Allows you to adjust the fold and staple positions for paper smaller than the B4 size Booklet Fold Position B4 or larger Allows you to adjust the fold and staple positions for B4 or larger paper The following explains how to adjust the fold and staple positions 7 Select Booklet Fold Position B4 or smaller or Booklet Fold Position B4 or larger and then select Change Settings 2 Select Sample Printout and then select the tray to output a sample printout for Press the lt Start gt button 3 Select the option that best describes the current fold and staple positions 4 Enter the desired fold and staple positions into A and B 75 6 Setups Watermark 5 Select Adjust to apply the settings 6 Select Sample Printout and then select the tray again to output a sample printout C
586. tion Method Specifies whether any restrictions apply to the method of selecting recipients of fax Internet Fax Server Fax and scanned E mail documents Select Only From Address Book to disable input of recipients from the keyboard screen and buttons on the control panel and restrict recipients to only those registered in the Address Book Restrict User to Edit Address Book Specifies whether to permit users to edit the Address Book Copy Service Settings Copy Tab This section describes the features that allow you to change the default settings for each copy feature For more information refer to the following Copy Tab page 84 Copy Defaults page 85 Copy Control page 88 Original Size Defaults page 89 Reduce Enlarge Presets page 90 7 Select System Settings and Machina Y Faults Y Supplies Al Biling i W Tools then select Copy Service t C Features Settings in the Group menu O Common Service Settings Copy Tab Copy Defaults O Connectivity amp Copy Control Network Set y This feature allows you to define the functions of the paper tray buttons and copy magnification buttons shown in Paper Supply on the Copy screen 1 Select Copy Tab in the Copy Tab Featu res menu Items Current Settings 4 Paper Supply Button 2 a 2 Change the required settings AEAEE Te 3 Paper Supply Button 4 Tray 3 3 Select Close x 4 Reduce Enlarg
587. tional The Office Finisher LX contains an automatic stapler When the finisher runs out of staples a message appears on the touch screen When this message is displayed load a new staple case into the staple cartridge 35 3 Maintenance 7 Make sure that the machine is not operating and open the front cover of the finisher 2 Hold the staple cartridge by the lever R1 and pull it to the right 3 Hold the staple cartridge by the orange lever and remove it from the finisher NOTE The staple cartridge is firmly inserted A slight force is required to pull the cartridge out of the finisher 4 Pinch both sides of the empty staple case with your fingers 1 and remove the staple case from the cartridge 2 5 Insert the front side of the new staple case into the staple cartridge 1 and then push the rear side into the cartridge 2 6 Hold the staple cartridge by the orange lever and insert it into the finisher until it clicks 7 Close the front cover of the finisher NOTE If the front cover is not completely closed a message will appear and the machine will not operate 36 Loading the Booklet Staples in the Office Finisher LX Optional Loading the Booklet Staples in the Office Finisher LX Optional If the optional Booklet Maker is installed a message appears on the touch screen when the unit runs out of staples When the messag
588. tions eee 118 Incoming Internet Fax Print Options 117 Initialize Hard Disk eceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeees 74 inserting new drum Cartridge a e 31 new toner Cartridge i e 34 Integrated Office Finisher cceeeseeeeeeees 34 Integrated Office Finisher Top Cover 351 Integrated Office Finisher Paper Jams 351 Integrated Office Finisher Staple Jams 355 Internet Fax ia ean e a aeae ea aade na ara 287 Information Checklist oooooooonncninniinoo 287 Installation Procedure eseeeeeeeees 288 Internet Fax Environments 0 005 288 Network Communication Setup 289 problem solving eeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeaes 379 Test Internet Fax coooocicccicicicocicocicicicncncnconon 291 Internet Fax Control Fax Service Settings 116 Internet Fax Output Destination 117 Internet Fax Path ooooccccinnccnconcononccnncnnncnnnnnnnannos 116 Internet Fax Profile oooooooonnncnnnniccococcccccccccnnnns 110 Internet Fax Subject a e 110 Internet Fax to E mail a se ernennen 120 Internet Fax to Internet Fax cceeeeee 120 Internet Services ceceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 92 Intranet problem solving ccceeeeeeeeeeees 379 IPP Pacis ee usec snc ensue LE rates Meee readers 91 IPP Internet Printing Protocol 262 Computer S
589. tions that apply while using Internet or intranet connections Internet Intranet connections Connection to the Internet or an intranet depends on various settings including the destination web server the used server application proxy server and firewall types When connecting to the Internet or an intranet using server application software proxy or firewall supplied by another company the following conditions are required Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Server 2003 or Windows Vista operating system e Conformance with the following conditions RFC2616 Hypertext Transfer Protocol HTTP 1 1 Normal connections SSL connections Proxy authentication 380 Network related Problems RFC2617 HTTP Authentication Basic and Digest Access Authentication Basic authentication support only others are not supported RFC2817 Upgrading to TLS Within HTTP 1 1 RFC2818 HTTP Over TLS HTTP HTTPS scheme compatibility GET CONNECT HOST method compatibility IPv6 Addresses Restrictions This section explains the restrictions on network connection using an IPv6 address CentreWare Internet Services e When SSL is enabled http IPv6 address entered on a web browser is not redirected to https IPv6 address Directly specify https IPv6 address Printing The following operating systems support IPv6 printing Windows Vista Mac OS except Mac OS X 10 4 and earlier
590. to Yes 2 Sided Printing Specifies whether to print received documents or private mailbox documents onto both sides of a sheet This is effective in saving paper NOTE Some data may not allow you to use this feature even when you set it to On Edge Erase Top amp Bottom Edges Specifies the margin on the top and bottom of the received document by cutting off the original image You can set the margins within the range of 0 20 mm 0 0 8 inches using the scroll buttons or the numeric keypad on the control panel Edge Erase Left amp Right Edges Specifies the margin on the left and right of the received document by cutting off the original image You can set the margins within the range of 0 20 mm 0 0 8 inches using the scroll buttons or the numeric keypad on the control panel Reduce 8 5x11 SEF Original to A4 SEF Specifies whether a 8 5 x 11 0 inches 216 x 279 mm size document is to be reduced to the A4 size when Reduce Enlarge in the Layout Adjustment screen is set to Auto Pseudo Photo Gradation Mode Specifies whether to perform gradation level correction for documents containing photographs Select from Error Diffusion and Dither Mailbox Selector Setup Specifies whether to sort the received documents to the mailboxes by the incoming line when more than one line is in use NOTE When setting the mailbox selector feature select a mailbox that has already been registered If an unregistered mail
591. to additional LDAP servers when user information is initially unavailable 334 Network Authentication Setup 73 If you enabled LDAP Referrals enter the number of additional servers to check for user information into LDAP Referral Hop Limit 14 For Search Name Order select the method that you would like LDAP to use to perform searches 75 Click Apply LDAP User Mappings You can click the LDAP User Mappings link to specify the attributes to search for within the LDAP database Make sure that any entries made in the Imported Heading boxes are in LDAP nomenclature For example you would enter sn Surname to search for the user s last name and givenName to search for the users first name Enter cn Common Name to search for the most commonly used name given name joined to surname to identify specific users within the LDAP system LDAP Authentication To set LDAP for authentication click the LDAP Authentication link For Authentication Method choose either Direct Authentication or Authentication of User Attributes Direct Authentication sets authentication with the LDAP server with the user name and password entered by the user Authentication of User Attributes sets authentication with the LDAP server to the attributes listed on this dialog such as samAccountName Unless you are very familiar with LDAP do not add text strings to the User Name LDAP Group Access LDAP server user groups can be
592. to enable or disable carriage return and line feed and also carriage return and form feed for the PCL mode e Treat CR as CR LF Allows you to enable or disable carriage return and line feed for the PCL mode e Paper Supply Allows you to select the paper tray Output Size Allows you to select the paper size e Paper Size Bypass Allows you to select the paper size for Tray 5 Bypass e Custom Paper Size Width X Allows you to specify a paper size width e Custom Paper Size Length Y Allows you to specify a paper size length Output Destination Allows you to select the destination for your output 197 7 CentreWare Internet Services Feature Setting items Services Printing continued Language Emulation continued e Quantity Allows you to specify the number of sets to print between 1 and 999 e 2 Sided Printing Allows you to select whether to print both sides of paper e Default Orientation Allows you to specify the orientation of the original e HexDump Allows you to enable or disable hexadecimal memory dump for the PCL mode Image Enhancement Allows you to enable or disable image enhancement Macro Font Management e Macro Management Allows you to configure or import a macro To configure a macro click the Macro List button and fill out the required items To import a macro click the Import a Macro button and
593. tory SSL certificate This appears only when HTTPS is selected in Protocol 204 Properties Feature Setting items Services Network File Repository Setup Continued Scanning Share Enter the shared name This appears only continued when SMB is selected in Protocol Scriptpath and filename from HTTP root Specify the script path and file name This appears only when HTTP or HTTPS is selected in Protocol e Document Path Specify the path to the file repository using up to 128 characters Server Name Specify the server name This appears only when Netware is selected e Server Volume Specify the server volume This appears only when Netware is selected NDS Context Specify the NDS context This appears only when Netware is selected NDS Tree Specify the NDS tree This appears only when Netware is selected Login Credentials to Access the Destination Select System to specify the login name and password on this page Select Prompt at User Interface to specify the user ID and password on the machine s control panel when requesting a job Select None to disable authentication None appears only when HTTP or HTTPS is selected e Login Name Specify the login name to use e Password Specify the password for the login name e Retype Password Re enter the password for verification Alternate File Destinations Allows
594. ts Page Count Displays the page counts of the documents Type Displays the job types of the documents Accounting Account Type Specify the account type to be used NOTE This item is displayed only when Xerox Standard Accounting is enabled Account ID Specify the account type of Xerox Standard Accounting and enter the group account ID with up to 48 characters NOTE This item is displayed only when Local Accounting Xerox Standard Accounting or Network Accounting is enabled When Network Accounting is enabled the item is displayed when Customize User Prompts is Display User ID amp Account ID Prompts or Display Account ID Prompt Only Retrieve Retrieve Page Select whether or not to retrieve one page of the selected document Page Number Enter the number of the page to be retrieved Retrieving Specify the file format to be used when retrieving the Format page Retrieve Select this button to retrieve the selected document 166 Scan Print Document Paper Supply Select the paper tray to be used to print the selected document Output Select the output tray Destination Quantity Select the number of copies to print 2 Sided Printing Select whether to print only on one side or both sides of the paper Staple Select the staple position and number of places to staple Hole Punch Select the hole punch position and the number of holes to punch Batc
595. ts and reallocate the memory The Receiving Buffer SMB memory allocation needs to be set in response to the operating environment If the memory allocation is too small it may prevent receiving messages Client settings e The IP address is a unique address administered system wide Consult with the system administrator when setting the necessary parameters When the machine is switched off The following actions take place when the machine is switched off e When Receiving Buffer SMB is set to Spool to Memory All print data spooled in machine memory including the data currently being printed is deleted There is no print data on the machine when the machine is switched on However if the machine is switched off immediately after a print request the print data may be stored on the client In this case the print request can be reissued when the machine is switched on and the print data is printed on the machine When Receiving Buffer SMB is set to Spool to Hard Disk All print data spooled on the machine hard disk including the data currently being printed is retained A print request can be reissued when the machine is switched on and the print data is printed on the machine 364 Network related Problems When Receiving Buffer SMB is set to No Spooling All print data in the receiving buffer including the data currently being printed is deleted There is no print data on t
596. tures The options available for the Scan Fax Reports feature are identical to those of Scan Reports 7 Select Scan Fax Reports on EPA Close the Print Reports screen O O 2 Select the required option ee O Sit 3 Select the lt Start gt button on the OC nites bik O Filter control panel 54 Machine Information Reports e Configuration Report Lists common settings such as hardware configuration network information and print and copy feature settings e Scan Fax Configuration Report Lists settings specific to fax and scan features e Domain Filter List Lists domains registered for domain filtering Job Template List Lists the job templates that can be used on the machine For more information on job templates refer to Job Templates in the CentreWare Internet Services chapter on page 160 Address Book Prints a list of recipient addresses and relay stations for the selected range of address numbers Multiple ranges can be selected Fax Reports NOTE When Server Fax is enabled the Scan Fax Reports feature is displayed instead of the Scan Reports and Fax Reports features The options available for the Scan Fax Reports feature are identical to those of Scan Reports 7 Select Fax Reports on the PET Tose Print Reports screen Q roms Address Book 2 Select the required option Fax Comments 3 Select the lt Start gt button on the e nee control panel
597. ty name of the SNMP agent Trap to be Received Select the types of traps to receive from the SNMP agent Add UDP IPv6 Address This button displays the SNMP Configuration IPv6 page which allows you to set the following settings IP Trap Destination Address IP Address Enter the IPv6 address of the SNMP agent that you are setting up to receive traps UDP Port Number Enter the UDP port number of the SNMP agent SNMP Version Select the SNMP version of the SNMP agent Traps TRAP Community Name Enter the trap community name of the SNMP agent Trap to be Received Select the types of traps to receive from the SNMP agent Add IPX Address This button displays a page that allows you to set the following settings IPX Trap Destination Address IPX External Network Number Enter the IPX external network number of the SNMP agent that you are setting up to receive traps Physical MAC Address Enter the physical MAC address of the SNMP agent IPX Socket Number Enter the IPX socket number of the SNMP agent SNMP Version Select the SNMP version of the SNMP agent Traps TRAP Community Name Enter the trap community name of the SNMP agent Trap to be Received Select the types of traps to receive from the SNMP agent 188 Properties Feature Setting items Connectivity Protocols continued SNMP Configuration continued Delete Selecting a tr
598. ubmitted cd var spool lpd mkdir PrinterName chmod 744 PrinterName Follow the steps below to set up an HP UX workstation to communicate with the machine 7 Log in as root at a client and add the machine to the etc hosts file For example Ip address tab PrinterName 2 Verify connectivity to the machine by using a UNIX command such as ping from a terminal command window as shown in the following example ping PrinterName NOTE Select CTRL C to cancel the ping command 3 There are two methods to install the machine on an HP UX workstation Refer to one of the following sections to complete the installation Using the Command Window TTY Method page 238 Using the System Administrator Manager SAM GUI Method page 239 Using the Command Window TTY Method Follow the steps below to use the command window to manually enter command strings 7 Open a command window on the desktop From the command prompt enter the information below Remember that UNIX commands are case sensitive 1 Type su to access the superuser mode 2 Type sh to run the Bourne shell 3 Type lpshut to stop the print service 4 Type the following command on one line lpadmin pqueuename v dev null mrmodel ocmrcmodel osmrsmodel ob3 orc ormhostname orplp NOTE The queuename is the name of the print queue being created The hostname is the PrinterName for the machine from the etc hosts file The remote queue name must be set to 1p to s
599. ue to insufficient memory Take one of the following actions e Lower the resolution e Cancel the Multiple Up or 2 Sided Print feature and try again 016 719 Unable to process PCL print data due to insufficient print page buffer memory Increase the print page buffer 016 720 The PCL print data contains an invalid command Check the print data and then try again 016 721 A print error occurred The Auto Tray Switching setting conflicts with the Paper Type Priority settings When the Auto Tray Switching feature is enabled select an option other than Auto Paper Off for trays on the Paper Type Priority screen 016 722 The specified staple position is not supported Change the staple position and try again 016 723 The specified hole punch position is not supported Change the hole punch position and try again 016 724 The specified staple and hole punch positions are not a valid combination 016 725 A scanned document saved in a mailbox could not be converted to fax data using the job flow sheet Send the document not by using the Job Flow Sheets service but by using Fax service 390 Fault Codes Code Description and Remedy 016 726 The printer language was not selected automatically The probable causes are as follows e PostScript data was sent to the machine but the PostScript Kit was not installed on the machine PDF data was sent directl
600. umable support representative 224 8 Printer Environment Settings This chapter describes how to set up the printing environment for the machine Some models require a Printer Kit to use the print feature on the machine The following information is provided Windows TCP IP page 225 NetWare page 228 UNIX TCP IP page 232 EtherTalk page 249 Microsoft Networking page 251 TCP IP LPD or Port9100 page 255 USB Port page 259 IPP Internet Printing Protocol page 262 Windows TCP IP This section explains how to set up the machine to operate in a Windows TCP IP environment The following information is provided Quick Network Setup DHCP page 225 Quick Network Setup Static IP page 226 Quick Network Setup DHCP Prerequisites for Quick Network Setup Using TCP IP 7 Confirm that an existing operational network utilizing TCP IP is available 2 Confirm that the Ethernet cable is plugged into the multifunction machine and into an operational Ethernet port on the network NOTE The Ethernet cable is an RJ45 type and is not supplied by Xerox Configuring an IP Address via DHCP On startup the multifunction device defaults to DHCP to obtain its network configurations A DHCP server delivers an IP address as well as other configuration settings to the machine If you use a DHCP server to allocate an IP address to the machine then proceed as follows Procedure for Quick Network S
601. ument O O O Job Flow Display O O O oe Link O O O Auto Run O O O Manual Run O O O O Operation available X Operation not available 1 When documents are stored or retrieved using a mailbox authentication is not applicable to the following operations 317 14 Authentication and Account Administration e Confidential fax reception e Confidential Internet Fax reception e Retrieving documents that use a scan driver or Mailbox Viewer 3 2 You can use them only when mailbox operations are permitted in the Authentication feature settings of the System Administration mode 3 You can perform display auto run and manual run operations for job flow sheets linked to a mailbox NOTE When job flow sheets not available for operation depending on changes made to the authentication status are linked to a mailbox you can still use them but are not allowed to change copy them If you release the link the job flow sheet will no longer be displayed and will be disabled Linking Job Flow Sheets to Mailboxes The ways to link job flow sheets to mailboxes differ depending on whether the Authentication feature is enabled The following explains the relationships available When the Authentication feature is not enabled When the Authentication feature is enabled NOTE When job flow sheets not available for operation depending on changes made to the authentication status are linked to a mailbox you can s
602. up menu OL re oido 2 Select the required option If you Cena Nano toa eked on apart select Enabled touching the Company Name to be printed on Report box allows you to enter the company name to be printed on reports The company name can be up to 30 characters long 3 Select Save Authentication Security Settings The Authentication Security Settings menu on the Tools screen is categorized into the following groups For details refer to the respective sections System Administrator Settings page 138 Authentication page 139 Allow User to Disable Active Settings page 144 Job Status Default page 144 Overwrite Hard Disk page 145 System Administrator Settings This section describes the features that allow you to change the System Administrator s login ID and passcode The machine enters the System Administration mode only when a correct System Administrator login ID is entered Before shipment the default System Administrator login ID is set to 11111 For more information refer to the following System Administrator s Login ID page 139 System Administrator s Passcode page 139 138 Authentication Security Settings 1 Select Authentication Security Settings and then select System Administrator Settings in the Group menu System Administrator s Login ID Y Billing Machine Y Faults Information Y Supplies Information
603. ure in the 036 791 User Guide and perform the operation again 036 792 Refer to 034 508 036 793 036 795 The remote copy function to make multiple copies of a received document is not supported on the destination machine Check if the remote copy function is supported on the destination machine 036 796 The general fax mode was used because the remote copy function to make multiple copies of a received fax document was not supported on the destination machine 036 797 Refer to 034 508 036 798 036 799 041 210 An error occurred in the tray module Switch off the machine and then switch it 041 211 on again Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 047 211 A hardware problem occurred in the paper output assembly Switch off the machine and then switch it on again Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 047 212 An error occurred in the OCT2 unit Switch off the machine and then switch it on again Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 047 213 An error occurred in the Finisher Switch off the machine and then switch it on again Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 047 214 An error occurred in the Duplex Module Switch off the machine and then switch it on again Contact the Xerox Welcome Center if the problem persists 047 215 A communication error occurred between the main unit and the Exit Module Switch off the machine and then switch it on again Con
604. us feature is displayed instead of the Job Status Activity Report feature and the Activity Report and Stored Document List options are not available 7 Select Job Status Activity Report on the Print Reports screen Job Status Activity Report Close All Jobs Job History Report Scan Fax amp Select the required option Job Flow 8 Auto File Transfer jobs Stored Document List Printer 8 Print from Mailbox Job O O Activity Report Internet Fax Jobs ox O 3 Select the lt Start gt button on the O O control panel Job History Report Lists the jobs recorded on the machine The data for the last 200 jobs is printed Print reports are available for All Jobs Scan Fax amp Internet Fax Jobs Job Flow amp Auto File Transfer jobs and Printer amp Print from Mailbox Job Selecting the Include Child Jobs check box prints one child job related job per line Clearing the check box prints all child jobs in one line Activity Report Lists activity results of incoming and outgoing fax communications Error History Report Lists the 50 most recent errors that occurred in the machine Stored Document List Lists the fax jobs queued on the machine Copy Reports 7 Select Copy Reports on the Print Reports screen Copy Reports Close Configuration Report 2 Select the required option 3 Select the lt Start gt button on the control panel Con
605. ust enter their account details in the print driver to print documents from their computers The XSA feature is mutually exclusive from any other accounting feature If XSA is enabled at the device the following applies e You cannot enable Local Accounting or Network Accounting Each device supports unique XSA User IDs and Group Accounts All user IDs must be assigned to one or more group accounts NOTE The XSA settings and account data are stored in the machine It is strongly recommended that you back up the settings and data regularly using the Cloning hot link available under the XSA folder of Internet Services as described in this section Should the machine lose your XSA data and settings you can restore them from the backup file that you produced using the Cloning process Installation Checklist Before starting the installation procedure please ensure the following items are available or have been performed 7 Ensure that your device is fully functioning on the network 2 Ensure that the TCP IP and HTTP protocols are configured on the device and fully functioning This is required to access CentreWare Internet Services to configure Xerox Standard Accounting The Internet Services function is accessed through the embedded HTTP server on the machine and allows the System Administrator to configure XSA with a web browser To verify that the TCP IP and HTTP protocols are correctly configured print a Configuration Report
606. uthentication Server running LDAP in an ADS environment for example to communicate with the Secure Access Server providing that server with user credentialing information A second Authentication 337 14 Authentication and Account Administration Server may be necessary for web User Interface Authentication if this feature is additionally desired Configuring Xerox Secure Access to Work with Remote Authentication At Your Workstation 1 DA Open your web browser and enter the TCP IP address of the machine in the Address or Location field Click Enter to access CentreWare Internet Services Click the Properties tab Expand the Security folder and then click Authentication Configuration The Authentication Configuration gt Step 1 of 2 page appears Select Xerox Secure Access from the Login Type drop down list Click Apply to reboot the machine Expand the Security folder and then click Authentication Configuration On the Authentication Configuration gt Step 1 of 2 area page a Select the Enabled box for each service that you wish to restrict access to Do not place a checkmark in the Non account Print box if you wish to enable users without accounts to continue to print b Click Apply and then reboot the machine following the prompt c Click Next The Authentication Configuration gt Step 2 of 2 page appears On the Authentication Configuration gt Step 2 of 2 pag
607. ution 0000 106 110 Response to Read Receipts oooocnonccoccccncccccccnso 118 Restrict User to Edit Address Book 84 RINGING Volume ocoococcccccnnoonncccnanoncnnnonana na nnnnnnnnnos 68 Rotate 90 degrees cnccicnnccccccccononcconcnnnnnnnnonananos 111 441 Index S S MIME Communication ccceeeeeeeeeee 98 S MIME SettingS sieri ii eiei 98 Sample Job iki poe en eh et ae eee ead 88 Sample Set cccccceccececeeeeeeeeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 45 Saturation ieina eas ea dado ada DILE 108 Save Deleted Faxes c ecceeeeeeeeeeeeeteees 112 Save Undelivered Faxes cccceceeeeettees 112 Saved Faxes Auto Delete 0 0 0 0 112 Scan CentreWare Internet Services 160 Scan Defaults Scan Service settings 105 Scan File Transfer Report cccceeee 57 73 Scan Reports cccccceceeceeeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 54 Address BOOK s 2sc5 223 liada contatti 55 Configuration Report eeeeeeceeessteeeeeesees 55 Domain Filter List ooooooconnnnnnnnnnnnnocccnconccnnno 55 Job Template List cecceeeeeteeeteeeee 55 Scan Fax Configuration Report n se 55 Scan Service Settings eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 105 Original Size Defaults 2000 eeeeeeeee 107 Other Settings orir eA E 108 Output Size Defaults 0 0 00 ee 107 Reduce Enlarge Presets a a 108 Scan Defaults e assets ies ei 105 Scan to PC Defaults
608. vailable for all users when the Authentication feature is not enabled When the Authentication feature is enabled only a System Administrator can operate this job flow sheet System Administrator Shared Job Flow Sheet This job flow sheet is created by a System Administrator When the Authentication feature is not enabled this job flow sheet is shared and its settings may be changed by any user When the Authentication feature is enabled the parent job flow sheet can be shared by all Authenticated Users Only a System Administrator can change its settings To create a System Administrator Shared Job Flow Sheet operate the machine as a System Administrator Personal Job Flow Sheet This job flow sheet is created by an Authenticated User when the Authentication feature is enabled When the Authentication feature is enabled this job flow sheet is available for the System Administrator and the authenticated user who created the job flow sheet This job flow sheet can only be operated by a System Administrator when the Authentication feature is not enabled 311 14 Authentication and Account Administration Operation of the job flow sheets varies depending on whether the Authentication feature is enabled The following explains the operations available When the Authentication feature is not enabled When the Authentication feature is enabled When the Authentication Feature is Not Enabled The following table shows t
609. ve the paper tray guides away from the paper 3 Move the paper tray guides against the paper so that they are just touching the paper 4 Power the machine off and then on 358 Common Problems Symptom Recommendation Deformed transparencies Check that Transparency is selected in Paper Type The machine automatically adjusts the handling for transparencies Transparencies tolerate less heat than paper Blank output Check that the document is loaded face up in the document feeder If the cartridge is new the toner may not be dispensed Repeat the job Reinstall the drum cartridge and the toner cartridge Replace the drum cartridge Replace the toner cartridge if the screen message for replacement is displayed Streaks solid or dotted lines or spots Clean the document glass the CVT glass the areas under the platen cover the document feeder and the paper guides Completely remove the ROS cleaner and reinsert the ROS cleaner to clean the raster output scanner If the machine has been idle for an extended period of time or if the toner or drum cartridge is new begin the job again Run the job using the document glass Check the quality of the document Use Edge Erase to remove lines and marks from the edges of the document Replace the drum cartridge Load fresh paper Check the humidity of the machine location Output is too light or too dark Load fresh pape
610. ver returned the RFC2251 specification protocol error 13 confidentiality required during the address book query Check the server operating status 018 714 An LDAP server protocol error occurred in the address book operation The server returned the RFC2251 specification protocol error 14 SASL bind in progress during the address book query Wait a while then repeat the same operation Contact the network administrator if the problem persists 018 716 An LDAP server protocol error occurred in the address book operation The server returned the RFC2251 specification protocol error 16 no such attribute during the address book query The specified attribute does not exist Check the LDAP server status 018 717 An LDAP server protocol error occurred in the address book operation The server returned the RFC2251 specification protocol error 17 undefined attribute type during the address book query The attribute type specified is invalid Check the LDAP server status 018 718 An LDAP server protocol error occurred in the address book operation The server returned the RFC2251 specification protocol error 18 inappropriate matching during the address book query Filter type not supported for the specified attribute Check the LDAP server status 399 15 Problem Solving Code Description and Remedy 018 719 An LDAP server protocol error occurred in the address book operation The ser
611. ver returned the RFC2251 specification protocol error 19 constraint violation during the address book query An attribute value specified violates some constraint Check the LDAP server status 018 720 An LDAP server protocol error occurred in the address book operation The server returned the RFC2251 specification protocol error 20 attribute or value exists during the address book query An attribute type or value already exists Check the LDAP server status 018 721 An LDAP server protocol error occurred in the address book operation The server returned the RFC2251 specification protocol error 21 invalid attribute syntax during the address book query An invalid attribute syntax was specified Check the LDAP server status 018 732 An LDAP server protocol error occurred in the address book operation The server returned the RFC2251 specification protocol error 32 no such object during the address book query The specified e mail address does not exist in the directory Review the input e mail address and check the e mail address is registered on the LDAP server 018 733 An LDAP server protocol error occurred in the address book operation The server returned the RFC2251 specification protocol error 33 alias problem during the address book query The alias name in the directory points to a nonexistent entry Check the LDAP server status 018 734 An LDAP server protocol error occurred in the address book
612. version processing of the scanned image probably due to a disk malfunction For details on replacing the hard disk contact the Xerox Welcome Center 016 781 Unable to connect to the server during file forwarding by a Network Scanning server application Ask the System Administrator to check the network and server 016 782 Unable to connect to the server for a Network Scanning server application Verify the login user name password and other information that are entered 016 783 Unable to find the specified server path during file forwarding by a Network Scanning server application Check the path name of the server currently set to the job template 016 784 A write to server error occurred during file forwarding by a Network Scanning server application Confirm that there is sufficient space in the directory on the server and that access rights are present 016 785 The file could not be sent by a Network Scanning server application due to insufficient space on the server Delete unnecessary data from the server 393 15 Problem Solving Code Description and Remedy 016 786 The scanned data could not be written due to insufficient space on the hard disk Delete unnecessary data or initialize the hard disk if the saved data are not needed 016 787 The server IP address set to the job template is incorrect Specify the correct job template 016 788 Failed to retrieve
613. whether to allow login from the machine Get Accounting Code Specify whether to perform account management using account information received form the Xerox Secure Access server Connection Time Out Allows you to specify the connection time out period with the Xerox Secure Access server IP Filtering The IP Filtering feature provides security to the machine by allowing you to register the IP addresses permitted to communicate with the machine IPv4 Filtering IP Filtering IP Filtering Select whether to enable the IP Filtering feature using IPv4 addresses IP Filter Rule List Rule Number Displays entry numbers 1 10 for IP addresses to be filtered e Source IP Mask Displays the range of the IP addresses in IPv4 address prefix length format Add Displays the Add IP Filter Rule IPv4 page which allows you configure the following settings Source IP Address Enter an IP address from which to permit communication with the machine Source IP Mask Enter the mask address of the IP address in prefix length format Edit Displays the Edit IP Filter Rule IPv4 page which allows you to edit the IP address selected in IP Filter Rule List e Delete Displays the Delete IP Filter Rule IPv4 which allows you to delete the address selected in IP Filter Rule List IPv6 Filtering IP Filtering IP Filtering Select whether or not to enable the IP Filtering fe
614. will be sent 3 Print the document on the machine and verify that it prints correctly 4 Make sure that the driver is installed on every computer that will be sending jobs to the machine 5 Repeat the test for all computers that will be sending jobs to the machine The installation process is now complete If the test print fails refer to Problem Solving on page 341 USB Port This section explains how to set up the machine in a USB port environment The following information is provided Information Checklist page 259 USB Port Environment page 260 USB Port Installation page 260 Installation Procedure page 260 USB Port Communication Setup page 260 Computer Setup page 261 Test Print page 261 Information Checklist Before starting the USB port installation procedures make sure that the following items are available or have been performed Item By USB Cable Customer Test the machine to make sure that it is fully installed and functioning Customer correctly Install the print driver Customer NOTE The installation procedures will install the machine on the USB port of the host computer The procedures are not intended to connect the host computer to other computers If problems are encountered during the installation of the machine refer to Problem Solving on page 347 259 8 Printer Environment Settings USB Port Environment System configuration
615. work Communication Setup Initially boot the CentreWare Internet Services port 71 Connect the machine to the network 2 Press the lt Log In Out gt button on the control panel and then type the System Administrator login ID to enter the System Administration mode NOTE The passcode may also be required depending on the machine configuration 3 Press the lt Machine Status gt button on the control panel and then select the Tools tab on the screen 4 Select System Settings in the menu at the left side of the screen 5 Select Connectivity amp Network Setup in the Group menu 148 Centre Ware Internet Services Installation Select Port Settings in the Features menu Select Port Status and Change Settings Select Enabled and Save Set the port number for CentreWare Internet Services if required 6 7 Select Internet Services and Change Settings 8 9 70 At the Internet Services screen select Internet Services Port Number and Change Settings 11 Use the keypad to enter the port number and select Save Next establish TCP IP 7 Select Connectivity amp Network Setup in the Group menu and then select Protocol Settings in the Features menu 2 Under TCP IP IP Mode select IPv4 Mode IPv6 Mode or Dual Stack When IPv4 Mode or Dual Stack is selected in step 2 3 Select IP Address Resolution and then Change Settings 4 Select a method fo
616. work are unique Ifthe machine name or host name is changed there are restrictions on the number of characters and the type of characters that are valid for name registration Therefore it is recommended that the machine name and host name are not changed CentreWare Internet Services This section explains the troubleshooting procedures while using CentreWare Internet Services Troubleshooting The possible causes confirmation methods and actions are as follows Problem Confirmation Method Action Cannot access CentreWare Internet Services Check if the machine is switched on Switch on the machine Print out the System Settings List to check if CentreWare Internet Services port is activated Activate the CentreWare Internet Services port Check if the Internet address is correctly entered Check the Internet address If Services cannot be accessed enter the IP address to make the connection Check if the proxy server is used Depending on the proxy server connections may not be possible Set your browser so that it will not try to access the machine through a proxy server The please wait message is displayed Wait for a while as instructed If nothing happens click the Refresh button If this does not help check that the machine is working correctly The Refresh Status button is not working Selecting menu in the left frame does not
617. xceeds the receiving buffer capacity the client may retransmit the same print data In this case stop the client and make sure that the client does not transmit the print data e When Receiving Buffer LPD is set to No Spooling Print requests cannot be received from a client if a print request from another client is being processed When the client IP address or computer name is changed When the client IP address or computer name is changed the machine cannot perform query processing and cancel processing Switch the machine off and on with the receiving buffer empty of print data NOTE Stopping printing or forced deleting of print data in the machine receiving buffer can be performed using the control panel For information refer to Job Siatus on page 39 EtherTalk This section explains the troubleshooting procedures and restrictions while using EtherTalk Troubleshooting The possible causes confirmation methods and actions are as follows Problem Cause Action A job was printed ona different machine than the assigned machine If there are multiple machines on the network with the same name the machine names are changed automatically depending on the power on timing of each machine Print jobs intended to be printed on one machine are sent to another machine Change the machine names so that all machine names on the network are unique The machine cannot be accessed fr
618. y to the machine using the lpr command but the HDD was defective Contact the Xerox Welcome Center PCL data was sent to the machine but the optional emulation kit was not installed on the machine 016 727 The Print to Mailbox job was cancelled because there was no data for the job Check if the document is blank 016 728 The TIFF file contains unsupported tags Check the print data 016 729 The TIFF file could not be printed because the resolution of the TIFF file was too high Lower the resolution of the TIFF file and try again 016 731 The print job was interrupted Try printing the data again 016 732 The form specified in the emulation setting is not registered in the host computer Resend the form data 016 733 The IP address after the character could not be obtained Enter the e mail address correctly Or the DNS Internet address after the character could not be resolved Set the DNS server address correctly 016 734 Printing a simple transmission report failed Set the E mail Receive Protocol on the sender s end to SMTP 016 735 An attempt was made to print a job template while it was being updated Wait a while and then try printing the template again 016 736 A lock directory was not created e Check that there is space on the target disk e Check the access permissions e Delete any existing lock directory 016 737 The lock directory was not deleted Delete the lock directory 016 738 The Booklet Creation fe
619. you to manage alternate file destinations for scanning Select Add Edit or Delete to manage the destination list Validation Servers Allows you to add edit or delete meta data validation servers Add Displays the Add Validation Server page which allows you to configure the following settings Server Information Protocol Select the protocol of the server to be added Host Name IP Address amp Port Enter the host name IP address and port number of the server e Path Specify the path of the server e Response Timeout Specify the time in seconds after which the server will time out Edit Displays a page which allows you to edit the above settings for the selected server Delete Deletes the selected server Scan Template Management Setup Displays the steps required to set up a job template and status of each step whether required or not Template Management Service Select whether or not to enable the template management service Default Template Allows you to define the default job template For more information on the options available refer to the Job Templates on page 160 205 7 CentreWare Internet Services Feature Setting items Services Network Advanced Scanning Template Pool Setup continued Allows you to view and modify the remote pool setups Remote Template Repository e Protocol Select a transfer protocol from F
620. ys the list stored in the pool server This section describes the Setup menu that is also available for general users In this menu you can register various items such as mailboxes destination addresses and job flow sheets For more information refer to the following Create Mailbox page 122 Stored Programming page 124 Create Job Flow Sheet page 125 Create Job Flow Sheet Keyword page 127 Add Address Book Entry page 127 Create Fax Group Recipients page 131 Add Fax Comment page 132 Paper Tray Attributes page 132 7 Select Setup on the Tools Machine Y Faults Y Supplies Y Biting Y Tools Information Information screen A Group O Create Mailbox 2 Select a group in the Group menu O Stored Programming O Create Job Flow Sheet Create Mailbox This feature allows you to create mailboxes for saving confidential incoming fax documents scanned documents or print documents Fax documents in mailboxes can be printed out at a convenient time and scanned documents in mailboxes can be imported to computers Documents can also be exported from computers to a mailbox using a print driver 1 Select Create Mailbox in the Sees Group menu Mailbox Name Owner 001 Confidential A Go to 2 Select a mailbox number to 002 Templates ETA aa create a new mailbox ee 3 Select Create Delete en Y 122 Setup 4 On the s

Xerox 5222 All in One Printer User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents